Book 3 - Building Services 9-7-61 PDF

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-i
Book 3 : Building Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER: 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SECTION 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1-1
SECTION 1.2 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR 1-11
SECTION 1.3 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD AND CAPACITOR BANK 1-17
SECTION 1.4 BUSDUCT 1-45
SECTION 1.5 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) 1-49
SECTION 1.6 PANEL BOARD, LOAD CENTER, LOAD BREAK SWITCH/ 1-52
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR/SAFETY SWITCH AND
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER
SECTION 1.7 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONTROL CABLE 1-55
SECTION 1.8 CONDUIT, CABLE TRAY AND WIREWAY 1-64
SECTION 1.9 LUMINAIRES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 1-70
SECTION 1.10 SWITCH AND SOCKET OUTLET 1-76
SECTION 1.11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 1-79
SECTION 1.12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTHING SYSTEM 1-82
SECTION 1.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1-86
SECTION 1.14 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM 1-96
SECTION 1.15 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) 1-98
SECTION 1.16 SCADA INTERFACING SYSTEM 1-116
SECTION 1.17 FIRE BARRIER WORK 1-119
SECTION 1.18 PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEM 1-121
SECTION 1.19 STANDARD FIELD TESTS 1-124
NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

Bangkok Mass Transit Pink Line Project: Khae Rai – Min Buri Section
Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER: 2 PLUMBING AND SANITARY SYSTEM

SECTION 2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND 2-1
SANITARY SYSTEM
SECTION 2.2 COLD WATER SUPPLY PUMP 2-13
SECTION 2.3 SEWAGE PUMP SETS 2-21
SECTION 2.4 WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT 2-26
SECTION 2.5 OIL INTERCEPTOR 2-28
SECTION 2.6 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING WORK 2-30
SECTION 2.7 SANITARY PIPING WORK 2-41
SECTION 2.8 STORM DRAIN PIPING WORK 2-52
SECTION 2.9 VALVE AND ACCESSORIES 2-62
SECTION 2.10 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL WORKS 2-68
SECTION 2.12 PAINTING 2-86
SECTION 2.13 TEST AND STERILIZATIONS 2-90

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER: 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 3-1
SECTION 3.2 DIESEL ENGINE FIRE PUMP 3-13
SECTION 3.3 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP 3-25
SECTION 3.4 JOCKEY PUMP 3-36
SECTION 3.5 FIRE WATER PIPING WORK 3-39
SECTION 3.6 VALVE AND ACCESSORIES 3-49
SECTION 3.7 N2 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 3-61
SECTION 3.10 PAINTING 3-82
SECTION 3.11 TEST AND STERILIZATIONS 3-85

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER: 4 MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

SECTION 4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL 4-1
VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 4.2 ELECTRIC WATER CHILLER 4-12
SECTION 4.3 CROSS FLOW COOLING TOWER 4-18
SECTION 4.4 PUMPS 4-22
SECTION 4.5 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONER 4-28
SECTION 4.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT 4-34
SECTION 4.7 FAN COIL UNITS 4-39
SECTION 4.8 AIR COOLED SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONER 4-41
SECTION 4.9 FAN AND BLOWER 4-46
SECTION 4.10 PIPING WORKS 4-53
SECTION 4.11 VALVES 4-65
SECTION 4.12 DUCT WORKS 4-72
SECTION 4.13 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES 4-84
SECTION 4.14 AUTOMATIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT 4-88
SECTION 4.15 WATER CONDITIONING SYSTEM 4-95
SECTION 4.18 PAINTING AND COLOR CODES 4-114
SECTION 4.19 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM 4-120
SECTION 4.20 STANDARD FIELD TESTS 4-130

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER: 5 ESCALATORS AND LIFTS

SECTION 5.1 INTRODUCTION 5-1
SECTION 5.2 PARTICULAR DESIGN REQUREMENTS 5-5
SECTION 5.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS LIFTS 5-7
SECTION 5.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ESCALATORS 5-25

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Section 1-1
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SECTION 1 : ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1.1.1 General
1.1.1.1 Introduction
This general specification and requirement describe the materials and
installation of the Electrical works for building services works and related work
for the Project.
The work shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the
Drawings and specifications herein.
1.1.1.2 Environment
(1) The materials and equipment shall be installed as shown on the Drawings
and shall be suitable for tropical climate as mentioned below.
(2) Weather conditions for selection of materials and general equipment:
(a) Altitude : Approximately mean sea
level
(b) Maximum temperature : 40C
(c) Average temperature (all year) : 32C
(d) Maximum relative humidity : 85%
(e) Average relative humidity (all year) : 60%
1.1.1.3 Standards, Codes, and Regulations
(1) The entire system and its basic components shall conform in all respects
to the standards and regulations of the local Electricity Authority.
The following standards are mentioned in these Specifications for systems
and/or components and, where described, the systems and/or components
shall conform to such standards.
(a) ANSI - American National Standard Institute
(b) ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
(c) BS - British Standard
(d) DIN - Deutsche Industrie Normen (German Industrial Standard)
(e) EIT - The Engineering Institute of Thailand
(f) FM - Factory Mutual

(g) IEC -
International Electrotechnical Commission
(h) MEA -
Metropolitan Electricity Authority
(i) NEC -
National Electrical Code
(j) NEMA -
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(k) NFPA -
National Fire Protection Association
(l) PEA -
Provincial Electricity Authority
(m) TISI -
Thai Industrial Standard Institute
(n) UL -
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
(o) VDE -
Verband Deutsche Electro Techniker (German Electrical
Regulation and Codes)
(2) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing
authorities require an earlier issue.
1.1.1.4 Scope of Work
(1) The Electrical System work includes the furnishing of materials, labour,
equipment, tools, transportation and services required to construct, install
and test the complete electrical system as shown on the Drawings
and/or specified herein.
(2) It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide a completely safe
and workable system in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications, and the accompanying Drawings and schedules all to the
entire satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
(3) The Contractor shall coordinate with the local Electricity Authority to test
the high voltage cables as shown on the Drawings. The expenses for the test
shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
(4) It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the local
Electricity Authority to inspect the electrical installation and install the
high voltage meter for the building as indicated in the Drawings.
(5) The entire system and its basic components shall conform to the
standards and regulations of The Engineering Institute of Thailand (EIT)
and the National Electrical Code (NEC). All standards, codes, and
regulations shall be the latest issue unless governing authorities require
an earlier issue and/or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.1.5 Examination of Drawings and Specifications
(1) The Contractor shall examine all relevant architectural and structural
drawings together with all other utilities systems involved in the Project,
prior to installation of machines, materials and equipment.

1.1.1.6 Dimensions
(1) Before the Contractor commences any works, he shall ensure that
dimensions are checked on the site and/or building and agree with those
on the Drawings.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions
regardless of the comparable dimensions of the Drawings.
1.1.1.7 Operation
(1) Where the Contractor proposes to use material and/or equipment which
is not specified or detailed on the Drawings, the matter shall be brought
immediately to the attention of the Employer’s Representative who will
make a decision.
1.1.2 Materials
1.1.2.1 General
(1) The quality of all materials shall comply with the standards specified in
the details on the Drawings and diagrams. They shall further be of an
approved make and suitable for the works.
1.1.2.2 Materials and Equipment
(1) All electrical equipment, materials and associated accessories used shall
be brand new, free from defects, high quality, current product of the
manufacturer, and approved by the Employer’s Representative.
(2) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specification, all materials and equipment shall be installed in
accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. However, the
approval of the Employer’s Representative shall not release the
Contractor from his responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of
installations.
(3) The Contractor shall protect all electrical equipment, materials and
associated accessories during storage and during construction against the
ingress of moisture, contamination or corrosion that might damage the
finish or lower their electrical integrity.
(4) Certain major electrical equipment defined in the Specifications will be
furnished to the Contractor on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align,
level and fix this equipment as instructed by the manufacturer and to the
satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative. In this case herein specified
(if any).

(5) After the materials and equipment have been installed completely in
accordance with the instructions, the responsibility for protecting of
materials and equipment from damages shall rest with the Contractor's
own expense.
1.1.2.3 Equipment Deviations
(1) Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than
that specified or detailed on the Drawings, requiring any redesign of the
structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the
mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, including
drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by the Contractor at his
own expense and then approved by the Employer’s Representative.
(2) Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and

arrangement of cable, conduit, and equipment from the specified or
indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any
such cable, conduit, structural supports, insulation, and any other
additional equipment required by the system with out additional cost,
which shall be approved by the Employer’s Representative.
1.1.2.4 Tools and Appliances
(1) Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all
tools and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of
the works.
(2) If at any time prior to commencement or during the progress of works,
tools, equipment and materials, in the opinion of the Employer’s
Representative, appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure the
required quality of works or proper rate of progress, the Employer’s
Representative may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency, to
improve their character, to augment their number or to replace with new
tools, equipment and materials as required.
1.1.2.5 Nameplates and Identifications
(1) All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and
maintenance, shall be provided with nameplates, tags or arrows,
especially in enclosed areas, such as ceiling, shafts, and other places
accessible for maintenance service.

1.1.2.6 Submission of Data for Approval

(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative complete
information regarding details of materials and equipment involved, prior
to any purchase or manufacturing operation. Any purchase or
manufacturing operations carried out prior to obtaining such approval
shall be at the Contractor’s sole responsibility.
(2) Each equipment information shall be separately submitted by listing all

the details and with attached catalogue indicating at least the model,
series, size and performance. Such data shall have sufficient details to
enable the Employer’s Representative to identify that particular product
has the qualifications conforming to the Specification.
1.1.2.7 Approval of Materials
(1) Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works.
All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject
to inspections and approval of the Employer’s Representative. The
materials and equipment used for the Works shall correspond to the
approved makes. Any materials which, in the opinion of the Employer’s
Representative, have lower quality than the approved makes shall
promptly be removed from the job site.
(2) If these should be an unavoidable necessity to use materials and
equipment that deviate from the Specification or from approved samples,
then the Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s
Representative in writing and submit the substituted items of equal quality
for approval.
1.1.2.8 Shop Drawings
(1) As soon as the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall prepare shop
drawings comprising complete details of items to be fabricated and works
to be installed.
(2) The Drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy with regard
to dimensions taken in the building(s) and shall closely follow manufacturer's
recommendations. All submitted drawings shall be signed by the
Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the date(s) of
revision(s).
(3) In case shop drawings require modifications for whichever reason,
the Contractor has to clearly identify the portion that was modified, and

has to indicate the running number of revision every time that a revised
drawing is submitted.
(4) The installation details shall be checked with the building works, the
structure, and other related trades to prevent conflicts that may cause
delay of the Project.
(5) Size and scale of the shop drawings shall be at least 1:100 scale except
for enlarged scale details done for clarity, which shall be in conformity
with international standards or as directed by the Employer’s
Representative.
(6) Where required by the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor shall
prepare additional drawings, diagrams, etc., which in the opinion of the
Employer’s Representative are considered necessary for a proper
execution of the Works.
(7) The Contractor shall not proceed his work prior to approval of the shop
drawing expense incurred by the modification of works as a result of
neglecting to submit shop drawings for approval shall be borne by the
Contractor.
(8) Approval of the shop drawings by the Employer’s Representative shall
not be construed as a complete check but will indicate only the general
method of installation and its details are satisfactory.
(9) The approval of the Employer’s Representative will not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility or his liability regarding the exact
dimensions and any further properties of the installations.
1.1.2.9 As-Built Drawings
(1) The as-built drawings shall record all changes arising during the
installation and detail all relevant data concerning makes, types, numbers,
capacities, sizes, quantities, etc.
1.1.2.10 Transportation of Materials and Equipment
(1) The Contractor shall submit in advance a transportation schedule of
materials to the Employer’s Representative and coordinate with the
Building Contractor in preparing passage ways and storage facilities.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for all expense incurred during
shipping and transporting of materials and equipment to the job site. The
materials and equipment shall be handled in a manner to prevent

warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft
of damage of any kind what so ever.
1.1.2.11 Materials and Equipment Storage
(1) The Contractor shall prepare storage areas of sufficient size for all
necessary materials and equipment brought to the job site. The storage
areas shall be provided with access for inspection and removal of the
stored materials and equipment.
(2) Materials and equipment delivered to the Site without suitable storage
shall not be accepted.
1.1.3 Installation
1.1.3.1 Temporary Power Supply and Others
(1) The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water
pipe for his own use at suitable connection points and shall bear the
expense of usage, which shall be removed upon completion of sections
of the Works.
1.1.3.2 Responsibility
(1) The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and supervise all precautions and
programs for safety and provide protection to prevent damage, injury or
loss to :
(a) All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected
thereby.
(b) All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein,
whether in storage on or off the site.
(2) As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall progressively remove rubbish
and surplus materials away from the construction site or to a space
indicated by the Building Contractor and shall maintain his working area in
a clean and tidy condition as far as is practicable.
(3) Upon completion of the Works he shall, without delay, remove all his
temporary works and buildings, all tools, equipment and surplus
materials, and shall clean the whole area affected by his work and leave
it ready for immediate occupation.
(4) All materials, equipment and finished works shall be kept in good
condition. The completed work shall be the Contractor's property until
handed over to the Employer’s Representative.

1.1.3.3 Color Coding

(1) Color coding for power cables, busbars shall be complied with IEC and EIT
Standards.
(2) Color coding for Junction boxes shall be as follows:
Color Codes of Various Systems Electrical System

Ite Color Symbol Color Code
System
m Letters Color (Clamp & Box Cover)
Electrical System
1 Normal Power Supply NPS Black Orange
2 Essential Power Supply EPS Red Yellow
3 Very Essential Power Supply VEPS Red Yellow
4 Normal Lighting LTG Black Orange
5 Emergency Lighting ELTG Red Yellow
6 Fire Alarm FA Black Red
7 BMS BMS Black Blue
8 Telephone TEL Black Green
9 MATV System TV Black White
10 Public Address System PA Black White
11 CCTV CCTV Black Blue
12 Master Clock CLK White Brown
13 Signalling or Data SLG Black White
14 SCADA SCADA Black Gray
1.1.3.4 Field Testing

(1) Test all electrical equipment upon completion of installation to ensure
that the equipment operates satisfactorily and to conform to Contract
Documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all cables and electrical equipment
furnished, installed or connected by the Contractor to assure proper
installation, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance with the
plans and specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer’s
Representative and, when necessary, under the supervision of equipment
manufacturer's field engineer.
(4) All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturers whether
specified in these Specifications or not, shall be included, unless
specifically waived by the Employer’s Representative.

(5) The Contractor shall maintain in a written record of all tests showing date,
personnel making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and
results. Two copies of test records shall be given to the Employer’s
Representative.
(6) The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or
material due to improper test procedures or test apparatus handling, and
shall replace or restore to original condition any damaged equipment or
material.
(7) Safety devices, such as rubber gloves, blankets, protective screens,
barriers, danger signs, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor and shall
be used to adequately protect and warn all personnel in the vicinity of
the tests.
(8) The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary
power source of proper type for testing purposes when normal supply is
not available at the time of testing.
(9) Conduit and wiring system shall be checked to ensure that the system
has been installed in such a way as to provide a safe and reliable system.
(10) The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination
levels as specified have been met.
(11) All interlocks, control, and alarm circuits shall be given an operationally
test (If any).
(12) The insulation test of each conductor shall not be lower than the
accepted level as required by the Authority concerned.
(13) The grounding system test shall not be more than 5 ohms.
(14) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturers
as recommended by the manufacturers i.e., circuit breaker, low voltage
switchboard, motor (if any), etc unless specifically waived by the
Employer’s Representative.
1.1.3.5 Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual
(1) The manual shall be prepared in hard cover binding in 4 sets to be
submitted to the Employer’s Representative on acceptance of the
completed work.
(a) Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and
materials that have been approved.

(b) Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete

with installation, operations, and the maintenance
manuals from the manufacturers.
(c) Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
(d) Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare
parts.
(e) Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and
service and maintenance procedures for individual
equipment listed daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and
yearly.
(f) Section 6 Comprises system operations manual
(2) A draft copy of the manual shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative in advance for approval.
1.1.3.6 Works to Completion
(1) The Contractor shall make commission, clean up, and leave in full
working order the works as specified.
(2) As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings
of the Electrical system installation, and as-built drawings, It will be
sufficient to modify these contract drawings showing any amendments to
the service which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to
the Employer’s Representative for approval.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the Employer’s Representative on
completion of the works, manufacturer's literature, specifications,
technical information, and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END OF SECTION

1.2 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR

1.2.1 General
1.2.1.1 General Requirements
This Specification describes the requirements for providing, installing a complete,
testing, and commissioning standby diesel generator set.
(1) The Contractor shall install the standby power systems including
generator sets, associated auxiliary, and control equipment. The generator
shall provide back-up power for the emergency power distribution system
during utility or normal power outage.
(2) Power outage sensing, generator starting, transfer of load, re-transfer to
normal power, and engine cool down running time shall be a completely
automated system and shall not require attended operation.
(3) The capacity of generator set shall conform to ISO 8528 standard.
(4) Both alternator and engine shall be mounted on a common base and
shall be assembled by the generator manufacturer.
1.2.1.2 Standards and References
The diesel generator set shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(1) BS 5000 : Rotating electrical machines of particular types
or for particular applications
(2) DIN 6271/VDE0530 : Reciprocating internal combustion engines;
performance; power tolerances; supplementary
stipulations to DIN ISO 3046 Part 1
(3) IEC 60034 : Rotating Electrical machines
or IEC 34 : Rotating Electrical machines
(4) NEMA MG133 : Synchronous Generators
or NEMA MG1-33 : Definite purposes synchronous Generators for
Generating set Application.
1.2.1.3 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, cable installation
drawings, cable routes, connections and other associated equipment of the
generator set for approval before purchase and installation.

1.2.1.4 Quality Assurance

The generator set shall designed in the facilities certified to ISO9001 and
manufactured in the factory and facilities certified toISO9001 or ISO9002.The
manufacturer shall specialize in the specified equipment and having
experience about the equipment which have been installed in Thailand at
least five (5) years.
1.2.1.5 Warranty
All parts of the equipment and associated accessories including installation
shall be guaranteed by the Contractor at least two (2) years after handover.
1.2.2 Materials
1.2.2.1 Description
(1) Technical Requirements
(a) Generator set powered : As indicated on
Drawing
(b) Electrical system : 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz,
4-pole, 1500rpm.
(c) Governor regulation class : Compliance with ISO
8528 class G2
(d) Frequency regulation : Isochronous
(e) Random frequency variation : ± 0.5%
(f) Voltage Regulation; No Load to Full Load : ± 1%
(g) Random Voltage Variation : ± 1%
(h) Radio Frequency Emissions Compliance : BS EN 61000-6-4 and
BS EN 61000-6-2
(2) Diesel Engine
(a) The diesel engine shall be of direct injection, AC-Generator drive
type, cold starting, multi-cylinder 1,500 rpm engine speed, prime
rated power according to ISO 8528 with 10% overload capability is
available in accordance with ISO 3046, DIN 6271 and BS 5514.
(b) The diesel engine and AC generator shall be arranged to drive the
alternator by SAE standard housing and flexible disc direct coupling
to AC generator with single bearing.
(c) The engine shall be furnished with the following components:

 Fuel service tank including level gauge, sufficient for at least 8-

hour service under full load.
 Manual-operated.
 Pumps for fuel oil and lubricating oil.
 Fuel and lubricating oil filters.
 Pressure gauge for lubricating oil.
 Temperature gauge or thermometer, for outlet water in water
cooling system.
 Cooling water circulating pumps, for water cooling system.
 Tachometer and service hour meter.
 Exhaust silencer for exhausting to the outside of the plant.
 Automatic shut down and audible alarm in case of over normal
operation temperature, and low oil pressure.
 Battery charger.
 Other accessories according to the manufacturer's design.
(d) Starting device
 An electrical starting and automatic starting system shall be
provided.
(e) Cooling system
 The engine shall be water-cooled with 50°C ambient radiator and
fan.
(f) Bearing
 The main and big end bearing shall be type or ball bearing type,
of shell type, easy for maintenance and replacement.
(g) Governor
 The governor shall be isochronous to 5% droop speed regulation
under varying loads from no load to 100% full load with electronic
governor type.
 The governor shall be random speed variation not exceed ±0.5%
of its mean value for constant loads – no load to full load.
(3) Alternator
The alternator shall be brushless single bearing, revolving field, IP23
screen protected type. The synchronous alternator shall have two-end
shield ball or roller bearing, special damper windings to prevent flicker,

and separated exciter. The alternator shall be specially designed for direct
diesel engine drive and protected against insects attacking the load wires.
Short-circuit : The alternator shall sustain a short-circuit current.
Stator : The stator frame shall be made of cast-iron or welded
steel. The stator core shall be made of specially
selected sheet steel stamping of high permeability and
low hysterisis loss. Each stamping shall be insulated
with varnish so that the iron loss is reduced to a
minimum.
Stator : The stator windings shall be 2/3 pitch and reconnectable
Field : The field windings shall be round or square conductors
pre-insulated with class H insulation.
Exciter system : Separately excited with Permanent Magnet Generator
(PMG).
Insulation : The stator and rotor windings shall be insulated with
insulation materials of the highest quality fully capable
of service under high humidity in tropical condition
Class H for the rotor and stator.
AVR : The Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) shall be 3-phase
sensing, maintains voltage output to within ±0.5% at any
power factor between 0.8 and 1.0, any variations from
no load to full load, any variations from cold to hot and
speed drop variations up to 4.5%.
Voltage level : Terminal voltage adjustable within + 5% of rated
voltage.
(4) Control Board
(a) Each generator control board shall consist of:
 One triple pole molded case circuit breaker, undervoltage release,
three-phase overcurrent release, and auxiliary contacts for signal
lamps.
 One AC voltmeter with a selector switch for measuring line and
phase voltage.
 Three AC ammeters for measuring the current of each of the three
phases.
 One three-phase, 4-wire indicating wattmeter for unbalanced load.
 One read-type frequency indicator, 47-53 Hz.

 All wirings of meters shall not be smaller than 2.5 sq.mm. copper
conductors
 One set of red and green indicating lamps; for breaker energized
and de-energized.
 One set of instrument fuses..
(b) The engine control board shall provide protection and control of
diesel engine with shutdown, visual alarm indication and audible
alarm activation as follows:
 Over crank.
 Low oil pressure.
 High engine temperature.
 Over speed.
 Under speed.
 Over voltage.
 Under voltage.
The above protection shall be provided individual volt-free contact and/or
common alarm volt-free contact according to BMS or/and SCADA required.
1.2.3 Installation
1.2.3.1 The engine and alternator shall be mounted on the same steel base frame
and installed on the concrete pad to be done by the Electrical Contractor .
1.2.3.2 The exposed non-current carrying parts of the alternator and control board,
which can be accessible to persons and can become under tension to be
grounded.
1.2.3.3 The incidental sundry components necessary for the complete execution of
works and for proper usage of the installation, whether or not these sundry
components are mentioned in details in the Specification shall be supplied
and installed by the Contractor.
1.2.4 Testing and Commissioning

1.2.4.1 The Contractor shall carry out performance tests in the presence of the
Employer’s Representative before handing over the installed system.
1.2.4.2 All modes of operations and each of equipment shall be tested and
ascertained to be functioning.

1.2.4.3 Test reports shall be submitted for approval prior to conducting an

acceptance test. All controls shall be checked. The performance of all
equipment shall be tested to ascertain they meet the specifications or
applicable standards.
END OF SECTION

1.3 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD AND CAPACITOR BANK

1.3.1 Low Voltage Switchboard
1.3.1.1 General
(1) General Requirement
(a) This specification describes a double ended, low voltage
switchboards, complete with incoming circuit breakers, tie & feeder
circuit breakers, and busbars with interconnections, metering,
protection, earthing, etc for distributing power 415/240 V, 3-phase,
50Hz, 4-wires, solidly grounded neutral system to all facilities and
utilities of the station.
(b) The switchboards will be indoor, or outdoor, installed within stations
as specified as in the Contract drawings and specification. The plant
site is located in altitude at approximately mean sea level with the
ambient temperature maximum 40C.
(c) The Contractor shall supply and install the main low voltage
switchboards, distribution boards, and its accessories as described or
shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.
(d) The scope of Low Voltage electrical distribution commences at the
secondary terminal of the station Service Transformers, which
supplied by E&M contractor, and includes the provision of the main
LV cable incomer termination to the Main LV Switchboards. The
Contractor shall be responsible for cable termination at the
secondary terminal of each station Service Transformer.
(e) The main LV switchboard shall be manufactured in accordance with
the IEC 61439-1&2 and shall be so labelled where procedure exist.
Type test certificate, together with approved testing document shall
be provided for the switchboards. The type tests shall be in
accordance with VDE, KEMA, ASTA DIN, PSH, ASEFA certification or
other approved short circuit testing authority.

(2) Standard and Reference

(a) The Main low voltage switchboard, distribution boards, and its
accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
IEC 61439-1 : Low-Voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60269 : Low voltage fuse
IEC 60529 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60947-1 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 1:
General Rules
Circuit-breakers
Ancillary equipments
IEC 61439-2 : Low-Voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
-Part 2: Power switchgear and control gear assemblies
(3) Submittals
(a) The Contractor shall have to submit shop drawings, including wiring
diagrams, installation instructions, material lists and technical data, as
much as required, to the E for approval before purchase and
installation.
(b) The short circuit calculation and the coordination pattern along the
protective lines for the circuit breakers within the main low voltage
switchboards and load panel shall be submitted with the certificated
test reports to the Employer’s Representative for approval.
(4) Quality Assurance
(a) All materials and equipment to be supplied under this Contract shall
be of proven design and furnished by a manufacturer who has
accomplished similar projects for a period of at least five (5) years
unless otherwise approved by the Employer’s Representative.
(b) The switchboard assemblies manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
(5) Warranty
(a) All assembly parts of the Low Voltage switchboards, including its
accessories, shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or the
contractor at least two (2) years after handover to the Employer.

1.3.1.2 Materials
(1) Description
(a) The main LV switchboard shall be designed and fabricated for use on
a 415/240V a.c, 3 phase, 4 wires, 50 Hz, Y-grounded neutral system.
Control and distribution of power to auxiliary equipment and the
lighting systems in the stations will be by means of the two main LV
switchboards installed in the dedicated station Service Substation
(SSS) of each station.
(b) There are two Station Service Transformers which capable of
supplying the fully station service loads and each separately installed
in the station Service Substation Room 1 and Room 2. The each main
LV switchboard will be provided adjacent to support each
transformer.
(c) The two main LV switchboard are connected together via a Tie Circuit
breaker with an interlocking system. The two main circuit breakers
shall be interlocked by electrical and mechanical method, so that
the both breakers cannot be closed at the same time and the two
transformers cannot be operated in parallel to supply power to the
loads.
(d) The switchgear shall be provided complete with circuit breakers,
fused switches, isolators, relays, meters, control switches and other
electrical component necessary for the correct operation and
protection of the installation as shown on the Drawing and described
in this specification.
(e) The switchgear shall be provided complete with housing, busbar
chambers, busbars, cabling chambers, cable boxes, glands, gland
plates, cable trays, conduit entries, wiring trays, cable lugs, secondary
wiring terminals, nameplates, labels and all accessories, whether
described in detail or not, necessary for the correct operation and
protection of the installation as described herein.
(f) The main LV Switchboards shall have the change over sequence for
the essential section board shall be as follows;
 If the normal supplies fails exceed 5 seconds, the generator set
shall be started automatically.
 When the voltage reaches 90% of the nominal value the change
over switch shall be energized.

 Reenergisation of the normal supply shall cause the change over

switch to disconnect the system from the generator and reconnect
the system to the normal supply. This shall cause a signal to be
given to the engine controls to initiate an automatic generator set
shut-down sequence.
(g) The rating and quantity of main and feeder breakers shall be shown
on the single line diagram and relevant drawings.
(h) An undervoltage sensing relay shall be installed on the secondary
side of each transformer to sense loss of voltage and it has an
adjustable time delay feature. เท case the supply voltage drop to
zero, it must remain at that value for a period of 3 seconds before
tripping the main incoming circuit breakers.
(i) All cable terminations and component circuit references shall be
properly labeled & tagged.
(j) The low voltage switchgear shall have the electrical characteristic as
follow:
 System Wiring : 3-phase, 4-wires, solidly ground
 Rated Voltage : 415/240V
 System Voltage : 380/220V
 Rated Frequency : 50 Hz.
 Insulation Class : 600V (Minimum)
 Rated Continuous Current : indicated on Drawings
 Rated Short Circuit Current : indicated on Drawings (at 415 V.)
 Degree of protection : IP 31 (For Indoor use)
(k) The main switchboard shall be constructed so as to allow for future
additions and extensions.
(2) Components
(2.1) Main LV Switchboard
 Panel Construction
(a) The main LV switchboard shall be of sturdy and robust, metal
enclosed, moisture, termite and vermin proof with ventilation
louvers, free-standing, front or rear accessible. The cubicle tops,
floor plates, side panels, front and rear doors shall be
detachable gasket sheets metal plates. The bare edges shall be
lipped. Each panel shall be divided vertically and horizontally by

isolating sheet metal and horizontally by insulation between

compartments for each item of switchgear and/or instrument.
(b) The overall height of the switchboards shall not exceed
2,200mm above floor finished level. It shall be fully extensible,
self- supporting and constructed from non-hygroscopic and non-
inflammable materials.
(c) The cubicle shall be fabricated from a minimum 1.5 mm thick
mild steel using folded and welded sections and angle iron
bracing where necessary. All weld shall be flush.
(d) Arc chutes and ventilating outlets shall be so situated that any
emission of flame or hot metal particles shall not cause
electrical breakdown and shall be directed away in such a
manner as to avoid endangering the operator.
(e) Metal barriers shall divide the switchgear unit into compartments
to provide separated totally 3 basic compartments from front to
rear in form 3b as follow:
(i) Circuit breaker compartment for installation of switching
equipments.
(ii) Busbars Compartment is the chamber for busbar installation
both horizontal and vertical.
(iii) Cable compartment which be provided for power cable
incoming and outgoing from the switchboard.
Each compartment as mention above shall have sheet
metal safety partition with minimum thickness not less than
1.0 mm.
(f) The top, sides and rear cover plates shall be removable and
attached to the frame with rustproof screws. The front doors
shall be attached the frame with the hidden hinged and
approved keys providing easy opening to the doors.
(g) All front plate use for mounting meters, selector switches or
other front mounted devices shall be hinged with all wiring
installed and laced with flexibility at the hinged side. The back
closure plate shall also be hinged type and other closure plates
shall be screw removable and small enough for easy handling by
one man.
(h) Door or lift-off panels as applicable, shall be fitted to the front of
cubicles and unless otherwise noted, lift-off panels shall be

fitted to the rear of cubicles. Doors and lift-off panels shall be

stiffened in an approved manner to prevent distortion and shall
be fitted all around with compression gaskets to exclude dust.
(i) All interior shall be completely factory assembled with circuit
breakers and wire connections. All wire connectors, except screw
terminals, shall be of the anti-turn solder-less type and all shall
be suitable for copper wire of the sizes indicated.
(j) Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be
replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing
the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits
may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping.
(k) All steel parts of the panel shall be completely dry and
chemically clean, prevent corrosion with zinc-phosphate process
before being coated epoxy powder paint, both inside and
outside. Finish shall be light grey with RAL standard color, unless
otherwise directed by the Employer’s Representative.
(l) Mimic diagram shall be black plastic strip adhered on the front of
the panel showing single line diagram of the system. Mimic bus
shall be 3 mm thick and 10 mm widths.
(m) Nameplates shall be furnished and mounted by the Contractor.
Each assembly, each piece of equipment mounted on an
assembly, and each power and control circuit shall be provided
and mounted with a nameplate. All nameplates materials shall
be designed and proposed to the Employer for approval.
(n) The nameplates shall be furnished to identify the list of panels,
circuit breakers, etc. in accordance with the nameplate designations
shown on the Contract and Shop Drawings.
(o) Where specified, instruments, push buttons, indicating lights and
other similar items shall be fastened direct to the fixed or hinged
fascia panel and stiffened as necessary to hold the items firmly
in position under all conditions of operation.
(p) Ventilating louvers shall be provided on the sides and backs of
panels such that adequate ventilation shall be provided for the
internal heat dissipation and under no circumstances shall the
internal temperature rise above 40°c. All louvers shall be
screened, vermin proofing.

(q) A flexible ground strap shall connect all removable doors to the
frame.
(r) All of the feeder cubicles shall be designed for feeder cables
enter from the top. Removable cover plates for all cable
entrances shall be provided.
(s) Suitable supports for cables and wiring shall be provided within
the cubicles to prevent excessive stresses on terminal connections.
(t) The switchboards shall be provided with adequate lifting means,
and be capable of being rolled or moved into position and
bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills.
 Busbars and Supports
(a) Busbar supports shall be formed of high-dielectric strength and
low moisture absorption molded compound with the high
impact strength and low creepage surface. All current carrying
parts shall be copper.
(b) The Main Busbar shall be arranged throughout the switchboard in
the sequence of R-S-T from left to right, top to bottom and front
to back as viewed from the front and to permit future additions.
Busbars shall be bare copper and permanently labeled by phase
for identification of each phase, neutral and protective conductor
as following:
(i) Phase A of three-phase ac circuit with Brown colored
(ii) Phase B of three-phase ac circuit with Black colored
(iii) Phase C of three-phase ac circuit with Grey colored
(iv) Neutral of three-phase ac circuit with Blue colored
(v) Earthing conductors with Green or Green-and-Yellow strip
colored.
(c) The main bus shall have a continuous current rating not less
than the main breaker, and the individual unit buses shall have a
current rating not less than of the feeders. Buses shall be braced
and supported for the maximum allowable fault current of the
incoming breakers.
(d) The bus bar shall be air insulated, solid rectangular bars,hard
drawn, high conductivity, 98%, copper bars and shall be
mechanically braced to withstand the maximum symmetrical short-
circuit current rating of the main breaker in each assembly.

(e) The bus bar shall have sufficient cross sectional area to
continuously conduct rated full load current, as shown on the
single line diagram, for operation in 40°c ambient temperature
and for limit temperature rise within the requirements of IEC
61439-1. The current carrying capacity of bus bar shall be of the
bare bus bar rating, conformed to IEC 61439-1.
(f) Neutral bus shall be furnished through the entire length of the
switchgear and it shall be connected to the transformer neutral.
Neutral bus size shall not less than full size of phase bus and
shall have the same bracing. All switchgear equipment requiring
neutral shall be connected to this bus. Bolted type terminal lugs
shall be furnished for connecting the neutral bus to the incoming
and outgoing cables.
(g) A ground bus, 50% size of phase bus, shall be furnished to the
entire length of the switchgear. All switchgear equipment
requiring grounding shall be connected to this bus.
(h) All joints shall be securely tightened to Manufacturer' ร standards
for each size of hardware. Bolted, nut and washer for buses
connection shall be high tension class and the contact point
between buses and terminal pad shall be electrical compound
painted.
(i) Busbar holder shall be of fiber-glass reinforced polyester (FRP)
type or epoxy-resin or manufacturer’s recommendation. The
calculation sheet and technical data showing the minimum
spacing between the busbar holder for withstand the maximum
force caused by short circuit current from the busbar holder’s
manufacturer shall be submitted for approval. The horizontal
main bus bar supports, connections, and joints shall be bolted to
be free of required periodic maintenance.
 Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)
(a) The ACBs shall meet the following requirements:
(i) Breakers shall be trip free, metal clad, horizontal draw-out
pattern and motorized operation.
(ii) Breakers rated below 600A shall be trip free, metal clad,
fixed pattern.
(iii) Number of poles : As indicated in the drawings.
(iv) Continuous rated current : : As indicated in the drawings.

(v) lcu : As shown on the Drawings.

(vi) lcs : 100% of lcu
(vii) Short circuit withstand : lcu at 1 Sec
(viii)Rated insulation voltage : 1,000 V ac.
(ix) Rated frequency : 50 Hz.
(x) Rated ambient temperature : 40 deg. C.
(xi) Spring charging can be operated by either manual or
motorized.
(xii) 2-steps operating mechanism:
- Step 1 Charge closing spring, (can be operated by either
manual or motorized)
- Step 2 After the spring is fully charged, press button at
the front of circuit breaker to close the circuit breaker
contacts.
(b) All ACBs shall be certified by IEC or approved equivalent to show
compliance with the short circuit duty as specified above.
(c) Isolating and main contacts shall be silver plated, self-aligning
cluster type backed by phosphor bronze springs. The arcing tip
shall be specially treated to minimise erosion and eliminate
contact welding under all conditions. Heat resistant arc
quenching devices shall be provided.
(d) At least four (4) Type 'a' auxiliary contacts (close when ACB in
'ON' condition) and fourteen Type 'b' auxiliary contacts (open
when ACB in 'ON' condition) shall be provided. All auxiliary wiring
shall be connected to a plug by a flexible cable with socket type
adapter at the outer casing of the circuit breaker.
(e) Draw-out pattern ACBs shall also meet the following
requirements:
(i) Electrical connection between the ACB and the busbar
system of the LV switchboard shall be of the plug and
socket type with automatic screening shutters to shield the
fixed terminals in the switchboard when the ACB is
withdrawn. The shutters shall be properly labelled to
indicate whether they are for incoming or outgoing terminals
and provided with padlock facilities.

(ii) The ACB shall not be capable of insertion or withdrawal

when in the closed position. Attempted withdrawal shall not
trip a closed ACB.
(iii) Live parts of the ACB shall not be accessible from the front
of the LV switchboard unless the ACB is drawn out.
(iv) Means shall be provided to padlock the ACB in it's
CONNECTED, TEST and ISOLATED positions.
(f) The drawout mechanism shall be hold the breaker rigidly in the
CONNECTED, TEST, and DISCONNECTED position (for drawout
type). Interlocks shall be provided which will prevent connecting
the breaker to, or removing it from, the bus stabs unless the
breaker is OPEN (tripped). All spare contacts on breaker position
switches and auxiliary relays shall be wired to accessible terminal
blocks.
(g) Each Air circuit breaker shall have a independent manual
“CLOSE” push button and a “TRIP” push button with stored
energy or spring assisted mechanism, and shall be provided with
“CLOSED”, “OPEN” indicator whether the mechanism is fully
“charged” and “discharged” indicator shall be provided.
(h) Geared motor for automatic charging of closing spring shall be
provided. The motor charges the closing springs again
immediately after the circuit breaker has closed.
(i) The closing springs can, however, be charged manually (using the
relative operating mechanism lever) in the event of a power
supply failure or during maintenance work.
(j) Control contacts shall make when the breaker is in the
“CONNECTED” position and break when in the “DISCONNECTED”
position. The auxiliary contacts shall make when the breaker is in
the “CONNECTED” position and break when in the “TEST” and
“DISCONNECTED” position.
(k) Notwithstanding the above, each ACB shall be equipped with,
but not be limited to, the following:
(i) A mechanically operated indicating device to indicate
breaker positions.
(ii) Key operated interlocks between breakers where required.
(iii) Auxiliary Switches.
(iv) Time Delay Under-voltage Trip

(v) Shunt Trip

(vi) Motor Operate
(vii) Alarm Switch
(viii) Microprocessor adjustable Trip Unit as followings;
- Long time protection (LT) can be adjusted from 0.4-1
time of ampere rated current (In) and can be adjusted
time delay from 15-480 seconds at 1.5 time of ampere
rated.
- Short time protection (ST) can be adjusted from 1.5-10
time of ampere rated current (In).
- Short time delay/Long time delay
- Instantaneous trip (INST)
- Thermal Memory
- Ground fault protection, current pick up adjustment and
time delay type.
- LCD display for current value, trip history, type of fault,
pre-trip alarm and main contact maintenance shall be
built-in the circuit breaker.
- Healthy unit LED for self inspection.
ix) Breaker OPEN/CLOSED/TRIPPED-ON-FAULT indicating lamps.
x) Phase indicating lamps (for incoming breakers and bus-
sections only).
xi) Control circuits, with anti-pumping relays, to ensure positive
operation of the ACB.
xii) Lamp test push button.
xiv) REMOTE/LOCAL-MANUAL breaker control selector switch.
 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
(a) All molded case circuit breakers shall be 3-pole, rated 415V a.c,
50Hz and shall be manual operated, except MCCB for essential
loads shall complete with motor operated, trip free from the
handle and provided with adjustable thermal overload and
instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protective elements. The
MCCB ampere frame rating < 400 AF shall be thermal magnetic
trip type and others shall be electronic trip type,
(b) Load handling contacts shall be of anti-welding silver/tungsten
tips electrolytic deposited onto high conductivity copper backing.

(c) The MCCBs shall be 'Trip Free'. The tripping mechanism shall be
thermal magnetic and fully compensated for ambient temperature
of 25 degree C to 50 degree C and calibrated at 40 or 50 degree
C to carry full load.
(d) MCCBs shall be complete with overload, short circuit and earth
leakage protection (if specified) and shall have an inverse
current/time characteristic with time delay inversely proportional
to the current up to seven times full load rating. On higher
overcurrent and earth leakage, the breaker shall trip
instantaneously. Wherever specified, additional undervoltage
relay protection shall be provided. Clear indication of type of
fault when tripped shall be indicated for all MCCB'S
(e) Where required, MCCB shall be provided with a shunt trip unit
that shall shunt trip the MCCB during an earth fault condition.
The shunt trip unit shall be controlled by an earth fault current
sensing device and static electronic circuitry with an adjustable
earth leakage tripping range and an adjustable tripping time of 0-
5s. The shunt trip coil shall operate on the dc supply as specified
hereinafter. An indicating lamp with lamp test and reset buttons
shall also be provided to indicate MCCB tripped on earth fault.
(f) Quick-make, quick-break and trip-free for over-current and short
circuit current, and have a common trip on all multi-pole
breakers with internal tie mechanism.
(g) Drives shall be toggle operating mechanism, operated by trip-free
system and shall have clearly indication whether the circuit
breaker is “ON”, “OFF” or “TRIP”. All breakers shall be provided
with terminal connectors for connecting to the outgoing feeders.
(h) De-rating factors shall be considered where applicable to
compensate for ambient temperature, enclosure, loading duty
cycle, frequency and altitude.
(i) Trip unit for the MCCB rating from 100 AF to 400 AF shall be
thermal-magnetic trip with fixed thermal current or adjustable
thermal curl from 0.8-1.0 time of AF rated as specified on the
Drawings.
(j) Trip unit for the MCCB rating > 400 AF shall have rating plug to
adjust ampere rating. The ampere rating can be adjusted from

0.4-1.0 time of rating plug for overload current and 3-8 times of
rating plug for short circuit current.
(k) All circuit breakers rating > 1000 AT shall be completed with
ground fault sensor. The sensor shall have the following
characteristic;
(i) Ground-fault clearing time of main circuit breaker shall be
more than the clearing time of feeder circuit breaker.
(ii) Ground fault pick up current > 200A. (adjustable)
(iii) Time delay can be set at 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and 0.4 Sec.
 Motorized MCCB Units
(a) Motorised MCCB units shall comprise an MCCB as specified and
with electrically operated solenoid and control as specified
hereafter.
(b) Where approved by the Employer, a motorised MCCB shall be
provided for control purposes or tripping the MCCB during an
earth fault or under-voltage condition. Operation of the MCCB
shall be by an individual momentarily energised solenoid
mounted on the breaker. The closing solenoid and tripping
solenoid shall operate on AC 220 V.
(c) Where approved by the Employer, an earth fault current sensing
device and static electronic circuitry with an adjustable earth
leakage tripping range and an adjustable tripping time of 0-5
seconds shall be provided.
(d) Where approved by the Employer, an under-voltage trip relay
capable of holding the circuit closed for a period of 0-5 seconds
adjustable at the commencement of complete mains failure
shall be provided. The under-voltage relay shall be of the self-
resetting type. A time delay circuit shall be incorporated to close
the MCCB automatically within a period of 0-30 seconds
adjustable at the commencement of mains restoration.
(e) Notwithstanding the above, each motorised MCCB unit shall be
equipped with, but not be limited to, the following:
(i) MCCB OPEN/CLOSED/TRIPPED ON FAULT indicating lamps.
(ii) MCCB OPEN/CLOSE push buttons.
(iii) Control circuits, with anti-pumping relays, to ensure positive
operation of the MCCB.

(iv) Auxiliary contacts for local status indications, controls and

20% spares.
(v) Lamp test push button.
(vi) Auxiliary contacts for remote status indications, controls and
20% spares for future use.
(vii) REMOTE/LOCAL-ANUAL MCCB control selector switch.
 Relay and Measuring Devices
(a) Multifunctional Digital Power Meter (DPM)
(i) The DPM shall be panel mounted type, complete with anti-
glare LCD or LED display unit.
(ii) The DPM meter shall be able to measure true RMS values as
follow (minimum):
- Current : per phase
- Voltage : VL-L and VL-N
- Power : kW, kVAR, kVA per phase and total at
3 phases
- Power Factor : per phase and average at 3 phases
- Frequency : incoming electrical source (Hz.)
- Energy : kWh, kVARh, kVAh, class 0.5S per IEC
62053 or 61557-12
- Harmonic : THDi and individual harmonic order
from 3rd Up to 31th
- Samplic rate : 96 samples per cycles
- Memory : At least 64 kbyte
(iii) The DPM shall be completed with built-in RS-485, Mod bus
communication port to interface with Building Management
System (BMS) and/or SCADA System.
(iv) The DPM shall be operated at rated voltage not exceed
600 VL-L and current rating ≤ 5 A (from secondary of current
transformer) or accept input from current sensors.
(v) The accuracy of power meter shall be:
- Current/Voltage : 0.5%
- Power/Energy : 0.5%
- Power Factor : 0.5%

(b) Analog Ammeter, Voltmeter

(i) Each indicating instruments shall be semi-flush mounted,
back connected, dustproof, fully tropicalized, switchboard
type with a dull black case for mounting on a steel panel.
Each shall be suitable for operation with the instrument
transformers shown on the drawings.
(ii) Except as otherwise specified, all indicating instruments shall
be approximately 96mm X 96mm square with a 90°c scale
arc. All ammeters and voltmeters shall be of the moving
iron type. The maximum error of each indicating instrument
shall not be more than 1% of full scale range.
(iii) The scale ranges of ammeters, voltmeters, wattmeters and
varmeters shall be chosen so that, under normal operating
conditions, each instrument will read between 60-75% of
the effective scale range. Scale plates shall have a
permanent white finish with black graduations and numerals.
(iv) The ammeters for which the upper limited of the effective
range does not exceed 20 amps may be direct (series)
connected. For higher range, current transformer operated
ammeter shall be used, and shall be designed for a
secondary current of 5 amps.
(v) Accuracy Class of the meters shall be 1.0 or better.
(vi) Voltmeters shall be the direct connection type with the
accuracy class 1.0 and scale range 0-500V.
(c) Instrument Transformers
(i) The current transformers shall be suitable for use with
meters and tropical proof type with a 5A secondary and a
primary rating equal to the breaker continuous current rating
as specified on the drawings. All current transformers shall
have thermal and mechanical limits coordinated with the
short-time rating of the circuit breakers with which they are
used.
(ii) All current transformer secondary leads shall be brought out
to shorting type terminal blocks located in the instrument
compartments and shall be arranged to provide any
combination of connections or polarity.

(iii) The current transformer shall not be used in dual-purpose

role serving both instrument and protective device.
(iv) Accuracy Class of the current transformers shall be in
accordance with the following function:
- Tariff metering : 0.5
- Non-tariff metering : 1.0
- Switchboard indicating instrument : 1.0
- Protection : 10P
(v) The voltage transformer (if applied) shall be of the air-
insulated type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy
resin or other suitable synthetic material. All voltage
transformer secondary leads shall be brought out and
connected, through secondary fuses, to terminal blocks for
external connections or connection to other devices integral
to the switchgear. These fuses and terminal blocks shall be
mounted in the instrument compartments.
(vi) On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, ammeter switches shall have
four operating positions, marked 'R', ' S ', T, 'N', and 'OFF'
position, and shall enable the single ammeter to read, in
sequence, the currents in each of the three phases and the
neutral wire. Ammeter switches shall have 'make-before-
break' contacts and shall be connected so that the
associated current transformers are short- circuit when they
are not connected to the ammeter.
(vii) On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have
six operating positions, marked 'R-S', 'S-T', 'T-R', 'R-N', 'S-N', 'T-
N', and 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single voltmeter
to read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and
each of the three phase-to-neutral voltages. Voltmeter
switches shall have 'break-before- make' contacts.
(viii) Undervoltage relay shall be provided to turn off the main
circuit breaker when the voltage falls below premeditated
level. Undervoltage relay shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, 416/240V,
50Hz unit. The undervoltage setting shall be adjustable to
10% with time delay setting 0-10s.The undervoltage relay
shall include phase sequence and phase failure to trip the
breaker when one phase falls symmetrically

(d) Asymmetrical Relay

(i) Asymmetrical relay shall be provided to turn off the main-
circuit breaker in the event the difference in the voltage
among the three (3) phases is incorrect.
(ii) Asymmetrical relay shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 380/220V, 50Hz
unit. The asymmetrical setting for the difference in the
voltage among the three (3) phases shall be adjustable.
(e) Under-voltage Relay
(i) Under-voltage relay shall be provided to turn off the main-
circuit breaker when the voltage falls below premeditated
level.
(ii) Under-voltage relay shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 380/220V, 50Hz
unit. The Under-voltage setting shall be adjustable to 10%.
(f) Control and Auxiliary Relays
(i) Control and auxiliary relays shall be provided where
necessary to ensure sound and effective operation of the
ACBs, MCCBs and contactors.
(ii) Relays shall be plug-in type, rack mounted, provided with
cable connection sockets and anchored by quick fastening
vibration-proof devices.
(iii) All contacts shall be of the double breaking type. Relay coils
shall be suitable for ac or dc operation as required.
(g) Volt-free Contacts (Dry Contacts)
(i) Volt-free contacts shall be provided where required. They
shall comprise a pair of contacts operated directly by the
equipment but electrically separated such that no electrical
potential derived from the equipment appears at the
contacts. Volt-free contacts shall also be used to complete
external control, alarm or indication circuits.
(h) HRC Fuses and Fuse Links
(i) All equipment shall be fitted with suitably rated fuses.
Heaters, indications, alarms, control circuits and measuring
instruments shall each be fused separately and all fuses
shall be housed in all insulated carriers with shrouded bases.
All fuse links shall be properly labelled to identify the rating.

(ii) The HRC, if applied, shall be three (3) poles, surface

mounting, and knife-contact type. The HRC fuses shall have
the rated voltage of 500V and the rated current as indicated
as on the Contract Drawing.
(iii) The HRC fuses shall be provided with side barriers and
phase-separation barriers. Fuse base and the HRC fuse shall
be manufactured in according to the IEC or VDE standards.
(iv) A fuse puller shall be provided for the distribution panel
which uses the combined HRC fuse and fuse base.
(i) Control wiring and terminal blocks
(i) All control wiring shall be with flexible, stranded copper
conductors, switchboard wire and shall not be less than
1.5mm2 except for current transformer circuits which shall
not be less than 2.5mm2. All hinged wiring shall be extra
flexible. The wiring shall be neatly and carefully installed in
suitable wiring ducts with removable covers and shall be
terminated at suitable terminal blocks. Splices shall not be
permitted in control wiring or instrument leads.
(ii) The switchgear shall be provided with terminal blocks for
termination of all wiring devices. Each terminal block shall
be clearly identified to show wiring which will be installed
by the Contractor. Extra terminals, in a quantity of not less
than 25% of the active terminals, shall be provided on each
terminal block for circuit modifications and for future use.
The terminal blocks shall be located so that the accessibility
to them will not be lessened by interference from structural
members or panel instruments. Ample space shall be
provided at terminal blocks for termination of external
circuits.
(iii) Terminal blocks shall be of the rail-mounted type and shall
be of screw-less type terminals 600V a.c. moulded block
type with molded insulating barrier between terminals.
Terminal connections shall be such that the conductors
shall be connected with the necessary maintained contact
pressure. Terminals shall be so constructed that the
conductors can be clamped between suitable surface

without any significant damage either to conductors or

terminals.
(iv) Terminal blocks for final connections for indication,
instrumentation and metering circuitry shall have test probe
facilities for connections of test leads and an integral
disconnecting device to facilitate testing. Terminal blocks
utilized in the secondary circuits of current transformers and
electrical measuring transducers shall be of short-circuiting
elements type.
(v) Wiring shall be identified at each end with a legible printed
black marking sleeve. Sleeves shall be white tubing, sized to
fit the insulation. Sleeves shall be able to rotate on the Wire
so not to inadvertently hide the wire number.
(vi) Nameplates shall be furnished and mounted by the
Contractor. Each assembly, each piece of equipment
mounted on an assembly, and each power and control
circuit shall be provided with a nameplate. All nameplates
shall be made of laminate plastic. Characters shall be black
on a white background.
(vii) All indicating and pilot lamp assemblies shall be of the low
power, cool operating, 24V, switchboard type, with color
caps and integrally mounted resistors. The color caps shall
be Red, Green, Yellow as required. The lamp bulbs shall be
replaceable from the front of the panels.
(2.2) Distribution boards
 General
(a) The distribution boards shall serve the distribution of electrical
power to machinery/motors, socket outlets, lighting system, etc.
The loads shall be connected either directly to these boards or
via sub-distribution boards.
(b) The distribution boards shall be of metal-enclosed indoor,
factory- built type. A minimum protection of enclosure IP42 shall
be provided. All distribution boards shall be provided with
incoming and outgoing LED indication lights.

 Panel Construction
(a) The distribution board enclosure shall be made of phosphate-
galvanized steel sheet (minimum thickness 2 mm) and finished
with epoxy-powder coating (minimum 60 micron) colored to the
Employer acceptance. The enclosure shall be completed with
hinged doors and to be provided with standardized key lock and
3 sets of keys shall be provided for each distribution board. All
DB doors shall be provided with separate latches in addition to
the door locks.
(b) The distribution boards shall be supplied fully equipped, wired,
and proofed against vermin, dust and moisture, designed for
free-standing or for wall-mounting, and cable access from
beneath or above. Proper warning signs indicating danger and
voltage level shall be provided.
(c) Unless otherwise accepted, access to the boards shall be from
the front, the doors shall be furnished with lift-off hinges to
permit an opening enabling an unrestricted access to the board
interior.
All doors and covers shall be fitted with moulded gaskets of
non-ageing material.
(d) The distribution boards shall be provided with 3-phase copper
conductor busbars rated for continuous current and short circuit
current. The busbars shall be designed to withstand dynamic
forces due to peak short circuit current. All busbars including
droppers and termination to the circuit breakers shall be colour
code refer to the local standard.
(e) Each distribution board shall also be furnished with neutral and
earthing busbars having the same rating as the phase-buses.
(f) As-built single line diagram, control circuit and layout plan shall
be inserted in a permanent pocket on the inner side of the panel
door of each distribution board.
 Circuit Breakers (CB)
(a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-2 standard with appropriate rated short-circuit breaking
capacity at 415V. The short circuit performance categories shall
depended on the application of the breaker. All MCCB shall be

of triple-pole or double-pole as required, thermal magnetic type,

with magnetic adjustable for MCCB’s rated at 400A and above,
independent manual operated to provide quick-make, quick-
break, trip free mechanism so that the unit cannot be held
closed against overload and short-circuit.
 Current transformer /current sensors
(a) Current transformers shall be single-phase, cast resin insulated.
They shall withstand a continuous overload of 120%. The type,
burden and accuracy class shall be suitable for its purpose.
(b) The current sensors shall have following characteristics:
- Have a millivolt output
- Risk free connection of on-load opening of the sensor’s
secondary
 Instruments
(a) The indicating instruments shall be flush-mounted, measuring
96mm high X 96mm wide.
(b) The instruments shall be of Class 3 accuracy or better.
(c) The voltmeter shall be provided with a selector switch, for
reading the values of the three phases i.e. phase to phase, and
phase to neutral voltage. The measuring range shall be indicated
on the diagrams or drawings.
(d) The scale shall not be less than 90° angular degrees and the
designation shall be in Amps or Volts on white plate.
 Internal cabling
(a) All internal cabling in each item of equipment shall be installed
in cabling channels or conduits. Exposed cabling shall be kept to
a minimum but where necessary, the wires shall be formed into
compact groups suitably bound together and properly
supported.
(b) All conductors shall be terminated with suitable pressure type
terminal lugs of proper sizes for terminal studs at the terminal
blocks or shall be terminated in a manner compatible to the
terminals of the instruments.
(c) All conductors shall run continuously between terminal studs
without splices or taps and all conductors shall be labeled at

each termination with wire number as designated on the circuit

diagrams.
(d) All internal cabling shall be insulated stranded copper wire, rated
at not less than 450V/750V. And minimum cross-sectional area
shall be;
(i) 1.5mm2 for control circuits.
(ii) 2.5mm2 for voltage and current circuits.
1.3.2 Execution
1.3.2.1 Installation
(1) All low voltage switchgears shall be installed on the location as indicated
on the drawings.
(2) The main low voltage switchboard shall be installed on the concrete base
at least 100 mm. height.
(3) All equipment shall be installed as recommended and certified by the
manufacturers.
1.3.2.2 Testing and Commissioning
(1) Field Testing
(a) Field inspection and testing for Switchboards shall occur after
installation is complete, feeders are terminated, and the room is
secure.
(b) Testing scope;
(i) Visual and physical inspection of equipment.
(ii) Check control wiring and metering.
(iii) Ground fault protection.
(iv) Insulation testing for equipments.
(v) Adjust circuit breaker setting based on recommendations in the
short circuit and co-ordination study.
(vi) Primary current injection testing of circuit breakers.
(vii) System grounding.
(viii) Function and operation testing for equipments inclusive
interlocking scheme.
(c) Certified test report;
(i) Verify that the installation is in accordance with Standards and
regulations.

(ii) Verify that the equipment has been fully tested and is
operational.
(2) Factory testing

(a) The Low Voltage Switchboard shall conform to IEC 61439-1&2 with
type test certificates issued by an independent and approved test
authority. Type test shall included:
(i) Dielectric properties;
(ii) Short-circuit withstand strength;
(iii) Effectiveness of the protective circuit;
(iv) Clearance and creepage distances;
(v) Mechanical operation; and
(vi) Degree of protection.
(vii) Meter calibration
(b) The routine testing for Switchboard at factory shall follows IEC 61439-
1&2 and covers below lists;
(i) Wiring and Operation testing
(ii) Protective measures
(iii) Insulation resistance.
1.3.3 Capacitor Bank

1.3.3.1 General
(1) General Requirements
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install the capacitor bank and
associated capacitor bank equipment as described or indicated on
the Drawings and requirements specified herein.
(b) The capacitor bank assemblies manufactured in Thailand shall be
also be the standard factory product which continues to produce
and/or assembly the capacitor bank similar to the low voltage
switchboard complying with type test IEC61439-1 & 2.
(2) Technical Requirements
(a) The Capacitor bank shall have the electrical characteristics as follows:
 System Wiring 3-phase, 4-wire

 Rated operational voltage 230/400V

 Rated Frequency 50 Hz.
 Rated Insulation 3kV
 Rated Insulation level 1000V
 Ambient temperature 40°C maximum, and average of 24 hours
not exceed 40°C.
 Rated Continuous Current indicated on Drawings
 Rated Short Circuit Current indicated on Drawings (at 415 V and
1sec.)
 IP20 Degree of protection or indicated on drawing
(3) Submittals
(a) The Contractor shall submit the certificates, technical data and
catalogues of the capacitor bank and associated accessories with
material samples for approval prior to proceeding purchase.
(b) The Contractors shall prepare and submit the installation details and
routing plans of the capacitor bank equipment for approval prior to
installation.
(4) Quality Assurance
The manufacturer shall specialize in the specified of type tested low
voltage switchboard according to IEC61439-1 &2 equipment and continue
having experience assemblies and produce it in Thailand at least five (5)
years.
(5) Warranty
All parts of the capacitor bank equipment and associated accessories
including installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least
two (2) years after handover.
1.3.3.2 Materials
(1) Power Factor Correction equipment
(a) The Capacitor bank shall be connected to main busbar of the Main
LV Switchboards as means of power-factor-correction equipment
which provides the reactive power directly at the loads, it is possible
to stabilize the system voltage and reduce the transmission losses.
The loading of the equipment installed for the generation and

transmission of power is reduced, and it is thus able to supply more

active power.
(b) Power factor correction equipment shall comprise capacitor units,
control relay, switching equipment, protective fuses and means of
isolation, all assembled and connected to control automatically the
connection and disconnection of the capacitance in response to
change in the load power factor.
(c) The Capacitor units shall be built into the dedicated enclosure, and
having a degree of protection of at least IP31. The spacing for
ventilation of each capacitor bank shall comply with IEC 60831. The
design, manufacture, installation and testing of materials shall comply
with the requirements of IEC60831: Part 1 and Part 2.
(d) Power factor correction equipment shall carry out the power factor
improvement to PF = 0.95 lagging or better. Provision shall be made
to ensure that a connection point is available for series connected,
detuning reactor in case of problems with high harmonics. The
Contractor shall submit the calculation report to approval.
(e) The application of capacitor units shall be automatically operated via
contactors. This process shall be controlled by multi-stage, kVAR
sensitive, solid state relay which cycles the capacitor stages so that
each is called into service in sequence and advances so that each
capacitor is used equally.
(f) Switching contactors shall have a minimum duty category AC-6b to
IEC 60070 and 60831 and according to IEC 60947-4-1 coordination
type as capacitor bank manufacture recommended. The capacitor
units shall be low loss type. Total losses shall be less than 0.5
W/kVAR and the capacitor elements shall have a voltage rating of
440Vac without detuned reactor and 525Vac with detuned reactor, 3-
phase, 50 Hz.
(g) Permanently connected discharge resistors shall be provided across
the termination sized to ensure safe discharge of the capacitors to
less than 50V within 1 minute after disconnection. The capacitors
shall be capable of operating for prolonged periods, without damage,
at an applied voltage 10% greater than the rated voltage.

(2) The capacitor shall comply with the following technical data:
(a) Type : Indoor, dry technology,
self-healing, metallization
polypropylene film.
(b) Capacitor rated voltage : 3-Phase, 525Vac with detuned
reactor.
(c) Rated operational voltage : 400Y/230V, 3ph, 4w
(d) Rated frequency : 50 Hz.
(e) Rated power : as specified on the Drawings
(f) Safety & Self protected capacitor : Internal fuse each element or
self- healing with pressure-
sensitive disconnector.
(g) Target Power factor setting : 0.85 ind. - 0.9 cap.
(h) Losses : <0.5W/kVAR (discharge resistors
included).
(i) Tolerance : -5 to 15%
(j) Protection : IP 31
(k) Standards : IEC 60831-1 & 2
(l) Overcurrent : 1.3 x In
(m) Overvoltage : 1.1 x Un As per IEC 60831- 1&2
(n) Maximum peak current : 100 x In
(o) Voltage test between terminals : 2.15 x Un for 10sec.
(p) Voltage test between terminal : 3kVfor 10s
and earth
(q) Ambient temperature : Class D, -25 / +55°C
(3) The reactive power regulator shall be of the solid state type and have the
following technical data:
(a) Rated voltage : 3-Phase, 4-wire, 400/230V
(b) Rated frequency : 50 Hz
(c) Step control : as specified in the Drawings
(d) Operation mode : Automatic & Manual
(e) Control voltage : 220V
(4) HRC Fuse link
(a) Rated Voltage : 500Vac, IEC 60269-2
(b) Rated Current : Shall be not less than
x1.6times of capacitor current

or according to IEC60947-4-1
coordination as manufacture
recommended or as specified
on the Drawings, with insulating
striker pin and remote indicator
fuse base.
(c) Rated Breaking capacity : 125kA at 500Vac
(d) Humidity : Up to 95% with +45°C
(e) Base fuse : Triple-poles with phase barriers
for >250A
(5) Contactor
(a) Electrical durability at nominal load : ≥ 100,000 operating cycles at
400V.
(b) Standard : IEC60947-4-1 or EN 60947-4-1
(c) Control voltage : 220-240 Vac
(d) Rated insulation voltage : 1,000V
(e) Prospective peak current at switch-on : ≥ 100In
(f) Rated thermal current : >1.30 times of Capacitor
current or according to
IEC60947-4-1 coordination type
as manufacture recommended
(6) The capacitor banks shall be designed so that alteration or addition of the
capacitor in the future will not affect the system.
(7) The capacitor bank shall be installed in separate cubicle from low voltage
switchboard which is the same design as the main switchboard and as the
manufacturer recommendation.
(8) The cubicle for capacitor bank shall be IP31 protection class and naturally
ventilated.
1.3.3.3 Factory routine verification and testing

The routine testing of capacitor bank at factory shall be similar to PSC.

(1) The capacitor bank shall be installed at the location as indicated on the
Drawings.
(2) The capacitor bank shall be installed on the concrete plinth of 100 mm.
height.
(3) All equipment shall be installed as recommended and certified by the
manufacturers.
1.3.3.5 Field or on site testing and commissioning
(1) Field inspection and testing for capacitor bank shall occur after
installation is complete, feeders are terminated, and the room is secure.
Testing shall be conducted not more than 4 weeks before equipment is
energized.
(2) Testing scope shall be in accordance with factory routine testing.
(3) Certified test report:
 Verify that the installation is in accordance with Standards and
Regulations.
 Verify that the equipment has been fully tested and is operational.
END OF SECTION

1.4 BUSDUCT
1.4.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install a totally enclosed low impedance
plug-in and/or feeder busduct system having the ratings as indicated in
the Drawings.
(2) The busduct and accessories shall be manufactured, installed and tested
in compliance with IEC 61439-6 or UL857. IEC 61439-6 or UL857.The
manufacturer shall have ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OSHAS 18001.
(3) Both feeder and plug-in busducts shall be of sandwich contractor type.
The fittings, such as plug-in unit, elbow, hanger, and so on shall be from
the same manufacturer as that of busduct.
(4) Labels indicating brand name and rating of busduct shall be clearly visible
and attached to all sections or pieces of busduct.
(5) The operation rating of busduct shall be 230/400volt, 3 phase,4wires, full
neutral with 50% continuous piece, integral ground bus.
(6) The Contractor shall coordinate with the other trades for routing the
busducts. Final field measurements shall be made prior to release
purchasing order and fabrication.
1.4.1.2 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the catalogues together with the technical
date of busduct and associated accessories for approval before
purchasing.
(2) The busduct shall pass full type tests as specified in UL857 or IEC 61439-
6. The test certificate shall be issued by an international independent
testing authority.
(3) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the shop drawing of installation
details and routing plans of the busducts for approval prior to proceeding
purchasing order and installation.

(1) The manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing busducts and having
experience about the busduct which have been installed in Thailand at
least two (2) years.

1.4.1.4 Warranty
All parts of the busduct and associated accessories including installation shall
be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years after handover.
1.4.2 Materials
(1) Busduct support shall be fabricated from hot-dipped galvanized steel or
manufacturing standards. The Contractor shall submit the loading
calculation of supports, both vertical and horizontal runs to the Engineer
for approval. The supports and hangers shall be from the same
manufacturer of the busduct and shall be of the standard support of the
manufacturer. In case of plug-in busducts, the supports shall not obstruct
the tap-off openings.
(2) Busduct and all fittings, such as elbow, tap-off box, end closer, etc. shall
be the standard products from the same manufacturer regularly available
in the market.
(3) Busduct expansion joints shall be provided at the expansion joints of
building as recommended by the manufacturers. And the ampere rating
shall not be lower than that of the busduct.
(4) The plug-in unit shall be of circuit breaker type having interrupting
capacity as indicated in the Drawings. The operating handle shall be
provided with on/off indicating device to indicate the circuit breaker
position.
(5) The plug-in units shall be mechanically interlocked with the housing of
busduct to prevent taking off or inserting the plug-in unit when its circuit
breaker is “ON” position.
(6) The cover of the plug-in unit shall be mechanically interlocked with the
circuit breaker. It cannot be opened when the circuit breaker is “ON”
position.
(7) The operating handle of the plug-in unit shall be provided with a
mechanism to close or disconnect the circuit breaker all the time.
1.4.2.2 Technical Requirements
(1) Busduct IP>= 54
Busduct specified in this Specification shall be feeder type and/or plug-in
type. The busduct and accessories shall be manufactured in compliance

with IEC 61439-6 or UL857 to operate with 400/230 volts, 3phases, 4wires,
50Hz.
(a) The busbars shall be of high conductivity copper with not less than
99% purity.
(b) Each busbar shall be insulated over its entire length. It shall
withstand the operating temperature of not less than 130°C except at
the contact points. The temperature rise at any point in the busduct
shall not exceed 55°C rise above ambient temperature when
operated at the rated load current. The insulation of busbars shall be
self-extinguished and flame-retardant.
(c) The busduct system shall be of the low impedance and totally
enclosed type, 3 phases, 4 wires, 400 volts with full neutral and
integral ground.
(d) According to the standard length (10 feet) of a plug-in busduct shall
have the plug-in openings for each side of busduct of not less than 3
or 4 openings or more. And each opening shall be able to tap off the
power at least 50% of the total rated current of the busduct.
(e) The short circuit rating of the busducts rated below 1000A shall be
not less than 25kA and those rated above 1000A shall be not less
than 35kA.
(2) Busduct IP>= 68

Busducts in this requirement shall include provision, installation and
testing of feeder busduct and accessories, such as elbow, terminal
element and so on for emergency supply lines. The busducts shall be
suitable for use in the areas lower than the normal ground level or in the
damp locations or as shown in the Drawings. Busduct shall be
manufactured in accordance with IEC 61439-1, IEC 61439-2, IEC 60331 and
IEC 60529 (IP68) for operating with 400/230 volt, 3 phases, 4 wires, 50Hz.
system
(a) All busducts shall be of high conductivity copper with not less than
99% purity.
(b) The busduct system shall consist of 5 copper busbars. The neutral
conductor as well as the ground conductor shall have the current
carrying capacity of not less than 100% of that of the phase
conductors or as specified in the Drawings.

(c) The short circuit rating of the busduct rated at 1000A. or below shall
be not less than 20kA. at 1 second and that of the busduct at 1000A.
or above not less than 50kA at 1 second.
(d) The busduct system shall be of high quality product and fabricated
by the manufacturer certified and awarded ISO 9000 or ISO 9001 ISO
14001, OHSAS 18001 Quality Standards from and international
recognized standard body.
1.4.3 Installation
1.4.3.1 The busduct shall be installed conforming to manufacturer’s installation
manual, NEMA BU1.1 standard, local regulation and approved drawings.
1.4.3.2 Final field measurements shall be made by the Contractor prior to release for
manufacturing to assure coordination with other trades.
1.4.3.3 Plug in unit housing shall completely enclosed the switching device and shall
be of sheet steel furnished in grey enamel or manufacturing standards over a
rust inhibitor. A ground slab to engage grounding tap on busduct shall be
provided. Provide means for padlocking cover and operating handle in "OFF"
position. All current-carrying parts of busducts shall be suitably plated.
1.4.3.4 Provide a releasable cover interlock that prevents opening cover except when
switch is in "OFF" position. A releasable interlock preventing closing switch with
cover open shall also be included, as well as an interlock to prevent insertion
or removal from busduct when in "ON" position.
1.4.3.5 Fire-stops or barriers shall be included as an integral part where busduct
feeder and plug-in busduct length and fittings pass through fire resistant
structural elements, such as walls and floors. The Contractor shall seal the
opening made as fire barriers according to the appropriate degree of fire
resistance of the walls and floor.

Insulation test for busduct shall be subjected to approval.
END OF SECTION

1.5 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)

1.5.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install the automatic transfer switch
described or indicated on the Drawings and requirements specified herein.
The automatic transfer switches shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
(1) IEC 60947-6-1 : Low Voltage Switch and Control gear: Multifunction
equipment, Automatic Transfer Switching equipment
(2) UL 1008 : Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
(3) NFPA110 : Emergency and Standby Power System
(4) NFPA70 : National Electrical Code
1.5.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of the
automatic transfer switch and associated accessories for approval prior to
purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and
layout plan of the automatic transfer switch for approval prior to
installation.
The manufacturer shall specialize in the specified equipment and having
1.5.1.5 Warranty
All parts of the automatic transfer switch and associated accessories including
installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years
after handover.

1.5.2 Materials
1.5.2.1 Description
(1) The automatic transfer switches shall be designed and manufactured in
accordance with UL 1008 or IEC60947-6-1.
(2) The Automatic Transfer Switches shall be of double throw construction
and electrically operated by solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized
in the event of normal supply failure, and can also be operated manually
in the event of control circuit failure. The manual operated shall be 2-
positions (Normal and Emergency).
(3) The Automatic Transfer Switches shall have the characteristics as follows;
(a) Number of pole : 3 or 4 pole as indicated on drawing
(b) Rated Voltage : 400V/230V
(c) System Voltage : 380Y/220V
(d) Rated Frequency : 50 Hz.
(e) Rated Continuous Current : As indicated on Drawings
(f) Enclosure : IP31 or type 1 enclosure
1.5.2.2 Component
(1) Automatic transfer switch shall be 3 poles or 4 poles solenoid operated
double throw switch type with 100% rated for both normal utility power
source and emergency engine generator power source and shall be
electrically and manually operated, off their respective power sources, as
a common transfer mechanism to provide double throw switching action.
Microprocessor control panel shall be the same manufacturer as
automatic transfer switch.
(2) Transfer mechanism shall electrically operated and mechanically held by
own structure, to prevent load circuits from being connected
simultaneously to the normal utility and emergency (engine generator set)
power sources.
(3) Each transfer switch shall be provided with normal utility 3 phase voltage
monitoring circuits of the closed differential type, field adjustable up to
98% for under voltage of normal utility voltage, in any phase and to pick
up when normal utility voltage returns to 90% in all 3 phases, dropout
shall be set up to 20%.
(4) The voltage monitoring circuits shall also include adjustable time delays
for dropout and pickup, dropout shall be adjustable in range of 0 to 6
seconds and after time period a signal shall be provided to the master

station start circuit controls, pickup shall be adjustable in range of 0 to 10

minutes and after time period the switch shall automatically retransfer to
the normal utility power source.
(5) To avoid inrush current of re-transfer to utility and cause a nuisance
tripping, an in-phase monitor feature shall be provided in the control
panel. The control panel and ATS shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.5.3 Installation
The automatic transfer switch shall be installed in distribution board or
indicated on the Drawings.

1.5.4.1 Operation Sequences
(1) Approximate 1-6 seconds (preset at 3 seconds) after the failure of any
phase of the normal power supply, the engine shall be started by the
engine start-stop relay.
(2) Approximate 0-10 seconds (preset at 5 seconds) after the engine starts
and the output frequency is within the range of the frequency relay, the
automatic transfer switch shall operate and transfer the load to the
alternator.
(3) After the normal supply is restored, approx. 3 minutes, the transfer switch
shall transfer the load back to the normal supply. The engine shall
continue running at no-load for about 5-10 minutes to cool off and then
stop. The control circuit shall automatically reset and shall be ready for
operation again.
END OF SECTION

1.6 PANELBOARD, LOAD CENTER, LOAD BREAK SWITCH/

SWITCH DISCONNECTOR/ SAFETY SWITCH AND ENCLOSED
CIRCUIT BREAKER
1.6.1 General
(1) Panelboard, Load Center, load break switch/switch disconnector/safety
switch and enclosed circuit breaker shall conform to IEC standards, local
utilities specifications and as specified on the Drawings.
(2) Panelboard, Load Center, load break switch/switch disconnector/safety
switch and enclosed circuit breaker shall be furnished and installed as
shown on the Drawings.
1.6.1.2 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues and certificates
(except enclosed circuit breaker) of the Panelboard, Load Center, load
break switch/switch disconnector/safety switch and enclosed circuit breaker
for approval prior to purchase.
location plans of the equipment for approval prior to installation.
1.6.1.4 Warranty
shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years after
handover.

1.6.2 Materials
1.6.2.1 The panelboard, Load Center, load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety
switch and enclosed circuit breaker shall be of the 3-phase, 4-wire
230/400V.or 1-phase, 2-wire 230V, 50 Hz system
(1) Panelboards and Load Center shall be dead-front safety type compliant
with IEC61439-1&2 or IEC61439-3 equipped with main moulded case
circuit breakers or main lug.
(2) All panelboard and Load Center shall be mounted 1800 mm. from
finished floor to top of panel and in accordance with local utility
regulations.
1.6.2.2 The circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-
indicating, and have a common trip on all multi pole breakers with internal tie
mechanism.
(1) Moulded-case circuit breakers of frame, trip rating and interrupting
capacity (including blank spaces for future addition) as shown in the panel
schedule shall conform to IEC 60947-2.
(2) Miniature circuit breakers shall conform to IEC 60898 or as scheduled on
the Drawings.
1.6.2.3 Busbar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be in the “phase-
sequence” type.
1.6.2.4 All load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch shall have switch
blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. The
switches shall be mounted 1800 mm. from finished floor to top of panel
unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
1.6.2.5 All load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch shall be compliant
with UL98 or IEC 60947-3 standard, 1 phase 2 pole 240VAC for general
purpose type and 3 phase 3 or 4 poles, 600VAC for heavy duty type.
1.6.2.6 All fuses for fused safety switches shall be of the HRC type of voltage rating
up to 600 V and current rating shall be as specified on the Drawings.
1.6.2.7 The load break switches/ switch disconnectors/ safety switches shall be NEMA
Type 1 or IP ≥10 for indoor use and general purpose enclosures with
knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. For outdoors use or in wet
areas shall have NEMA Type 3R or IP ≥14 enclosures.
1.6.2.8 Enclosed circuit breakers shall be installed in the steel boxes complete with
extension rotary handles and shall be of the types and rating indicated.

1.6.2.9 Enclosed circuit breakers shall be NEMA Type 1 or IP ≥10 general purpose
enclosures with knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. Enclosed
circuit breakers located outdoors or in wet areas shall have NEMA Type 3R or
IP ≥14 enclosures.
1.6.3 Installation
1.6.3.1 The main panelboards and sub-panelboards shall surface mounted type,
fitted with hinged front door and shall enclose all equipment, isolators,
contactors, E.L.C.B's, etc all suitably shrouded for safe working conditions.
1.6.3.2 On the inside of the door of each cabinet, a typewritten directory shall be
provided which will indicate the location of the equipment or outlets supplied
by each circuit. The directory shall be mounted in a metal frame with a non
breakable transparent cover. The panel board designation shall be typed on
the directory card and the panel designation stenciled in 40 mm. high letters
on the inside of the door.
1.6.3.3 The Contractor shall supply, adapt, and install steel gutters at the top and/or
the bottom the panelboards to permit where necessary the incoming or
outgoing of the cables, conduits, and wires.
1.6.3.4 The frame shall be closed with flat steel plate screwed on the frame.

1.6.4.1 Certified Test Reports
(1) Verify that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(2) Verify that the equipment has been fully tested.
1.6.4.2 Field Test
The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of system
which is complied with the manufacturing standards and requirements.
END OF SECTION

1.7 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONTROL CABLE

1.7.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the low voltage cables and
accessories as described or indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein.
(2) This Specification of low voltage cables shall be provided for wiring in
elevated structures, terminal station section and the other sections.
(1) The power cable shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(a) IEC 60228 : Conductors of insulated cables
(b) IEC 60502-1 : Power cables with extruded insulation and their
accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30kV
– Part 1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV and 3 kV.
(c) IEC 60332 : Tests on electrical cables under fire conditions
(d) IEC 61034-2 : Measurement of smoke density of cables burning
under defined conditions Part 2: Test procedures
and requirements
(e) IEC 60754 : Tests on gases evolved during combustion of
electric cables
(f) TIS 11-2553 : Standard for PVC insulated copper cables
(g) BS 6387 : Specification for performance requirements for
cables required to maintain circuit integrity under
fire conditions.
1.7.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, cable
installation drawings, cable routes, cable connection and other
necessaries accessories of the low voltage cables for approval before
purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall submit routine test reports and type test reports as
necessary for each type of cable in accordance with the standards as
mentioned above.
The manufacturer shall specialize and have experience about manufacturing
the cables in Thailand at least (5) years.

1.7.1.5 Warranty
(1) All cables and associated accessories including installation shall be
guaranteed by the Contractor at least two (2) years after handover.
1.7.2 Materials
1.7.2.1 Description
(1) Power cables shall be single or multicores conductors depending as
indicated on the Drawings, rated for 750V and 1000V, and shall be used
for a 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz, solidly grounded system.
(2) The cables shall be suitable for running in conduit, and laid in wireway or
cable tray as specified in the Drawings.
(3) The conductors shall be continuous for the full length of the reels.
1.7.2.2 Component
(1) PVC insulated single core cable (IEC 01)
(a) The cables shall be 450/750V copper conductor polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) insulated single core which have temperature rating of not less
than 70°C. The cables shall be manufactured in accordance with TIS
11 Part 3-2553.
(b) The conductor shall be solid or non-compacted concentric stranded
uncoated annealed copper conductor in accordance with TIS 2427-
2552, Class 1 or Class 2. The direction of lay shall be reversed in
successive layers and left-hand (S) lay in the outermost layer.
(c) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound complying
with the requirements of TIS 11 Part 3-2553.
(d) The technical information of cable shall be labeled with suitable
means throughout the length of cable.
 Rated voltage : 450/750 V.

 Insulation material : PVC
 Max. operating temperature : 70°C
 Designated Type : 60227 IEC 01
 Number of cores : Single Core(1)
 Size of conductor : According to TIS 11 Part3-2553
with TIS logo and standard
number

(e) The test and properties of cables shall be carried out in accordance
with TIS 11 Part 3-2553 and TIS 2427-2552.
(f) All cables sizing 6 sq.mm. or larger shall be stranded.
(g) The size of control cables shall not be smaller than 2.5 sq.mm.
(h) Cable wiring to the socket outlets shall not be smaller than 4 sq.mm
or as specified on the Drawings.
(2) PVC insulated and PVC double sheathed power cable (NYY)
(a) The cable shall be copper conductor, 450/750V, 70°C PVC insulated,
PVC double sheathed power cable. The cable shall be in accordance
with TIS 11 Part 101-2553
(b) The conductor shall be solid or non-compacted concentric stranded
uncoated annealed copper conductor in accordance with TIS 2427-
2552, Class 1 or Class 2. The direction of lay shall be left-hand (S) lay
in the outer most layer.
(c) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound complying
with the requirements of TIS 11 Part 101-2553.
(d) The individual insulated conductor for multi-core cables shall be
bundled together with suitable length of lay PVC rod or
polypropylene filament give the completed cable of a circular cross
section. The direction of lay shall be left-hand (S) lays.
(e) The cable cores shall be identified by color codes of insulation as
follows:
 Single core : Black

 2 cores : Light Blue, Brown
 3 cores : Brown, Black, Gray
 4 cores : Light Blue, Brown, Black, Gray
(f) The inner sheath shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound applied
over the cable core.
(g) The outer sheath shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound
complying with the requirements of TIS 11 Part 101-2553. The
average thickness shall be not less than the value given in TIS 11 Part
101-2553. The color of the outer sheath shall be black.
(h) The technical information of cable shall be labeled with suitable
means throughout the length of cable.
 Rated voltage : 450/750 V.

 Insulation material :
PVC
 Max. operating temperature :
70°C
 Designated type :
NYY
 Number of cores :
Single Core(1) or Multi-Cores(2-4)
 Size of conductor :
According to TIS 11 Part 101-2553
with TIS logo and standard
number
(i) The test and properties of cable shall be carried out in accordance
with TIS 11 Part 101-2553 and TIS 2427-2552.
(3) XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed cable
(a) Conductors shall be of soft or anneal uncoated stranded copper wire
Class 2 in accordance with IEC 60228 and shall have a concentric lay.
(b) The insulation shall be of cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated
and black Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) sheathed, which shall have rating
of 0.6/1 kV and temperature rating of 90°C complying with IEC 60502
standard.
(c) Fillers shall be used in the interstice of the multi-core conductor
cable where necessary to give the complete cable a substantially
circular cross section. Fillers shall be of polypropylene, non-
hygroscopic materials. The laid-up core shall be helically wrapped
with non-hygroscopic Mylar or Polyester tape.
(d) Maximum conductor operating temperature shall be 90°C for continuous
duty and 250°C under short circuit condition.
(4) Low Smoke Halogen Free (LSOH)
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all LSOH cables as required
and/or as shown in the Drawings.
(b) The LSOH cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with IEC or BS standards or approved equal.
(c) The conductor shall be annealed copper and shall be stranded.
(d) Electrical insulation shall be made of cross-linked material or
equivalent.
(e) The cables, which are installed on cable trays, and in wireways, shall
have outer sheath for protection against mechanical damages.
Otherwise, the cable shall be installed in conduits.
(f) The cable shall prevent flame propagation under fire conditions.

(g) Cables carrying digital or addressable data, shall have special

characteristics as follows:
 Aluminum screen
 Circuit protection conductor made of tinned annealed copper in
contact with the aluminum screen
(h) The cable shall comply with the following standards:

 Smoke emission : IEC 61034
: BS 7622-2 or BS EN 50268
 Halogen Free and Acid gas emission
: IEC 60754-1, and IEC 60754-2
: BS 6425, BS EN 50267-2-1 and BS EN
50267-2-2
 Flame retardant : IEC 60332-1
: BS 4066-1 or BS EN 50265-2-1
 Flame propagation : IEC 60332-3
: BS 4066-3 or BS EN 50266
(5) Fire Resistant Cable (FRC)
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all fire resistant cable as
(b) The fire resistant cable shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC or BS standards.
(c) All conductors 6 sq.mm or larger shall be stranded.
(d) Insulation shall consist of fire resistant tape (mica tape, etc.) covering
the copper conductor, And the outer shall be cross linked material
which have thickness according to IEC 60502. For multi core cable,
spacing between conductors shall be filled with.
(e) Outer sheath shall be Polyolefine or other materials that produce
low smoke when it is burning off and have zero halogen
characteristics according to IEC 60502.
(f) Rated voltage of power cables and control cables shall be 0.6/1 KV.
and 300/500 V respectively.
(g) Maximum conductor operating temperature shall be 90°C for
continuous duty and 250°C under short circuit condition.
(h) Cable shall not generate corrosive gases when it is burnt.
(i) The cable shall comply with the following standards:

 Smoke emission : IEC 61034

: BS 7622-2 or BS EN 50268
 Halogen Free and Acid gas emission
: IEC 60754-1, and IEC 60754-2
: BS 6425, BS EN 50267-2-1 and BS EN
50267-2-2
 Flame retardant : IEC 60332-1
: BS 4066-1 or BS EN 50265-2-1
 Flame propagation : IEC 60332-3
: BS 4066-3 or BS EN 50266
 Fire resistant cable : BS 6387 Category C, W, Z.
(6) Control Cable (CVV and CVVs)

(a) All control cables shall be suitable for installation in wet and dry
locations. The conductor shall be of soft or annealed stranded
uncoated copper wire.
(b) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) or Polyethylene (PE)
suitable for use on a copper conductor with a maximum operating
temperature of not less than 70 °C.
(c) Fillers shall be used in the interstice of the multi-conductor cable
where necessary to give the complete cable a substantially circular
cross section. Fillers shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) rod or
Polyethylene (PE) or polypropylene (PP) materials.
(d) The cable shall be helically wrapped over the filler with non-
hygroscopic Mylar or Polyester tape.
(e) The shielding, for CVVs cables, shall be annealed copper tape or
suitable tape and shall be helically applied with a minimum 10% lap.
The annealed copper tape or suitable tape shall be at least 0.1 mm.
thickness and substantially free from burrs.
(f) The outer sheath shall be of black Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) jacket
over the wrapping and shall comply in all respects with IEC 60502-1.
1.7.3 Installation
1.7.3.1 In general, the power cables shall be run in conduits, in cable tray and shall
be run concealed in ceiling, floor, and wall or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.7.3.2 No cable shall be pulled into the conduit system until it is completely
finished.

1.7.3.3 Lubricant shall be used to facilitate cable pulling. Lubricants shall be

approved for using with the insulation specified.
1.7.3.4 Splicing of wires and cables shall be allowed only in the luminaires, socket
outlets and junction boxes with an approved method of insulation. No splice
shall be made in conductors for instrument circuits or control circuits.
1.7.3.5 Splicing of large wires and cables shall be by compression type, solderless
wire connectors indented by special hydraulic tool. The splice shall be
insulated with plastic insulation tape, such as Scotch Brand No.35. Thickness
of the tape shall not be less than three layers or at least the same thickness
as the wire insulation.
1.7.3.6 Compression type, solderless lugs indented by proper tool shall be used at
the end of all wires and cables and shall be connected to the screw type
terminals of the equipment and to the bus bars.
1.7.3.7 The cut end of cables shall be treated to prevent seepage of water into the
cable. When unreeling cable from the cable drums, special care shall be taken
to prevent damage to the cables. When removing the cover of the drum, care
shall be taken to prevent damage to the cable sheath.
1.7.3.8 The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials for installation of the
cables, such as grounding lead wires, compression type terminals, metal
fitting, bolts and nuts including cable identification and felt packing to be
inserted between cable and cleats.
1.7.3.9 The unoccupied space in cable knockouts and conduits after cable insertion
shall be filled, with duct seal to prevent insects and small animals from
entering the equipment housing.
1.7.3.10 Where cables are buried in the ground the minimum depth of burial shall be
at least 600 mm. Cables shall be laid on 150 mm. compact sand and covered
by a 750 mm. layer of clean sand. Cables shall be covered with tiles and or
marking tape and the trenches backfilled to grade level.
1.7.3.11 Cables under roads shall be enclosed in reinforced concrete duct banks
supplied and installed by the electrical work.
1.7.3.12 All cables shall be identified by means of cable tags fitted to each termination
point and at 30 meter intervals along cable route.

1.7.3.13 Cable route markers shall be installed above ground along underground cable
routes. These shall be located at 30 meter intervals, at changes of direction
and at entries to buildings.
1.7.3.14 The Contractor shall be responsible for the supervision of the cable trench
excavation, sanding and backfilling, supply and installation to warning tape,
cable tiles and cable marker posts as detailed on the Drawings and in these
Specifications.
1.7.3.15 Cables shall be laid in one continuous length.
1.7.3.16 Conductors with compression type terminals and insulation cover shall be
arranged in a neat manner on terminal box or equivalent terminals. The
Contractor shall install plastic cable tie-wraps as required to neatly group
cables and to keep the weight of the cable from damaging terminations.
1.7.3.17 The conductors in vertical raceways shall be supported if the vertical rise
exceeds the values in table below:
Spacing for Conductor Supports in Vertical Raceway

Size of Cable (sq.mm) Maximum Spacing (m) Remark
50 or smaller 30 If the vertical run are less than
70 thru 120 24 25% of max. spacing in table,
150 thru 185 18 cable supports will not be
240 15 required.
300 12
over 300 10
1.7.3.18 Color coding for the low voltage cables shall comply with IEC and EIT
Standards.
1.7.4.1 Megger testing shall be conducted for all power cables, 600 volts rated with
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground prior to connecting to equipment and
conduct phase-to-ground testing after the equipment was connected including
all connections were tapped.
1.7.4.2 Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 Vdc megger on the
400 volts system. Insulation resistance shall be complied with IEC 60502-1.
END OF SECTION

1.8 CONDUIT, CABLE TRAY, AND WIREWAY

1.8.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the conduits, cable trays, and
wireways as described or indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(1) The conduits, cable trays and wireways shall comply with the following
codes and standards:
 ANSI C80.1 : Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)
 ANSI C80.3 : Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
 UL 1242 : Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
 ANSI/NEMA FB1 : Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit
Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable
 ANSI/NEMA OS1 : Sheet-Steel Outlet, Boxes, Device Boxes,
Covers, and Box Supports
 ASTM A123/A123M-13 : Standard for Hot-dipped galvanized for
Steel Cable Tray
1.8.1.3 Submittals
conduits, cable trays and wireways with sample material for approval
before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of
the conduits, cable trays and wireways for approval before installation.
1.8.1.5 Warranty
(1) All parts of the equipment and its accessories including installation shall
be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years after handover.

1.8.2 Materials
1.8.2.1 Component
(1) Conduit, Boxes and accessories
(a) The steel conduits shall be manufactured from steel tubing,
produced in electrical resistance welding process with the weld bead
on both inside and outside removed and hot-dipped galvanization or
Electro galvanized in accordance with the latest version of the above
mentioned standards.
(b) Size of conduit, fitting and accessories as indicated, specified or as
requested by the local utilities and reference standard.
(c) Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) and Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) shall
be hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel or Electro galvanized and
installed for the following services and locations: service entrance,
underground or in concrete subjected to mechanical damages.
(d) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized steel and used in all
locations unless otherwise specified for rigid or flexible conduits as
specified on the Drawings.
(e) Flexible metal conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel, and
those located in wet locations shall be of the Liquid-tight type.
(f) The conduit shall be in standard length of approximately 3 meters
including coupling, one coupling to be furnished with each length.
Each length shall be reamed and threaded on each end.
(g) All conduit fitting shall conform to the aforementioned standards and
shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or Electro galvanized with the
thickness of zinc not less than 20 microns.
(h) The finished conduit and fittings shall have smooth surface, free of
lumps of excess zinc, inside bead or other injurious defects or such
defects detrimental to smooth wire pulling.
(i) The outside surface and threads on conduit shall have protective
coating against corrosion. The threads on the fittings shall have paint,
zinc or other protective coating against corrosion.
(j) Flexible conduit and fittings or life safe equipments shall be
galvanized water-tight pattern, flame retardant; LSOH over-sheathed
and separated earth wire enclosed within the conduit.
(k) The standard manufactured elbows shall be used for all sizes of
conduits larger than 1 inch, and the field bends to be handled with
great care not to damage the conduits, will be permitted to be used

for conduit of 1 inch and smaller.

(l) The conduits shall have to be specified in SI units as on the Drawings.
And the table below shall be the conversion of diameters of conduits
from inch to millimeter.
Conduit Diameter
½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 4
(inch.)
Conduit Diameter
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
(mm.)
(2) Cable Tray

(a) Cable trays installed indoors shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to protect against corrosion during storage, installation and
to have long service life. The perforated cable tray with cover shall
be provided with the dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. The
fabricated shall be made of a minimum 2.0mm thick steel sheet and
shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 500°C for 1 hour
and shall not support combustion under the same temperature.
(b) The supports for horizontal cable tray shall be provided such that
they shall be capable to adjust vertically. Where tray and ladder
systems are supported by drop rods additional restraints shall be
included to provide adequate lateral support. Restraints shall be
installed at all bends and intersections and at intervals not exceeding
15 meters on straight runs. Support rods shall be at least 6mm
diameter. Trapeze or other hangers shall be clamped on the drop
rods between two nuts.
(c) Support brackets shall be of the same type.
(d) Site cuts or bends to hot dipped galvanized components shall be
properly repaired in the field using cold galvanizer.
(e) Connecting joint between cable tray and equipment shall be a
flexible joint.
(f) Each section of the cable tray shall be electrically bonded, with a
minimum 6 sq.mm. cross section area earth-bonding strap or wire, to
the next section to form an electrically continuous system and
bonded to the main grounding system with green/yellow PVC
insulated copper, single core cable. All edges, fittings, or any parts of
the cable trays shall be finished free from burrs, sharp edges, or
projections damaging to the insulation or jacket of the cables.

(g) The number of cables installed on the cable tray shall be provided in
compliance with the requirements of the MEA, and EIT standard. And
40% spare space capacity shall be provided for cable laying inside
the cable tray.
(h) Cable tray or ladder shall not be installed across building or
structural expansion joints. On horizontal runs the tray or ladder shall
be installed with a 20mm gap at the expansion joint. Supports shall
be installed within 150mm on either side of the joint.
(3) Wireway
(a) Wireway shall be made of hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to
protect against corrosion storage, installation and to have long service
life and shall be provided to form the continuous steel sheet troughs
with removable covers attached to the wireway by screws for housing
the cables. The minimum thickness for wireways up to 450mm wide
shall be 1.2mm, and widths above this the 2.0mm sheet thickness
shall be used.
(b) Installed wireways so that all signals cables are in wireways separate
from wireway having power cables in it. Install metal barriers in
pullboxes to keep power and signal cables separate and divided.
(c) Separated wireway for normal and emergency circuits shall be
provided as indicated on the Drawings.
(d) All length of the wireways shall be supported by the metal hangers
at every interval not more than 1.50m for horizontal and vertical
installation. The supports for horizontal run shall be provided such
that shall be able to adjust vertically.
(e) Each section of the wireways shall be electrically bonded, with a
minimum 6 sq.mm. cross section area earth-bonding strap or wire, to
the next section to form an electrically continuous system and
bonded to the main grounding system with green/yellow PVC
insulated copper, single core cable. All edges, fittings, or any parts of
the wireways shall be finished free from burrs, sharp edges, or
projections damaging to the insulation or jacket of the cables.
(f) The number of cables installed on the wireways shall be provided in
compliance with the requirements of the MEA, and EIT standard. And
40% spare space capacity shall be provided for cable laying inside
the waireways.

(4) Boxes and Auxiliaries

(a) Boxes shall be provided in the conduit system for cable connections,
cable pulling, installations of switches, and installation of outlets.
(b) All boxes provided in the conduit work shall be made of metal. A
box provided for cable connections and concealed in or exposed on
ceiling shall be a standard galvanized steel square or circular box or a
metal box, for hot-dipped galvanized or Electro galvanized made of
steel sheet with not less than 1.2 mm thickness, with one primer
anti-rust coated and two coating finishes.
(c) All boxes and conduit accessories shall be fully weatherproof when
used in outdoor location and others as agreed during construction.
(d) Conduit outlet boxes, for socket outlets, lighting switches, etc., shall
be of hot-dip galvanized steel complete with adjustable lug, ample
knockouts, and brass earth terminals fitted in the base.
(e) Each box shall be covered with a cover plate matching with the box
construction and suitable for application condition.
1.8.3 Installation
1.8.3.1 All conduits shall be as specified herein with a minimum size of 15 mm.
unless otherwise noted.
1.8.3.2 Where the conduits enter the cabinets and equipment, conduit bushings and
double locknuts shall be used.
1.8.3.3 The end of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture
while the buildings are under construction.
1.8.3.4 The bending radius of the conduit shall not be less than six times the outer
diameter of the conduits. The total bending angles of conduits shall not
exceed 360 degrees in any one run.
1.8.3.5 The conduits used shall not have any internal and external defects. Each end
of the conduit shall be made smooth with the conduit reamer to prevent
damage to the wire.
1.8.3.6 A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall be used for connecting all
motors, vibrating equipment, recess lighting fixtures and junction boxes and as
otherwise specified.
1.8.3.7 The wiring system shall consist of PVC insulated cables drawn into conduit.
Wiring shall be loop-in style without joints.

1.8.3.8 The wiring capacity of conduits shall be as Table of the current edition of the
local Regulations and as specified on the Drawings.
1.8.3.9 Conduit shall be run neatly on the surface or buried within the carcass of the
buildings as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications. Conduit
shall be run at least 0.15 m. clear of plumbing and mechanical services.
1.8.3.10 Conduit shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 2.5 m. on
horizontal runs and 1.5 m. on vertical runs.
1.8.3.11 The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall be fixed to the
structure or the building independently of the conduit.
1.8.3.12 The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall suit the length of
internal thread in the end of the fitting or accessory. Excess length of thread
will not be permitted.
1.8.3.13 Sleeves in floor slabs or beams for conduits shall be made of galvanized sheet
steel, securely fastened in position. Floor sleeves shall be with their top and
set at least 5 cm. above finished floor. Sleeves in beams shall be finished
flush with the surface of the beam. Sleeves in telephone and electric rooms
shall be filled with approved materials to provide a fire barrier. Both used and
unused sleeves shall be filled.
1.8.3.14 Provide all openings on floors and walls necessary for cable trays and wireway
unless indicated as being provided by others.
1.8.3.15 A strip of color coding on conduit, cable tray, wireway and termination box
shall be painted at interval 1 m. along total length of raceways for indication
as follows:
(1) Normal Power : Orange
(2) Essential Power : Yellow
(3) Control system : Blue
(4) Network system : Grey
END OF SECTION

1.9 LUMINAIRES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

1.9.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install luminaires and associated
equipment as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(2) The luminaire schedule is shown on the Drawings for types and
mountings. luminaires shall be manufactured locally by approved factory
or imported from abroad as specified on the Drawings.
(3) Any special luminaire or lamps which are marked "Employer Furnished" or
"Provided by Other" on the Drawings shall be provided by the Employer’s
Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for having them
installed in strict accordance with the instructions given by the
Employer’s Representative. Upon receiving those luminaires it is the
Contractor's responsibility to report in writing to the Employer’s
Representative of any damaged or missing parts. Thereafter those
materials shall be considered in the custody of the Contractor. He shall
be responsible for any loss or damage that might occur during the course
of storage and installation.
(1) The luminaires and associated equipment shall comply with the following
codes and standards:
(a) IEC 60598-1 : Part 1: General requirements and tests
(b) IEC 60598-2 : Part 2: Particular requirements
(c) IEC 60061-2 : Lamp caps and holders together with gauges
for the control of interchangeability and safety
– Part 2: Lamp holders
(d) TIS 673-2553-1&2 : Standard for ballasts for high pressure
mercury vapor lamps
Part 1 - Safety Requirements
Part 2 – Performance Requirements
(e) IES LM-79 : Approved Method for the Electrical and
Photometric Testing of Solid-State Lighting
Devices
(f ) IES LM-80 : Approved Method for Measuring Lumen
Depreciation of LED Light Sources

(g) IES TM-21 : Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of

LED Light Sources
(h) IEC 62612 : Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting
services with supply voltages>50 V-
Performance requirements.
(i) TIS902 2(1)-2557 : Fixed General Purpose Luminaires
(j) TIS902 2 (2) -2557 : Recessed Luminaires
(k) TIS344-2549 : Standard for Lamp holders for tubular
fluorescent lamps and starter holders
1.9.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit photometric data, a manufacturer's name,
material catalogues and type of lamp(s) to be installed, together with the
Shop Drawings for approval before purchase.
(2) If requested by the Employer’s Representative, a sample of proposed
luminaires shall be submitted. Samples of all locally made luminaires
shall be submitted for approval before purchase.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the installation details for approval before
installation.
1.9.1.5 Warranty
(1) All parts of the luminaires and associate equipment including installation
shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years.
1.9.2 Materials
1.9.2.1 Description
The luminaires as specified herein comprise the luminaires, lamp holders,
lamps, driver, emergency/exit lights and street lighting luminaires.
1.9.2.2 Component
(1) Luminaires
(a) The luminaires shall be wired to a single point with approved

luminaire wire for proper connection.

(b) The luminaire schedule is shown on the Drawings for types, and types
of mounting.
(c) All hanger, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all
kinds for safety erecting this equipment in place, shall be furnished
and erected in place under this section.
(d) The luminaires shall be supported from the building structure and
the hangers shall be adjustable in length.
(e) The LED luminaires shall be rated at 24 volts for colour changeable
and 230 volts for static colour, 50 Hz. And operated at constant and
carefully regulated current levels.
(f) For wet and damp use, LED-based luminaire itself shall be sealed,
and test for appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished
by using an additional housing or enclosure. All hardwired
connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and
provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed
or shorted during the installation process.
(g) All luminaires, when installed shall be set true and free of light leaks,
warps, dents, and other irregularities. The finish of exposed metal
parts of luminaires and finish trims of all recessed luminaires shall be
as directed by the Employer’s Representative or as indicated on the
Drawings.
(h) The flush mounting ceiling trims for recessed incandescent luminaires
shall have mitered corners, continuously welded and smoothed
before shop finish is applied. No lapping of trim metal will be
permitted.
(i) The luminaire shall be made from high grade cold rolled steel sheet,
0.8mm minimum thickness, and be provided with a lamp
compatible with the control gear used. Any plastic used in the
luminaires shall be UV and light stable and shall be suitable for their
application. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated
and painted using acrylic polyester or epoxy powders to prevent
corrosion.
(j) Lamp sockets shall conform to IEC or TIS standard or equivalent.
(k) The finish of exposed metal parts and stem lengths shall be as later
directed by the Employer’s Representative, unless otherwise noted in
the luminaire Schedule; trims for luminaires exposed to the weather

shall have suitable gaskets.

(l) All luminaires shall use energy saving LED lamp and the type of
luminaires, in generally, shall be used to suit for different
applications. Unless otherwise stated the completed set of
transformer shall be supplied with the LV tungsten halogen lamps
luminaires.
(m) Power for normal lighting shall be obtained from non-essential
supply lighting panel while the power supply for emergency lighting
shall be obtained from very-essential lighting panel which are fed
directly by the UPS system.
(n) In the luminaires will use 105oC heat resistant cable for PVC cables
with similar heat resistant sleeve and the connection size shall not
be smaller than 1.0 sq.mm. with same size ground conductor.
(o) Aluminum reflectors and louvers shall be made from high purity
aluminum (99.85% minimum) with low or very low iridescence and a
total reflection shall be of 87%. The anodic film shall have a
minimum thickness of 0.8 microns.
(p) Controller shall support VDC input. Controller housing shall be
enclosed ABS, fire retardant UL94-V0. Operating temperature shall be
range between -20°C - 80°C with 0-90% relative humidity, non-
condensing.
(q) The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width
modulation (PWM) and noise shaping pulse width modulation (PWM)
techniques. The LED system shall use integral and differential
nonlinear control. Constant data transmission rated shall be
employed, resulting in the output being independent of distance of
cable between power supply and light source within the specified
length. LED system shall have a selectable means of external control
via a data network.
(2) Lamps
(a) Lamps shall be at the number and types shown as specified. All
lamps installed shall be new, and shall operate on completion of the
job.
(b) Tubular LED lamps shall be high efficacy type > 120 lumen/watt with
cool white color unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
(c) Incandescent lamps shall be clear standard with wattage as indicated
in the Drawings and rated voltage not less than 230 volts.

(d) Luminous flux not less than 900 lumen for LED ≤ 10W lamp, and
1,900 lumen for LED ≤ 20W lamp or as indicated on the Drawings.
(e) LED lamps for general lighting illumination shall comply with the
following standards: IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3, and IEC 61547 or
TIS 1955-2551.
(f) The LED lamp shall comply with IEC 62471 “Photobiological Safety of
lamps and lamp systems” .The test results shall be classified under
the level of risk (Risk Group) 0 or 1.
(g) The color rendering index (CRI) shall not be less than 80 for indoor
type luminaire and 70 for outdoor type luminaires or as specified on
the Drawing.
The color temperature for LED shall be as follows:
 Daylight: 5,500 - 6,500 Kelvin
 Cool White: 4,000 Kelvin (within 3 Step McAdam)
 Warm White: 3,000 Kelvin (within 3 Step McAdam) or as specified
on the type of luminaires.
(3) Ballasts
(a) Ballast for high intensity discharge (HID) lamp
 Ballasts for high intensity discharge (HID) lamps shall be high
power factor or low power factor with dry type capacitor to
improve power factor up to 0.90. The ballasts shall be mounted in
the fixtures or in separate weatherproof steel box.
(b) Driver (Power/data supply) for LED
 Driver shall support universal AC power input option ranging from
100 VAC-240VAC, constant power output of 24 VDC, 230 VDC and
operate from 50Hz. Input with sustained variations of +/- 10%
with no damage to driver.
 Driver outputs shall have current limiting protection. And driver
input current shall have total harmonic distortion (THD) less than
15%.
 Driver shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature
from -10°C to - 60°C.
 Driver shall have power factor not less than 0.90 complying to
IEC 61347-2-13 or equivalent.

1.9.3 Installation
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Building Contractor to ensure that
the luminaires furnished are compatible with the ceiling suspension system
being installed.
1.9.4.1 The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination
1.9.4.2 Megger testing shall be conducted to all installed luminaires and control
cables with phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
1.9.4.3 The performance of the luminaires and associate equipment shall be tested
by turning on all luminaires for 24 hours, together with measuring of the
illumination levels which shall not be deviated.
END OF SECTION

1.10 SWITCH AND SOCKET OUTLET

1.10.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the switch and socket outlet as
described or indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(1) The switches and socket outlets shall comply with the following codes
and standards:
(a) IEC 60529/1989 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Code)
(b) IEC 60309 : Plugs, socket outlets and couplers for industrial
purposes - Part 1: General requirements
(c) IEC 60884-1 : Plugs and socket outlets for household and
similar purposes - Part 1: General requirements
(d) IEC 60669-1 : Switches for household and similar fixed-
electrical installations-Part 1: General
requirements
(e) TIS 824-2551 : Switches for household and similar to fixed
electrical installations: For General
requirements
1.10.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the material selections and catalogues of
switch and socket outlet for approval before purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details for approval before
installation.

1.10.1.5 Warranty
(1) All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor at
least two (2) years.
1.10.2 Materials
1.10.2.1 Description
(1) The material and color of cover plates for all switches and socket outlets
shall be selected by the Employer’s Representative to match with the
decorative finishing of architectural work.
1.10.2.2 Component
(1) Switch
(a) Switches shall be of the flush, quiet type, large tumbler switches,
rated 16 amperes at 250 Volts single phase.
(b) The cover plate of the switches shall be stainless steel or Aluminium
or to be chosen by the Employer’s Representative.
(c) Switches located outdoor or in wet locations shall be provided with
the weatherproof cover plates with the minimum degree of
protection, IP54.
(d) The maximum number of switches, installed in the same box shall
not be more than 3 ganges switches.
(e) Switches for ventilation fans shall be identical to lighting switches,
but rated not less than 4 amperes at 250 Volts and complete with
LED indicating lamps.
(f) Only switches connected to the same phase of power supply shall
be allowed to mount on a common switch box. Otherwise, they shall
be physically separated within a switch box. Switches for Normal and
emergency lighting circuit shall be housed in a separate box.
(2) Socket Outlet
(a) All socket outlets shall be flush mounted type,rated 16 amperes at
250 Volts universal type, single phase, 2 poles, 3 wires, with third-
pole grounded.
(b) The cover plate of the socket outlet shall be stainless steel or
Aluminium or to be chosen by the Employer’s Representative.
(c) All socket outlet boxes which are to be embedded in concrete shall
be of cadmium plated steel box and shall be of cast metal box for
surface mounting.

(d) The socket outlets in offices control rooms, and public areas shall be
flush mounted. And the socket outlets in workshop and plant room
shall be surface mounted and enclosed in robust heavy duty steel
boxes.
(e) Weatherproof outlets shall be provided with rubber gasketed cover
lids complying with protection class, IP 54.
(f) Power socket outlets for maintenance purposes shall be rated 32
amperes, 400 Volts, 3 pole+neutral+earth (TP+N+E), with protection
class IP41 for indoor use and IP67 for outdoor use.
(g) All socket outlets shall be protected by earth leakage circuit breakers
rated 30mA., 230 Volts installed in the distribution boards.
1.10.3 Installation
1.10.3.1 The switches shall be mounted on wall or column at 1,350 mm above the
finished floor level or as otherwise noted.
1.10.3.2 The outlets shall be mounted on wall or column at 300 mm above the
finished floor level unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of the system
witnessed by the Employer’s representative.
END OF SECTION

1.11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

1.11.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall provide and install the lighting control system as
indicated on the Drawings and specification herein.
(2) All systems shall be tested to demonstrate that all wiring and equipment
has been properly installed, and the system will function in the required
manner.
(3) Operation and maintenance manuals of the system shall be prepared and
submitted to the Employer’s Representative.
(4) The Contractor shall provide training to the operators and maintenance
staff of the Employer until they are competent to operate the system by
themselves.
1.11.1.3 Submittals
lighting control system and associated accessories with samples for
approval prior to proceed purchasing.
routing plans of the equipment for approval prior to proceed installation.
1.11.1.5 Warranty
shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for at least two (2) years after
handover.
1.11.2 Materials
1.11.2.1 Components
(1) Computer-Based Lighting Control System
(a) The lighting control system (LCS) shall be of distributed intelligence
network type comprising microprocessor-based lighting control all

module connected via a topology-free network that employs CAT5E

cables or higher categories to communicate and supply power to
network devices.
(b) The lighting control system shall have the capability to support up to
100 units per single network, and all units are operated by self-
powered extra-low voltage.
(c) The Contractor shall supply, install, test and make commissioning the
lighting control system in compliance with all requirements in the
Specification.
(d) The Contractor shall propose the latest type or model of equipment and
material to be installed for the Project and submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for approval before purchase order.
(2) Relay output unit
(a) The relay unit can control independent loads, and be equipped with
a voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel.
(b) Each relay unit shall support up to 20A per channel. No derating shall
be required for inductive lighting loads.
(c) Non-volatile memory shall be provided to retain all addresses and
switching information.
(d) Each unit shall have the facility for connecting both ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’
Remote Manual Override push-button switches. It shall be possible to
connect these overrides in parallel to multiple units to allow manual
override of multiple units from one push-button location.
(e) Local ON/OFF toggle buttons shall allow individual channels to be
manually overridden at each unit.
(f) Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be selectable via
software.
(g) The individual relay unit shall be DIN rail mounted within the
enclosure.
(3) Power supply unit
The power supply unit shall have adequate power capacity for all
equipment, which transforms the power supply voltage at 220VAC to
required voltage for the equipment.
(4) Enclosure
The enclosure for the equipment shall be cabinet with flush key lock,
which is fabricated from 2 mm electro-galvanized steel sheet.

(5) Selector switch (if applied) shall be equipped with pilot lamp for position
indicator.
(6) All equipment Except PC workstation and Software shall be produced
from the same manufacturer.
(7) The software program shall be applied a convenience control in building
graphic display.
(8) The system shall be stand alone operation during the shutdown or failure
of the main controller.
(9) The lighting control system shall be able to interface with Building
Management System (BMS) for fully control (interface unit shall be
provided by BMS).
1.11.3 Installation
All final connections, testing, adjustments and calibrations shall be made
under the direct supervision of a factory-trained technician of the system
supplier or as directed by the Employer or Employer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

1.12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTHING SYSTEM

1.12.1 General
(1) Lightning Protection and Earthing system shall conform to the standards
or regulations of EIT and IEC or BS and as specified on the Drawings.
(2) The Contractor shall supply, install, connect, test and commission a
complete system of Earthing and Lightning Protection in accordance with
requirements specified in the specifications and the Drawings.
(3) The Lightning Protection and Earthing System shall comply with the
following codes and standards.
(a) EIT Standard : Protection against Lightning
(b) IEC 62305 : Protection against Lightning
(c) IEC 62561 : Lightning Protection System Component
(d) UL 467 : Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(1) Earthing System
(a) All non-current carrying metallic parts of the system shall be earthed.
(b) The transformer star points shall terminate at a copper earthing
conductor located in the electrical room. The transformer earthing
cables shall be connected from this bar to the transformer earth pit.
And also the cables shall also be connected from this bar to the
main switchboard.
(c) All earthing conductors within power cables shall be terminated at
the switchboard earth bar by means of cable lugs. The gland plates
at which all armoured cables have been terminated shall be securely
bonded to the earth bar.
(d) The main earthing system shall consist of 95 Sq.mm. single core
copper cable installed in conduit embedded in concrete slab or as
(e) Before passing through the zero-phase-sequence current transformer,
the neutral conductor shall be earthed only to the earthing busbar of
the main switchboard.
(f) The earthing conductors shall be single core copper wires of the size
as specified.
(g) All connections shall be made by exothermic welding and they shall
be protected from weather and moisture.

(h) Earthing electrodes shall be copper bond steel, Ø 14.2 mm. (5/8ʺ)x 3
m. long and shall be installed at the location as shown on the
Drawings.
(i) Earthing clamps shall be used for securing the earth wires to the
earthing electrodes. In addition, copper earth wire shall be bonded to
the earthing electrode by exothermic welding.
(j) The earth resistance, measured by the earth testing instrument, shall
be not more than 5 ohms.
(k) Sizes of earthing conductor not specified either in this specification or
on the Drawings shall comply with the Table 1 below:
Table 1.12-1 : Earthing Conductor for AC System

Size of Largest Service-Entrance Size of Earthing Copper
Copper Conductor (Sq.mm.) Conductor (Sq.mm.)
35 or smaller 10
Over 35 thru 50 16
Over 50 thru 95 25
Over 95 thru 185 35
Over 185 thru 300 50
Over 300 thru 500 70
Over 500 95

Table 1.12-2 : Minimum Size of Earthing Conductors for Electrical

Equipment
Rating or Setting of Automatic Copper Conductor
Overcurrent Device in Circuit Ahead Size (Sq.mm.)
of Equipment, Not Exeeding (Amperes)
20 2.5
40 4
70 6
100 10
200 16
400 25
500 35
800 50
1,000 70
1,250 95
2,000 120
2,500 185
4,000 240
6,000 400
(l) All components shall be certified by UL or IEC standard

(2) Lightning Protection System
(a) Lightning protection shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.
The lightning down conductor shall be terminated at its own earth
electrodes. The down conductor, from the roof network to the earth
electrodes shall be installed in a straight line as much as possible.
(b) The protection system shall consist of copper tapes or aluminium
tapes network on roof top, down conductor, earthing grid at ground
level and all necessary accessories.
(c) The system shall conform to the regulations and requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
(d) Down conductors and other conductors shall be bare stranded copper
wires or copper tapes with the minimum cross-sectional area of
50sq.mm. or as specified on the Drawings.

(e) The earth electrode shall be copper bond steel having the sizes
unless otherwise additional number of earth electrodes shall be
installed to attain the required value as described above.
(f) The earth resistance shall not be greater than 5 ohms.
1.12.1.3 Submittals
earthing and lightning protection materials including associated
accessories and samples for approval prior to purchase.
routing plans of the system for approval prior to proceeding installation.
(3) All parts of the equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the
Contractor for at least two (2) years after handover.

1.12.2.1 Certified Test Reports
Verify that the installation is in accordance with codes or standards as
mentioned above.
1.12.2.2 Field Test
The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of the system
complied with the recognized standards and requirements.
END OF SECTION

1.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1.13.1 General
1.13.1.1 General Requirement
(1) The fire alarm system shall be fully addressable, pre-signal, non-coded
system.
(2) The Contractor shall supply and install the following fire alarm system as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.13.1.2 Standard and Reference
Fire alarm system shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) IEC 60332 : Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
(2) IEC 61034-2 : Measurement of smoke density of cables
burning under defined conditions – Part 2:
Test Procedure and Requirements
(3) IEC 60754 : Tests on gases evolved during combustion of
electric cables
(4) EIT Standard (2001-56) : Standard for Electrical Installation
(5) EIT Standard (2002-49) : Standard for Fire Alarm System
(6) UL List : Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.
1.13.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the catalogues and technical data of all
equipment and materials for approval before purchase.
(1) The fire alarm equipment manufacturer shall specialize in the specified
equipment and having experience about the equipment which have been
installed in Thailand at least five (5) years.
(2) The fire alarm equipment manufacturer shall be ISO 9000 certified.
1.13.1.5 Warranty
(1) All parts of the fire alarm system shall be guaranteed by the Contractor at
least 2 year after handover.

1.13.2 Materials
(1) The system wiring shall be a 4 wire (Class A) data loop including with
wiring for all initiating devices and Class B for alarm notification device
circuits.
(2) The fire alarm system has been designed to control the initial operation
of any manual or automatic alarm initiating devices, to obtain the primary
alarm sound at the control panel. Authorized personnel with special keys
may initiate a general evacuation alarm from any manual station.
Control circuits for time delay in pre-signal (1-5 min) preceding the general
alarm shall be provided and installed in the system.
One set of alarm contacts and alarm signal cable shall be wired to Main
Distribution Boards and all elevator control panels for fire condition
operation.
(3) Wiring and Conduit
Main control wiring loop shall be twisted pair with shield fire resistant
cable (FRC). The cables shall not be less than 1.5 sq.mm. FRC Cable for
initiating devices and 2.5 sq.mm.FRC Cable for alarm indicating devices
and run in conduits. FRC cables shall conform to BS6387 CWZ, IEC 61034,
IEC 60754-1, IEC 60332-3, IEC 60332-1 or equivalent. The number of wires
and size of conduits shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation and as shown on the Drawings. Supply and return lines
for initiating devices shall be in separate conduits or raceways.
1.13.2.2 Component
Fire alarm system shall consist of the following equipment: Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FCP), annunciator, battery charger and battery, initiating devices, alarm
indicating devices, conduit and wiring system.
(1) Fire Alarm Control Panel
The control panel shall be microprocessor-based modular system,
expandable maximum to 10 loops. Each loop shall support alarm zones
as indicated on the Drawings. The panel shall be a dead-front, heavy
gauge steel enclosure and include the following devices:
(a) LED indicators and trouble-sounding devices as follows:
 AC power ON indicator
 Alarm indicator
 Supervisory indicator

 Trouble indicator
 CPU failure indicator
 Test indicator
 Ground fault indicator
(b) Control switch with indicator:
 Reset switch/LED
 Alarm silence switch/LED
 Trouble silence switch/LED
 Drill switch/LED
 Command menu switch
(2) Annunciator
The annunciators and remote annunciators (if specified) shall be of the
graphic board type with graphic representation of the location or zone of
fire upon operation of manual or automatic detectors and complete with
built-in buzzer inside the annunciator.
(3) Battery Charger and Battery
The power supply shall be 220 VAC, 50 Hz. with 24 hours standby
batteries and charger. The standby batteries shall be of the sealed lead
cell or nickel cadmium type. At the end of alarm condition, shall be
capable of operating all alarm notification appliances used for evacuation
or to direct aid to the location of an emergency for 15 minutes.
(4) Initiating Devices
(a) Heat Detectors, addressable type (if applied) shall be of the type with
combined fixed temperature and rate of rise detectors. The fixed
temperature setting shall be 57°C. The rate of rise setting shall be
approximately 9°C per minute.
(b) Heat Detectors, addressable type (if applied) shall be of the type with
fixed temperature detectors. The fixed temperature setting shall be
57°C.
(c) Line Type Heat Detector, provide early detection of fire condition and
overheating in situations where other forms of fire and heat detection
would not be visible. The combination of line type heat detector and
monitor/control unit with addressable module to interface to FCP by
data loop. Thermo cable shall be consists of a 2-core cable, up to
10,000 linear feet per zone and approved for up to 35 feet spacing.

The cores shall be twisted and protected by outer sheath of thermal

cable, chemical resistance and UV protected.
(d) Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric addressable type. Each
Addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being
programmed individually as: most sensitive, more sensitive, normal,
less sensitive or least sensitive. The system shall allow for changing of
detector types for service replacement purposes without the need to
reprogram the system
(e) Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric addressable type and
installed in return air ducting system (capacity 2000 cfm or greater),
completed with remote test switch and indicator light, and
comprised with an auxillary alarm relay for an other interfacing.
(f) Reflective Beam Smoke Detector shall be 4-wire conventional device
with addressable monitor module type. It shall be integral a
transmitter and receiver in a single enclosure completed with remote
test station at ground level. Alarm threshold of 25%, 35% and 50%
obscuration can be selected. Coverage range shall be 15-160 ft or
160-330 ft.
(g) Manual stations addressable type shall be of the semi-flush
mounted, signal pull operation and break glass type with key for
initiating a general evacuation alarm and suitable for pre-signal non-
coded application. The stations shall be of a pleasing modern design,
permitting easy inspection and test operation. The front shall be of
shock-resistant material.
(h) Sprinkler water flow switches which supply and install by other, shall
be wired and connected to the fire alarm system such that the
activation of the sprinkler system shall sound an alarm at the center
console.
(i) Sprinkler supervisory devices which supply and install by other, shall
be wired and connected to fire alarm system such that the
movement of a valve from the normal position (open) shall sound a
supervisory trouble signal at the center console.
(5) Monitor & Control Modules
(a) Monitor Module, the module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B
for water flow switch and supervisory valve circuit. The module shall
provide set to normally open alarm-delayed latching for water flow

switch and normally open active-latching for supervisory and tamper

switch
(b) Control Module, the module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B
notification circuit. The module shall provide polarized audible /
visual selection for 24Vdc at 2amps, audio outputs at 25Vrms, 50
watts or 70 Vrms ,35 watts
(c) Control Relay Module, the module shall provide one (1) form C dry
relay contacts rated at 24Vdc, 2 amps (pilot duty) to control external
appliances or equipment.
(d) Isolation Module, the module shall be capable of isolating and
removing a fault from a Class A data circuit while allowing the
remaining data loop to continue operating
(6) Color Graphic Monitor and Printer
The color graphic command workstation shall display a different color
text for each message type and color graphic diagrams/floor plans. The
graphical command workstation shall simultaneously display the following
system event views; system event display, graphical diagram display,
detailed event message/instructions, and user event log. When processing
fire alarm events the graphic workstation: at least shall be capable of
acknowledge, silence and reset all fire alarm functions, generating status,
maintenance and sensitivity reports for fire alarm components.
The printers shall be 24-pin wide carriage with 80-characters per line and
shall use standard pin-feed paper. The printers shall provide hard-copy
printout of all changes in status of the system and shall time-stamp such
printouts with the current time-of-day and date.
1.13.2.3 Control Logic
(1) Should a fire be detected either by smoke detectors, heat detectors,
manual stations, sprinkler waterflow switches, sprinkler supervisory
devices the following operation sequences shall be executed.
(2) General alarm will include the following:
(a) Indicate the alarm sound at FCP and Color Graphic Monitor.
(b) Identify the device that is the source of alarm zone at FCP and
annunciators.
(c) Initiate all alarm audible and visible alarm signals throughout staff
areas (i.e.SOR)
(d) Alert operation central at depot via the SCADA system

(e) Initiate fire authority automatic digital alarm communication

transmitter
(f) Monitor operation of automatic fire suppression systems.
(g) Initiate operation of automatic public address alarm message.
(h) Initiate smoke control sequence (automatic shutdown of/or energisation
of ventilation plant)
(i) Allow any restrained emergency exit doors to open on transmission
of the evacuation signal.
(j) Allow AFC gates to open on transmission of evacuation signal
(k) Initiate illumination of the station “No Entry” signs, on transmission of
the evacuation signal.
(l) Give control signals to lifts
(m) Give control signals to escalators
(n) Display color graphical representation of the area in which the alarm
device is located with type and description and time of the event in
a prioritized color-coded event list. Record the event on the system
printer
(3) When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating
devices, the following functions shall immediately occur at the control
panel and annunciators.
(a) The system trouble LED indicator shall flash.
(b) A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
(c) The system CPU & LCD shall indicate all pertinent information
associated with the trouble condition and its location. However,
unacknowledged alarm message shall have priority over trouble
messages.
(d) Display color graphical representation of the area in which the
trouble device is located with type and description and time of the
event in a prioritized color-coded event list. The appropriate message
shall be reported via printer (s).
(e) The system trouble indicator on remote annunciators shall be
illuminated.
(4) Activation of the acknowledge switch of the control panel shall silence
the panel sounding device and change the “System Alarm” or “Trouble
LED” from flashing to a steady “ON” condition. In case additional new
alarm or trouble conditions exist in the system, activation of this switch

shall advance the display to the next alarm or trouble condition that
exists, and shall not silence the local audible device or change the
flashing LED to steady “ON” until all new conditions have been so
acknowledges. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before
new trouble conditions. Activation of the acknowledge switch shall also
cause a corresponding (time stamped) message to be displayed on Color
Graphic Monitor and printer. Occurrence of a new alarm or trouble
condition shall cause the panel to “Resound” and again repeat the
sequence.
(5) Activation of the “Alarm Silence Switch” shall cause all appropriate
indicating appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after
and alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays
silenced by this switch shall be programmable in the field.
(6) Activation of the “Reset Switch” shall cause all electronically-latched
initiating devices or zones, as well as all associated output devices and
circuits, to return to the normal state. If alarm conditions still exist in the
system after the “System reset Switch” activation, the system shall then
resound the alarm conditions.
(7) Activation of the “Lamp Test Switch” on annunciator shall turn “ON” all
LED indicators
(8) Input signals other than from detectors, sprinkler flow switches, and break
glass units, and gaseous extinguishing system shall only generate an
indication and buzzer alarm but shall not generate a general alarm.
(9) No general alarms shall be sounded in passenger areas, to avoid panic.
Alarms shall alert staff in control rooms and offices.
(10) From any manual station, an authorized personnel with special keys may
initiate a general evacuation alarm.
1.13.3 Execution
(1) All final connections, tests, adjustments and calibrations shall be made
under the direct supervision of a factory-trained technician of the fire
alarm system supplier.


1.13.4.1 These shall prove that :
(1) All equipment cabling and distribution is electrically and mechanically
safe.
(2) All exposed metal work is properly bonded and earthed in accordance
with the requirements of the appropriate Statutory Requirements and that
all connections and points required to be earthed for safe and satisfactory
operation are properly earthed in accordance with the manufacturers
requirements.
(3) All cables, cores and terminations are properly made off, secure, properly
supported and correctly identified and coloured.
(4) All phases, polarities, neutral and common connections are correctly
switched as required, that power is correctly available at all points and
that voltage and frequency at all equipment is correct and in accordance
with the requirements for correct working.
(5) All supplies are properly fused, or otherwise protected to give satisfactory
discrimination and safe disconnection under fault conditions.
(6) All contacts are properly aligned and not excessive wear or erosion.
(7) All protective covers are properly fitted, all warning and designating labels
are correct and in position and the inside of all boxes and cubicles are
clean and free of “swarf” and cable strippings.
(8) Batteries, if provided, are properly ventilated, installed, connected and
fitted, and that battery chargers are working correctly.
(9) Insulation resistance of all cabling and equipment is not less than that
required by the requirements of the appropriate Statutory Authorities.
(10) All instruments and meters are energised with the correct polarity and
working properly.
(11) All fault indications and alarms are working correctly.
(12) All essential equipment fed from battery systems continues to function
correctly and without disturbance during all supply failures, restoration
and standby sequences.
1.13.4.2 In addition to all operation tests required for satisfactory completion the
operation of all interlock, sequences and protection not utilised during normal
operation shall be checked to the satisfaction of the Employer.

1.13.4.3 Additional Tests

(1) Additional tests shall be performed to verify that the complete electrical
installation shall meet the requirements of this Specification. The list
provided below is indicative of the minimum tests required. This also
includes the electrical services systems associated with mechanical
services, fire protection systems, tunnel ventilation etc. The Contractor
shall develop full test schedules for approval in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification.
(2) Cables
(a) Continuity Test.
(b) Insulation Resistance Test.
(c) Earth Test.
(d) Polarity Test.
(3) The Fire Detection & Alarm Systems will be tested in accordance NFPA 70
& 72. Each component and assembly will be type tested and functionally
tested before installation, and the entire system functionally tested for
correct operation including all interfaces with other systems and the
Concessionaire/Designated Contractor’s systems.
(4) Minimum required tests are as follows:
(a) Verify that the control unit is in normal condition as detailed in the
manufacturers operation and maintenance manual.
(b) Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission
under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be
opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating and indicating
devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of
wiring used.
(c) Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and
proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual
products of combustion.
(d) Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved
operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified
functional performance items at each station, including making all
possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all
communications options. For each item, observe related performance
at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system
sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and

annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity,

quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
(e) Test both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the
secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the
period and in the manner specified.
(5) Complete testing of automatic and manual fire alarm system.
END OF SECTION

1.14 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM

1.14.1 General Requirement
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Emergency Call System as
indicated on the Drawing. The main function is for communicating between
the Handicapper’s toilet room and the security room for emergency
assistance.
1.14.2 Technical Requirements

(1) Base Terminal/ Master Station
The Base terminal is able to display up to four different call locations.
During normal system operation the LED is lit. If a fault arises, then the
operation LED goes out and the fault LED starts to glow. Calls are
displayed visually by LED red light on the call display / cancel button,
and via room lamps which may also be present (optional). The call signal
are also indicated by a buzzer in the base terminal. The incoming call
remains displayed optically until the call is acknowledged. The call is
either cancelled by pressing the cancel button on the base terminal or by
pressing a cancel button which may also be present at the call location.
(2) Extension Terminal
The Extension terminal will be provided when there are more than four
terminals and they can display of at least 8 locations of incoming calls.
(3) Emergency Call Button
The Call button contains LED red light which lights up once a call has
been triggered. The LED remains lit until the call has been acknowledge.
The LED red light will be “OFF” when cancelled at cancel button or the
cancel button on the base terminal or extension terminal.
(4) Pull Switch
The Pull switch shall have at least two meters cord with grip and contains
a red call LED which lights up once a call has been triggered. The LED
remains lit until the call has been acknowledge. The LED red light will be
“OFF” when cancelled at cancel button or the cancel button on the base
terminal or extension terminal.
(5) Cancel Button/ Reset Button
The Cancel button/ Reset button is a push button to reset the call
from the call switch or the pull switch.

(6) Room Signal Lamp/ Corridor Lamp

The Room signal lamp/ Corridor lamp shall have the red lamp with
the white lamp bracket. The lamp shall be lighted when the call is
made and it can be cancelled by either pressing cancel button or
using the cancel button on the base terminal or extension terminal.
(7) The Power supply shall be 24 VDC for using with the emergency call
system.
(8) The Emergency call cable shall be CAT5E cable or higher categories.
1.14.3 System Operation

When the emergency call buttons or pull switch is used to make a call, the
lamp and the sound will activate at the base terminal. If any, the room signal
lamp at the room of calling will also be lighted. An incoming call shall be
annunciated by an electronic buzzer, and the corresponding station LED shall
light. Both the call tone and the LED shall remain active until the call is
cancelled at base terminal or extension terminal or be cancelled at the calling
location.
1.14.4 Installation
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of
emergency call system. And associated accessories for approval prior to
proceed purchasing.
routing plans of the emergency call equipment for approval prior to
installation
(3) All equipment and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation and in the location as indicated on the
Drawings.
END OF SECTION

1.15 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

1.15.1 General
(1) The Building Management System (BMS) shall be supplied, installed,
commission, tested and maintained by a specialized Contractor who shall
preferably be a control system supplier.
(2) Works in connection with the installation of the BMS.
(3) The Contractor shall base his tender on the system specified as the base
offer. If Alternative systems are proposed, they shall be listed as
alternative offer. Divergences from these Specifications, which regarded as
essential or as improvement shall be clearly pointed out and explained.
N/A
1.15.1.3 Submittals
(1) The details of all materials and equipment installations and
programmable load control schedules shall be submitted for the
Employer’s Representative approval before purchase order.
(1) The equipment manufacturer shall specialize in the specified
equipment and having experience about the equipment which have
been installed in Thailand at least five (5) years.
1.15.1.5 Warranty
(1) All parts of the BMS including its performance shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer at least two (2) years after handover.

1.15.2 Materials
(1) The BMS specified herein shall be capable of integrating building function
including equipment supervision, control alarm, energy management, and
historical data collection and archiving. The BMS shall consist of the
following equipment:
(a) One set of operator console, complete with ≥ LED 32” color monitor.
Keyboard and 2 sets of printers for normal and alarm conditions.
(b) Microprocessor based distributed controllers interface directly with
sensors, actuators and environmental delivery systems. i.e. HVAC
units, chiller electrical system, sanitary system etc.
(c) A two-wire loop communication network to allow data exchange
between devices in the system.
(d) Pneumatic, electrical and electronic control sensors and actuators as
1.15.2.2 Component
(1) System Equipment
The system shall be of modular design both hardware and software
consisting of a Operator Console, IP Router and Remote Processing Unit
(RPU) or Direct Digital Controller (DDC) keyboard and monitor.
The basis system element shall be interconnected by multiplex
communication networks, which include the following:
(a) Operator Console
 The CPU shall be compatible desktop personal computer with
full 64 bit Intel Core i7 processor, 3.0 GHz minimum clock rate,
16 Gigabytes of RAM, 1 Terabyte hard disk, battery backed real-
time clock and peripheral interface boards as specified herein.
The Contractor shall propose the latest type or model of
equipment and material to be installed for the Project and
submitted to the Employer’s Representative for approval before
purchase order.
 The keyboard shall include the full upper and lower case ASCII
keyset, a numeric keypad and cursor control keys. The Contractor
shall propose the latest type or model of equipment and material
to be installed for the Project and submitted to the Employer’s


 The LED color monitor (VGA, DVI-D, HDMI, Display Port connections)
shall comply with the graphics standard. The Contractor shall
propose the latest type or model of equipment and material to be
installed for the Project and submitted to the Employer’s
 Printers shall be provided for recording alarms operator
transactions and system reports. Printers shall be 24 pin dot
matrix types with at least a “paper width and have 160
characters per second capacity. Supply one box of 2000 sheets
of printer paper and two (2) printer ribbon or cartridges. The
Contractor shall propose the latest type or model of equipment
and material to be installed for the Project and submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval before purchase order.
 Color printer (inkjet) – 4800 x 1200 dpi using a A4 medium, 20
Sheets/minute (B&W) or better. The Contractor shall propose the
latest type or model of equipment and material to be installed for
the Project and submitted to the Employer’s Representative for
approval before purchase order.
 In addition the PC shall have an Rs232 serial port ,USB Ports or
network ports dedicated solely to BMS Network communication
and receipt of alarms form the BMS. This computer shall be used
as the main supervisory computer for the BMS. The main
supervisor shall have no part in the overall control. The
Contractor shall propose the latest type or model of equipment
and material to be installed for the Project and submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval before purchase order.
 Scheme and the system shall continue to operate unaffected by
total failure of the main supervisor.
(b) IP Router
 A device that routes messages destined for a node (DDC) on
another segment subnet or domain of the control network. The
device controls message traffic based on node address and
priority.
 The IP Router shall be able to performance ANSI/CEA-852 or
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard (ISO 16484-5) layer 3 transparent routing

of control packets onto the IP network. The Router shall support

devices of its type on the IP channel up to 256 devices or
manufacture recommend, and multiple servers can operate
behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) firewall.
 On Ethernet IP side, the router shall utilize Ethernet IP protocol
transport to route messages.
 Support of configured Router Mode and Smart Switch Mode.
 Router shall be able to tunneling of ANSI/EIA-709 or ANSI/EIA-458
or ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995 packets in RPU or DDC level through IP
(Ethernet) networks and fully compliant with EIA/CEA-852. or ISO
16484-5
(c) Remote Processing Unit (RPU) or Direct Digital Controller (DDC)
 The RPU shall be minimum 16 bit microprocessor based design
for performing control, alarm and monitoring programs.
 The RPU or DDC shall be standalone controller which is able to
operate by itself and peer to peer communication with other
RPU or DDC.
 The RPU or DDC shall be capable of control on-off command,
mode change, status input and digital alarms etc. The RPU or
DDC shall also optimum start / stop, duty cycling and support
energy management via BMS Software.
 The RPU or DDC shall be capable of storing trend logs for up to
20 fields or calculated points. Both long and short processes
shall be able to be stored with log intervals ranging from 10
seconds to one year. The amount of storage required shall be
programmable to 4,400 floating point values or 34,000 logical
values. Storage shall be programmed as cyclic or non-cyclic. If
cyclic storage is programmed the earliest values stored will be
overwritten when the storage is exceeded. If non-cyclic storage is
programmed the trend log will stop when the storage is full.
Trend logs shall be initiated manually or by occurrence of a
programmed event.
 To ensure standalone functionality each RPU or DDC shall store
32 independent time schedules, comprising normal weekly
timetables and prioritized alternative (including holiday) timetables.
Alternative timetables shall be able to be programmed for

scheduling times different to the normal schedules. It shall be

possible to utilize so called wild cards for repeated timetables
e.g. every year or monthly. Alternative timetables schedules shall
override the normal time schedules. Each timetable shall define
one set of start and stop times (accuracy 1 minute) and for
which days they are valid. Furthermore each RPU or DDC shall
store 16 independent logical time variables. Every time variable
shall be controlled from one or several timetables.
 RPU or DDC shall be installed in electrical room or mechanical
room or as specified in the Drawing. It shall be possible to
expand each RPU or DDC by additional of new RPU or DDC
input/output modules.
 The RPU or DDC shall accept the following type of inputs and
outputs.
input output
Analog 4-20 mA,0-10V Analog 4-20 mA,0-10V
Dry contact (NO or NC) Dry contact (NO or NC), 2A 250VAC
Pulse accumulator Momentary-pulsed and
Override switch Mechanically latched
Photocell contact
Transducer sensors Etc.
 If the IP Router or Network Control Unit transmission network

fails but power to RPU or DDC does not, the RPU or DDC shall be
continued
 The Communication between RPU or DDC and IP Router or
Network Control Unit shall be by the use of shield twisted pair
cable.
 All control strategies shall be held in flash memory,. All data
shall be available for review and modification from the operator
console or portable computer.
(d) Sensors and operating equipment
The Contractor shall supply the sensors, transmitters and relays
necessary for the BMS. Where necessary, the Contractors shall do the
mounting e.g. For the packets, probe tubes etc. for voltage, current

and kW measurements, the Contractor shall provide the transformers

with standard outputs.
 Filter pressure drop of each filter bank as specified in the point
list shall be sensed by means of a differential. Pressure sensing
device which closed a contact when the filter pressure
differential exceeds a typical pressure.
 Low Temperature Limit Thermostats as shown on the Drawings
or described in the sequences of operation, install low
temperature limit thermostats complete with 6.1 m. (20 ft) of
sensing capillary sensitive to 406 mm. (16”) and shall have reset
provided one limit thermostat for approximately every 6 sq.mm.
(65 sq.ft.) of duct area.
 High Temperature Limit Thermostats as shown on the Drawings
or described in the sequences of operation for individual
systems, provide high limit thermostats to shut down respective
fan system (S). Provide a single rod and tube type manual reset
limit thermostat set at 57.5 ºC.
 Air proving switches shall utilize a differential pressure activated,
diaphragm actuated, snap acting SPDT switch rated at minimum
1 amps. 220Vac or 24Vac full load.
 Air flow for each AHU as specified herein shall be indicated by
means of a differential. Pressure sensing device which shall open
a contact when the pressure is different. All fans shall use
differential, pressure sensor or auxilliary, contact for start/stop
indications, pressure of sir flow falls below a typical value.
Pressure transmitters shall be suitable for continuous contact
with the material being measured (i.e. air, water glycol, or steam
as applicable).
 Pressure transmitters shall have a linear output of 0-10V. or 4-
20mA Pressure transmitters shall be a span of not greater than
twice the static pressure at maximum flow or differential
pressure at shutoff as applicable.
 Water flow for pumps shall be indicated by means of differential,
pressure or flow switches which opens a contact as the
differential, pressure or flow falls below a typical value. Water
flow switches shall have a paddle, snap acting SPDT switch rated

minimum 1 Amp 220Vac or 24Vac full load.

 Humidity sensors shall be suitable for operating ranges of 0 to
100% RH and shall incorporate a solid state sensing element.
Sensor accuracy shall be ±3%(in 30%RH to 70%RH, 25ºC). Humidity
sensors shall also incorporate a transducing circuit for conversion
of the sensed variable to a voltage level for digital conversion.
- Carbon dioxide sensors for air quality control purposes shall
have the following characteristics.

- Measurement Range -0-2000 ppm. CO2
- Accuracy ±1% of measurement range, ± 5 % of measured
value
- Drift ±10 ppm. per year
- Output Signal 0-10 VDC proportional over the 0-2000 on
range.
- Response time <3 Min maximum.
- Operating conditions 0-50 ºC, 0-95% RH non-condensing
- Provide one single point calibration kit.
 Flow meter
- Flow meters shall be of the electromagnetic kind and consist
of two parts. The primary measuring unit shall have no

moving parts or intrusion into its flow path. It shall be lined
with neoprene, artificial ceramic or other liners. The
electrodes shall be stainless steel. The primary housing shall
be fully welded/fully scaled (to at least IP65). No electrode
shall be incorporated into the primary head. The coil and its
insulation shall withstand 120°C
- Volumetric measurement of a liquid flow can be achieved
without influenced from changes in temperature, pressure,

density or viscosity of the liquid being measured. There shall
also be no zero point drift due to conductive in homogeneties
or electrode contamination. Output signal shall be analog 4-
20 mA and adjustable 0 to 1 kHz pulses.
- Flow rate indicator shall have 3.5 digits and 7-segment LED
- It shall be possible to ‘zero’ the flow meter without external
instruments. Overall accuracy (primary and converter) shall

be + 0.5% full scale wet calibration. Power consumption
shall not exceed 2 VA (independent of size).

 Pressure sensing elements shall be bourdon tube, bellows or

diaphragm type. Adjustable set point and differential. Pressure
switches shall be snap action type rated at 220 volts, 3 amp AC
or 24 volts DC.
 Temperature Sensors / Transmitters
- Temperature transmitters shall be equipped 0-10Vdc or 4-
20mA converter output.

- Temperature transmitters shall be sized and constructed to
be compatible with the medium to be monitored.

Transmitters shall be equipped with a linearization circuit to
compensate for non-linearities of the sensor and bridge and
provide a true linear output signal.
- Temperature sensors shall be of the NTC resistance type and
shall be two-wire thermistors.

- The following accuracy’s are required :
Point Type Accuracy

Outside Air ± 0.6ºC
Chilled Water ± 0.5ºC
Room Temperature ± 0.5ºC
 Thermowells :
- When thermowells are required, the sensor and well shall be
supplied as a complete asssembly including sensing element

placed in or stainless steel well.
- Thermowells shall be constructed in accordance with the
system working pressure.

 Outside Air Sensors :
- Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the
environmental conditions to which they will be exposed.

They shall also be provided with a solar shield.
- Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded
by a perforated plate surrounding the sensor element.

 Temperature transmitters shall be of enclosure rating IP54.
 Duct Type Sensors :
- Duct mount sensors shall be mounted in a handy box through
a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily

accessible for repair or replacement. A neoprene grommet

(sealtite fitting and mounting plate) shall be used on the
sensor assembly to prevent air leaks.
- Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a
complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate.

Duct sensors probe shall be constructed of poly carbonate
plastic.
- For outdoor air duct applications, use a weatherproof
mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket.

 Power Meter (Digital Meter)
- The power meter shall be a communication base metering
device, which allows sending and receiving via communication

cable. It shall include two devices, the electrical
measurement device and the communication device.
- The electrical measurement device shall be a three-phase
power meter with current transformer and power inputs. It

shall have a system accuracy of class 0.5S (for energy). Input
primary voltage, 50 to 400 VAC rms. Phase monitoring
capability, one or three. Split core current transformer to
meet application. It shall pass a minimum of 20 data points to
the integration node.
- The integration node device shall take the data points from
the electrical measurement device and report the energy

information on Modbus or equivalent Protocol via
communication cable.
 Pulse kWH meter for monitoring of the electrical consumption
shall be of an electronic type with pulse output acceptable by
RPU or DDC.
 Network Thermostat with 3-speed switch
- Use for fan coil unit. It adjusts indoor temperature and
achieves comfort and energy saving by controlling operation

status of fan coil and motorized valve based on result of
comparison between detected room temperature and
temperature setting. Features microprocessor-based control
and large LCD screen. The LCD display modes include
operation status (cooling, heating, ventilation), fan speed, room
temperature, and temperature setting. The following keys are

provided power switch/fan speed adjustment and energy

saving key and temperature setting key. It can communicate
to BMS via RS-485 port on modbus protocol.
 Start/stop relay modules shall if possible provide either momentary
or maintained switches actions as appropriate for the unit being
started and depending on the fact whether the units are
subjected to a power fail restart program or not. All relays shall
be mounted in interface panels and/or starter panels.
 All control point requiring remote adjustments shall be provided
normally with control devices that will hold the last requested
output regardless of IP Router or Network Control Unit
malfunction or power failure to control panel unless it is
specified otherwise in the control specifications.
(e) Control Cable and Cable Connection
Type of cable shall be as per manufacturer or recommendations as
follows:-
 Cat 6 cable or as specified on the Drawings shall be used
between IP Router or Network Control Unit and computer.
 Twisted pair with shielded cable shall be used between IP Router
or Network Control Unit and RPU or DDC.
 Minimum distance of twisted pair with shield cable between RPU or

DDC to others shall more than 1,200 meters or equivalent via IP
channel in bus topology without repeater.
 Twisted pair with shielded cable shall be used in analog points.
 CVV cable or as specified on the Drawings shall be used in digital
points.
 Terminal blocks shall be provided in panel for RPU or DDC to
load points.
(2) System Software
(a) The Main Software
The software shall include, as a minimum, the operation system
(MS-DOS together with Microsoft Window XP, 7 or 2008 server),
Communications and Alarm Handlers, Schematics and Text display
handlers, Graphs and Automatic Reporting, Calendars, Word
Processing, Computer Aided Drawing and Spreadsheet Programs.

(b) Operator Interface Software

All operator interaction with the system shall be via the mouse.
Moving from one item to another shall be accomplished without the
operator having to learn any codes, abbreviations, syntax or point
addresses, and without having to use the keyboard. Information shall
be displayed in screen “windows” and it shall be possible to have a
large number of windows open at any time, limited only by the size
of the screen. The software shall consist of number of separate
programs:
 Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection
shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation
control, display and database manipulation capabilities as he
deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned
password.
- A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported:
Level 1 = Data Access and Display

Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides
Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Modifications
Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation
Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification
A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported for the
system.
- Operators will be able to perform only those commands
available for their respective passwords. Menu selections

displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel
mounted shall be limited to only those items defined for the
access level of the password used to log-on.
- User-definable, automatic log-off times of from 5 to 60
minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from

inadvertently leaving devices online.
 Schematic Pictures: The schematics program shall allow data
from the BMS controllers to be displayed together with a
schematic drawing of the building. The data points shall be
positioned anywhere on the Drawing and shall be displayed
either as an analogue value or digital values. The schematic
drawings shall contain “Click Boxes” to enable the operator to
move from one drawing to another or to select some other

function merely by pointing to the click box and pressing the

mouse button. The functions selectable by this means shall
include:
- Selecting another schematic drawing
- Adjustment of a value, e.g. a setpoint
- Select and display a graph or user page, either full size or as a
“Pop-up” window on top of the current window.

- Run another program, including proprietary software
unconnected with the function of the main supervisory
software
- Click boxes shall be user-definable
 Computer Aided Drawing (CAD): The software package shall

include a CAD program or Graphic visualization software package
which shall be used to Import CAD file and create schematic
drawings for use in the schematics program.
 User Pages: The User Page program shall provide the means to
display data as a list of text, where this form of display would be
more appropriate than a schematic picture. Data shall be
possible to display data from any combination of controllers in
the system, including RPU or DDC . Foreground and background
colours shall be operator selectable. Data values which are in an
alarm condition shall be displayed in a complementary colour to
highlight this condition. All text and data displayed in a user page
shall have the facility to be copied and included in a document
being processed by a different application, e.g. a word processing
program.
It shall be possible to use click boxes in user pages exactly as
specified for the schematic program.
 Graphs: The graphs program shall allow the display and printing
of trend logs held in the RPU or DDC. Up to four traces shall be
displayed simultaneously on the same axes. Each trace shall
have a different, user definable, color and shall print out using a
different line style (and different colour where a colour printer is
used). The points to be displayed shall be on-line selectable and
the graph may be displayed in real time, or the definitions may
be saved on disk and recalled whenever required. Graph

definitions which have been saved on disk shall be displayed

from a schematic drawing or a user page by means of a click box,
as previously specified. Historic graphs may be concentrated to
show a series of logs on a single pair of axes.
 Automatic Reporting: This program shall permit historical data
to be built up in any of the display modes, i.e. Schematics, User
pages or graphs. In record mode the program shall automatically
collect data at operator defined intervals and in the selected
display mode, and shall save the data on disk for later recall.
The data shall be collected automatically as a background task
and shall require no operator intervention, other than to start it
running. It shall be possible to play back the recorded data at
any time simply by specifying the time and data of the recorded
data to be viewed.
 Alarm Handling: Any incoming alarm message regardless of type
shall be displayed in a “Pop-up” panel on top of whatever is
currently displayed on screen. Each alarm panel shall have a
user-assigned title indicating its source or function, and shall flash
to attract the operator’s attention. All incoming alarms shall
have the option of being printed and logged on disk. An optional
audible signal shall also be provided, which shall continue to
sound until the alarm has been acknowledged. Under normal
operating conditions it shall be possible for an alarm condition to
appear on screen less than 5 seconds after it occurs.
 Calendars: This program shall provide the facility to link
outstation time zones to supervisor calendars which may be
used by the operator to set occupation times. The program shall
provide the facility to set up special days, i.e. days on which the
occupation times are different to the normal schedule, up to
one year in advance.
(c) Control RPU or DDC Software
 General: The RPU or DDC shall be capable of fully stand-alone
operation and shall be independent of any central computer for
all specified control or communication applications. The
software shall include all necessary routines and modules
required to implement any control strategy and shall be user

programmable. The programming language shall be English and

shall use standard controls terminology.
 The RPU or DDC operating software shall be held in a minimum
of 32 Bit and shall operate in real time. Control strategies shall
be held in a minimum of 2 MB of Flash memory which shall be
battery backed up for at least two years. The software shall
include a continuous self-test routine which shall test all parts of
the main processing unit and shall report any failures to the
main supervisor.
 Input and Output point processing shall include:
- Continuous update of input and output values, conditions
and status. All connected points are to be updated at a

maximum of 5 second intervals.
- Analog to digital conversion of input values shall be carried
out with at least 10 bit resolution with typically 40 dB series

mode rejection @50 Hz. It shall be possible to calibrate the
inputs by means of movable jumpers or links to suit the
sensor type in use, to achieve a high accuracy reading.
- Input reading shall be automatically checked to determine
that the reading is within the sensor’s range and within the
range of the input circuit, i.e. 0-10V or 4-20mA. Should this not
be the case then an alarm status shall be indicated.
- Use-defined units normally recognized Employer’s
Representative units.
- All sensor readings shall be in Employer’s Representative or
user-definable units. These units shall be calculated by the

sensor scaling type assigned to each sensor.
- Each sensor shall have, in addition to the checks specified
above, operator adjustable High and Low alarm limits. If the

sensor reading is outside these limits then an alarm shall be
generated. It shall be possible to delay these alarms by a
user-defined amount so that spurious alarms are not reported.
- All digital inputs shall be de-bounced and shall be capable of
receiving pulses at a maximum rate of 20Hz.

 All output points shall have optional start up delays assigned
which shall prevent all plant from starting at the same time.
These delays shall be adjustable by the operator.

 Alarms shall be provided with user-adjustable delays to prevent

nuisance alarms. A log of the last 32 alarms shall be stored in
the controller.
 Provision shall be made to count the total running hours of any
digital input or output and to assign an operator-definable limit
to this period. Provision shall be made to generate an alarm if
any plant item exceeds its defined run time limit.
 Provision shall be made to count the number of starts for any
plant item. Limits shall be assignable and an alarm shall be
generated if the limits are exceeded.
 Each RPU or DDC is to be configured to run the control strategies
called for in the sequence of operation sections of this
specification. Each RPU or DDC shall have the required software
modules available for arithmetic calculations, logical decisions
and relational operators necessary for the implementation of
these control sequences.
- RPU or DDC data such as set points, sensor values, loop
parameters etc., shall be available to the operator for display

and modification at the main supervisor, the portable
supervisor or the display panel.
- The reschedule time of control loops shall be adjustable, in 5
second intervals.
 Each RPU or DDC shall provide five independent time zones,
each of which shall have three separate start and stop periods
within each 24 hours.
- Unique time program shall be provided for each day of the
week, plus a unique holiday schedule. Each RPU or DDC time

zone may be provided with unique time programs, or they
may be grouped and assigned a common time program as
configured by the operator.
- For each time program, the main supervisor shall have a
calendar available which may be used to make simple

modifications up to a year in advance. The calendar shall
allow these modifications to be permanent or to execute
only once and then return to the previous (permanent)
schedule.

- Calendar days which are intended to operate as Holidays shall

also be definable up to a year in advance.
 All control strategies shall be held in RAM, All data shall be
available for review and modification from the main or portable
supervisors.
(d) Program Application
 Optimum Start/Stop: OS
 The automatic system shall include a software program to
perform optimized start up and shutdown of selected
equipment. The program shall start HVAC equipment at the
latest possible time to achieve the desired zone conditions be
occupancy of time, and also shutdown HVAC equipment at the
earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period,
and still maintain desired comfort conditions.
 Time Program: TP
A comprehensive program shall be provided to automatically
start/stop designated points according to a stored time, It shall
be possible to individually command a point or group of points.
It shall be possible to assign variable time delays between each
successive start/stop command within that group.
 Peak Demand: PD
The automation system shall include a software program to
perform Peak Demand Limit. The program shall monitor the rate
of electrical power consumption and forecast the total demand
during each demand interval. If the predicted demand exceeds
demand limit, the program shall automatically sheds loads to
reduce demand.
 Run Time: RT
perform log run time totalization of selected equipment and
shall include user name (s) and associated totalized values.
 Alarm Limit: AL
For analog point which shall have associated high/low limits, if
the measured or calculated values drops below the low limit or
exceed the high limit, that point shall be considered in alarm
and report as previously defined in alarm reporting.

 Historical Trend Log: HL

The operator shall be able to assign any system point, analog or
binary, real or calculated to a trend group. Trend groups shall
consist of a single point or multiple point groups with capacity of
at least 50 points. Trended values shall be historically retained
on the system for future inquiry.
 Graphic Monitor: GM
show the system diagram, floor plan lay-out with equipment and
alarm points.
 Alarm Report: AR
Each alarm as determined by the system shall cause the
following information to be logged.
- Current time, data and initial of on- duty operator
- Point/type of alarm
- Current valve or status
- Operator instructive message
- Etc.
 Maintenance Management: MM
Maintenance Mange schedules maintenance activity on calendar,
run-time, and even-occurrence basic. It issues detail work orders,
tracks material inventory, and provide work orders and schedule
maintenance progress monitoring through conversational menus
and prompts and Monitor energy consumption from building to
building and across the enterprise, through a variety of
customizable reports and manage complaints and service calls
from incident to resolution, and use historical data to identify
problem areas and assist in maintenance planning.
Note: The program application shown above is the minimum
requirement; it might be changed/added later by the Employer’s
Representative and manufacturer’s recommendation.
1.15.3 Installation
All equipment and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation and in the location as indicated on the
Drawings.


1.15.4.1 The BMS is subject to conduct the following tests:
(1) Operational test of the system.
(2) Operational test of the RPU or DDC.
(3) Monitoring System
(4) Others as specified by Manufacturer and the Employer or Employer’s
Representative.
END OF SECTION

1.16 SCADA INTERFACING SYSTEM

1.16.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall provide and install the SCADA Interfacing system as
N/A
1.16.1.3 Submittals
(1) The details of all material and equipment and installations shall be
submitted for approval from the Employer’s Representative before giving
the manufacturer a purchase order and installation.
(1) The equipment manufacturer shall specialize in the specified equipment
and having experience about the equipment which have been installed in
Thailand at least five (5) years.
(2) The SCADA System manufacturer shall be ISO 9000 certified.
1.16.1.5 Warranty
(1) All parts of the system including its performance shall be guaranteed by
the manufacturer and/or the Contractor at least two (2) years after
handover.
1.16.2 Materials
The SCADA interfacing consists of Marshalling Cabinet (MS-00) located adjacent
to RTU in communication room, sub marshalling cabinets (MS-XX) are located
adjacent to devices or equipments in all areas and MS-00 shall be connected
to each MS-XX by hard wires cables via conduits or cable trays as indicated on
the Drawings.
(1) Marshalling Cabinets (MS)

(a) The terminal blocks shall be provided for termination of all SCADA
interface monitor /control signal wiring. Terminal blocks shall be
designed and tested in complying with IEC 60947-7-1. Terminal block
shall have ability to receive unprepared conductors.

(b) Terminal block shall be single terminal type. Each terminal shall be
exchangeable without dismounting adjacent terminals and also
suitable for designative labeling.
(c) Terminal blocks shall be of the rail-mounted type and shall be of
screwless type terminals 600V a.c. moulded block type with molded
insulating barrier between terminals. Terminal connections shall be
such that the conductors shall be connected with the necessary
maintained contact pressure. Terminals shall be so constructed that
the conductors can be clamped between suitable surface without
any significant damage either to conductors or terminals.
(d) Terminal blocks shall have test probe facilities for connections of test
leads and an integral disconnecting device to facilitate testing.
(e) The rated cross-section of a terminal block shall be 0.5-2.5 sq.mm. of
round copper conductor. No terminal can carry more than two
conductors simultaneously connectable on each incoming/outgoing
side.
(f) The terminating block in all MS shall be spare capacity at least 20%
of the number of I/O points.
(g) The MS shall be 1.6 mm thick galvanized sheet steel, the color is gray
epoxy, electrostatic powered coated. The protection class shall be
IP 31.
(2) SCADA Interfacing Cables
(a) Digital input (DI) and Digital output (DO) signals shall be used multi-
core CVV cables via conduits or cable trays.
(b) Analog input (AI) and Analog output (AO) signals shall be used twisted
pair with aluminum shield cables via conduits or cable trays.
(c) SCADA interfacing cables for life safety lifts, fire alarm system and fire
pumps shall be used fire resistant cable tested to BS 6387 and meet
the requirements of Class C,W,Z via conduits only.
(d) The numbers of SCADA interfacing cable shall be spare capacity at
least 20% of the number of I/O points.
(3) Field Control Wiring
(a) If screen is required, aluminum tape laid longitudinally and in contact
with the un-insulated drain wire or un-insulated circuit protective
conductor (cpc) shall be provided.

(b) All field control wiring associated with analogue inputs/outputs shall
be run in screened cable with a minimum cross sectional areas of 0.5
sq.mm.
(c) All field control wiring associated with digital inputs/outputs shall be
wired in unscreened cable with a minimum cross sectional areas of
1.0 sq.mm.
(d) All field control wiring shall be wired contained in trunking or
conduits
(e) All field control wiring for equipment used for life safety shall be of
fire resistant cable.
1.16.3 Installation
manufacturer’s recommendation and in the locations as indicated on the
Drawings.

1.16.4.1 The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of system
which comply to the manufacturing standards, related international standards
and the Employer's Representative requirements.
1.16.4.2 The Contractor shall prepare instruction manual of the system for users.
1.16.4.3 Necessary training regarding maintenance and operation of the system shall be
provided to the Employer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

1.17 FIRE BARRIER WORK

1.17.1 General
(1) After erection of equipment and materials through walls and openings has
been completed, the Contractor shall fill up voids and openings with fire
resistant materials which conform to NEC article 300-21 and ASTM to
protect fire or smoke from spreading out from one room to another room
through these voids and openings.
(1) The fire barrier and its components shall comply with the following codes
and standards.
(a) NEC 300-21 : Spread of fire or product of combustion
(b) ASTM E814 : Fire test of through-penetration firestops
(c) UL 1479 : Fire test of through-penetration firestops
(d) BS 476-20 : Fire Resistance Test to Building Materials
(e) IEC 60332-3 : Test on electric and optical fiber cables under fire
conditions
1.17.1.3 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit material, catalogues, material lists, technical data
and method of installation for approval before purchase and installation.
The manufacturer shall specialize in the specified material and having
experience about the material which have been installed in Thailand at least
five (5) years.
1.17.1.5 Warranty
All materials and installation of the fire barrier work shall be guaranteed by
the Contractor at least two (2) years after handover.
1.17.2 Materials
(1) The applied materials to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection
wall, unless otherwise specified. Covers or escutcheon plates shall be
provided, wherever exposed, and shall be neatly placed to the satisfaction
of the Employer’s Representative and manufacturer's recommendation.

(2) After the erection of all conduits, wirings, and raceways in the shaft,
block-out or any floor openings, the voids shall be sealed with 2-hour fire
rating material, as approved by the Employer’s Representative unless
specified otherwise.
1.17.2.2 Components
The fire barrier materials shall have the following properties:
(1) Comply with the standards of Underwriter's Laboratory Inc.
(2) Have a minimum of 2-hour fire resistant rating.
(3) Have no toxic during installation or in case of fire.
(4) Easy to be dismantled and replaced in case of rearrangement.
(5) Withstand over vibration.
(6) Easy to be installed.
(7) No change of physical strength before and after fire spreads.
(8) The fire barrier materials shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for approval before installation.
1.17.3 Installation
The fire barrier material shall be filled up voids on walls or floors after the
erection of raceways.

The testing method shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s
standards or as directed by Employer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

1.18 PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEM

1.18.1 General
The Contractor shall provide and install the public telephone system as
The system and its components shall comply with the following codes and
standards
(1) TOT
(2) CCITT
(3) IEEE
(4) TIA/EIA-568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards.
1.18.1.3 Submittals
The details of all material and equipment installations shall be submitted for
approval from the Employer’s Representative before giving the manufacturer a
purchase order and installation.
(1) The equipment manufacturer shall specialize in the specified equipment and
having experience about the equipment which have been installed in
Thailand at least five (5) years.
(2) The equipment manufacturer shall be ISO 9000 certified.
1.18.1.5 Warranty
All parts of the system including its performance shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer and/or the Contractor at least two (2) years after handover.

1.18.2 Materials
(1) Telephone Distribution Cabinet (TC)
(a) The Telephones Distribution Cabinet shall be 1.6 mm thick galvanized
sheet steel, the color is gray epoxy, electrostatic powered coated.
The protection class shall be IP 31
(b) Cabinet are provided with full length horizontal and vertical jumper
guides.
(c) Cabinet are designed to allow easy door reversal from one side to
the other. A rubber sealant strip is fitted to door panels.
(d) A document holder shall be provided inside.
(e) Standard provisions for door lock are flush door lock with key.
(f) The termination block shall support all applications and facilitate
cross connection and interconnection using either cross connect wire
or patch cords
(g) The wiring blocks shall be fire retardant, moulded plastic consisting of
horizontal index strips for terminating 10 pairs of conductors each.
These index strips shall be marked with five colors on the high teeth,
separating the tip and ring of each pair, to establish pair location. A
series of fanning strips shall be located on each side of the block for
dressing the cable pairs terminated on the adjacent index strips.
Clear label holders with the appropriate colored inserts shall be
provided with the wiring blocks. The insert labels shall contain
vertical lines spaced on the basis of circuit size (3-, 4-, or 5-pair) and
shall not interfere with running, tracing or removing jumper
wire/patch cords.
(h) The terminating block shall be spare capacity of TC at least 25% of the
whole lines.
(2) Telephone Cables
4 Pair-UTP CAT6 cable shall be provided for installation in conduits,
between TC and telephone outlets, shall be labeled with sandwich type
plastic sheets with letters engraved on the first layer. The plastic sheets
shall be tied to the cables nearby the end by releasable cable tie. The
works engraved shall indicate the type of the cable and number of pairs,
to which terminal boxes it is connected (at both side) and the number of
terminations.

(3) Telephone outlets

Telephone outlets shall be modular jack RJ 45, aluminum cover plate or
stainless steel cover plate.The cover plate of telephone outlet shall be
the same type as of power receptacles. The telephone outlets shall be
specifically designed for flush mounting in walls or floors.
1.18.3 Installation
manufacturer’s recommendation and in the locations as indicated on the
Drawings.

1.18.4.1 The Contractor shall test the system to full function.
1.18.4.2 The Contractor shall provide training to the operators and maintenance staff
of the Employer covering the function and maintenance.
END OF SECTION

1.19 STANDARD FIELD TESTS

1.19.1 General
(1) The electrical installation shall be functionally tested and checked to
ensure that all equipment, devices and wiring have been properly
installed and will operate as intended.
(2) The completed equipment and systems shall be tested and balanced by
the Contractor. The cost incurred during this operation shall be borne by
the Contractor unless stated specifically otherwise specified in these
Specifications or the Contract Documents.
furnished, installed or connected by the Contractor to assure proper
Documents.
(5) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer’s representative
and, when necessary, under the supervision of equipment manufacturer's
field representative.
(6) All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether
(7) Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the Employer’s
Representative conditions to determine that equipment, materials and
system meet requirements of these Specifications.
(8) The Contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests
showing date, personnel making test, equipment or material tested, tests
performed and results. Two copies of test records shall be given to the
(9) The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or
material due to improper test procedures or test apparatus handling, and
shall replace or restore to original condition any damaged equipment or
material.
(10) Safety devices such as rubber gloves, blankets, protective screens,


the tests.
(12) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment
manufacturer as recommended by the manufacturer i.e., circuit
breaker, low voltage switchboard, motor (if any), etc unless specifically
waived by the Employer’s Representative.
(13) Cost incurred during testing i.e. electricity, city water, labor, etc, shall be paid
by the Contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these
1.19.2 Feeder Insulation Resistance Testing

1.19.2.1 All current carrying phase conductors and neutrals shall be tested as installed,
and before connections are made, for insulation resistance and accidental
grounds. This shall be done with a 500volt megger. The procedures listed
below shall be followed:
(1) Minimum readings shall be one million (1,000,000) or more ohms for #6
AWG wire and smaller, 250,000 ohms or more for #4 AWG wire or larger,
between conductors and between conductor and the grounding
conductor.
(2) After all fixtures, devices and equipment are installed and all connections
completed to each panel, the Contractor shall disconnect the neutral
feeder conductor from the neutral bar and take a megger reading between
the neutral bar and the grounded enclosure. If this reading is less than
250,000 ohms, the Contractor shall disconnect the branch circuit neutral
wires from this neutral bar. He shall then test each one separately to the
panel and until the low readings are found. The Contractor shall correct
troubles, reconnect and retest until at least 250,000 ohms from the
neutral bar to the grounded panel can be achieved with only the neutral
feeder disconnected.
(3) At final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish a megger and show the
Employer’s Representatives and State Construction Office representatives
that the panels comply with the above requirements. He shall also furnish
a hook-on type ammeter and voltmeter to take current and voltage

readings as directed by Employer’s Representative or the Employer or

Employer’s representatives.
1.19.3 Ground System Testing

Upon completion of installation of the electrical grounding and bonding
systems, the ground resistance shall be tested with a ground resistance tester.
Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over 25 ohms, appropriate action
should be taken to reduce the resistance to 25 ohms, or less, by driving
additional ground rods. (The compliance should be demonstrated by
retesting.)
1.19.4 Ground Fault Protection System

The ground fault protection on the new circuit breakers (if provided) shall be
performance tested in the field and properly calibrated and set in accordance
with the coordination study.
1.19.5 Documentation
1.19.5.1 All tests specified shall be completely documented indicating time of day,
date, temperature and all pertinent test information.
1.19.5.2 All required documentation of readings indicated above shall be submitted to
the Employer’s Representative prior to, and as one of the prerequisites for,
final acceptance of the Project.
END OF SECTION


SECTION 2 : PLUMBING AND SANITARY SYSTEM
2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND SANITARY

SYSTEM
2.1.1 General
(1) This general specification and requirement describe the materials and
installation of the Plumbing works for building services works and related
work for the project.
(2) The work shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the
drawings and this specification
2.1.1.2 Environment
(1) The material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings
(2) Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection :
 Altitude : Approximately mean sea level
 Maximum temperature 40C (104F)
 Average temperature (all year) 36.1C (97F)
 Maximum relative humidity 85%
 Average relative humidity (all year) 60%
2.1.1.3 Standards, Codes and Regulations
to the standards and regulations of Metropolitan Water Work Authority.
The following standards are mentioned in these Specifications for systems
and/or components and, where described, the systems and/or components
shall conform to such standards.
 ANSI - American National Standard Institute
 API - American Petroleum Institute
 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
conditioning Engineers, Inc.
 ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
 BS - British Standard

 DIN -
Deutsher Industrie Normen (German Industrial Standard)
 EIT -
The Engineering Institute of Thailand
 FM -
Factory Mutual
 IEC -
 MEA -
 MWWA -
Metropolitan Water Works Association
 NEC -
 NFC -
National Fire Code
 NEMA -
 NFPA -
 PEA -
 TISI -
 UL -
 VDE -
Verband Deutsher Electro techniker (German Electrical
 Any regulations issued by local authorities.
(1) The scope of work of the Contractor shall include provision, installation,
testing and balancing, commissioning of equipment and accessories as
shown on the Drawings and Specifications to achieve a complete sanitary
system.
(2) The system shall include the following:-
 Cold water supply system
 Soil, waste and vent drainage system
 Wastewater treatment plant system
 Rain water drainage system
 Electrical power and control
 Accessories as required to complete the system
(3) It shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide a completely safe and
workable system in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications, and the accompanying drawings and schedules all to the

(4) The Contractor shall coordinate with the building contractor or other
trades to ensure that the system and its components furnished form a
complete electrical and communication system with the established
construction schedule.
(1) The Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications to make sure
that all requirements are thoroughly understood. In cases where, in his
opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of these documents, he
shall inform the Employer’s Representative immediately.
(3) Figure dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in
no case dimensions shall be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible,
dimensions are to be measured from the building. Before the Contractor
commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on
the site and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions
regardless of the comparable dimensions on the Drawings.
2.1.1.6 Dimensions
(1) Figured dimensions as indicated on the drawings are to be followed and
in no case shall dimensions be scaled from the drawings. Wherever
possible, dimensions are to be measured from the building.
(2) Before the Contractor commence any works, he shall ensure that
on the drawings.
regardless of the comparable dimensions of the drawings.
2.1.1.7 Operation
(1) Where the Contractor propose to use material and/or equipment which is
not specified or detailed on the drawings, the matter shall be brought
make a decision.
(2) The locations of air outlets, air duct route and piping route shown on the
drawings are diagrammatic, and shall be considered as approximate only.

The approved locations may be different from those shown on the

drawings, if so directed by the owner.
2.1.2 Material
2.1.2.1 General
2.1.2.1.1 The quality of all material shall comply with the standards specified in the
details on the drawings and diagrams. They shall further be of an approved
make and suitable for the works.
2.1.2.1.2 The manufacturer’s marks of major materials submitted by the contractor for
approval shall correspond to the approved vender list. However, the
Contractor may submit the alternative materials for approval; such alternatives
must meet the requirements of the specifications. In this case, the contractor
shall provide sufficient technical documents and the comparison to Employer’s
Representative for consideration.
2.1.2.1.3 The major materials vender or manufacturer shall have the following
qualification:
(1) The materials vender shall be an authorized sole distributor in Thailand
and shall have spare parts and after sale service.
(2) The submitted material’s trademarks shall be promoted in Thailand
market more than 5 years
(3) If contractor wishes to offer the others major materials which do not
meet the above qualification, the contractor shall as certain himself that
such major materials is of equal quality to that mention in these
specifications and shall furnish full details of the material or apparatus in
order to enable the Employer and the Employer’s Representative to
judge the quality of the offered.
2.1.2.2 Material and Equipment
(1) All Plumbing equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and
unused, of current manufacture, of the highest quality and free from
defects or imperfections affecting the performance or life of the item and
approved by the Employer’s Representative
specification, all materials and equipment shall be installed, with the
approval of the Employer’s Representative, in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the

Employer’s Representative shall not release the Contractor from his

responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of installations.
(3) The Contractor shall protect all electrical equipment, materials and parts
during storage and during construction against the ingress of moisture,
contamination or corrosion that might damage the finish or lower the
electrical integrity of the item.
furnished to the Contractor, on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align,
Employer’s Representative satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if
any).
(5) After the material and equipment have been installed completely in
material and equipment from damages shall rest with the Contractor's
own expense.
own expense and then approved by the Employer’s Representative
additional equipment required by the system with additional cost, which
approved by the Employer’s Representative
(3) In reference to inspection, all works rejected by the Employer’s
Representative shall be repaired, corrected or replaced at the Contractor's
expense to attain good workmanship, and conform to the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. Therefore, ample time shall be provided for
inspection and, if there is any defective work re-inspection of the
Employer’s Representative shall be performed. In the event that the
Contractor should fail to carry out necessary changes, then the

Employer’s Representative shall have the right to make its own

arrangement at the Contractor's expense.
the works.
Representative may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency,
improve their character, augment their number or replace with new tools,
equipment and materials as required.
All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and
maintenance, shall be provided with nameplates, tags or arrows, especially in
enclosed areas, such as ceiling, shafts, and other places accessible for
maintenance service.
2.1.2.6 Submittal of Data for Approval
series, size and performance. Such data shall be sufficient detail to
and to form an opinion to its conformity to the Specification.
(3) The Contractor shall stamp the name of his company and sign all
documents to be submitted for approval.
(1) Only new material and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works. All
materials and equipments furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to

inspections and approval of the Employer’s Representative with the

consent of the Employer. The materials and equipment used for the
Works shall correspond to the approved makes or other data. Any
materials which, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, have
lower quality than the approved makes shall promptly be removed from
the job site.
(2) Whenever requested by the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor
shall send materials to be tested by an independent institute selected by
the Employer’s Representative immediately; any extra expanse for testing
shall be of the contractor responsibility.
equipment that deviate from the specification or from approved samples,
Representative in writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality
for approval.
(1) As soon as the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall prepare shop-
to be installed. These shop-drawings shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval not later than 30 days before
installation.
(2) The drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy with regard
to dimensions taken in the building(s) and shall closely follow
manufacturer's recommendations. All submitted drawings shall be signed
by the Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the
date(s) of revision(s).
(3) In case shop-drawings require modifications for whichever reason, the
Contractor has to clearly identify the portion that was modified, and has
to indicate the running number of revision every time that a revision-
(4) The installation detailed shall be checked with the building works, the
structure and other related trades to prevent conflicts that may cause
delay of the project.
(5) Size and scale of the shop-drawings shall be at least 1:100 scale except


Representative.
(7) The Contractor shall not proceed his work for a certain part or section,
prior to the approval of the shop-drawings therefore. Expense incurred
because of modification that have to be made as a result of lack of
approved shop-drawings shall be borne by the Contractor.
(8) Approval of the shop-drawings by the Employer’s Representative shall
(9) The approval of the Employer’s Representative never releases the
(10) Shop-drawings submitted without sufficient detailed shall be rejected and
new submission shall be required.
(11) The Contractor shall submit 3 blueprint copies of all shop-drawings for
approval. If approved by the Employer’s Representative, one copy shall
bear the Employer’s Representative stamp indicating the date of
approval, and shall be returned to the Contractor. After approval, 4
copies of blueprint are required and additional copies may be requested
by the Employer’s Representative as necessary.
installation and detail all relevant data concerning makes, types,
numbers, capacities, sized and quantities, etc.
(2) The Contractor shall submit to the owner 3 sets of prints and 1 set of
reproducible drawings.


building contractor in preparing passage ways and storage facilities.
(2) The Contractor shall responsible for all expense incurred during shipping
and transporting of material and equipment to the job site. The materials
and equipment shall be handled in a manner to prevent warping, twisting,
bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft of damage or any
kind what so ever.
(3) The shipping documents of particular materials and equipment shall be
submitted to the Employer’s Representative as soon as the materials and
equipment have arrived at the Site.
2.1.3 Execution
(1) The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water
pipe for his own use at suitable connection points and shall bear the
expense of usage, which shall be removed upon completion of sections
of the Works.
loss to :
 All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected
thereby.
 All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein,

indicated by the building contractor and shall maintain his working area in
it ready for immediately occupation.
(1) Test all plumbing equipment upon completion of installation to ensure
Documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all equipment furnished, installed or
connected by the Contractor to assure proper installation, setting,
connection, and functioning in accordance with the plans and
specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer’s Representative
field Engineer.
Representative to determine that equipment, material and system meet
requirements of the Specifications.
(7) Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material
due to improper test procedures or test apparatus handling, and shall
replace or restore to original condition any damaged equipment or
material.
(8) Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and


the tests.
(10) The conduit and wiring system, shall be checked to ensure that the
system has been installed in such a way as to provide a safe and reliable
system.
(11) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturer
as recommended by the manufacturer i.e., circuit breaker, low voltage
switchboard, motor (if any) etc unless specifically waived by the
(12) Include all additional tests issued by Employer’s Representative that he
deems necessary because of field conditions, to determine that
equipment and material and systems meet requirements of these
Specifications.
(13) Be responsible for all damage to equipment or material due to improper
test procedures or test apparatus handling.
(14) Cost incurred during testing i.e., electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be
borned by the Contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these
(1) The manual shall be prepared in hard cover building in sets to be
completed work.
 Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and materials
that have been approved.
 Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete
with installation operations and the maintenance
 Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
 Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare
parts.

 Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and

yearly.
 Section 6 Comprises system operation manual
Representative for approval first.
2.1.3.5 Training of Operators
After acceptance of the completed work, the Contractor shall train the operator
(s) and maintenance staff of operator for a period of not less than 15
consecutive days until they are competent to operate the system by
themselves.
(1) The Contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working
order the works as specified.
of the plumbing installation, as built drawing. It will be sufficient to
modify these contract drawings showing any amendments to the service
which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the owner
representative for approval.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the owner representative on completion
of the works, manufacturer's literature, specifications, technical
information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END OF SECTION

2.2 COLD WATER SUPPLY PUMP

2.2.1 General
(1) Pumps used for the same function shall be of the same manufacturer.
(2) The unit shall be especially selected to meet the project requirements,
from reputable manufacturers.
(1) Pumps and accessories shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 ASTM A159-83 (1993) : Standard Specification for Automotive
Gray Iron Castings:
 ASTM B584 (2000) : Standard Specification for Copper Alloy
Sand Castings for General Applications
 ASTM B36/B36M (1995) : Standard Specification for Brass Plate,
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar
 ASTM A48/A48M (2000) : Standard Specification for Gray Iron
Castings
(3) The standards and codes as mention in 3.2.1.2 can be equivalent by
another standards and codes, if it equal or better than standards and
codes mention in 3.2.1.2 when comply between two codes.
2.2.1.3 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit Pump’s performance selection, material lists and
technical data for approval before purchasing.
The manufacturer must specialize in the specified equipment and having
2.2.1.5 Warranty
All part of the cold water supply pump shall be guaranteed by the contractor
at least 2 years after handover.

2.2.2 Material
2.2.2.1 Description
(1) The cold water supply pump in this section shall include water transfer
pump and package water booster pump set.
(2) The Water Transfer Pump
 The water transfer pump shall be centrifugal, single stage or multi-
stage volute type. They shall be end suction or vertical inline as
indicated on the Drawings. They shall be driven by electric motors
with flexible couplings. The pumps and motors shall be mounted on
steel base plate.
 The transfer pump shall be completed with pump starter and control
panel with all automatic control function and can be interface to the
building management system (BMS).
(3) Water Supply Pump-Constant Pressure Booster Pump Set
 The pumps shall be end suction centrifugal or multi stage turbine
type.
 The water supply pumps shall be constant pressures with continuous
running operation sequence. The booster pump set shall be pressure
switch controlled.
 The entire booster system shall be factory prefabricated on a
common structural steel stand with all interconnection piping anti-
vibration mounting and wiring completed and operationally tested
prior to shipment. Complete package shall also include isolation
valves on the suction and discharge at each pump. Galvanized steel
suction and discharge pipe manifolds as well as copper tubing with
shut-off cocks for gauges and pressure switch, will be furnished
assemble.
 The booster pump set shall be completed with pump starter and
control panel with all automatic control function and can be
interface to the building management system (BMS).
(4) Pumps shall be selected for a total efficiency of not less than 50 percent.
2.2.2.2 Component
(1) Centrifugal Pump
 End Suction Centrifugal Type
- Pumps shall be of single-stage horizontal end suction centrifugal

type, frame or closed couple operating at not over 3,000 rpm or

as indicated on the Drawings.
- The pumps shall be designed so that removal of the pump
impeller will not interfere with the piping system (back pull out
pump).
 In-line Centrifugal Type
- Pumps shall be of the single-stage vertical mounted. Split coupled
or close coupled design, in-line centrifugal type, single suction
with volute type casing operating at a speed of not over 3000 rpm.
- The pumps shall be designed so that removal of the pump
impeller will not interfere with the piping system (back pull-out
pump).
(2) Centrifugal Pump Component
 Casings
- Casings of all pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of
10 kg/cm2 or 1.5 times the actual discharge pressure, whichever is
greater.
- Pressure classification of flange connections shall correspond to
casing working pressures.
- Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty.
- Water discharge diffusers shall be included to reduce radial torque
to the impeller.
 Wearing Rings
- All pumps having discharge connections larger than 50 mm and
operating at more than 2 kg/cm2 total dynamic head shall be
provided with casing wearing rings.
- These rings shall be suitable for an individual application. Rings
shall be replaceable, and positively keyed to prevent rotation.
 Impellers
- Impellers shall be one-piece, zinc free bronze and dynamically
balanced. Impellers of pumps having 40 mm and larger discharge
connection shall be fully enclosed and hydraulically balanced.
- Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an
axial position by shaft sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers
shall be fully protected against damage due to reverse rotation.

 Shafts
- Shafts for pumps shall be of stainless steel, (chrome-iron or nickel-
iron) with high safety precautions to withstand easily the torsional
loads with other stresses to which they may be subjected. They
shall be so designed that there will be no detrimental vibrational
stresses.
 Bearings
- Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball bearing.
- The bearings shall be self-sealed, and housed in malleable-iron
housing aligned to a bearing bracket by means of large precision
registers.
- Bearing shall be removable without dismantling any rotating
element inside the pump.
 Shaft Seal
- Unless otherwise specified, shaft seals shall be mechanical type.
 Couplings
- All pumps, other than close coupled pumps, shall be provided
with urethane flexible couplings or steel pins and bushing with a
service factor of at least 1.5 for an individual application.
- Spacer couplings shall be required for back pull out end suction
pumps.
- Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or
expansion. Suitable coupling guards shall also be provided.
 Base Plates
- Each flexible coupled pump shall be provided with a cast-iron or
fabricated mild steel base plate to hold both the pump and the
motor in correct alignment.
- Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
 Miscellaneous Fittings
- High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks.
These cocks shall be extended outside of any insulation. Low
points of casings shall be provided with valve drains and both
inlet and outlet connections with properly located gauge tapings.
 Motors
- Each pump shall be driven at the speed indicated on the drawing,

380V / 3  / 50 Hz. totally enclosed fan-cooled, insulation class F

and protection class IP54 electric motor and IP 55 for outdoor
motor.
- The rated kW shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power
required
- The motors shall be of a high efficiency design and should be
supplied as an integral part of the pump. The contractor shall
submit technical data for approval.
- Bearing of each motor shall be of anti-friction type ball bearing or
roller bearings.
(3) Instrumentation and Control Panel for Transfer Pump
The transfer pump shall included the following instrument and control
features:-
 Main selector switch “Auto-Off-Manual”
 Pressure gauge
 Flow sequencing
 Lead-lag pump selector switch
 Pump run light
 Control power light and switch
 Audible alarm buzzer
 Water storage tank low level system shut down
 Control panel
 Gate vale, check valve
 Strainer
 Pump overload light
 Flexible Connectors.
 Storage tank and roof tank level switch
(4) Instrumentation and Control Panel for Constant Pressure Booster Pump
Set
The booster pump set shall included the following instrument and
control features:-
 Main selector switch “Auto-Off-Manual”
 Pressure gauge and pressure switch
 Flow sequencing

 Lead-lag pump selector switch

 Pump run light
 Control power light and switch
 Audible alarm buzzer
 Water storage tank low level system shut down
 Water storage tank and roof tank high level system alarm
 Control panel
 Pressure regulating valve
 Gate vale, check valve
 Strainer
 Flow switch
 Pump overload light
 Flexible Connectors.
 Diaphragm pre-charged diaphragm type closed pressure tank.
2.2.2.3 System Control
(1) Cold Water Transfer Pump
 The transfer pump shall be controlled by storage tank and roof tank
level switch.
 The transfer pump controlled shall be parallel and alternated, when
the lead pump cannot handle the volume flow rate of the system
then the lag pump will be automatically start to run parallel.
(2) Constant Pressure Booster Pump Set
 System pressure controlled shall be maintain within + 5% by pilot
operated diaphragm type, combination pressure regulating and non-
slam check valve on each pump discharge line, or stabilized and
controlled by a pressure reducing valve.
 The booster pump set controller shall be parallel and alternated,
when the lead pump cannot handle the volume flowrate of the
system then lag pump will be automatically start to run parallel.

2.2.3 Execution
(1) Pumps shall be installed by following the manufacturer recommendations
and as indicated on the detail drawing.
(2) Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which are,
in turn, placed on a concrete base. The isolators shall be selected and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations such
that no disturbing vibration and noise is being transmitted to the nearby
structure.
(3) Ensure that no Cavitation occurs at the eye of the impeller
(4) Any suction and discharge pipes, which are bigger than the pump
connections shall be equipped with eccentric reducers.
(5) Flexible connections shall be installed on both the suction and on the
discharge pipe.
(6) Shut-off valve and strainers shall have the same size as the suction pipe.
Check valve and shut-off valve shall have the same size as the discharge
pipe.
(7) Drainage from each pump shall be discharged to the nearest drain. Each
drain pipe shall be of galvanized steel pipe as detailed within this
specification.
2.2.3.2 Testing and commissioning
(1) Operating test run shall be provided from manufacturer.
(2) Before start-up, grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the pump and
motor.
(3) After installations are completed, all pumps shall undergo test run. Any
adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all pumps will
operate either the required performance. Report forms to contain
following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions
for each Item mentioned below:
 Date and time of test.
 Ambient conditions at time of test.
 Pump maker, type, name and serial number.
 Pump rpm.
 Pump amperage (Individual Operation).
 Pump amperage (Multiple Operation).
 Rated motor amperage, starter relay number and amperage rating.

 Pump inlet pressure (Individual Operation).

 Pump inlet pressure (Multiple Operation).
 Pump outlet pressure (Individual Operation).
 Pump outlet pressure (Multiple Operation).
END OF SECTION

2.3 SEWAGE PUMP SETS

2.3.1 General
(1) Pumps used for the same function shall be of the same manufacturer.
(2) The unit shall be especially selected to meet the project requirements,
from reputable manufacturers.
(1) Pumps and accessories shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 ASTM A159-83 (1993) : Standard Specification for Automotive Gray
Iron Castings:
 ASTM B584 (2000) : Standard Specification for Copper Alloy
Sand Castings for General Applications
 ASTM B36/B36M (1995) : Standard Specification for Brass Plate,
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar
 ASTM A48/A48M (2000) : Standard Specification for Gray Iron
Castings
(2) In the case of conflict or uncertainty in the application of the above
standards and codes, the most stringent regulation shall govern.
2.2.1.3 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit Pump’s performance selection, material lists and
technical data for approval before purchasing.

2.2.1.5 Warranty
All part of the booster pump shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least
2 years after handover.
2.3.2 Material
2.3.2.1 Description
(1) The sewage pump in this section shall include drainage pump and sewage
pump.
(2) The submersible drainage and sewage pump shall be completed with
pump starter and control panel with all automatic control function and
can be interface to the building management system (BMS) and SCADA
system.
2.3.2.2 Component
(1) Submersible Drainage Pump
 Drainage Pump
- The pump shall be of the automatic, electrical-motor-driven
submerged type, complete with all necessary control equipments.
The use of guide rail with fitting with the pumps in the sump has
made the removal and installation easier by suspending with the
chain.
- For the small drainage pump shall be completed with built-in
level control device.
- Pump housing shall be made of cast iron or stainless steel.
 Motor
Pump shall be directly connected to a vertical electrical motor
having continuous oiling device on packed bearing sealed against dirt
and moisture.
The motor shall be class F insulation with built-in thermal protection.
 Control
The motor of large unit submersible drainage pump shall be operated
by a float switch adjusted to start and stop the motor at predetermined
water levels. The switch shall be completely enclosed in a rain tight
cast-aluminum case. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with and
automatic alternator to allow for the change in operation form one
pump to the other and for starting the second pump if the flow to
the sump exceeds the capacity of the first pump.

 Discharge Line and Accessories

The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a check
valve and union in an accessible location near the pump.
(2) Submersible Sewage Pump
 The submersible pump shall be constructed such that motor is the
integral part of the unit and shall be capable of operating in
submerged condition without any damage.
 The shaft shall be of mechanical type, lubricated with oil. The
sealing effect shall be kept for a long usage.
 The pump impeller shall have adequate passage to handle solids,
and shall be of either multi-vane vortex design or of semi-axial
centrifugal flow design, and it shall be statically and dynamically
balanced.
 The pump with cutter device, If specified in drawing, shall have a
rotating cutting edge and a stationary cutting edge. The rotating
cutting edge shall be made of tungsten carbide or hardened stainless
steel, and the stationary cutting edge shall be surface-hardened.
 The motor shall be submersible type and be capable of running in
submerged condition without any damage.
 The motor shaft shall be common to the pump shaft.
 The bearing shall be able enough to sustain pump thrust and shall
maintain its function for a long usage.
 The cable entry shall be constructed such that water does not leak
into the terminal box even along with the cable conductors if the
sheath is damage.
 Motor protector shall be as follows :
- D.O.L. start motor shall have a motor protector which is
connected in the main circuit of single phase motor winding or
neutral point of three phase motor winding. The protector shall
be such that, if it senses overheating and/or overcurrent, it
automatically cuts the circuitry to stop the motor. The protector
shall automatically reset to re-start the pump when cooling down
has occurred.
- Start-Delta start motor shall have three miniature protectors
(thermostat) which are connected in series and embedded on the
motor windings. The protectors shall sense motor overheating and
give a signal through the cabtyre cable, then actuate on the

magnetic contactor in control panel or starter to cut the power

supply circuit. The type of contactor of the miniature protectors
shall be B-contact.
 Material
Pump casing : Iron casting, Stainless casting, Bronze casting
Impeller : Iron casting, Stainless steel or casting,
Bronze casting
Mechanical Sealed : SiC (silicon carbide) or WC (tungsten carbide)
seal
Shaft : Stainless steel
Cabtyre cable : P.V.C. Sheathed, Chloroprene sheated
Motor frame : Iron casting, Stainless steel or casting
 Accessories
- Automatic discharge connection components ; Duckfoot bend,
support, Guide pipes (Galvanized steel, Stainless steel) and Lifting
chain(Galvanized steel, Stainless steel)
- Free-standing type components ; Discharge bend, Pump stand
(strainer)
- 5 meters of cab type cable
 Painting
The painting shall be epoxy-tar painting, chloroprene rubber painting
or other painting recommended by manufacturer. Stainless steel
components shall not be painted.
2.3.3 Execution
Installation shall be followed instruction manual from manufacturer
(1) Before start-up, grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the pump and
motor.
(2) After installations are completed, all pumps shall undergo test run.
Any adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all pumps
will operate either the required performance. Report forms to contain
following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions
for each Item mentioned below:
 Ambient conditions at time of test.

 Pump make, type, name and serial number.

 Pump rpm.
 Pump amperage (Individual Operation).
 Pump amperage (Multiple Operation).
 Rated motor amperage, starter relay number and amperage rating.
END OF SECTION

2.4 WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT

2.4.1 General
(1) The works shall be executed to completion in conformity with the
drawing and these specifications
(2) Grease trap tank shall be used for separated grease from waste water of
the kitchen and washing area.
2.4.1.2 Standard and References
(1) Purify waste water that flowing out to public water resources shall
comply with the BMA. Regulations
(2) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issued unless
governing authorities require an earlier issue.
2.4.1.3 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit waste water treatment plant’s performance
selection, material lists and technical data for approval before purchasing.
2.4.1.5 Warranty
All parts of the wastewater treatment plant shall be guaranteed by the
contractor at least 2 years after handover.
2.4.2 Material
2.4.2.1 Description
(1) Waste water treatment tank shall be completely package onsite
treatment unit.
(2) Treatment system shall be of anaerobic filter and contact aeration
process.
(3) Waste water treatment tank shall be suitable to treat domestic

wastewater to purify wastewater prior to flow out to public drain.
(4) Tank material shall be made of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) or
equivalent materials.

(5) Influent BOD shall be of 250 mg/l, treated water effluent BOD shall be
lower than 20 mg/l.
2.4.2.2 Components
The wastewater treatment unit shall consist of the following component:-
(1) Solid separation tank
(2) Anaerobic filter tank
(3) Contact Aeration tank
(4) Sedimentation tank
2.4.3 Execution
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Test equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION

2.5 OIL INTERCEPTOR

2.5.1 General
The unit shall be especially selected to meet the project requirements from
reputable manufactures.
2.5.1.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit Oil interceptor unit performance selection,
material lists and technical data for approval before purchasing.
2.5.1.4 Warranty
All part of the oil interceptor unit shall be guaranteed by the contractor at
least 2 years after handover.
2.5.2 Material
2.5.2.1 Description
(1) Oil interceptor unit shall be completely package onsite treatment unit
which compact suitable to be used for separate oil from oily waste water.
(2) The works shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the
Drawings and these Specifications.
2.5.2.2 Component
(1) System description
Oily water influent will introduced in to unit which equipped with a large
surface of special media to promote the coalescence of hydrocarbons. Oil
will rapidly move and accumulates on the surface of the interceptor and
then removed via the skimmer to wastewater treatment plant.
(2) Design Parameter
Design Influent free oil concentration shall be of 4250 PPM and effluent
free oil concentration shall less than 5 PPM
(3) The oil interceptor shall comprised with following compartment:-
 Sludge compartment

 Hydrocarbon interceptor compartment

2.5.3 Execution
Test equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION

2.6 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING WORK

2.6.1 General
The contractor shall furnish and install all piping work including all necessary
parts as shown on the drawings.
(1) The piping work shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM D2239 (2003) : Standard Specification for Polyethylene
(PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
 TIS 982-1990 : High-density polyethylene pipes for drinking
water services
 AWWA C203 : Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings
for Steel Water Pipelines
 AWWA C901 : Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure
Pipe and Tubing for Water Service
 BS 1387 (1985) : Medium Black & Galvanized Steel Pipe
 BS 143 & 1256 (1986) : Malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy
threaded pipe fittings
2.6.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit all material, catalog, material lists and technical
data request for approval before installation.
2.6.1.5 Warranty
All part or the piping work shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2
years after handover.

2.6.1.6 Delivery, Handling, Storage and Cleaning

(1) Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be kept
closed with temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed,
it shall be opened and pounded to remove any foreign substances, or
swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid
rusting. If necessary, carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodic rust
converter or red lead primer.
(3) During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every
precaution to prevent any debris from being left in the pipes. He shall be
responsible for any damage that may occur.
(4) Immediately after erection, exposed threads at all fittings shall be painted
with zinc-chromate paint, and after welding each joint shall be wire-
brushed and then painted with zinc-chromate paint.
(5) Before start-up, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water
until it runs clear.
(6) Fixtures and equipment shall be lightly covered and protected against
damage. At the completion of the work, fixtures, materials and equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a satisfactory condition.
2.6.2 Material
2.6.2.1 Description
(1) The cold water piping shall be the types or models, which are suitable for
the working fluid in the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the cold water piping system as specified
for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual working
pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
2.6.2.2 Component
(1) Cold water pipe
 Cold water pipe underground shall be High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) pipe Class PN 10 conforming to ASTM D2239, TIS 982-1990.
 Cold Water inside building shall be PPR
(2) Fittings for High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
 Fitting for HDPE pipes shall be high density polyethylene as
requirement or recommendation of manufacture.
(3) Fittings for PPR

 Fitting for PPR shall follow requirement or recommendation of

manufacturer
2.6.3 Execution
(1) General Piping Installation
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the
building walls and partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and drain
shall be not less than 1: 500. Branches from water mains shall be
taken in a manner that facilities venting and draining. Reductions in
bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except on
vertical pipes where concentric reduction may be used.
 All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can
be completely drained off and all air pockets in the water circuits
shall be suitably vented.
 Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be
adequately provided to facilitate maintenance. Overhead clearance
shall be at least 600 mm. over access ways, and where possible the
projection of valve stems into access ways shall be avoided. Pipe
works and pumps shall be so arranged that the removal for
maintenance of the equipment can be carried out with minimum
dismantling. Provision of all pipe fittings and accessories necessary for
the efficient functioning of the various systems shall be included.
 Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible.
Except where required to be connected to fitting outlets or headers,
they shall be joined by welding, solvent welding, screwing or
soldering as approved or indicated in these Specifications.
 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide
a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply
for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a
drainage system or a soil or waste pipe that will permit or make
possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the
water supply system. Where crossing a sewer or waste line is
inevitable, the water line shall be not less than 0.30 meters above
the sewer line, which shall be cast-iron soil pipe for not less than 30
meters on each side of the crossing.

 All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a

neat and orderly appearance, using fittings for all changes of
direction, and arranging pipe run parallel to or at right angles with
structural members of the building, to provide utmost head-room
and to clear lights and other obstructions. In general, suspended
pipes shall be installed as closely as possible to the overhead
structure.
(2) Workmanship
 All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the
site, and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing.
 Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely
without injury to itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe
shall be cut with pipe cutters and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All
cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to restore the
pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing
fitting.
 Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
(3) Location of Device
 All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so
located that they are accessible for repair and replacement.
(4) Connection to Equipments
 Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in
such a manner that undue strains between pipes and equipment are
eliminated.
 Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of the
equipment.
(5) Expansion and Contraction
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage
due to expansion and contraction during operation.
 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion
and contraction of the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated
by expansion loops or offsets.
(6) Differential Settlement

due to differential settlement of the pipe supports after installation.

The problems shall be avoided by providing flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of
black steel pipes. Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through
the entire floor construction and shall terminate 50 mm. above the
finished floor level.
 Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be
provided with full thickness sleeves made of standard weight black
steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm.
clearances around the pipe and covering insulation, if there is any.
Sleeves shall be set in place where the walls and partitions are built.
 Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided
with temporary centering caps and securely nailed or screwed to
formwork before the concrete is poured.
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass
through walls or floors.
 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance
between sleeves and pipes shall be filled with fire-resistant material.
The fire rating of the fire-resistant material shall be at least
equivalent to that of the fire wall.
 When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with
approved type of sealant shall be applied.
(8) Pipe Joints
 Joint for Threaded Pipe
- Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved teflon
tape or graphite compound applied to the male threads only.
Threads exposed after joints are made up shall be mopped with
compound.
- Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with the ends
being reamed before installation.
 Joint for Flanged Pipe
- Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm.
and at other places where necessary.

- Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts

are used only to tighten joints, rather than correct alignment.
Flanges shall be chosen to suit the maximum working pressure of
the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be cadmium-plated
steel.
 Welded Pipe Joint
- The edges of the pipe to be welded shall be machine-beveled
wherever possible. Gas cuts shall be true and free of all burnt metal.
Before welding, the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and
degreased. The welding technique shall be such as to ensure
penetration to the full thickness of the pipe wall and through
fusion of the deposited metal with the parent metal. During
welding the ends of the pipes shall be held firmly together by
suitable lugs, welded-on-bridge pieces or adequate tack welding.
Special care shall be taken to prevent formation of welded
obstructions and lodgment of welding residue inside the pipes.
Cracks, pinholes, excessive under-cutting, etc. shall be removed
and the joints rewelded. Welding materials and workmanship shall
be in accordance with AWS.
- Welders must be entirely competent and may be required to
perform site tests. Should the Employer’s Representative not be
satisfied, the welder must be replaced. The Employer’s
Representative reserves the right to order the cutout for inspection
of up to 1 percent of the total number of welds. In the event of
any inspected welds being, in the Employer’s Representative
opinion, unsatisfactory he reserves the right to order the removal
of further welds which in his opinion indicate faulty workmanship.
Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at no cost to
the Project.
- Either the electric arc or the oxy-acetylene welding method may
be used. Welding rods or electrodes shall have such composition
that the welds produced by them shall have the same analysis as
the parent metal and shall be of an approved type and brand.
(9) Hanger and Supports
 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be
supported by adjustable clevis type hangers with solid rods securely

attached to the building structure. Where several pipes run in a

parallel fashion, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate
hangers. All hangers shall have turnbuckles or other approved means
of adjustment. Where pipes, such as those from individual toilet
rooms to main stacks, are not low enough to permit the use of
turnbuckles, other means of adjustment shall be used. Chains, straps,
perforated bars, or wire hangers will not be accepted. All hangers and
supports shall be hot-dip galvanized. The maximum distances
between hangers and supports for horizontally mounted and
vertically mounted pipes shall be as indicated below.
 For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for
hangers of dissimilar metals, suitable apparition with a layer of felt
shall be provided to prevent corrosion. Hangers on structural steel is
absolutely prohibited, unless with the express approval from the
 Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and
securely bolted to the building structure. Anchors for copper and PVC
pipes shall be of the split ring type. Hangers in the plant room shall
be supported on springs.
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of
inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts,
and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Two fixings per
bracket shall be provided as follows:-
Nominal Pipe Size, mm. (inch) Fixing Rod Size, mm. (inch)
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized

 Underground pipe support and hanger shall be all Hot dip galvanize.
 Schedule of Pipe Supports as shown in the following table.

SCHEDULE OF PIPE SUPPORTS

Nominal Hanger Rod Maximum Interval (m.)
Pipe Size Min. Size Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
(mm.) (mm.) Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8
(10) Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plate

 Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all
exposed pipes passing through finished walls, finished partitions,
finished ceilings, and floors above grade.
 Plates shall be large enough to completely close the hole around
the pipe. Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws; spring clips
will not be acceptable.
 Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep escutcheons
shall be provided.

(11) Cutting and Repairing

 The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural
works shall be done only with specific approval from the Employer’s
Representative Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired
by skilled workmen of the trade involved.
(12) Invert Elevation
 The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to
laying pipes.
(13) Termination of Water and Drainage Piping
 Water and drainage pipes extended to points 1.50 meters beyond the
building structure shall be capped or plugged for future connection,
or connection under other sections of these Specifications.
 If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before
being connected to the utility systems, the locations of the end of
each pipe shall be marked with a stake properly tagged or otherwise
identified.
(14) Underground Pipes
 Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall
be made of Hot dip galvanized.
 Back fill and under-fill shall be made with sand.
(15) Flashing
Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4-pound
sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than 200 mm from the vent
pipes in all directions and shall extend up the vent pipe not less than 150
mm at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable-iron recess
roof couplings shall be installed to form counter-flashing or rain guards.
(16) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the
drawings, but, whether or not so indicated, shutoff gate valves shall
be furnished and installed in each supply main where it enters the
building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be of the
too expensive, if possible, please change to gate valve type. All
valves shall be installed in accessible locations or otherwise access
panels shall be provided. No valve shall be installed with its stem
below the horizontal. These valves shall be rated for 1034 kpa (150

psi) working pressure or more, unless otherwise shown on the

Drawings.
 Furnish and install a trap on each fixture and each piece of
equipment requiring connection to the sewer system, except fixtures
or equipment having an integral trap or seal. Each trap shall be
placed as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be
double-trapped. All traps installed in accessible locations shall have
cleanout plugs or other approved means for cleaning. Slip joints in
traps will be permitted only on the inlet side or in the trap seal.
(17) Water Pipe
 All pipes shall be installed with a pitch to drain. Where branches are
connected to vertical risers, each branch shall drain back to its
respective riser. Provide drain valves at all low points of the system
to permit complete draining.
 Branches from service lines may be taken of the top, bottom or side
of the main, using such cross over fittings as may be required by
conditions.
 Unions shall not be concealed in walls or partitions nor covered with
insulations.
(1) Cold water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than
specified or 1 ½ times the maximum working pressure, whichever is
greater, at the lowest point in the system. Care shall be taken to avoid
putting excessive pressure on safety devices, etc. These delicate control
mechanisms shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage.
The system shall be tested when water temperatures and average
ambient temperatures are approximately equal and constant. Test
pressure shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes without an
appreciable drop after the force pump has been disconnected.
(2) Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the
construction.
(3) Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks
in welded joints shall be cut out and rewelded. Caulking of leaks will not be
permitted.
(4) After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system
to be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained

dirt and mud have been removed before introducing chlorinating

material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or
hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less
than 50 PPM. and shall be introduced into the system in an approved
manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to
destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is
approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce
not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the extreme end of the system of the
retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened
and closed several times during the contact period.
(5) The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine is reduced to less than 0.2 PPM. During the flushing period all
valves and faucets shall be turned on and off several times.
END OF SECTION

2.7 SANITARY PIPING WORK

2.7.1 General
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install all piping work including all
necessary parts as shown on the drawings.
(1) Piping and accessories shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 ASTM A74 : Standard specification for cast iron soil pipe and
fittings
 ASTM D2239 : Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
 TIS 982-1990 : High-density polyethylene pipes for drinking water
services
 TIS 277-1989 : Galvanized steel pipes
 TIS 533-1987 : Cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes
 TIS 604-1986 : Cast iron pipe fittings
 TIS 249-1997 : Malleable cast iron threaded pipe fittings
 ASTM A120 : Welded Steel Pipes Zinc-Coated, Threaded and
Coupled (GTC)
2.7.1.3 Submittals


2.7.1.5 Warranty

2.7.2 Material
2.7.2.1 Description
The sanitary piping shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the
working fluid in the system.
2.7.2.2 Component
(1) Soil, Waste and Drain Pipes
 Soil and waste pipe shall be PVC or PP conforming to ASTM 74-42,
TIS 533-1987
 Run underground Soil and waste pipe shall be High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe PN 6.3 conforming to ASTM D2239, TIS 982-
1990
(2) Vent Pipe
 Vent Pipe inside building shall be PVC or PP.
 Underground vent pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
pipe PN 6.3 conforming to ASTMD 2239, TIS 982-1990
(3) Waste Pipes from Drainage Pumps
 Pipe from drainage pump shall be PVC or PP.
2.7.3 Execution
(1) General piping installation
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the
 All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can
 Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be


 Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible.
 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide
 All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a
structure.
(2) Workmanship
 All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the
site, and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing.
 Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely
without injury to itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe
shall be cut with pipe cutters and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All
cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to restore the
pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing
fitting.
 Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
 All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so


 Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in
such a manner that undue strains between pipes and equipment are
eliminated.
 Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of the
equipment.
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage
 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the
expansion and contraction of the pipe is excessive or cannot be
compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
due to differential settlement of the pipe supports after installation.
The problems could be avoided by providing flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of
 Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be
steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm.
 Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass
 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance

 When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with
(8) Pipe Joints
 Joint for Threaded Pipe
- Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon
compound.
- Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with the ends
being reamed before installation.
 Joint for Flanged Pipe
steel.
 Joint for HDPE Pipes
- All HDPE pipe works shall be strictly installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. It shall be joined with thermal butt
fuse welding method.
- Stub end and backing ring shall be provided where connect to
steel pipe, valves or other equipments with flanged joint.
 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be
hangers.
All hangers shall have turnbuckles or other approved means of
adjustment. Where pipes, such as those from individual toilet rooms
to main stacks, are not low enough to permit the use of turnbuckles,
other means of adjustment shall be used. Chains, straps, perforated
bars, or wire hangers will not be accepted. All hangers and supports
shall be hot-dip galvanized. The maximum distances between

hangers and supports for horizontally mounted and vertically

mounted pipes shall be as indicated below.
 For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for
 Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized.

 Underground pipe support and hanger shall be Hot dip Galvanized.
Schedule of Pipe Supports as shown in the following table.
Maximum Interval (m.)
Nominal Hanger Rod
Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
Pipe Size(mm.) Min.Size(mm.)
Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0


Maximum Interval (m.)
Nominal Hanger Rod
Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
Pipe Size(mm.) Min.Size(mm.)
Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8
 The maximum interval of horizontal run cast iron pipe 1.2 m, with at
least one hanger for each pipe section. Hangers should be located
adjacent to joints, changes in direction and branch connection.
 Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all
exposed pipes passing through finished walls, finished partitions,
finished ceilings, and floors above grade. Plates shall be large enough
to completely close the hole around the pipe.
 Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws; spring clips will not be
acceptable. Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep
escutcheons shall be provided.
 The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural
works shall be done only with specific approval from the Employer’s
Representative.
 Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by skilled
workmen of the trade involved.
 The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to
laying pipes.
 Water and drainage pipes extended to points 1.50 meters beyond the
building structure shall be capped or plugged for future connection,
or connection under other sections of these Specifications.
 If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before
being connected to the utility systems, the locations of the end of

each pipe shall be marked with a stake properly tagged or otherwise

identified.
 Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall
be made of Hot dip Galvanized.
 Back fill and under-fill shall be made with sand.
(15) Flashing
 Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with
4-pound sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than 200 mm
from the vent pipes in all directions and shall extend up the vent
pipe not less than 150 mm at which point threaded standard cast-
iron or malleable-iron recess roof couplings shall be installed to form
counter-flashing or rain guards.
(16) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the
building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be gate
valve type. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations or
otherwise access panels shall be provided. No valve shall be
installed with its stem below the horizontal. These valves shall be
rated for 10 kg/cm2 working pressure or more, unless otherwise
 Furnish and install a trap on each fixture and each piece of equipment
requiring connection to the sewer system, except fixtures or
equipment having an integral trap or seal. Each trap shall be placed
as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be double-
trapped. All traps installed in accessible locations shall have cleanout
plugs or other approved means for cleaning. Slip joints in traps will
be permitted only on the inlet side or in the trap seal.
(17) Floor Cleanout
 Floor cleanouts shall have an iron body ferrule with raised head brass
plug or with spanner wrench sockets.

(18) Drain
 Outside Floor Drain
Floor drains shall be of the cast-iron type and be provided with trap,
chromium-plated brass inlet grating and round removable cast-brass
strainer. They shall, furthermore, be threaded or caulked connection.
 Floor and Area Drain
The size of the drains shall be determined by the branch size
indicated or as shown on the Drawings. Drains and backwater valves
installed in connection with waterproofed floors shall be equipped
with bolted-type clamping devices. Floor drain for mechanical room
shall be tunnel floor drain as indicated in the Drawings.
(19) Grease Trap
 Grease trap tank shall be installed in the position shown on the
Drawings and be of the sizes and dimensions indicated typical details,
as shown. They shall be constructed of complete sets from
manufacture.
(20) Soil, Waste and Drain Piping
 Slope
Horizontal lines shall be installed with a minimum slope in the
direction of flow of 2 cm per meter (1:50) for pipes of 80 mm and
smaller sizes and with 1 cm. per meter (1:100) for larger pipe sizes.
 Fitting
All changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers while changes in direction shall be made with "Y"
fittings, combination Y and 1/8 bends, long sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6,
1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary "Tee" branches may be used when the
direction of flow is from a horizontal line to a vertical line, and short
sweep 1/4 bends may be used on the discharge from a water closet.
Union connections shall be made with tucker or hub drainage fittings.
(21) Vent Line
 Slope
Horizontal lines shall be pitched to drain back to the drainage system
without forming traps, using fittings as required.
 Arrangement
Except where otherwise indicated, main vertical soil and waste stacks
shall be extended full size to and above the roof line as vents.

Where practicable, two or more vent pipes shall be connected

together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vertical vent
pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through
the roof. Vertical vent pipes may be connected into on main vent
riser above vented fixtures. Unless indicated otherwise, sanitary piping
shall form circuit or loop vents with no dead ends or inverted
siphons. Circuit or loop vent lines shall be connected at a height of
not less than 300 mm. above the highest fixture served. Horizontal
waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be
provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is shown.
Where a vent is taken from a horizontal drain line, the vent
connection shall be made above the centerline of the drain, either
on the top or at an angle of not more than 45 degrees from the
vertical. The bottoms of vent stacks shall be so connected that any
dirt or scale from the inside of the stacks will be flushed out through
the soil or waste piping. All vent stacks shall be extended to a
minimum of 300 mm above the roof and be equipped with a flashing
fitting and special waterproof hood.
(1) The contractor shall primarily perform his own pressure test. The actual
test shall be performed by the witness of the Employer’s Representative.
(2) For partial pressure test of soil, waste and vent pipes, fill up the part
being tested by water up to 3 metres over the tested part. For the whole
system test, fill up the system until overflow. Sanitary wares shall be
tightly sealed, and after one hour of filling up, look for any leakage.
(3) If sanitary wares are already installed before test; fill up water into all
traps/charge the smoke or odour into the system until the smoke or
odour comes out at the vent through pipe. Then seal the vent through
pipe, and charge the smoke or odour to the pressure of one inch water
gauge. 15 minutes of this pressure means passing of the test.
END OF SECTION

2.8 STORM DRAIN PIPING WORK

2.8.1 General
(1) The Piping work and accessories shall comply with the following codes
and standards.
 ASTM A74 : Standard specification for cast iron soil pipe and
fittings
 ASTM D2239 : Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
 TIS 982-1990 : High-density polyethylene pipes for drinking
water services
 TIS 277-1989 : Galvanized steel pipes
 TIS 533-1987 : Cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes
 TIS 604-1986 : Cast iron pipe fittings
 TIS 249-1997 : Malleable cast iron threaded pipe fittings
 ASTM A120 : Welded Steel Pipes Zinc-Coated, Threaded and
Coupled (GTC)
 ASTM D2241 : Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
 ASTM D1785 : Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

2.8.1.3 Submittals
2.8.1.5 Warranty
2.8.2 Material
2.8.2.1 Description
(1) The storm drain piping shall be the types or models, which are satiable
for the working fluid in the system.

2.8.2.2 Component
(1) Rain Water Pipes
 Rain water pipes inside building shall be PVC or PP.
 Underground rain water pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) pipe PN 6.3 conforming to ASTMD 2239, TIS 982-1990
(2) Storm Drain Pipe
Storm drain pipe shall be Reinforced Concrete pipe, Tongue & Groove
Joint Type, conforming to TISI 128-2528 Class 3 or Local Standard which
equal.
(3) Fittings for High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Fitting for HDPE pipes shall be high density polyethylene as requirement
or recommendation of manufacture.
2.8.3 Execution
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the

 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide

structure.
(2) Workmanship
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site,
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be
installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to itself
or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters
and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to
remove all burrs and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in
size shall be made with reducing fitting. Pipe bends and bushings are
prohibited.
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so
Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such
a manner that undue strains between pipes and equipment are
eliminated. Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal
of the equipment.

 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the

expansion and contraction of the pipe is excessive or cannot be
compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due
to differential settlement of the pipe supports after installation. The
problems shall be avoided by providing flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm.
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass
(8) Pipe Joints
 Joint for Threaded Pipe
Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon
compound. Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with
the ends being reamed before installation.

 Joint for Flanged Pipe

steel.
 Joint for HDPE Pipes
- All HDPE pipe works shall be strictly installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. It shall be joined with thermal butt
welding method.
- Stud end and backing ring shall be provided where connect to
steel pipe valves or the other equipments with flanged joint.
 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be
vertically mounted pipes shall be as indicated below.


Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall hot dip galvanized.

 Underground pipe support and hanger shall be Hot dip galvanized.
 Schedule of Pipe Supports as shown in the following table.

Nominal Hanger Rod Maximum Interval (m.)
Pipe Size Min.Size Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
(mm.) (mm.) Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8


Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed
pipes passing through finished walls, finished partitions, finished ceilings,
and floors above grade. Plates shall be large enough to completely close
the hole around the pipe. Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws;
spring clips will not be acceptable. Where necessary to cover beads of
fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided.
The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works
shall be done only with specific approval from the Employer’s
Representative Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by
skilled workmen of the trade involved.
The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to laying
pipes.
Water and drainage pipes extended to points 1.50 meters beyond the
building structure shall be capped or plugged for future connection, or
connection under other sections of these Specifications. If trenches are
closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the
utility systems, the locations of the end of each pipe shall be marked
with a stake properly tagged or otherwise identified.
(15) Flashing
Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4-pound
sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than 200 mm from the vent
pipes in all directions and shall extend up the vent pipe not less than 150
mm at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable-iron recess
roof couplings shall be installed to form counter-flashing or rain guards.
(16) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the


building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be of the
too expensive, if possible, please change to gate valve type. All
valves shall be installed in accessible locations or otherwise access
panels shall be provided. No valve shall be installed with its stem
below the horizontal. These valves shall be rated for 10 kg/cm2
working pressure or more, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
 Furnish and install a trap on each fixture and each piece of equipment
requiring connection to the sewer system, except fixtures or
equipment having an integral trap or seal. Each trap shall be placed
as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be double-
trapped. All traps installed in accessible locations shall have cleanout
plugs or other approved means for cleaning. Slip joints in traps will
be permitted only on the inlet side or in the trap seal.
(17) Floor Cleanout
Floor cleanouts shall have an iron body ferrule with raised head brass
plug or with spanner wrench sockets.
(18) Drain
 Outside Floor Drain
Floor drains shall be of the cast-iron type and be provided with trap,
chromium-plated brass inlet grating and round removable cast-brass
strainer. They shall, furthermore, be threaded or caulked connection.
 Floor and Area Drain
The size of the drains shall be determined by the branch size
indicated or as shown on the Drawings. Drains and backwater valves
installed in connection with waterproofed floors shall be equipped
with bolted-type clamping devices. Floor drain for mechanical room
shall be tunnel floor drain as indicated in the Drawings.
 Roof Drain
Roof drains shall be of the heavy pattern cast-iron type, as specified
on the drawings, with an integral flange and satisfactory device for
clamping or otherwise securing the roofing and flashing to make a
watertight connection. Openings in the strainer shall have a
combined area equal to twice the area of the drain outlet. The outlet
shall be equipped with necessary parts for proper connection to
threaded pipes of the same size as downspout.


Operating test run shall be provided from manufacturer
END OF SECTION

2.9 VALVE AND ACCESSORIES

2.9.1 General
(1) Valve shall be provided as indicated in the drawing.
(2) Shut-off valves shall be furnished as necessary for a satisfactory operation
of all apparatus.
(3) Valves of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
(1) The valves and accessories shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 ASTM A53/A53M-04a : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,
Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
 ASTM B75-02 : Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube.
 TIS 277-2521 : Steel Pipes
 ASME/ANSI B16 : Standards of Pipes and Fittings
 ASME Section VIII : Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Codes
 ANSI/NEMA 250 : Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
 ASTM A216 : Carbon steel castings, suitable for fusion
welding for high temperature service.
2.9.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit all valves and accessories performance selection,
catalog, material lists and technical data for approval before installation.

2.9.1.5 Warranty
All parts of valves and accessories shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer
and/or by the contractor for at least 2 years after handover.
2.9.2 Material
2.9.2.1 Description
(1) The valves shall be the types or models which are suitable for the
working fluid in the system. The rated working pressure of the valve as
specified for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual
working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
(2) The diameter of hand wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as
to allow tight closure by hand with the application of reasonable force so
that neither additional leverage nor damage shall be imposed upon the
stem, seat and disc. Where indicated or required, for inaccessible
overhead valves, chain-operated hand wheels including rustproof chain
and chain guide shall be provide.
2.9.2.2 Component
(1) Gate Valves
 Valves of size up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where
appropriate, with threaded ends, solid wedges and non-rising stems.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron or
ductile iron where appropriate, with flanged ends, solid wedges and
rising stems.
(2) Globe Valves
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where
appropriate with threaded ends and union bonnets.
 Valves of 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron or ductile
iron, bronze-trimmed where appropriate, with flanged ends.
(3) Swing-Check Valves
 Valves shall be of the swing type suitable for the horizontal or
vertical operation with a two-piece hinge and accessible disc cover.
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½) inches) shall be bronze where
appropriate, with threaded ends and full area Y pattern bodies.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron, swing
pattern and bronze-trimmed where appropriate, with flanged ends.

(4) Lift-Check Valves

 Lift-check valves or silent-type check valves shall be installed as
indicated on the Drawings and at the location where noise and water
hammer would cause a problem. The valves shall be of a spring
closed type.
 Seats, discs, and springs shall be bronze or stainless steel, whichever
is appropriate.
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where
appropriate, with threaded ends.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron where
appropriate, with flanged ends.
(5) Butterfly Valves
 A butterfly valve can be used instead of a gate valve if its size is 100
mm. (4 inches) and larges; it shall have flange bolt centering holes for
easy installation and be drilled to suit precisely the piping flange (Full
lug type).
 The body shall be cast-iron or ductile iron with aluminum-bronze
disc where appropriate of sufficient rigidity and strength to resist
distortion. The stem shall be through-shaft or two piece shaft design
to provide high strength and positive disc control.
 Compound rubber seat rings shall have excellent elasticity as well as
wear resistance to ensure positive water shut-off under the designed
working pressure. Moulded-in "O" rings shall provide positive flange
sealing to eliminate need for gaskets. All rubber parts shall be of the
type suitable for the specified working fluid.
 Lever-operated valves shall be used for sizes up to 150 mm. (6”).
Gear-operated valves shall be used for sizes larger than 150 mm. (6”).
Position indicators shall be provided to indicate valve disc position.
(6) Ball Valves
 Valves shall be ball pattern of the square head type with stainless
steel ball conforming to AISI 304.
 Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. (2 inches) shall be bronze with threaded
ends conforming to ASTM B62 and for valves of sizes larger than 50
mm. (2 inches) Valve body shall be carbon steel conforming to ASTM
A216.

(7) Float Valve

 The valve shall be hydraulically operated, diaphragm-actuated globe
or angle pattern valve. Operation of the main valve shall be
controlled by a two-level remote float control.
 The body shall be cast-iron with flanged ends and shall have a
pressure rating of 1,206 kPa. (175 psi [class 125]). A stilling well must
be provided around the float to protection against water surface
turbulence.
(8) Pressure Regulating Valve
 The valve shall automatically reduce a higher inlet pressure to a
steady lower downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate
and/or varying inlet pressure. This valve is an accurate pilot-operated
regulator, capable of holding downstream pressure to a pre-
determined delivery pressure.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or flanged
ends and have a pressure rating of 1,206 kPa. (175 psi [class 125]).
(9) Pressure Reducing Valve
 The Pressure Reducing Valve is a hydraulically operated, single seated
globe valve controlled by a direct acting spring and diaphragm pilot
valve. It available in globe or angle body.
 The main valve is operated by the downstream pressure passing
through the pilot system. It will reduce a high pressure of upstream
to a predetermined lower pressure of downstream.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or Hanged
ends and have a pressure rating of 1206 kPa (175 psi (class 175))
(10) Pressure Relief Valve
 Pressure relief valve shall be installed at the pump discharge line to
provide protection against high surge when pump is shut down as
indicated on the Drawings. It shall be of globe patters diaphragm
valve with hydraulically-operated, pilot-controlled and modulating
type.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screw or flanged ends
of pressure rating class of 1206 kPa (175 psi (class 175))
(11) Water Hammer Arrestors (Air Rechargeable)
 This water hammer arrestor shall be installed at discharged pipe of
water pump as indicated on the drawings.

 It contains only one moving part; a spherical piston which floats

inside the surge copper chamber, built in valve and gauge assembly
simplified charging and recharging procedure.
(12) Flexible Connections
 Where it is considered necessary, and only with the Employer’s
Representative approval, flexible connections at inlets and outlets of
pumps shall be of rubber type, Double-sphere shape.
 The flexible connectors shall be designed for excellent vibration and
noise protection. Isolated tension members shall be provided to
prevent excessive elongation.
 Flexible connections shall be suitable for the specified working fluid
and specified working pressure and temperature.
(13) Expansion Joints (For Steam and Hot Water System)
 Packless construction externally pressurized guide expansion
connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction of the
pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or
offsets.
 Anchors and pipe guides shall be provided and installed at the
recommended locations. All expansion connectors shall have flanged
ends with working pressure corresponding with the piping system
(14) Strainers
 Water strainers shall be of the Y type. Strainers of 50 mm. (2 inches)
and smaller shall have bronze or iron bodies with screwed
connections while 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) strainers and larger shall have
iron bodies and flanged connections. They shall have the same rating
as the piping system.
 Screens shall be stainless steel with perforations as follows:-
Strainer Size, mm. (inch) Screens Perforation (mm.)

20 (3/4) to 50 (2) inclusive 0.76
65 (2 ½) to 150 (6) inclusive 1.52
200 (8) to 300 (12) inclusive 3.05
Over 300 (12) 6.10
 The free area of each screen shall be not less than three times the
area of the strainer inlet pipe. Strainers size of 65 mm. and larger
shall be provided with 15 mm. valve drains.

(15) Air Vents and Drains

 Manual air vents shall be furnished as required for purging air or other
gases from the water circuit during filling-up. The outlet shall be
piped to the nearest drain.
 Automatic air vents, conforming to ASA standards, shall be furnished
at the top of main water risers, supply and return pipes.
 A shut-off valve shall be provided at the inlet of each automatic air
vent. The outlet shall be piped to the nearest drain.
 A plug-type drain cock shall be provided at all low points of pipe
work systems. Drains shall be installed to ensure easy access and
convenience for maintenance and removal of all piping, valves,
fittings and equipment without undue spillage.
 Drainage facilities shall be provided and suitable sized to drain
expeditiously the entire system and equipment involved.
(16) Pressure Gauges
 Pressure gauges shall be of the bourbon type, stainless steel casing,
round type of 100 mm. dial and scale range of approximately 150 per
cent of the normal operation. Pressure readings shall be in dual scale
with psi and kg/cm2.
 A needle valve and snubber with working pressure corresponding
with the piping system shall be provided for each pressure gauge.
 Pressure gauges, subjected to corrosive liquid, shall be of the
chemical type with diaphragm liquid separator.
(17) Water Meters
 Water meters shall be turbine type. Dry dial magnetic drive
conforming to the Metropolitan Water Works Authority Standard with
working pressure corresponding with the piping system.
2.9.3 Execution
Installation shall be followed instruction manual from manufacturer.
Operating test run shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

2.10 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL WORKS

2.10.1 General
(1) This part of the Specification describes all electrical equipment and
installations including connections thereof for the aforementioned
system.
(2) An electrical contractor will be responsible for bringing in the supply
cable or wiring to the Contractor's panels at the locations indicated on
the drawings. The Contractor shall connect the cable from the indicated
location to the isolator or circuit breaker in the mechanical work panels.
The connections and installation thereof shall form a part of the contract.
(3) All items of a similar nature shall be products of one manufacturer.
(4) All equipments, wiring methods and the installation shall conform to the
latest applicable standards as specified in this specification.
(1) Electrical and control works shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 IEC 60034-1 - Rotating electrical machines - Part 1:
Rating and performance
 IEC 60034-12 - Rotating electrical machines-Part 12:
Starting performance of single-speed
three-phase cage induction motors
 IEC 60335-2-104 - Household and similar electrical
appliances - Safety - Part 2-104: Particular
requirements for appliances to recover
and/or recycle refrigerant from air
conditioning and refrigeration equipment
 IEC 60364-1 Edition 4.0 - Electrical installations of buildings - Part 1:
Fundamental principles, assessment of
general characteristics, definitions
to the standards and regulations of PEA and IEC.

2.10.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit all material , catalog, material lists and technical
2.10.1.5 Warranty
All part of the electrical and control works shall be guaranteed by the
contractor at least 2 year after handover.
2.10.2 Materials
(1) All electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation at the indicated
system voltages and operating conditions.
the Drawings. The Contractor shall connect the cable from the indicated
location to the isolator or circuit breaker in the panels. The connections
and installation thereof shall form a part of the Contract.

2.10.2.2 Component
(1) Earthing or Grounding System
 The equipment grounding system shall be designed and installed
such that all metallic, raised floor structures, enclosures, raceway,
junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable
equipment, and other conductive items in close proximity with
electrical circuits operate continuously at ground potential.
 The equipment grounding system shall provide a low impedance
path for possible ground fault currents. The system shall consist of a
separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each
feeder and each branch circuit. The required grounding conductor
shall be installed in the common conduit with the related phase
and/or neutral conductors. Each electrical expansion fitting shall be
provided with an external flexible copper ground strap securely
bonded on each end of the fitting.
 Unless otherwise specified, the grounding connectors shall be of a
type specifically manufactured for grounding purposes, made of
copper alloy and assembled with high strength silicon bronze
hardware. Where grounding or bonding conductors connect to structural
cables, connections shall be made with mechanical devices; welded
connections shall not be made at these points. All mechanical
connections shall be completely encapsulated in nonhardening,
conductive epoxy. The epoxy shall be applicable for wet locations or
for ambient temperatures of 10 °C - 55 °C.
 Grounding of all chillers, pumps, and air handling units shall be done
by means of separate green insulated equipment grounding
conductor for each feeder or each branch circuit.
(2) Motor Control Centers
 General Requirement
This provision covers the design and construction of motor control
center of floor or wall mounting type. Applicable standards of NEMA,
ANSI, IEC, TISI, JIS, VDE and MEA shall be complied.
 Ratings of Equipment in Motor Control Center
The ratings of the equipment shall be as follows:-
- Rates voltage : 380V/230V
- System Wiring : 3-Phase, 4-Wire (Solid
grounded neutral)

-Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
-Rated Current : As shown in drawing
-Rated Short Time Withstand Current : 50 KA rms.
-Rated Power Frequency Voltage : 2.5 KV rms.
Withstand Test (50 Hz x 1 min)
 The Construction of Motor Control Center
- Motor control center shall consist of one or more vertical sections
bolted together to form a totally enclosed rigid construction.
The vertical section shall be made of sheet steel (minimum
thickness of 1.6 mm.). Each vertical section shall consist of three
compartments, viz. busbar, cable, terminal and control unit
compartment, and each compartment shall be separated by sheet
steel barrier. The motor control center shall be designed to permit
easy addition and removal in the future.
- Each control unit compartment shall be the combination of
starter, circuit breaker and other accessories for each motor. The
unit shall be completely enclosed and isolated from all other
units. Unit side plates shall be permanently attached. Each unit
shall have a single door mounted on removable pin hinges. Each
door shall be provided with a removable panel suitable for
mounting push button, selector or switch and pilot lamp.
- Efficient ventilation opening shall be provided on the panel.
The opening shall be screened so as to be insect-proof.
- Each panel shall undergo a treatment of degreasing and derusting
by electro-galvanized or other equivalent method for antirust and
shall be coated by an oven-baked enamel paint finished.
- All doors shall be provided with dust-protection gaskets of neoprene
or any other approved material. All doors shall be equipped with
locks operated by keys.
- Plastic nameplate with engraved letters of at least 3 mm. thick
shall be placed at ever circuit breaker and starter indicating their
uses.
- Mimic bus diagram shall be applied for each motor control center.
- Ground bus shall be full length of the motor control center.
- Uniform height and depth shall be adopted for the cubicles.
 Circuit Breakers

- All circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA, or JIS or IEC or TISI
standard and shall be manually operated, trip-free.
- Main circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following
protection devices.
 Over current and short circuit protection.
 Phase sequence protection.
 Over and under voltage protection.
 Time delay relay.
- The rated current and rated breaking capacities shall be as shown
on the drawings.
 Motor Starters
- Motor starters shall comply with NEMA, IEC or JIS standard.
- Each starter shall be of an air break type and provided with
thermal trip unit (one on each phase). In case of intervention of
the above trip units, an auxiliary contact shall cut the starter coil
off and give an alarm signal.
- The thermal trip units shall be hand reset, and a suitable push/
button shall be provided on the door of each unit.
- At least 2 normally open and 2 normally closed free contacts for
both starting and tripping signals shall be provided. These free
contacts shall be wired to the terminal blocks for remote
indicator.
- The starter contacts shall be able to interrupt a current equal to
10 times the rated current of the motor.
- Automatic direct-on-line starters are allowable for various motor
sizes up to 1.1 kW (1.5 HP) and closed circuit transition reduced
voltage starter shall be used for those over 5.5 kW (7.5 HP).
 Measuring Instrument and Current Transformer
- All measuring instruments and current transformers shall comply
with IEC or ANSI or JIS standards.
- All metering shall be the flush-mounted type with a dimension
approximately 96 x 96 mm. accuracy class 1.5. The overload
capacity is 1.2 times of the normal continuous load, except for
motor circuit where the overload capacity of ammeter shall be
2 times the normal continuous load. The voltmeters shall be
provided with selector switch.

- Current transformers shall be the single phase insulated type and

can withstand a continuous overload of 20%. The accuracy class
of the transformer shall be class 1 for metering winding and class
3 for instrument winding. The insulation of the current transformer
shall be of class 600 volts.
 Busbar & Busbar Holder
- Busbar shall be of copper conductor (purity 98%) the size and
ampacity of busbar shall comply with DIN standard and also shall
comply with MEA regulation.
- Busbar spacing shall comply with MEA regulation.
- Busbar holder shall be of fiberglass reinforced polyester or epoxy
resin (flame-proof material) and shall withstand the short-circuit
stresses.
- Each busbar shall have a colour identification, conforming to the
colour coding of the cable.
 Control Wiring
- Control wire in the motor control center shall be flexible
annealed copper wire 750V PVC insulated.
- The size of control wire shall be as follows:-
 4 mm2 for current circuit
 2.5 mm2 for voltage circuit
 1.5 mm2 for control circuit
 10 mm2 for ground wire for door
- All control wiring shall be run in cable trunk or flexible conduit
and no splicing.
- Wire marker approved by the Employer’s Representative shall be
applied and both ends of the control wiring.
- All wirings shall be terminated at the terminal blocks.
(3) Motors
 All motors shall conform to the latest ANSI or IEC standards or
approved equivalent. They shall have ample margin on their rating
for the required duty with due allowance for ambient temperature.
All motor shall be induction type suitable for 50 Hz. Motors shall be
of totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage screen-protect drip-proof
type. High starting torque motors and low speed machines shall be
started by reduced voltage starters.

 Motors 7.5 KW (10 HP) and larger shall be started by reduced voltage
starters unless otherwise specified.
 Motors shall normally be supplied by the manufacturer of the
equipment driven by the motors.
 Control devices shall be provided for all motors. Single or double
pole snap switches, specifically designed for alternating current
operation only, may be used as manual controllers for single-phase
motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the
switch rating. Automatic control devices such as thermostats may
control the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the
devices used are designed for that purpose and have such a rating.
Otherwise, magnetic starters shall be used, with the automatic
control device actuating the control circuit.
 Overload protection shall be provided with running-over current
(Overload) protection in accordance with the NEC. The overload
protection device shall be provided either integrally with the motor
or controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless
otherwise specified, the protective device shall be of the manually
reset type.
 All motors shall be provided with a disconnection means. All 3-phase
and single-phase motors above 1 kW (1 ½ HP) shall be provided with
a safety-type disconnecting switch. For single phase motors below
1 kW (1 ½ HP), a general use snap switch, rated for alternating-current
only shall be acceptable, provided the ampere rating or the switch is
at least 125 percent of the full load current rating of the associated
motor. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors
(4) System Voltage and Colour Code
 The distribution system for the low-voltage shall be 380/220V, 3-
phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz and as specified on the Drawings. The rating of
the equipment in this system shall be as mentioned in these
Specifications and on the Drawings.
 All cables, wires, terminals, etc. shall be colour coded as follows :
white or grey for neutral, black for phase R, red for phase S, blue for
phase T and green for ground. Large wires, cables and busbars shall
be colour-coded with suitable heat shrinkage sleeves.

(5) Low-Voltage Cables

 All cables shall conform to the TIS Standard, No.11-2518. All conductors
of the insulated cables shall be copper wire.
 The rating of current carrying capacity of the cables shall comply with
the MEA regulation.
 The conductor size is to be determined by taking into consideration
the following factors :
- The rated load (permissible permanent overload being 25%).
- The limit voltage regulation of 5% for all types of loads.
- The effects of short-circuit current.
 The types of low tension cables to be installed shall be as follows :
- Type NYY for direct burial or exposed wiring, or cable trench.
- Type THW for running in conduit, cable tray, or wireway.
 No conductor shall be smaller than the 2.5 mm2 wire, except for the
control wiring. Wiring to switches shall not be considered as control
wiring.
 All conductors 6 mm2 or larger shall be stranded. In all lug
connections for main feeders, sub-feeders and branches made in
switchboards and panels, etc., copper solderless connectors having
either a 2-bolt cast-copper clamp or an indent compression
attachment shall be used.
 Branch taps from feeders shall be made in junction boxes or pull
boxes, with approved cast-copper alloy solderless connectors in a
high impact phenolic insulating cover, having at least two spring clip
fasteners.
 Splicing shall be allowed only in the proper junction box with an
approved method of insulation. No splice shall be made in
conductors for instrument circuits of control circuits.
 Termination and splices for conductors of 6 mm2 and larger shall be
of the pressure or bolted type. No splices shall be made in
conductors except at outlets or accessible junction boxes. Splices in
branch circuit wiring shall be made mechanically and electrically
secured with solderless connectors, and if insulated they shall be
rated 750 volts. If connectors are not of the insulated type. Splices
shall be rated 750 volts and insulated by taping so that the insulating
value is equal to that of the conductors being jointed. Insplicing,
connectors shall be brought up securely on the conductors in a

workmanlike manner so that all conductors are equally engaged and

the insulation is not ruptured. No bare wires are to be exposed or
shall have "backed off" due to the application of pressure nor shall it
happen that the connector will loosen due to cycling or vibration.
 Immediately prior to the installation of each cable or cable group,
the raceway route to be followed shall be inspected and ascertained
to be completed in installation.
 If at any time during the progress of work the Contractor finds
conduits appear to inadequately accommodate the assigned cables
with a space factor of 40 percents he shall notify the Employer’s
Representative at once and discontinue any further work on the
questionable conduit advised by the Employer’s Representative as to
how he shall proceed. In general, the number of cables in conduit
shall conform to the figure tabulated in Table 2.10-1.
Table 2.10-1 Maximum Number Of Conductor In Conduit Or Tubing

PVC, 75 C, 750V Conduit or Tubing Diameter (mm.)
15
Size 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100
2 (1/2”
(mm ) (3/4”) (1”) (1 ¼”) (1½”) (2”) (2½”) (3”) (3½”) (4”)
)
2.5 3 5 9 16 - - - - - -
4 3 5 7 13 - - - - - -
6 2 4 5 10 15 - - - - -
10 1 3 4 6 9 15 - - - -
16 1 2 3 4 7 9 14 - - -
25 - - - 3 5 7 11 16 - -
35 - - - 2 4 5 8 13 - -
50 - - - 1 3 4 6 9 13 16
70 - - - 1 2 3 5 8 10 13
95 - - - 1 1 2 3 6 8 10
120 - - - 1 1 1 3 6 8 10
150 - - - 1 1 1 3 5 7 9
185 - - - 1 1 1 2 4 5 7
240 - - - 1 1 1 1 3 4 6
300 - - - - 1 1 1 3 4 5
400 - - - - - 1 1 1 3 4
500 - - - - - 1 1 1 2 3

 All cables shall be carefully checked as to size and length before

being pulled into conduits. Cables pulled into the wrong conduit or
cut too short shall be removed and replaced. Cables removed from
conduits shall not be installed in another conduit without permission
of the Employer’s Representative.
 Finishing or pulling shall be done with a nylon rope or other
approved devices.
 The Contractor shall indentify the ends of all power and control
conductors, circuits, and pull boxes. Each marker shall bear the circuit
schedule on the drawings. Where cables are multiple runs, labels
shall be provided at 10 m. intervals. Labels shall show the size of the
cable, phase and the equipment being fed.
(6) Raceway
 The cables are to be laid in conduits, in cable trays, wire way
underground or in cable trenches as indicated on the Drawings.
 Conduit
- All conduits shall be as specified herein, unless otherwise noted.
All materials and workmanship shall conform to the MEA codes
and as stipulated in these Specifications.
- Rigid steel conduits (RSC) and intermediate metal conduits (IMC)
shall be galvanized rigid steel Electro Galvanized with a minimum
size of 12.7 mm. unless otherwise noted. Rigid steel conduits and
intermediate metal conduits shall be installed for the following
services and locations: service entrance, underground (in contact
with earth), in concrete, panel feeders, for motor feeder over 10
HP, for electrical equipment feeders over 16 kW and in "wet"
locations.
- Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized steel with a
minimum size of 12.7 mm. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used
in all locations not otherwise specified for rigid or flexible
conduits.
- Flexible metal conduits shall be galvanized steel, and those
located in wet locations shall be of the liquid-tight type.
- A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall be used in connecting
all motors and vibrating equipment, recessed lighting fixtures and

junction boxes, and as otherwise noted, provided the use meets

the requirements of the VDE, NEC and/or the local codes.
- PVC conduit for electrical wiring wherever specified on the
Drawings, shall be rigid PVC conduit and comply with the Thai
Industrial Standard No.216-2520. PVC conduit shall be used in the
corrosive area both under ground and above ground installation.
The corrosive area shall be where expressly indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
- PVC conduit installation shall conform to MEA regulation.
- Supports and connections for each conduit run shall be
completed prior to the pull-in of any pulling line or conductor.
- All conduits shall be run as shown on the drawings and shall be
located at least 150 mm. from hot water pipes and other not hot
surfaces.
- Moisture pockets shall be eliminated from the conduits before
installation.
- Bends in conduits shall be made without reducing the internal
diameter of conduits. The use of pipe tees for bending will not be
permitted. The inside radius of bends shall not be less than six
times the inside diameter of the conduits. Conduits deformed or
crushed in any way shall be removed form the Site.
- The plane of all conduit ends shall be squared with the
centerline. Where threads are required, they shall be cut and
cleaned prior to conduit reaming. The ends of all conduits shall
be reamed to remove all rough edges and burrs.
- Conduits shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets.
Threads on metallic conduits shall project through the wall of the
box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit,
after which the locknuts, both inside and outside, shall be
tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely to the box.
- Precautions shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of water,
dirt or concrete in the conduits. Conduits in which water has
accumulated shall be thoroughly cleaned. If the cleaning is not
possible, the conduits shall be replaced.
- Junction boxes shall be aluminium or cadmium-plated cast iron
and shall be utilized where required.

- Double locknuts shall be provided on all conduit terminations not

provided with threaded hubs and couplings. Locknuts shall be
designed to bond securely the conduit to the box when tightened
and shall not loosen through vibration.
- Steel lined sleeves shall be provided wherever a wire way or
conduit passes through a floor slab or beam.
- Sleeves in floor slabs or beams for conduits shall be made of
galvanized sheet steel, securely fastened in position. Floor sleeves
shall be with their top end set at least 5 cm. above finished floor.
Sleeves in beams shall be finished flush with the surface fo the
beam. Sleeves in telephone and electric rooms shall be filled
with approved materials to provide a fire barrier. Both used and
unused sleeves shall be filled.
 Cable Tray and Wireway
- All cable trays and wireway shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel.
The housing of the cable trays and wireway shall be suitable and
strong enough to protect the cables from mechanical damage.
- The dimension and details of installation of the cable trays and
wireware have been shown on the drawings and/or in the
Spcification. The trays shall be securely supported at intervals not
exceeding
1.5 m unless specially approved for supports at maximum interval,
but in no case shall distances between supports exceed 2.40 m.
- The supports and hanger clamps, fastening hardware and pins
shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel. Steel accessories shall be
galvanized.
- Trays and supports shall be installed level, plumb, square, and
free from twists and at the correct grade. Any necessary cutting,
fitting, or drilling required to install trays shall be performed in a
neat workmanlike manner.
- Where power control and communication cables run in the same
tray, sheetmetal barriers shall be installed between each class of
cables. Cables shall be fastened to cable trays at suitable
intervals.
 Safety Switch
- Safety switches shall be installed as indicated on the drawings or
as required. The switches shall be either Fused Safety Switches

(FSS) or Non-Fused Safety Switches (NFSS) as shown on the

Drawings or as required.
- Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating
handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box.
Padlocking provisions shall be provided in the OFF position with at
least three padlocks. Switches shall be horsepower rated for
380/220V as required. Lugs shall be for copper conductors.
- Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure
with knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. Switches
located on the exterior of the building or in "wet" locations shall
have NEMA 3R enclosures.
- The safety switches shall be securely mounted in accordance with
the NEC.The Contractor shall provide all mounting materials
including fuses it specified, in the FSS.
- All fuses for "fused load break switch" shall be of the high
rupturing capacity (HRC) type of voltage rating up to 500 Volts.
Current rating shall be as specified on the Drawings.
 Distribution Boards
- The distribution boards shall be used for the 380/220V, 3 O /, 4 W,
50 Hz. systems. Moulded-case circuit breaker of frame, trip rating,
and interrupting capacity (including blank spaces for future
additon) as shown in the Drawings shall be provided. The circuit
breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-
indicating, and have a common trip on all multipole breakers with
internal tie mechanism.
- Busbar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be in the
"phase-sequence" type. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be
such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually
connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner
that two- or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location.
All current carrying parts of the busbar assembly shall be plated.
Main rating shall be as shown in the panel board schedule on the
drawings. A solid neutral (S/N) assembly shall be provided when
required.
- Terminals for feeder conductors to the distribution boards mains
and neutral shall be suitable for the type of the conductor
specified. Terminals for branch-circuit wiring, both breaker and

neutral, shall be suitable for the type of the type of the conductor
specified.
- The distribution board busbar assembly shall be enclosed in a
steel cabinet. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or
equivalent rust-resistant steel Fronts shall include doors and have
flush, brushed stainless steel, spring-loaded door pulls. The flush
lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panel
board locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall not be removable
with doors in the locked position.
- Before installing a distribution board, the Contractor shall check all
the architectural drawings for possible conflicts of space, and
adjust the location of the panel board to prevent such conflicts
with other items.
- When the cabinet is recessed into a wall serving an area with
accessible ceiling apace, the Contractor shall provide and install
an empty conduit system for future wiring. A 32 mm. diameter
conduits shall be stubbed into the ceiling space above and under
the panel board if such accessible ceiling space exists.
- The Contractor shall furnish all materials for mounting the
cabinets. In general, the cabinet shall be installed 1.80 m. above
finished floor measure from the top of the cabinet.
(7) Outlet Boxes
 All outlet boxes for concealed work shall be of hot-dip galvanized or
Electro Galvanized stamped steel.
 All wall boxes on exposed work shall be of aluminium- or cadmium-
plated cast-iron.
(8) Pull Boxes
 Pull boxes shall be installed at all necessary points, whether
indicated on the Drawings or not, to prevent injury to the insulation
or other damage that might result from pulling resistance or for other
reasons related to improper installation. Pullbox locations shall be
approved by the Employer’s Representative prior to installation. All
pull boxes shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel not less
than 1.6 mm. thick. Where boxes are used in connection with
exposed conduits, plain covers attached to the box with a suitable
number of countersunk flathead machine screws may be used.

 Where so indicated, certain pull boxes shall be provided with barriers.

These pull boxes shall have a single cover plate, and the barriers shall
be of the same gauge as the pull boxes. Each circuit in pull boxes
shall be marked with a tag guide denoting panels to which they
connect. Exposed pull boxes will not be permitted in areas normally
occupied or regularly used by staff and/or visitors.
2.10.3 Execution
 All motor control centers and electrical system shall be installed in
accordance with MEA regulation, NEC standard and/or the
manufacturer's recommendation.
 All metal parts and non-carrying current of motor control center shall
be.
 All motor control centers shall be not only tested at the
manufactory but also checked at the site for the follow performances
- Insulation of all cables
- Operating and protecting of the equipment
- Grounding
END OF SECTION


2.11.1 General
After erection of materials and equipment through wall and opening had been
completed, it is the responsibility of The Contractor to fill up voids and
openings with fire resistant materials which conform to NEC article 300-21,
BS476, AS1530 and ASTM to protect fire or smoke from spreading out from
one room to another room through these voids and openings.
The fire barrier and its components shall comply will the following codes and
standards.
(1) NEC 300-21
(2) ASTM
(3) UL
(4) BS476
(5) AS1530
2.11.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit material selector, catalog, material lists, technical
data and method of installation for approval before purchasing and
installation.
2.11.1.5 Warranty
All material and installation of the fire barrier work shall be guaranteed by the
contractor at least two (2) years after handover.

2.11.2 Materials
(1) The applied to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection wall,
unless otherwise specified. Cover or escutcheon plates shall be provided,
wherever exposed, and shall be neatly placed to the satisfaction of the
(2) Also, after the erection of all conduits, wirings, and raceways in the shaft,
block-out or any floor openings, the voids must be sealed with 2-hour fire
rating material, ad approved by the Employer’s Representative unless
2.11.2.2 Component
The fire barrier materials shall have properties as the following:
(1) The fire barrier materials shall be based on the standards of Underwriter’s
Laboratory Inc.
(2) The fire barrier materials shall be of minimum 2-hour fire resistant rating.
(3) The fire barrier materials must not be toxic during installation or incase of
fire.
(6) Easy installation.
(7) Before and after fire spreads, the fire barrier materials must be strong
enough.
(8) The fire barrier materials must be submitted to the Employer’s
2.11.2.3 All fire barrier products shall be supplied by single brand.

2.11.3 Installation
2.11.3.1 At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed
where:
(1) Every voids, sleeves, and openings appear on wall, floor, beam and shaft,
provided for raceway or pipes or ducts installation, must be sealed after
the erection work had been completed.
(2) Voids, sleeves, and openings which are provided for future installation.
(3) Voids between electrical conduits or pipes or ducts and sleeves.
(4) Voids between electrical cabling and raceway on fire wall and floor.
(5) Voids between raceway and sleeves on fire wall and floor.
The testing method shall be provided from the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

2.12 PAINTING
2.12.1 General
(1) Prior to equipment installation all metal surfaces shall be treated with
anticorrosive materials and/or painted according to this specification.
(2) The preparation and application of the painting materials shall adhere
strictly to the manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) The equipment or materials that have previously been treated with
anticorrosive materials and painted from the factory must be inspected
for their workmanship. Any defects, such as scratches, peels and rust shall
be repaired and repainted to the approval of the Employer’s
Representative.
(4) During the progress of the paint work, the Contractor shall avoid spotting
of the floors, walls and other adjacent equipment. All spotting, if any,
shall be cleaned immediately. Any damages, which may result from
painting shall be under the contractor's responsibility.
2.12.2 Execution
2.12.2.1 Painting
(1) Preparation and cleaning of surface to be painted
 Metal or ferrous metal surfaces
 Rust at welding joints and other defects shall be removed by
scraping. Wire brushes or sand papers shall be used to clean the
surfaces and to remove rust. Sand-blasting may be used to remove
loose rust and other foreign substances. Mordant solution such thinner,
gas, terpentine shall be used to remove grease, oil or organic coating.
Then the surface shall be cleaned with water and thoroughly dried or
blow-dried.
 The application of prime coats which follows shall adhere strictly to
the manufacturer's recommendations.
 Old paint coats shall be removed by scraping before application of
new paint.

(2) Brush or spray painting

Each paint coat shall be left until completely dry before subsequent
applications.
Painting can be classified into 2 coats :
 Prime coat for rust prevention and/or adhesion of the finishing coats.
 Finishing coat for final appearance or for symbolizing the system
codes. Types of paint used shall depend on the material as well as
on the environment.
(3) Types of paint for various surface and environment
Normal Area
Type of Surface Humid Area
or Corrosive Area
Black steel pipe, black 1st coat : Red lead primer 1st coat : Epoxy red lead primer
steel hanger and support, 2nd coat : Red lead primer 2nd coat : Epoxy red lead primer
black steel sheet, 3rd coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat : Epoxy Finishing paint.
switchboard, and panel. 4th coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat : Epoxy Finishing paint.
Galvanized steel pipe, 1st coat : Wash primer 1st coat : Wash primer
galvanized steel hanger 2nd coat : Zinc chromate primer 2nd coat : Zinc chromate primer
and support, and gal- 3rd coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
vanized steel sheet. 4th coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
If colour coding is not

specified, bronze colour
shall be used for finishing
coat.
PVC pipe, plastic pipe. 1st coat : Wash primer 1st coat : Wash primer
2 coat : Chlorinated rubber 2nd Coat : Chlorinated
nd
rubber
finishing-paint finishing-paint
rd rd
3 coat : Chlorinated rubber 3 coat : Chlorinated rubber
finishing-paint finishing-paint
st st
Cast-iron pipe inclusive of 1 coat : Coal tar epoxy 1 coat : Coal tar epoxy
nd
underground pipe. 2 coat : Coal tar epoxy 2nd coat : Coal tar epoxy
Copper tube, stainless 1st coat : Wash primer 1st coat : Wash primer
steel pipe, stainless steel 2nd coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 2nd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
sheet, aluminium steel 3rd coat : Alkyd finishing paint 3rd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
pipe, aluminium steel
sheet, light allowy, lead,
and conduct clamp.
Note: In case where there is a paint repair resulting from welding, cutting, drilling, polishing, or
threading, zinc rich primer shall be used prior to the application of finishing paint.

(4) Colour Code

 All pipes shall be colour coded except insulated pipes where only
priming coats shall be applied to the pipe surface.
 In the electrical system, colour coding shall be only at the conduit
clamps and the cover of junction boxes.
 Strip sizes of colour codes (for insulated pipes) and the letter size are
as follows :-
Pipe Size, mm. (inch) Width of Colour Strip, mm. (inch) Letter Size, mm. (inch)
20 (3/4) – 32 (1¼) 200 (8) 12 (1/2)
40 (1½) – 50 (2) 200 (8) 20 (3/4)
65 (2½) – 150 (6) 300 (12) 30 (1¼)
200 (8) – 250 (10) 300 (12) 65 (1½)
300 (12) and larger 500 (20) 100 (4)
 Location of symbols and arrows indicating directions are as follows :

- Every 6 metre (20 ft.) internal of straight line pipe.
- Near all valves.
- Every change of direction and/or separation.
- Where pipes passing through walls or floors.
- Near service pipe.
(5) Colour Codes of Various Systems
 The identifications previously mentioned shall have colour as follows :

Description Code Letters Symbol Colour Code Colour Symbol

Cold Water Supply CWS Blue White
Cold Water Supply to Water
CWT Blue White
Storage
Soft Water SF Blue White
Drinking Water DW Green White
Rainwater RL Light Green White
Waste W Brown White
Soil S Black White
Vent V Yellow Black
Sink Waste SK Purple White
Conduit & Tray for Electrical
SAN Blue Blue
for Sanitary System
Drain pipe D White Black
Conduit & Tray for Electrical
FP Orange Red
for Fire
Pipe Support & Hanger - Dark Gray -
Distribution Board & Motor
Control Board Normal - Ivory Black
Electrical
Distribution Board & Motor
Control Board Emergency - Ivory Red
Electrical
 Final selection of colours will be made by the Employer’s

Representative. All uninsulated pipes painted all over the pipe surface
conforming to this colour codes.
END OF SECTION

2.13 TEST AND STERILIZATIONS

2.13.1 General
(1) All piping shall be tested by the Contractor and approved by the
Employer’s Representative before acceptance.
(2) All equipment, materials, labour, etc. required for testing the sanitary
system or the part thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor at no
additional cost
(3) All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered
and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved.
(4) Where such work has been covered or concealed before it is tested and
approved, it shall be exposed for testing.
(5) Underground plumbing shall be tested and approved before back filling.
2.13.2 Execution
2.13.2.1 Drainage and Venting System Piping
Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water or air before
the fixture are installed. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their
traps filled with water, the entire drainage and venting system shall be
submitted for a final test.
(1) Water Test
Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in
its entirely or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings
except the highest one in the pipes shall be tightly closed. Then the
system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is
tested in sections, each opening of the section under test shall be tightly
plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at
least 3 m. head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the
upper 3.00 meters of the next preceding section shall be tested so that
each joint or pipe in the building except the uppermost 3.00 m. of the
system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3.00 m. head of water.
The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at
least 15 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be
tightened at all joints.
(2) Air Test
The air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus

to any suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets and outlets to the
system, force air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of
0.35 kg/cm2 or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 250 mm. in
height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for
a period of at least fifteen (15) minutes.
2.13.2.2 Water System
Piping
When the roughing-in is completed and before fixture are set, the entire cold-
water piping systems shall be tested at hydrostatic pressure of not less than
6.9 kg/cm2, and proved tight at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes in
order to permit inspection of all joints. Where a portion of the water-piping
system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall be tested
separately as specified for the entire system.
2.13.2.3 Defective Work
If the inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall
be replaced or repaired as necessary. Then inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs of piping shall be made with new materials. No caulking of
screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
2.13.2.4 Cleaning and Adjusting
Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings, and fixtures shall be clean without grease,
metal cuttings, or sludge that may have accumulated from operation of the
system during the test. Any stoppage, discolouration, or other damage to the
finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the Contractor's failure of
cleaning the piping system properly, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his
properly, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. When the
Works is completed, Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be
adjusted for proper operation.
2.13.2.5 Sterilization
(1) After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water-
distribution system to be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water
until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed before introducing
chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid
chlorine or hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage
of not less than 50 ppm. and shall be introduced into the system in an

approved manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long
enough to destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter
period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall
produce not less than 10 ppm. of chlorine at the extreme and of the
system of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized
shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period.
(2) The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine is reduced to less than 0.2 ppm. During the flushing period all
valves and faucets shall be turned on and off several times.
2.13.2.6 Report
After installations are completed, all equipment shall be test run. Any
adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all equipment will
operate with the required performance. Test run reports with all necessary
data such as pressure, temperature, flow rate, current, voltage, etc., shall be
recorded.
END OF SECTION


SECTION 3 : FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

3.1.1 General
installation of the Fire Protection works for building services works and
related work for the project.
drawings and this specification
3.1.1.2 Environment
(2) Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection:
 Altitude: Approximately mean sea level
 Maximum temperature 40C (104F)
 Average temperature (all year) 36.1C (97F)
 Maximum relative humidity 85%
 Average relative humidity (all year) 60%
to the standards and regulations of National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA). The following standards are mentioned in these Specifications for
systems and/or components and, where described, the systems and/or
components shall conform to such standards.
 ANSI - American National Standard Institute
 API - American Petroleum Institute
 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
conditioning Engineers, Inc.
 ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
 BS - British Standard

 DIN -
Deutsher Industrie Normen (German Industrial Standard)
 EIT -
The Engineering Institute of Thailand
 FM -
Factory Mutual
 IEC -
 MEA -
 MWWA -
Metropolitan Water Works Association
 NEC -
 NFPA -
 NFC -
National Fire Code
 NEMA -
 PEA -
 TISI -
 UL -
 VDE -
Verband Deutsher Electro techniker (German Electrical
 Any regulations issued by local authorities.
(1) The scope of work of the Contractor shall include provision, installation,
testing and balancing, commissioning of equipment and accessories as
shown on the Drawings and Specifications to achieve a complete Fire
protection system.
(2) The system shall include the following:-
 Fire protection system
 Clean agent fire suppression system
 Electrical power and control
 Accessories as required to complete the system
workable system in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications, and the accompanying drawings and schedules all to the

complete electrical and communication system with the established
(1) The Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications to make sure
opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of these documents,
he shall inform the Employer’s Representative immediately.
(3) Figure dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in
no case dimensions shall be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible,
dimensions are to be measured from the building. Before the Contractor
commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on
the site and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions
regardless of the comparable dimensions on the Drawings.
3.1.1.6 Dimensions
on the drawings.
3.1.1.7 Operation
make a decision.
(2) The locations of sprinkler head, gas nozzle, smoke detector, air outlets, air
duct route and piping route shown on the drawings are diagrammatic, and

shall be considered as approximate only. The approved locations may be

different from those shown on the drawings, if so directed by the owner.
3.1.2 Material
3.1.2.1 General
shall provide sufficient technical documents and the comparison to
Employer’s Representative for consideration.
qualification:
(1) All Fire Protection equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and
unused, of current manufacture, of the highest quality and free from
defects or imperfections affecting the performance or life of the item and
approved by the Employer’s Representative.

Employer’s Representative shall not release the Contractor from his

responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of installations.
(3) The Contractor shall protect all electrical equipment, materials and parts
during storage and during construction against the ingress of moisture,
contamination or corrosion that might damage the finish or lower the
electrical integrity of the item.
furnished to the Contractor, on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align,
Employer’s Representative satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if
any).
(5) After the material and equipment have been installed completely in
material and equipment from damages shall rest with the Contractor's
own expense.


the works.
(2) If at any time prior to commencement or during the progress of works, tools,
equipment and materials, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative,
appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure the required quality
of works or proper rate of progress, the Employer’s Representative may
order the Contractor to increase their efficiency, improve their character,
augment their number or replace with new tools, equipment and
materials as required.
All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and
maintenance, shall be provided with nameplates, tags or arrows, especially in
enclosed areas, such as ceiling, shafts, and other places accessible for
maintenance service.


(1) Only new material and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works.
All materials and equipments furnished by the Contractor shall be subject
to inspections and approval of the Employer’s Representative with the
the job site.
the Employer’s Representative. immediately, any extra expanse for testing
shall be of the contractor responsibity.
then the Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative
in writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality for approval.
installation.
to dimensions taken in the building(s) and shall closely follow
manufacturer's recommendations. All submitted drawings shall be signed
by the Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the
date(s) of revision(s).

Representative.
approval, and shall be returned to the Contractor. After approval, 4
copies of blueprint are required and additional copies may be requested
by the Employer’s Representative as necessary.

shipping and transporting of material and equipment to the job site. The
materials and equipment shall be handled in a manner to prevent
warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft of
damage or any kind what so ever.
3.1.3 Execution
The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe
for his own use at suitable connection points and shall bear the expense of
usage, which shall be removed upon completion of sections of the Works.
loss to :
 All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected
thereby.
 All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein,

(1) Test all fire protection equipment upon completion of installation to
ensure that the equipment operates satisfactorily and to conform to
Contract Documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all equipment furnished, installed or
connected by the Contractor to assure proper installation, setting,
connection, and functioning in accordance with the plans and
specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
manufacturer's field Engineer.
Representative to determine that equipment, material and system meet
requirements of the Specifications.
material.
the tests.

system.
as recommended by the manufacturer i.e., circuit breaker, low voltage
switchboard, motor (if any) etc unless specifically waived by the
Specifications.
(14) Cost incurred during testing i.e., electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be
borned by the Contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these
completed work.
 Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and
 Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete
 Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
 Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare
parts.
 Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and
yearly.
 Section 6 Comprises system operation manual


After acceptance of the completed work, the Contractor shall train the operator
(s) and maintenance staff of operator for a period of not less than 15
consecutive days until they are competent to operate the system by
themselves

(2) As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings of
the Fire protection work installation, as built drawing. It will be sufficient
to modify these contract drawings showing any amendments to the service
which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the
Employer’s Representative for approval.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the Employer’s Representative on
completion of the works, manufacturer's literature, specifications,
technical information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END OF SECTION

3.2 DIESEL ENGINE FIRE PUMP

3.2.1 General
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the fire pump as shown on the
drawing and/or specified herein.
(2) All pumps used in the fire protection system shall be of one
manufacturer.
Pumps shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
 NFPA 20/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire
Pumps
(2) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
 UL 218 : Fire Pump Controllers
 UL 448 : Pumps for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 1008 : Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
 UL 1478 : Fire Pump Relief Valves
(3) Factory Mutual (FM)
3.2.1.3 Submittals
(1) The contractor shall submit pump performance curves, material lists and
technical data for approval.
(2) The pump supplier shall submit certificate test of origin from
manufacturer before the pump on site.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the following technical data for approval
before installation:
 Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the fire pump,
required clearances, and location of all field piping and electrical
connections.
 Diagram of control system indicated points for field interface and
field connection.
 Installation and operation manuals.


least five (5) three (3) years.
3.2.1.5 Warranty
All part of the fire pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by the
contractor at least two (2) year after handover.
3.2.2 Materials
3.2.2.1 Description
(1) Pumps shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at a total
head of not less than 65 percent of the total rated head. The total
shutoff head shall not exceed 140 percent of the total rated head on
pumps.
(3) Pumps shall be UL Listed and FM approved.
(4) The pump type shall be specified as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. General Classification type shall be as the following.
 Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Type
Pumps shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, volute type.
They shall be of the horizontally split, double suction type with
suction and discharge connections in the lower half of the casing,
allowing removal of the rotating element without disturbing pipe
connections.
 Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Type
Fire Pumps shall be of the vertical water lubricated multi-stage
turbine type. Each unit shall include a bowl assembly, strainer,
column and shaft, surface discharge head, vertical hollow shaft, right
angle gear and flexible gear engine shaft, automatic air release and
pressure gauge.

3.2.2.2 Component
(1) Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Pumps
 Casing
Casing of horizontally split pumps shall be designed for a working
pressure of 10-20 kg/cm2 (200-300 psig) or 1 3/4 times the actual
discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Pressure classification of
flange connections shall correspond to casing working pressure. Casing
material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Water discharge diffusers shall be
included to reduce radial torques to impellers.
 Wearing Ring
Wearing rings shall be of bronze suitable for an individual application.
Rings shall be replaceable, and positively keyed to prevent rotation
 Impeller
Impellers shall be one piece, cast-bronze or ASTM B584 and
dynamically balanced. Impellers of pumps shall be fully enclosed
and hydraulically balance. Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the
shaft and fixed in an axial position by shaft sleeves and separate snap
rings. Impellers shall be fully protected against damage from reverse
rotation.
 Shaft
Shafts for pumps with stuffing boxes shall be of stainless steel or
Carbon Steel extending through the stuffing boxes. Where stuffing
boxes are used, shafts shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts
shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts shall be designed with
high safety precautions to easily withstand the torsion loads with
other stresses to which they may be subjected. They shall be so
designed that there will be no detrimental vibration stresses. All shaft
threading shall be external stresses. All shaft threading shall be
external to the water passage and stuffing boxes. Shaft sleeves shall
be keyed to the shafts and extended through the stuffing boxes. O-
rings or gaskets shall be provided at sleeve ends to protect the shafts
from water corrosion. They shall be so designed that no dismantling
of the pump casings is required to replace the sleeves.
 Bearing
Bearing shall be heavy-duty ball bearing with a minimum average life

of 100,000 hours. The bearing shall be self-sealed, and housed in

malleable-iron housings aligned to a bearing bracket by means of
large precision registers. Bearings shall be removable without
dismantling any rotating elements or pumps.
 Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing boxes shall be deep enough for not less than 4 rings of
packing and shall have bronze glands. Packing shall be suitable in all
cases for the service required with proper consideration of water
pressure, temperature, temperature changes and sediments carried in
the water.
 Couplings
Pumps shall be provided with urethane flexible couplings or universal
joint with a service factor of at least 1.5 for an individual application.
Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or
 Base Plate
Pumps shall be provided with a cast-iron or fabricated steel base
plate to hold both the pump and the motor in correct alignment.
Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks.
Low points of casings shall be provided with valve drains and both
inlet and outlet connection with properly located gauge tapping.
Casing brackets of pumps equipped with stuffing boxes shall be
arranged to form drip pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip
pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip pocket to the
nearest drip funnel or floor drain.
 Circulation Relief Valve
Each pump shall be provided with a 20 mm. (3/4 inch) circulation
valve for pump overheat protection. Furthermore, Relief valves for
over pressure protection shall be provided with sizes conforming to
Table 2.20 in NFPA 20/2002. Relief water pipes shall terminate at the
fire reservoir.
 Pressure Switch or Pressure transducer
Switches shall be used for pump control and shall be able to
withstand 20kg/cm2 (300 psig) working pressure without any damage.

 Anti-Vibration
Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which
are, In turn, placed on a concrete base. The isolators shall be
selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation such that no disturbing vibration and noise is being
transmitted to the nearby structure.
(2) Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Pumps
 Bowl
The intermediate bowls, suction bell, and discharge bowl shall be
flanged type constructed of close grained cast iron Ductile Iron ASTM
A 536 Gr60, and shall conform to ASTM designation A48, class 30 and
sand collar is bronze material. They shall be free from sand holes,
blowholes, or other faults and must be accurately machined and
fitted to close tolerance. The intermediate bowls shall have enamel
or epoxy lined waterways for maximum efficiency and wear
protection. All intermediate bowls shall be of identical design for
interchangeability. A discharge bowl shall be used to connect bowls
to the discharge column.
 Impellers
The impellers shall be constructed from Bronze and shall be the
enclosed type. They shall be from defects and must be accurately
cast, machined for optimum performance and minimum vibration.
Impellers are to be static and dynamically. They shall be securely
fastened to the bowl shaft with taper locks steel or. The impeller
running position shall be adjustable by shaft adjusting nut in the
discharge head or on top of the hollow shaft driver.
 Suction
The suction bell shall be provided with non-soluble grease packed
bronze bearing and a bronze sand collar shall be incorporated in the
pump design to protect this bearing from abrasives. The bearing
housing shall have sufficient opening at the bottom for removal of
the bearing. A bronze basket type strainer shall be attached to the
suction bell. It shall have a free area of at least four times the flow
area of the suction connection size and the opening shall be sized to
restrict the passage of 15 mm (1/2 inch) solids.
 Wearing Ring or Lateral Bowl wear Ring

In addition to close-clearance side seal, Bowl assembly shell be fitted

with replaceable wearing ring of bronze.
 Shaft
The bowl shaft shall be constructed from ASTM 582 type 416
stainless steel. It shall be precision turned and ground with surface
finish and shall be supported by water lubricated bearings of bronze
alloy.
 Column Pipe
The column pipe shall be furnished in sections not exceeding a
normal length of 10 ft and shall be connected by threaded-sleeve
couplings or flanges. The length of top and bottom sections shall not
be more than 5 ft. It shall be of ASTM A53 grade A steel pipe and the
weight shall be not less than schedule 30. The threaded pipe shall
be with 8 threads per inch with 3/16" taper per foot thread and faced
parallel to butt against the centering spiders to from accurate
alignment.
All column flange faces shall be parallel and machined for rabbet fit
to permit accurate alignment. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be
such that the head losses shall not more than 5 feet per 100 feet of
pipe.
 Line shaft
The line shaft shall be furnished in interchangeable section not over
ten feet in length, and shall be couplings machined from solid steel
bar. It shall have left-hand thread to tighten during pump operation.
Line shaft and coupling shall be stainless steel. Centering spiders
shall be furnished at each column pipe joint for shaft stabilization.
Bearings shall be fluted rubber.
 Discharge Head
It shall be of the high profile type to allow shaft coupled above
stuffing box and provided for mounting the driver and support the
column and bowl assemblies it shall be high-grade cast iron, ASTM
A48 Class 30, or fabricated steel. The above ground outlet shall be
flanged. It shall have a 1/2" NPT connection for a pressure gauge.
 Stuffing Box
The stuffing box shall be cast iron or Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr60
and shall contain a minimum of five rings of packing with lantern ring.

It shall have a pressure relief connection. The packing gland shall be

a 316SS or aluminium bronze split type secured in place with non-
corrosive studs and nuts. The bearing shall be bronze. A rubber
slinger shall be secured to the shaft above the packing gland.
(3) Diesel Engines
The engine brake horse power shall be rated at least 1.10 times the
maximum power required. The engine shall be rated at standard SAE
conditions for (152.4 meters above sea level and 0.746 meters HG
(at 29.4 °C) by the testing laboratory. The engine shall be of a
reputable manufacturer form which spare parts can be obtained
easily.
 Governor
The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor capable of
regulating engine speed within a range of 10 percent between shut-
off and maximum load conditions of the pump. The governor shall
be set to maintain the rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
 Over speed Shut-Down Device
The device shall be arranged such that the engine is shut-down at a
speed approximately 20 percent above the rated engine speed, and
that it can be manually reset.
The position of the over speed shut-down device shall be indicated
at the controller and will continue to show an over speed trouble
signal until the device is manually reset to normal operating position.
 Tachometer
A tachometer shall be provided to indicate revolutions per minute of
the engine. An hour meter shall be provided to record total time of
engine operation.
 Oil Pressure Gauges
The engine shall be provided with oil pressure gauges indicating
lubricating oil pressure.
 Temperature Gauge
The engine shall be provided with a temperature gauge to indicate
cooling water temperature.
 Instrument Panel
All engine instruments shall be placed on a suitable panel secured to
the engine at a suitable point.

 Automatic Controller Wiring

All connecting wires for automatic controllers shall be hardness or
flexibly enclosed, mounted on the engine and connected in an
engine junction box to terminals numbered to correspond with
numbered terminals in the controller, for ready wiring in the field
between the two sets of terminals.
 Battery and Charger
The engine shall be provided with two storage battery units, each
having sufficient capacity, at 5 °C, to maintain cranking speed
recommended by the engine manufacturer through a 6 minute cycle
(15 second cranking and 15 second rest, in 12 consecutive cycles).
Two means for recharging shall be provided. One shall be the
generator furnished with the engine. The other shall be an
automatically controlled charger taking power from the building
power supply.
 Signal for Engine Running and Crank Termination
The engine shall be provided with a speed sensitive switch to signal
engine running and crank termination. Power for these signals shall
be taken from a source other than the engine generator.
 Cooling System
A completely closed circuit cooling (Heat Exchanger) waste circulation
system shall be provided.
 Engine Exhaust Pipe
The exhaust pipe shall be galvanized steel sized in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. This exhaust pipe shall be as
short as possible and shall not exceed 4.5 m. in length, unless than
one pipe size for each 1.5 m. in excess length. The exhaust pipe shall
be insulated with 40 mm. of preformed fiberglass with aluminium
jacket.
Stainless steel flexible connection shall be made between the engine
exhaust outlet and the exhaust pipe.
 Fuel Tank
The tank shall be fabricated from at least 3 mm. steel sheet and
shall hold enough storage for an 8 hour operation of the pump. The
tank shall be installed above ground or as indicated on drawing and
equipped with fuel piping, drain, air vent and sight-glass.

(4) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved completely assembled
and wired from the factory the following items shall be included:
 Pressure transducer
 Weekly test program timer
 Automatic test run program
 Solid state crank cycle control
 Battery charger (2 sets)
 Pressure recorder
 Stop button
 Reset button
 Ammeter, Voltmeter
 Alarm devices such as for oil pressure, low fuel level, water
temperature, failure to start, over speed, battery no. 2 failure, charge
loss and water storage tank low level.
 Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses,
pushbuttons and alarm bell.
 Selector switch "AUTO-OFF-MANUAL"
3.2.3 Execution
(1) Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) The contractor shall align the pump and engine shafts to within the
manufacturer’s recommended tolerances prior to system start-up.


(1) General
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures
outlined in Chapter 14 Acceptance Testing, Performance, and
Maintenance of NFPA 20/2010, shall be carried out.
(2) Hydrostatic Tests and Flushing
 Suction and discharge piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not
less than 13.8 kg/cm2 (200 psi) pressure, or at 3.4 kg/cm2 (50 psi) in
excess of the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system,
whichever is greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.
(3) Field Acceptance Tests
 All electric wiring to the fire pump motors, including control (multiple
pumps) inter-wiring, emergency power supply, and jockey pump,
shall be completed and checked by the electrical contractor prior to
the initial startup and acceptance test.
 A copy of the manufacturer’s certified pump test characteristic curve
shall be available for comparison of results of field acceptance test.
The fire pump as installed shall equal the performance as indicated
on the manufacturer’s certified shop test characteristic curve within
the accuracy limits of the test equipment.
 The fire pump shall perform at minimum, rated, and peak loads
without objectionable overheating of any component.
 Vibrations of the fire pump assembly shall not be of a magnitude to
warrant potential damage to any fire pump component.
 Emergency governor valve for steam shall be operated to
demonstrate satisfactory performance of the assembly. Hand tripping
shall be acceptable.
 Both local and remote alarm conditions shall be simulated to
demonstrate satisfactory operation.
 The fire pump or foam concentrate pump shall be in operation for

not less than one (1) hour total time during all of the foregoing tests.
(4) Field Acceptance Test Procedures
 Test Equipment
Test equipment shall be provided to determine net pump pressures,

rate of flow through the pump, volts and amperes for electric motor-
driven pumps, and speed.
 Flow Tests
- The minimum, rated, and peak loads of the fire pump shall be
determined by controlling the quantity of water discharged through
approved test devices
- The pump flow for positive displacement pumps shall be tested
and determined to meet the specified rated performance criteria.
One performance point is required to establish positive
displacement pump acceptability.
 Measurement Procedure
- General
The quantity of water discharging from the fire pump assembly
shall be determined and stabilized. Immediately thereafter, the
operating conditions of the fire pump and driver shall be measured.
Foam concentrate pumps shall be permitted to be tested with
water; however, water flow rates can be lower than expected
foam flow rates because of viscosity.
- The pump flow test for positive displacement pumps shall be
accomplished using a flow meter or orifice plate installed in a test
loop back to the foam concentrate tank or the inlet side of a
water pump. The flow meter reading or discharge pressure shall
be recorded and shall be in accordance with the pump
manufacturer’s flow performance data. If orifice plates are used,
the orifice size and corresponding discharge pressure to be
maintained on the upstream side of the orifice plate shall be
made available to the authority having jurisdiction. Flow rates shall
be as specified while operating at the system design pressure.
- For electric motors operating at rated voltage and frequency, the
ampere demand shall not exceed the product of a full-load
ampere rating times the allowable service factor as stamped on
the motor nameplate
- For electric motors operating under varying voltage, the product of
the actual voltage and current demand shall not exceed the
product of the rated voltage and rated full-load current times the
allowable service factor. The voltage at the motor shall not vary

more than 5 percent below or 10 percent above rated

(nameplate) voltage during the test.
- Engine-driven units shall not show signs of overload or stress. The
governor of such units shall be set at the time of the test to
properly regulate the engine speed at rated pump speed.
- The gear drive assembly shall operate without excessive
objectionable noise, vibration, or heating.
 Loads Start Test
The fire pump unit shall be started and brought up to rated speed
without interruption under the conditions of a discharge equal to
peak load.
 Phase Reversal Test
For electric motors, a test shall be performed to ensure that there is
not a phase reversal condition in either the normal power supply
configuration or from the alternate power supply (where provided).
(5) Controller Acceptance Test
 Fire pump controllers shall be tested in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommended test procedure. As a minimum, no less
than six automatic and six manual operations shall be performed
during the acceptance test.
 A fire pump driver shall be operated for a period of at least 5
minutes at full speed during each of the operations.
 The automatic operation sequence of the controller shall start the
pump from all provided starting features. This sequence shall include
pressure switches or remote starting signals.
 Tests of engine-driven controllers shall be divided between both sets of
batteries.
 The selection, size, and setting of all overcurrent protective devices,
including fire pump controller circuit breaker, shall be confirmed to
be in accordance with this standard.
 The fire pump shall be started once from each power service and run
for a minimum of 5 minutes.
END OF SECTION

3.3 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP

3.3.1 General
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the fire pump as shown on the
(2) All pumps used in the fire protection system shall be of one
manufacturer.
Pumps
 UL 1478 : Fire Pump Relief Valves
3.3.1.3 Submittals
(1) Pump performance curves shall be submitted for approval together with
the pump technical data.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the following technical data for approval before
installation:
 Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the fire pump,
connections.
 Diagram of control system indicated points for field interface and
field connection.


least three (3) years.
3.3.1.5 Warranty
All part of the fire pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by the
contractor at least two (2) year after handover.
3.3.2 Materials
3.3.2.1 Description
(1) Pumps shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at a total
head of not less than 65 percent of the total rated head. The total
shutoff head shall not exceed 140 percent of the total rated head on
pumps.
(3) Pumps shall be UL Listed and FM approved.
(4) The pump type shall be specified as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. General Classification type shall be as the following.
 Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Type
Pumps shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, volute type.
They shall be of the horizontally split, double suction type with
suction and discharge connections in the lower half of the casing,
allowing removal of the rotating element without disturbing pipe
connections.
 Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Type
Fire Pumps shall be of the vertical water lubricated multi-stage
turbine type. Each unit shall include a bowl assembly, strainer,
column and shaft, surface discharge head, vertical hollow shaft, right
angle gear and flexible gear engine shaft, automatic air release and
pressure gauge.

3.3.2.2 Component
(1) Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Pumps
 Casing
Casing of horizontally split pumps shall be designed for a working
pressure of 10-20 kg/cm2 (200-300 psig) or 1 3/4 times the actual
discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Pressure classification of flange
connections shall correspond to casing working pressure. Casing
material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Water discharge diffusers shall be
included to reduce radial torques to impellers.
 Wearing Ring or Lateral Bowl wear Ring
Wearing rings shall be of bronze suitable for an individual application.
Rings shall be replaceable, and positively keyed to prevent rotation.
 Impeller
Impellers shall be one piece, cast-bronze and dynamically balanced.
Impellers of pumps shall be fully enclosed and hydraulically balance.
Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial
position by shaft sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers shall be
fully protected against damage from reverse rotation.
 Shaft
Shafts for pumps with stuffing boxes shall be of stainless steel, or
Carbon Steel extending through the stuffing boxes. Where stuffing
boxes are used, shafts shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts
shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts shall be designed with
high safety precautions to easily withstand the torsion loads with
other stresses to which they may be subjected. They shall be so
designed that there will be no detrimental vibration stresses. All shaft
threading shall be external stresses. All shaft threading shall be
external to the water passage and stuffing boxes. Shaft sleeves shall
be keyed to the shafts and extended through the stuffing boxes. O-
rings or gaskets shall be provided at sleeve ends to protect the shafts
from water corrosion. They shall be so designed that no dismantling
of the pump casings is required to replace the sleeves.

 Bearing
Bearing shall be heavy-duty ball bearing with a minimum average life
of 100,000 hours. The bearing shall be self-sealed, and housed in
malleable-iron housings aligned to a bearing bracket by means of large
precision registers. Bearings shall be removable without dismantling any
rotating elements or pumps.
 Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing boxes shall be deep enough for not less than 4 rings of
packing and shall have bronze glands. Packing shall be suitable in all
cases for the service required with proper consideration of water
pressure, temperature, temperature changes and sediments carried in
the water.
 Couplings
Pumps shall be provided with urethane flexible couplings or universal
joint with a service factor of at least 1.5 for an individual application.
Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or
 Base Plate
Pumps shall be provided with a cast-iron or fabricated steel base
plate to hold both the pump and the motor in correct alignment.
Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks.
inlet and outlet connection with properly located gauge tapping.
Casing brackets of pumps equipped with stuffing boxes shall be
arranged to form drip pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip
pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip pocket to the
nearest drip funnel or floor drain.
 Circulation Relief Valve
Each pump shall be provided with a 20 mm. (3/4 inch) circulation
valve for pump overheat protection. Furthermore, Relief valves for
over pressure protection shall be provided with sizes conforming to
Table 2.20 in NFPA 20/2002. Relief water pipes shall terminate at the
fire reservoir.

 Pressure Switch or Pressure Tranducer

withstand 20 kg/cm2 (300 psi) working pressure without any damage.
 Anti-Vibration
Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which
are, In turn, placed on a concrete base. The isolators shall be
selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation such that no disturbing vibration and noise is being
transmitted to the nearby structure.
(2) Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Pumps
 Bowl
The intermediate bowls, suction bell, and discharge bowl shall be
flanged type constructed of close grained cast iron, Ductile Iron ASTM
A536 Gr60 and shall conform to ASTM designation A48 and sand
collar is Bronze Material class 30. or They shall be free from sand
holes, blowholes, or other faults and must be accurately machined
and fitted to close tolerance. The intermediate bowls shall have
enamel or epoxy lined waterways for maximum efficiency and wear
protection.
All intermediate bowls shall be of identical design for interchangeability.
A discharge bowl shall be used to connect bowls to the discharge
column.
 Impellers
The impellers shall be constructed from Bronze and shall be the
enclosed type. They shall be from defects and must be accurately
cast, machined for optimum performance and minimum vibration.
Impellers are to be dynamically. They shall be securely fastened to
the bowl shaft with taper locks. The impeller running position shall
be adjustable by shaft adjusting nut in the discharge head or on top
of the hollow shaft driver.
 Suction
The suction bell shall be provided with non-soluble grease packed
bronze bearing and a bronze sand collar shall be incorporated in the
pump design to protect this bearing from abrasives. The bearing
housing shall have sufficient opening at the bottom for removal of
the bearing. A bronze basket type strainer shall be attached to the

suction bell. It shall have a free area of at least four times the flow
area of the suction connection size and the opening shall be sized to
restrict the passage of 1/2" solids.
 Wearing Ring or Lateral Bowl Wear Ring
In addition to close-clearance side seal, Bowl assembly shall be fitted
with replaceable wearing ring of bronze or rubber material in the
bowl.
 Shaft
The bowl shaft shall be constructed from ASTM 582 type 416
stainless steel. It shall be precision turned and ground with surface
finish and shall be supported by water lubricated bearings of bronze
alloy.
 Column Pipe
The column pipe shall be furnished in sections not exceeding a
normal length of 10 ft and shall be connected by threaded-sleeve
couplings or flanges. The length of top and bottom sections shall not
be more than 5 ft. It shall be of ASTM A53 grade A steel pipe and the
weight shall be not less than schedule 30. The threaded pipe shall
be with 8 threads per inch with 3/16" taper per foot thread and faced
parallel to butt against the centering spiders to from accurate alignment.
All column flange faces shall be parallel and machined for rabbet fit
to permit accurate alignment. The inside diameter of the pipe shall
be such that the head losses shall not more than 5 feet per 100 feet
of pipe.
 Line shaft
The line shaft shall be furnished in interchangeable section not over
ten feet in length, and shall be couplings machined from solid steel
bar. It shall have left- hand thread to tighten during pump operation.
Line shaft and coupling shall be of type 416 stainless steel. Centering
spiders shall be furnished at each column pipe joint for shaft
stabilization. Bearings shall be fluted rubber.
 Discharge Head
It shall be of high profile type to allow shaft coupled above stuffing
box and provided for mounting the driver and support the column
and bowl assemblies it shall be high-grade cast iron, ASTM A48 Class
30, or fabricated steel. The above ground outlet shall be flanged..

 Stuffing Box
The stuffing box shall be cast or Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr60 iron
and shall contain a minimum of five rings of packing with lantern ring.
It shall have a pressure relief connection. The packing gland shall be
a 316SS split type secured in place with non-corrosive studs and
nuts. The bearing shall be bronze. A rubber slinger shall be secured
to the shaft above the packing gland.
 Pressure Switch
withstand 20 kg/cm2 (300 psig) working pressure without any damage.
(3) Motor
Each pump shall be driven not over 3,000 rpm, 380V/3PH/50Hz totally
enclosed fan-cooled Class F, IP54 or WP-1 motor. The rated HP shall be at
least 1.15 times the maximum power required. Starter shall be of star-
Delta opened transition reduced voltage starter.
(4) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved completely assembled
and wired from the factory the following items shall be included:
 Pressure transducer
 Weekly test program timer
 Voltage surge protector
 Circuit breaker
 Motor contactors
 Start and stop button
 Emergency manual
 Running period timer
 Ammeter, Voltmeter
 Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses,
pushbuttons and alarm buzzer.
 Selector switch "AUTO-OFF-MANUAL"
3.3.3 Execution


(1) General
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures
outlined in Chapter 14 Acceptance Testing, Performance, and
Maintenance of NFPA 20/2010, shall be carried out.
(2) Hydrostatic Tests and Flushing
 Discharge piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than
13.8 kg/cm2 (200 psi) pressure, or at 3.4 kg/cm2 (50 psi) in excess of
the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system, whichever is
greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.
(3) Field Acceptance Tests
 All electric wiring to the fire pump motors, including control (multiple
pumps) inter-wiring, emergency power supply, and jockey pump,
shall be completed and checked by the electrical contractor prior to
the initial startup and acceptance test.
 A copy of the manufacturer’s certified pump test characteristic curve
shall be available for comparison of results of field acceptance test.
The fire pump as installed shall equal the performance as indicated
on the manufacturer’s certified shop test characteristic curve within
the accuracy limits of the test equipment.
 The fire pump shall perform at minimum, rated, and peak loads
without objectionable overheating of any component.
 Vibrations of the fire pump assembly shall not be of a magnitude to
warrant potential damage to any fire pump component.
 Emergency governor valve for steam shall be operated to
demonstrate satisfactory performance of the assembly. Hand tripping
shall be acceptable.
 Both local and remote alarm conditions shall be simulated to
demonstrate satisfactory operation.
 The fire pump or foam concentrate pump shall be in operation for
not less than 1 (one) hour total time during all of the foregoing tests.
(4) Field Acceptance Test Procedures
 Test Equipment
Test equipment shall be provided to determine net pump pressures,
rate of flow through the pump, volts and amperes for electric motor-

driven pumps, and speed.

 Flow Tests
- The minimum, rated, and peak loads of the fire pump shall be
determined by controlling the quantity of water discharged
through approved test devices
- The pump flow for positive displacement pumps shall be tested
and determined to meet the specified rated performance criteria.
One performance point is required to establish positive
displacement pump acceptability.
 Measurement Procedure
- General
The quantity of water discharging from the fire pump assembly
shall be determined and stabilized. Immediately thereafter, the
operating conditions of the fire pump and driver shall be
measured. Foam concentrate pumps shall be permitted to be
tested with water; however, water flow rates can be lower than
expected foam flow rates because of viscosity.
- The pump flow test for positive displacement pumps shall be
accomplished using a flow meter or orifice plate installed in a test
loop back to the foam concentrate tank or the inlet side of a
water pump. The flow meter reading or discharge pressure shall
be recorded and shall be in accordance with the pump
manufacturer’s flow performance data. If orifice plates are used,
the orifice size and corresponding discharge pressure to be
maintained on the upstream side of the orifice plate shall be
made available to the authority having jurisdiction. Flow rates shall
be as specified while operating at the system design pressure.
- For electric motors operating at rated voltage and frequency, the
ampere demand shall not exceed the product of a full-load
ampere rating times the allowable service factor as stamped on
the motor nameplate
- For electric motors operating under varying voltage, the product of
the actual voltage and current demand shall not exceed the
product of the rated voltage and rated full-load current times the
allowable service factor. The voltage at the motor shall not vary
more than 5 percent below or 10 percent above rated

(nameplate) voltage during the test.

- Engine-driven units shall not show signs of overload or stress. The
governor of such units shall be set at the time of the test to
properly regulate the engine speed at rated pump speed.
- The gear drive assembly shall operate without excessive
objectionable noise, vibration, or heating.
 Loads Start Test
The fire pump unit shall be started and brought up to rated speed
without interruption under the conditions of a discharge equal to
peak load.
 Phase Reversal Test
For electric motors, a test shall be performed to ensure that there is
not a phase reversal condition in either the normal power supply
configuration or from the alternate power supply (where provided).
(5) Controller Acceptance Test
 Fire pump controllers shall be tested in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommended test procedure. As a minimum, no less
than six automatic and six manual operations shall be performed
during the acceptance test.
 A fire pump driver shall be operated for a period of at least 5
minutes at full speed during each of the operations.
 The automatic operation sequence of the controller shall start the
pump from all provided starting features. This sequence shall include
pressure switches or remote starting signals.
 Tests of engine-driven controllers shall be divided between both sets of
batteries.

 The selection, size, and setting of all over current protective devices,
including fire pump controller circuit breaker, shall be confirmed to
be in accordance with this standard.
 The fire pump shall be started once from each power service and run
for a minimum of 5 minutes.
END OF SECTION

3.4 JOCKEY PUMP

3.4.1 General
The contractor shall furnish and install the jockey pump as shown on the
Pumps
3.4.1.3 Submittals
(1) Pump performance curves shall be submitted for approval together with
the pump technical data.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the following technical data for approval
before installation:
 Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the jockey pump,
connections.
 Diagram of control system indicated points for field interface and field
connection.

3.4.1.5 Warranty
All part of the jockey pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by
the contractor at least two (2) year after handover.
3.4.2 Materials
3.4.2.1 Description
Pumps shall be regenerative turbine or vertical multistage inline pumps with
suction arrangement suitable for suction of water from the water reservoir.
3.4.2.2 Component
(1) Motors
Each pump shall be driven by a 2,900 rpm, 380V/3 Φ /50 Hz totally
enclosed fan-cooled class F insulation motor. The rated Hp shall be at
least 1.15 times the maximum power required.
(2) Casings
Casings of jockey pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 20
kg/cm2 or 1.5 times the actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater.
Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Specification for wearing rings, impellers,
shafts, bearings, stuffing box couplings, base-plates, circulation relief
valves, anti-vibration pads differential pressure switches shall be similar to
the fire pump specification.
(3) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved, completely assembled
and wired from the factory.
The following items shall be included:
 Isolating switch
 Circuit breaker
 Direction line motor starter with overload relay and external reset.
 Pressure switch
 Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses
and pushbuttons.
 Minimum running timer

3.4.3 Execution
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures outlined in
Chapter 14 Acceptance Testing, Performance, and Maintenance of NFPA
20/2007 shall be carried out.
END OF SECTION

3.5 FIRE WATER PIPING WORK

3.5.1 General
The contractor shall furnish and install fire water pipes as shown on the
Pipes and Fittings shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 NFPA 13/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
 NFPA 14/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private
Hydrant, and Hose Systems
Pumps
 NFPA 24/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire
Service Mains and Their Appurtenances
 NFPA 2001/2012 : Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
 UL 213 : Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire-Protection Service
(3) American Society of Mechanical Employer’s Representatives (ASTM)
 ASTM A53 : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
 ASTM A183 : Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings
 ASTM A234 : Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought
-Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High Temperature Service
 ASTM A536 : Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings
(4) British Standard (BS)
 BS 143 & BS 1256 : Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron and
cast copper alloy
 BS 1387 : Specification for screwed and socketed steel
tubes and tubulars and for plain end steel tubes
suitable for welding or for screwing to BS 21 pipe
threads

(5) American Water Works Association (AWWA)

 AWWA C203 : Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel
Water Pipelines Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied
 AWWA C214 : Tape Coating System for the Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines.
(6) American Welding Society (AWS)
 AWS D10.9 : Specification for Qualification of Welding
Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing
3.5.1.3 Submittals
3.5.1.5 Warranty
year after handover.
3.5.1.6 Delivery, handling, storage and creaming.
closed with temporary covers during erection.
(2) Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded to remove
any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(3) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or under cover to
avoid rusting. If necessary, carbon steel pipes shall be coated with
anodized rust converter or red lead primer.

(6) Before start-up all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water
3.5.2 Materials
3.5.2.1 Description
(1) The fire pipe shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the
working fluid in the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the fire protection system as specified for
the working fluid shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual working
pressure, but not less than 1378 kPa (200 PSIG)
3.5.2.2 Component
(1) Wet Pipe
 Fire water pipe for wet pipe system shall be black steel pipe, ERW
Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A53. Grade A used for standpipe
and automatic sprinkler system.
 Welding methods or Grooved Couplings shall be used for joining.
(2) Dry Pipe
 Fire water pipe for dry pipe system shall be galvanized steel pipe
conforming to BS 1387 class H. and use for pre-action system.
 Threading methods or Grooved Couplings shall be used for joining
pipes (2 inches).
(3) Drain Pipe
 Drain pipes shall be galvanized steel pipe conforming to BS 1387 class M.
 Threading methods shall be used for joining pipes.
(4) Gas Suppression Pipe
 Gas suppression pipe shall be black steel pipe, Seamless Schedule
80 conforming to ASTM A53, Grade B, Seamless.
 Welding methods or Grooved Couplings shall be used for joining .
(5) Fittings
 Fittings for welded, black steel pipes shall be of wrought carbon and
alloy steel for modulate and elevated temperature, conforming to
ASTM A234.
 Fittings for grooved, black steel pipes shall be of ductile-iron, UL
listed and FM approved.

 Fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable iron,

conforming to BS 143 and BS 1256.
(6) Grooved Couplings
Grooved couplings shall be UL 213 listed and FM approved, complete set
from the factory.
The following items shall be included :
 Housing shall be made of ductile-iron.
 Gasket shall be made of EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer).
 Oval track head bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A183.
3.5.3 Execution
(1) General
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with the
building walls and partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and
drain shall be not less than 1 : 500. Branches from water mains shall
be taken in a manner that facilities venting and draining. Reductions
in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except on
 All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can be
completely drained off and all air pockets in the water circuits shall
be suitably vented.
 Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be
 Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible.
soldering as approved or indicated in the Specification.

(2) Appearance
All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat
and orderly appearance, using fittings for all changes of direction, and
arranging pipe runs parallel to or at right angles with structural members
of the building, to provide utmost head-room and to clear lights and
other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes shall be installed as
closely as possible to the overhead structure.
(3) Workmanship
installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to itself
or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters
and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to
remove all burrs and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in
size shall be made with reducing fitting. Pipe bends and bushings are
prohibited.
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so
(5) Storage and Cleaning
 Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be
kept closed with temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is
installed, it shall be opened and pounded to remove any foreign
substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
 Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to
anodic rust converter or red lead primer.
 During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every
precaution to prevent any debris from being left in the pipes. He
shall be responsible for any damage that may occur.
 Immediately after erection, exposed threads at all fittings shall be
painted with zinc-chromate paint, and after welding each joint shall
be wire-brushed and then painted with zinc-chromate paint.
 Before start-up, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with
water until it runs clear.

 Fixtures and equipment shall be lightly covered and protected

against damage. At the completion of the work, fixtures, materials
and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a
satisfactory condition.
of the equipment.
problems could be avoided by providing flexible connections.
(9) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of
 Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be
steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm.
clearance around the pipe and covering insulation, if there is any.
 Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass

 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance

 When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with
(10) Joints for Threaded Pipes
Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon tape or
graphite compound applied to the male threads only. Excess jointing
material shall be removed after the joint is made. Threads shall be clean-
cut, tapered threads with the ends being reamed before installation.
(11) Flanged Pipe Joint
Flanged joints shall be installed at valves of size 65 mm. diameter and
above, and at other places where necessary. Jointing flanges shall be truly
parallel to each other so that bolts are used only to tighten joints, rather
than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit the maximum
working pressure of the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be
cadmium-plated steel.
(12) Welded Pipe Joint
 Welding methods that comply with all of the requirements of AWS
D10.9, Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and
Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3, are acceptable means of
joining fire protection piping.
 Sprinkler piping shall be shop welded.
 No welding shall be performed if there is impingement of rain or high
wind on the weld area of the pipe product.
 When welding is performed :
- Holes in piping for outlets shall be cut to the full inside diameter
of fittings prior to welding in place of the fittings.
- Disc shall be retrieved.
- Openings cut into piping shall be smooth bore, and all internal
slag and welding residue shall be removed.
- Fittings shall not penetrate the internal diameter of the piping.
- Steel plates shall not be welded to the ends of piping or fittings.
- Fittings shall not be modified.

- Nuts, clips, eye rods, angle brackets, or other fasteners shall not
be welded to pipe or fittings.
 Torch cutting and welding shall not be permitted as a means of
modifying or repairing sprinkler systems.
 A welding procedure shall be prepared and qualified by the
contractor or fabricator before any welding is done. Qualification of
the welding procedure to be used and the performance of all
welders and welding operators is required and shall meet or exceed
the requirements of American Welding Society Standard AWS D10.9,
Level AR-3.
 Contractors or fabricators shall be responsible for all welding they
produce. Each contractor or fabricator shall have available to the
authority having jurisdiction an established written quality assurance
procedure ensuring compliance with the requirements shown in this
item.
 The Employer’s Representative reserves the rights to order the
cutout for inspection of up to 1 percent of total number of welds. In
the event of any inspected welds being, in the Employer’s
Representative opinion, Unsatisfactory he reserves the rights to order
the removal of further welds which in his opinion indicate faulty
workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at
no cost to the project.
(13) Grooved Coupling
 Rigid couplings shall be used for riser, mechanical room and other
applications where rigidity is required. The built-in teeth and T&G
(tongue and groove) mechanisms provide a rigid, locked-in
connection.
 Flexible couplings shall be used for moderate pressure pipeline
applications where expansion, contraction or deflection caused by
temperature change, seismic tremors or other sources of vibration are
factors.
 Grooved couplings are permitted for using the roll-groove method by
roll grooving machine. Mechanically cut grooves are not permitted
 Lubricant shall be used to the sealing lips and exterior of the gasket
as well as the interior of the coupling housings.


 All pipes shall be securely supported in accordance with NFPA13
“Installation of Sprinkler System”. Horizontal piping shall be
vertically mounted pipes shall be as indicated in drawing.
 For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for
hangers of dissimilar metals, suitable separation with a layer of felt
 Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and
securely bolted to the building structure. Hangers in the plant room
shall be supported on springs.
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of
and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
 Two fixings per bracket shall be provided as follows :
Nominal Pipe Size, mm Fixing Size, mm
(inch) (inch)
Up to 65 (1/2) 6.4 (1/4)
80x3 to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200x8 to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized.

 Underground pipe support and hanger shall be all stainless steel.
Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed

pipes passing through finished walls, finished partitions, finished ceilings,

and floors above grade. Plates shall be large enough to completely close
the hole around the pipe. Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws;
spring clips will not be acceptable. Where necessary to cover beads of
fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided.
The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works
shall be done only with specific approval from the Employer’s
Representative. Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by
skilled workmen of the trade involved.
The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to laying
pipes.
 All steel pipes to be buried underground shall be externally coated
in the mill of the fabricator. Material shall conform to AWWA C214.
(1) Flushing of Piping.
 Piping between the fire department connection and the check valve
in the inlet pipe shall be flushed with a sufficient volume of water in
order to remove any construction debris and trash accumulated in
the piping prior to the completion of the system and prior to the
installation of the fire department connection.
 Underground Piping
- Underground piping, from the water supply to the system riser,
and lead-in connections to the system riser shall be completely
flushed before the connection is made to downstream fire
protection system piping.
- The flushing operation shall be continued for a sufficient time to
ensure thorough cleaning.
END OF SECTION

3.6 VALVE AND ACCESSORIES

3.6.1 General
(1) Valves and accessories shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
(2) Shut-off valves shall be furnished as necessary for a satisfactory operation
of all apparatus.
(3) Valves of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
Valve and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 NFPA 10/2010 : Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
Pumps
 NFPA 24/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances
 UL 8 : Foam Fire Extinguishers
 UL 154 : Carbon-Dioxide Fire Extinguishers
 UL 193 : Alarm Valves for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 199 : Automatic Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 213 : Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire-Protection
Service
 UL 246 : Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 260 : Dry Pipe and Deluge Valves for Fire-Protection
Service
 UL 262 : Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 312 : Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 346 : Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems
 UL 405 : Fire Department Connections

 UL 626 : Water Fire Extinguishers

 UL 668 : Hose Valves for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 711 : Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers
 UL 753 : Alarm Accessories for Automatic Water-Supply
Control Valves for Fire Protection Service
 UL 864 : Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm
Systems
 UL 1091 : Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service
 UL 1468 : Direct Acting Pressure Reducing and Pressure
Restricting Valves
 UL 2129 : Halocarbon Clean Agent Fire Extinguishers
(4) British Standard / European Standard (BS EN)
 BS EN 671-1 : Fixed fire fighting systems. Hose systems. Hose reels
with semi-rigid hose
 BS EN 694 : Fire-fighting hoses. Semi-rigid hoses for fixed systems
(5) Listed of Approved Fire and Security Products and Services, (LPCB)
 Part 5, Section 7 : Multiple jet controls
(6) Thai Industrial Standard (TIS)
 TIS 332 : Dry Chemical Portable Fire Extinguishers
3.6.1.3 Submittals
3.6.1.5 Warranty
(1) All portable fire extinguishers shall be guaranteed by the contractor at
least 5 year after handover.
(2) All part or the valve and accessories shall be guaranteed by the
contractor at least 2 year after handover.

3.6.2 Materials
3.6.2.1 Description
(1) The valves and accessories shall be the types or models which are
suitable for the working fluid in the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the valve as specified for the working fluid
shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual working pressure which could be
specified as 12 kg/cm2 (175 PSI) for general area and shall be 20 kg/cm2 in
fire pump room.
(3) The diameter of hand-wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as
that neither additional leverage nor damage shall be imposed upon their
overhead valves, chain-operated hand-wheels including rust-roof chain
and chain guide shall be provided.
3.6.2.2 Component
(1) Gate Valves (OS&Y)
 Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with threaded ends,
solid wedges and rising stems.
 Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be cast-iron with flanged
ends, solid wedges and rising stems.
 Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(2) Butterfly Valves
 Butterfly valve may be used instead of gate valve if its size is over or
equal to 80 mm. in diameter or as indicated on the drawings.
 Butterfly valves shall be cast iron or ductile iron, grooved end.
 Built-in supervisory switch shall be provided.
 Butterfly valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(3) Swing-Check Valves
 Valves shall be of the swing type suitable for the horizontal or
vertical operation with two-piece hinge and accessible disc cover.
 Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with thread ends and
full area Y pattern bodies.
 Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be wafer style cast-iron, swing
pattern and bronze-trimmed with flanged ends.


(4) Lift-Check Valves
 Lift-check valves or silent-type check valves shall be installed as
indicated on drawings and at the location where noise and water
hammer would cause a problem.
 The valve shall be of a spring closed type. Seats, discs, and springs
shall be bronze or stainless steel.
 Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with threaded ends.
 Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be wafer style cast-iron with
flanged ends.
(5) Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be made of cast brass with threaded ends, 35 kg/cm2
(500 psi.) working pressure. They shall be installed as indicated on
drawings. UL listed or FM approved.
(6) Wet Pipe Alarm Valves
 Alarm valves shall be of the vertical or horizontal pattern as
indicated in the drawings, and shall be provided with an isolating
valve to allow removal for maintenance.
 The valves shall be designed for a wet pipe water sprinkler system
and actuated by breaking sprinkler heads.
 Each alarm valve shall be fitted with a water motor and gong, and an
alarm contact for connection to the central fire alarm panel.
 The following items shall be included :
- Water motor Gong shall be made of aluminum, stainless steel and
other non-corrosive materials to prevent rust and staining. Water
motor gong shall be UL listed and FM approved.
- Retard chamber shall be ductile-iron body, FM approved, and UL
listed rated for 20 kg/cm2 (300 psi.).
- Pressure switch shall be UL listed and FM approved.
- Water Supply Pressure Gauge
- System Pressure Gauge
- Main System Drain Valve
 Alarm valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.

(7) Multi-Jet Control Valves

 Multi-jet control valves shall be single inlet with double outlets.
 Multi-jet control valves shall be included with following :
- Frangible glass bulb
Multi-Jet control valves shall be temperature rating at 68oC for
SOR room, and 93oC for ESPS.
- Electric Actuators
(8) Multi-Jet Control Panel
 Control panel shall be included with following :
- Microprocessor controlled
- Alarm and trouble resound
- General alarm and trouble relays
- Disable / Enable controls per initiating zone
- Battery / Earth Fault supervision
- 7 AH to 15 AH battery options, up to 90 hours standby
- Resettable / non-resettable regulated power outputs
- Cross zone detection
 Circuit Specification shall be included with following:
- Input Circuits
 Detector Circuit 1
 Detector Circuit 2
 Water flow
 Supervisory Switch
- Output Circuits
 Alarm/Water flow Bell
 Water flow/Supervisory Bell
 Releasing Circuit 1
 Supervisory Bell/Release Circuit 2
- Front Panel Control Switches
 Switch 1 - Tone Silence
 Switch 2 - Alarm Silence
 Switch 3 - Alarm Activate
 Switch 4 - System Reset
 Multi-Jet Control Panel shall be UL listed and FM approved.

(9) Hose Valves

 Angle Hose Valves
- Valves of size 65 mm. in diameter shall be cast brass body with
female thread at both inlet and outlet sides.
- Adjustable pressure restricting angle hose valve shall be used
where the inlet water pressure is exceed 7.0 kg/cm2
- Angle Hose Valves shall be UL listed and FM Approved.
(10) Pressure Relief Valves
 Pressure relief valves shall actuate to relieve excess pressure in a fire
protection system.
 They shall be pilot controlled and back pressure shall not affect the
set point. They shall be actuated by line pressure through a pilot
control system and open fast in order to maintain steady system
pressure as system demand decreases. They shall close gradually to
control surges and shall re-seat drip-tight within 5% of its pressure
setting.
 The main valve shall be of the hydraulically-operated, pilot-
controlled, diaphragm type, globe or angle valve.
 The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded,
diaphragm type valve designed for modulating service to permit flow
when controlling pressure exceeds spring setting.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or flanged
ends.
(11) Sprinkler Heads
Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.
 Upright Sprinkler Heads
The exposed sprinkler heads shall have the following features :
- Applicable for areas without false ceilings and as specified on the
drawings.
- Frangible bulb type.
- Upright style.
- 15 mm. (1/2 inch) in diameter nominal orifice, Unless otherwise
specified.
- Chrome finish.
- Temperature rating shall be ordinary hazard.

- Sprinkler guards shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.

 Pendant Sprinkler Heads
Pendant sprinkler heads shall be of the recessed type suitable for
incorporation into a high quality metal tray type false ceiling.
They shall be the following features :
- Minimum projection below ceiling.
- Frangible bulb type.
- Pendant style.
specified.
- Chrome-plated with ceiling plate finish to suit decorative scheme.
- Sprinkler guards shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
 Sidewall Sprinkler Heads
The sidewall sprinkler shall be the following features :
- Applicable for those areas where ceiling sprinklers cannot be used.
- Frangible bulb type (open type within escalator trusses).
specified.
- Chrome finished.
- Water distribution at pressure 2.0 kg/cm2 not less than 6 m. length
and 4.5 m. width.
(12) Flow Switches
 Flow switches shall be fitted on all sprinkler systems, hydrants and
hose points, along with other pipe branches as indicated on the
drawings.
 Each unit shall have tamper-proof switch housing with flexible flow
paddle, micro-switches and retard feature to minimize false alarm.
Retard setting shall be adjustable.
 Each unit shall have a volt-free contact, the wiring from which will be
carried out under the fire detection and alarm system work.
 Flow switch shall be UL listed and FM approved.

(13) Supervisory Switches

 Supervisory switches or monitor switches shall be fitted on main and
branch isolating valves in the fire pump room and/or as indicated on
the drawings. The monitor switches are for the supervision of the
open position of valves which control water supplies to automatic
sprinkler or stand pipe fire protection system. Supervision of the
open position of a main control valve is to indicate a condition, i.e.,
closing of the valve, that could prevent the required operation of a
fire protection system.
 Supervision switches or monitor switches are operated by movement
of the trip rod or by removal of the cover. The trip rod is spring
loaded and double action, consequently, lateral movement of the
trip rod, in either direction from its normally installed position, will
result in operation of the switching components.
 The monitor switch has one single pole double throw snap-action
switch.
 The switching components are enclosed in NEMA type 1 general
purpose indoor rated housing. The electrical switch contacts are
rated at 220 VAC,15A.
 In addition, all valves indicated as supervised on the drawings shall
be locked open with strap and padlock.
 All Φ 65 mm. hydrants shall be locked closed using the same
method.
 Supervisory Switches shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(14) Pressure Gauges
 Pressure gauges shall be of the bourdon type, stainless steel casing,
round type of 100 mm. dial and scale range of approximately 150
percent of the normal operation. Pressure readings shall be in kg/cm2
and psig (dual scale).
 gauge cock with working pressure corresponding with the piping
system shall be provided for each pressure gauge.
 Oil filled pressure gauges shall be selected where used adjacent to
moving machinery, e.g. pumps.

(15) Automatic Air Vent

 Automatic air vent shall be of cast iron body, thread end connection,
dia. 25 mm. inlet, dia. 15 mm. outlet, working pressure at least
12 kg/cm2 (175 psi).
 Automatic air vent shall be FM approved.
(16) Flexible Connections
 Flexible connections at inlet and outlets of pumps shall be of
stainless steel corrugated inner tube and stainless steel wire braid
outside the tube with flanged ends.
 The flexible connectors shall be designed for excellent vibration and
noise protection. Isolated tension members shall be provided to
prevent excessive elongation.
 Flexible connections shall be suitable for the specified working fluid
or specified working pressure and temperature.
(17) Expansion Joints
 Anchors and pipe guides shall be provided and installed at the
recommended locations.
 All expansion connectors shall have flanged ends with working
pressure corresponding with the piping system.
(18) Strainers
 Water strainers shall be of the Y type.
 Strainers size of 50 mm. and smaller shall be bronze body with
screwed connections and size of 65 mm and larger shall be cast iron
and flanged connections. They shall have the same rating as the
piping system.
(19) Sight-glass
 Sight-glass shall be suitable for the specified working fluid or specified
working pressure.
 Sight-glass shall be of cast iron body. Clear acrylic iron window,
Buna-NO-ring.
(20) Fire Department Connections

 The fire department connection shall be of cast brass body with 65 mm.
diameter two-way male instantaneous outlet connections, including
caps and chains and incorporating individual clapper type non-return
valves. The unit shall be mounted as indicated on the drawings.
 Fire Department Connections shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(21) Fire Hose Reel Cabinets and Fire Hose Box Cabinets
 The cabinets shall be fabricated from steel sheet with a minimum
thickness of 1.6 mm.
 The cabinets shall be suitable for accommodating the fire fighting
equipment as specified on the drawing and shall be complete with
internal hinges, door locks and letter signs. The door shall be
openable to 180°.
(22) Jet/Fog Spray Nozzle
 Jet/Fog spray nozzle shall be adjustable combination straight stream
and spray and installed in fire hose box or as indicated on drawings.
 Jet/Fog spray nozzle shall be of 65 mm. with inlet quick coupling type.
(23) Fire Hose
 Fire hose shall be of 100 percent polyester with extrude rubber liner
and designed for fire protection propose with water pressure not less
than 250 PSIG.
 Fire hose shall be installed in fire hose box or as indicated on
drawings.
 Fire hose shall be size of 65 mm. with 30 m. long, completed with
male and female quick coupling on each end.
(24) Quick Coupling Reducer
 Quick coupling reducer shall be installed in fire hose box or as
indicated on drawings.
 Quick coupling reducer to reduce hose size with size of 65 mm. male
inlet and dia. 40 mm. female outlet.
(25) Fire Hose Reel
 Fire hose reel shall be installed in fire hose reel cabinet or as
indicated on drawings.
 Fire hose reel shall be Automatic, Recessed Swing Hose Reel type.
 Fire reel hose shall be red colour, dia. 25 mm. x 30 meters conform

to BS EN 694 Type A. Maximum working pressure at 15 kg/cm2 and

theoretical burst pressure at 50 kg/cm2.
 Hose nozzle shall be manufactured in red nylon, include both twist
grip and lever control to allow adjustment through jet/spray, shut-off
positions. Hose nozzle shall comply with BS EN 671-1.
 The automatic stop valve shall be opened to providing full capacity
within just two revolutions of the reel.
 Fire hose reel shall conform to BS EN 671-1 completely assembled
from the factory.
(26) Portable Fire Extinguisher
 Multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguishers
- Each unit shall have capacity of 4.5 kg. and at least TIS 332 rating
6A:20B.
- Multipurpose dry chemical fire extinguishers shall comply with
TIS 332.
 CO2 portable fire extinguishers
- Each unit shall have CO2 capacity of 4.5 kg. with at least UL rating
10B:C.
- CO2 portable fire extinguisher shall be UL listed.
 Halotron fire extinguishers
- Each unit shall have capacity of 7 kg. with at least UL rating
2A:10B:C
- Halotron fire extinguishers shall be UL listed.
3.6.3 Execution
(1) Hydrant Test
 Each hydrant shall be fully opened and closed under system water
pressure.
 Dry barrel hydrants shall be checked for proper drainage.
 The tests shall be completed with the pumps running.

(2) Control Valves Test

All control valves shall be fully closed and opened under system water
pressure to ensure proper operation.
(3) Hose Connection and Fire Department Connection Test
All hose connection and fire department connection threads shall be
tested to verify their compatibility with threads used by the local fire
department. The test shall consist of threading coupling samples, caps, or
plugs onto the installed devices.
(4) Manual Valve Test
Each valve intended to be manually opened or closed shall be operated
by turning the hand-wheel crank or wrench for its full range and returning
it to its normal position. Hose valve caps shall be tightened sufficiently to
avoid leaking during the test and removed after the test to drain water
and relieve pressure.
(5) Pressure Reducing Valves
 Each pressure-reducing valve shall be tested upon completion of
installation to ensure proper operation under flow and no-flow
conditions.
 Testing shall verify that the device properly regulates outlet pressure
at both maximum and normal inlet pressure conditions.
 The results of the flow test of each pressure-reducing valve shall be
recorded on the contractor's test certificate.
 The results shall include the static and residual inlet pressures, static
and residual outlet pressures, and the flow rate.
(6) Hydrostatic Tests
 All piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 13.8 kg/cm2 (200 PSI) and
shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours.
 The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low
elevation point of the system or portion being tested.
 Piping between the exterior fire department connection and the
check valve in the fire department inlet pipe shall be hydrostatically
tested in the same manner as the balance of the system
END OF SECTION

3.7 N2 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

3.7.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the gas suppression system as
shown on the Contract Drawing and specified herein.
(2) Supply and installation of the Nitrogen (IG-100) system shall be carried
out by a specialist contractor in accordance with latest NFPA 2001.
(3) The systems shall be generally indicated as on the Contract Drawings, but
the specialist contractor shall have to provide detailed installation drawings.
(4) The specialist contractor shall furnish detailed brochures outlining the
operation, recharge, service and maintenance of the system, in addition,
the equipment manufacturers recommended spare parts lists with
information regarding availability and ordering instructions shall also be
provided.
The design, equipment, installation, and testing shall comply with the
following codes and standards.
 NFPA 2001-2012 : Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
 NFPA 72-2010 : National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
(2) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM)
(3) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASTM)
(4) European Norm (EN)
(5) British Standard (BS)
(6) Japanese Industrial Standard, Japan High Pressure Gas Regulation.
(7) VDS, LPCB

3.7.1.3 Submittals
The Following items shall be submitted to the Employer for approval prior
installation.
(1) All drawing and complete hydraulic flow calculation sheets from
computer program of manufacturer recognized international standard shall
be submitted for review prior installation.
(2) Drawing show the system and remote component locations, piping
isometrics, electrical diagrams, elevations, and components detail.
(3) Letter of Authorization from Manufacturer.
(4) Manufacturer’s invoice & Packing List. (No price shown)
(5) Certificate of Origin issued by government party of manufacturing country.
(6) Manufacturer’s data sheets for all components to complete to the
system.
(7) Manufacturer’s training, instructional manuals for the installing
contractor’s personal assigned to install this system.
(8) As build drawings submitted for review and approval, prior to project
completion.
3.7.1.4 Warranty
All IG-100 system components furnished under this contract shall be
guaranteed against defective design, materials, and workmanship for the full
warranty period, which is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier, but
in no case less than two (2) years from the date of the system acceptance and
handover to the Employer.
3.7.2. Materials
3.7.2.1 Description
(1) The extinguishing agent shall be of Nitrogen Compressed Gas (IG-100)
(2) All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be of new,
unused, and undamaged condition in strict accordance with the
requirements of this Specification.
(3) IG-100 Fire suppression systems shall be of the engineered, permanently
piped, fixed nozzle type.
(4) Systems shall be operated with a restorable electric actuator and
incorporate a manual mechanical actuator.
(5) Detection systems shall suit direct interface with the IG-100 fire
suppression system. Detection networks shall be wired as cross-zones
loops and programmed each detector is one addressible. One address is

one alarm zone. To activate gas discharge must be detected two alarm
zones.
(6) The systems shall be designed for total flooding and based upon the
enclosure being sufficiently tight against agent leakage with all ventilation
shut down and/or fire damper to provide for static air condition upon
discharge.
(7) Agent quantity calculations shall be determined from dimensions
furnished on the construction drawings for a design concentration of 37.2-
43.7 % at the anticipated hazard temperature of 21C.
(8) The system shall be designed to discharge the calculated agent quantity
within 60 seconds for Class B fuel hazard, 120 seconds for Class A surface
fire or Class C hazard period.
(9) Nozzle spacing shall be in accordance with the listed or approved
coverage for each nozzle type. In all cases, the need for additional
nozzles shall be considered based upon site conditions and
recommendations of the manufacturer.
(10) The System can be operated automatically and manually.
(11) Automatic operation of each protected area shall be:
 Actuation of 1st detector, within the system, shall:
(a) Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator,
(b) Transfer auxiliary contacts which can perform auxiliary system
functions such as:
(i) Operate door holder/closures on access doors,
(ii) Transmit an alarm signal to the Fire detection and alarm
system,
(iii) Shutdown the relevant HVAC equipment.
 Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:
(a) Energize a pre-discharge horn/strobe device.
(b) Start time-delay sequence (not exceed 60 seconds)
(c) System abort sequence is enabled at this time.
 After completion of the time-delay sequence, the IG-100 Clean Agent
system shall discharge and the following shall occur:
(a) Energize a visual indicator outside the hazard in which the
discharge occurred.
 The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge
devices located at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device

shall duplicate the sequence description above except that the time
delays and abort functions shall be bypassed. The manual discharge
station shall be of the electrical
(12) Manual operation shall be available for both Manual Release and manual
lever solenoid valve on top of pilot cylinder.
 Manual Release
(a) Energize a pre-discharge horn/strobe device.
(b) Shut down the relevant HVAC system and/or close dampers.
(c) The IG-100 clean agent system shall discharge.
 Manual Lever Solenoid Valve
(a) The IG-100 clean agent system shall discharge.
(b) Energize a visual indicator outside the hazard in which the
discharge occurred.
3.7.2.2 Component
(1) IG -100 Control Panel
 The IG-100 Control panel is an electric automatic control releasing
device for actuating a fire suppression system upon receipt of alarm
signals from any initial devices and detectors. It shall be capable of
handling hazards from the cross-zoned detection configuration.
 The control panel for IG-100 shall consist of the specified input
(detection), output (signaling), power and control circuits, all connection
to the function panel, equipped with the specified input and output
circuit modules, and be installed in one or more specified equipment
cabinets.
 Operating power for the control panel shall be at 24 volts DC,
derived from 220 volts 50 Hz fed from the station essential supply.
 The panel shall contain of a sealed lead-acid batteries and an
automatic battery charger to give 24 hours standby power. , arrange
to come into use automatically in the event on the main incoming
supply fails. Loss of the main feed shall initiate an alert alarm to the
operator. Upon restoration of the main feed, the panels shall revert
into the normal operation.

 The panel shall incorporate necessary interface points for closing

relevant dampers on Ancillary Supply and Dirty Extract duct
branches, and shut down the local cooling systems, where
applicable. The panel shall also contain auxiliary contacts for remote
indicating to the Fire Alarm Panel of the following:
(a) Power supply healthy/fail,
(b) Gas discharged,
(c) Common fault alarm
 LED Indicators shall be provided on the front cover door to
annunciate the following condition.
(a) Normal,
(b) Trouble,
(c) Alarm,
(d) Pre-discharge,
(e) Discharged.
 Control panel shall be of UL listed and/or FM approved
(2) Agent (IG-100)
 The extinguishing agent shall be of NITROGEN GAS (N2) As Specified
by the name IG-100
 Agent (IG-100) shall be of manufacturer standard and / or
manufacturer distributor standard, produced by local gas plant is
acceptable.
(3) Agent Storage Containers
 IG-100 Cylinders shall be of seamless steel construction in
accordance with JIS or VDS or BS or ASTM or LPCB standards, or
similar design
IG-100 Cylinders specification, and finished in Grey or Red or Green
enamel paint.
 IG-100 Cylinders shall have an actual volume of 80 liters approximately,
and filled with only Nitrogen compressed gas and will provide a free
agent volume of minimum 20 cum at 300 bar @ 20 C.
 All cylinders shall equip with an automatic pressure-regulation valve.
The valve will quick discharge the agent and has the mechanism
which controls the discharging pressure to 60 bar or standard of
acceptable manufacturer.

 The actual volume and Nitrogen compress gas filled in N2 Pilot

Actuating cylinder shall be as manufacturer standard, in case of using
the pilot cylinder to activate the N2 storage cylinder pressure-
regulation valve.
 Gas filling pressure shall be not more than 67% of cylinder test
pressure.
 The Cylinders shall be made in USA or Europe or Japan. The Client
representative(s) have full rights to visit Nitrogen Cylinders Manufacturer
factory for inspection prior to shipment to Port of Thailand.
(4) Discharge Nozzles
 IG-100 discharge nozzles shall be of one piece stainless or brass
construction sized to provide flow rates in accordance with system
design hydraulics calculation.
 Orifices shall be machined in the nozzle body to provide a horizontal
discharge in Standard angle or 360 º patterns based upon the
approved coverage arrangements.
 Nozzles shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s part
number, number of orifices and orifice code.
 Nozzles shall be of standard of manufacturer.
(5) Smoke Detectors
 Smoke detectors shall be of a photoelectric smoke detector, Plug-in,
low standby current.
 Smoke detectors shall be of UL listed and/or FM approved.
(6) Abort Station
 Abort station shall be Push & Hold
 The abort station shall be of UL Listed and/or FM approved.
(7) Manual Station
 The manual station shall be a push button switch and pull handle
type (dual action).
 Manual station shall be of UL listed and/or FM approved.
(8) Alarm Bell
 Electric alarm bell shall be 150 mm. (6”) with 24 VDC.
 The bell alarm sound level shall not be less than 80 dBA at 3 m. or
UL rated.

 The housing shall be a high quality die casting with a baked red finish.
 The alarm bell shall be of UL listed and/or FM approved.
(9) Strobe Horn
 The horn sound level shall not be less than of UL rated.
 The strobe intensity shall be of UL rated., flash rate shall be 1 flash
per second minimum.
 The strobe horn shall be of UL listed and/or FM approved.
(10) Warning Signs
 Etched aluminum warning signs shall be provided at all entrance and
exit of the protected area.
 Entrance sign shall read : “WARRNING – DO NOT ENTER ROOM WHEN
ALARM SOUNDS, IG-100 BEING RELEASED” in English and Thai.
 Exit sign shall read : “WHEN ALARM SOUNDS, VACATE AT ONCE, IG-
100 BEING RELEASED” in English and Thai.
(11) Pipe Material
Distribution piping shall be of Schedule 40 and 80 steel pipe, ASTM. A53,
GRADE B, SEAMLESS. The pressure reducing fitting (orifice) cannot be use
for any part of N2 piping system due to disability for inspection for long
term.
(12) Pressure Relief Dampers
Gravity type pressure relief damper shall be furnished and installed where
show in drawing or not shown but need for the complete system. The
size of normally closed pressure relief damper shall be calculated and
recommended by manufacturer in order to meet the pressure relief
required.
3.7.3 Execution
(1) General
 The installation of the Gas Suppression System shall be done in
accordance With the drawings, specifications, and applicable NFPA
2001 and NFPA 72.
 All Equipment shall be also installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
approved instructions.

(2) Piping Installation

 Welding methods shall be used.
 Piping must be reamed, blown clear, and swabbed with appropriate
solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish, and cutting oil before
assembly.
 The piping network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue
before installation of nozzles.
 Teflon tape dope shall be used, and shall be applied to male
threads.
 All piping mush be solidly anchored to wall, building structure, etc.,
for support and thrust block.
 Pipes shall prime coat for rust prevention and finishing coat with red
colour.
(3) Equipment and Accessories
 Agent storage containers shall be securely mounted to the structural
frame.
 All agent storage containers shall be centrally located as vertical,
free-standing cylinders with steel support.
 The nozzle shall be threaded directly to the discharge piping without
the use of special adaptors.
(4) Wiring
All wiring associated with the alarms shall be carried out in electrical IMC
conduit.
(1) Installation Acceptance
 Adequate quantity of agent to produce the desired specified
concentration shall be provided. The actual room volumes shall be
checked against those indicated on the system drawings to ensure
the proper quantity of agent. Fan coast-down and damper closure
time shall be taken into consideration.
 The piping shall be pneumatically tested in a closed circuit for a
period of 10 minutes at 150 psig (1725 kPa.) At the end of 10
minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test
pressure.

 All auxiliary functions such as alarm-sounding or displaying devices,

remote annunciators, air-handling shutdown, and power shutdown
shall be checked for proper operation in accordance with system
requirements and design specifications. If possible, all air-handling
and power-cutoff controls shall be of the type that, once interrupted,
requires manual restart to restore power.
(2) Preliminary Functional Tests
The following preliminary functional tests shall be provided:
 If the system is connected to an alarm receiving office, notify the
alarm receiving office that the fire system test is to be conducted and
that an emergency response by the fire department or alarm station
personnel is not desired. Notify all concerned personnel at the end-
user’s facility that a test is to be conducted and instruct personnel as
to the sequence of operation.
 Disable each agent storage container release mechanism so that
activation of the release circuit will not release agent. Reconnect the
release circuit with a functional device in lieu of each agent storage
container release mechanism. For electrically actuated release
mechanisms, these devices can include 24-V lamps, flashbulbs, or
circuit breakers. Pneumatically actuated release mechanisms can
include pressure gauges, Refer to the manufacturer’s recommendations
in all cases.
 Check each detector for proper response.
 Check that polarity has been observed on all polarized alarm devices
and auxiliary relays.
 Check that all end - of - line resisters have been installed across the
detection and alarm bell circuits where required.
 Check all supervised circuits for proper trouble response.
(3) System Functional Operational Test
The following system functional operational tests shall be performed:
 Operated detection initiating circuit. Verify that all alarm functions
occur according to design specification.
 Operate the necessary circuit to initiate a second alarm circuit if
present. Verify that all second alarm functions occur according to
design specifications.

 Operate manual release. Verify that manual release functions occur

according to design specifications.
 Operate abort switch circuit of supplied. Verify that abort functions
occur according to design specifications. Confirm that visual and
audible supervisory signals are received at the control panel.
 Test all automatic valves unless testing the valve will release agent
or damage the valve (destructive testing).
 Check pneumatic equipment, where required, for integrity to ensure
proper operation.
(4) Remote Monitoring Operations.
The following testing of remote monitoring operations, if applicable, shall
be performed:
 Operate one of each type of input device while on standby power.
Verify that an alarm signal is received at remote panel after device is
operated. Reconnect primary power supply.
 Operate each type of alarm condition on each signal circuit and verify
receipt of trouble condition at the remote station.
(5) Control panel Primary Power Source.
The following testing of the control panel primary power source shall be
performed:
 Verify that the control panel is connected to a dedicated circuit and
labeled properly. This panel shall be readily accessible, yet restricted
from unauthorized personnel.
 Test a primary power failure in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specification with the system fully operated on standby power.
(6) Return of System to Operational Condition.
When all pre-discharge work is completed, each agent storage container
shall be reconnected so that activation of the release circuit will release
the agent. The system shall be returned to its fully operational design
condition. The alarm-receiving office and all concerned personnel at the
end-user’s facility shall be notified that the fire system test is complete
and that the system has been returned to full service condition.

(7) Commissioning
 Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide complete
operation and maintenance (O&M) instruction manuals to the Employer.
ALL aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed,
including electrical schematics of all circuits, a written description of
the system design, drawings illustration equipment location, and
technical bulletins describing each component.
 The manufacturer shall provide a supplemental, maintenance,
inspections, training seminar proposal for providing certification for the
Employer.
END OF SECTION


3.8.1 General
This part of the Specification describes all electrical equipment and
installations including connections thereof for the aforementioned system.
An electrical contractor will be responsible for bringing in the supply cable or
wiring to the Contractor's panels at the locations indicated on the drawings.
The Contractor shall connect the cable from the indicated location to the
isolator or circuit breaker in the mechanical work panels. The connections and
installation thereof shall form a part of the contract.
All items of a similar nature shall be products of one manufacturer.
All equipments, wiring methods and the installation shall conform to the
latest applicable standards as specified in this specification.
(1) The electrical and control works shall comply with the following codes
and standards.
 IEC 60034-1 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 1:
Rating and performance
 IEC 60034-12 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 12:
Starting performance of single-speed three-
phase cage induction motors
 IEC 60335-2-104 : Household and similar electrical
appliances - Safety - Part 2-104: Particular
requirements for appliances to recover
and/or recycle refrigerant from air
conditioning and refrigeration equipment
 IEC 60364-1 Edition 4.0 : Electrical installations of buildings - Part 1:
to the standards and regulations of PEA and National Electrical Code
(NEC).

3.8.1.3 Submittals
3.8.1.5 Warranty
All part or the electrical and control works shall be guaranteed by the
contractor at least 2 year.
3.8.2 Materials
3.8.2.1 Description
All electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation at the indicated
system voltages and operating conditions.
3.8.2.2 Component
(1) Earthing
The equipment grounding system shall be designed and installed such
that all metallic, raised floor structures, enclosures, raceway, junction
boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment, and
other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits operate
continuously at ground potential.
The equipment grounding system shall provide a low impedance path for
possible ground fault currents. The system shall consist of a separate
green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and each
branch circuit. The required grounding conductor shall be installed in the
common conduit with the related phase and/or neutral conductors. Each
electrical expansion fitting shall be provided with an external flexible
copper ground strap securely bonded on each end of the fitting. The
required equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance
with NEC, Table 250-95, or approved equivalent.

Unless otherwise specified, the grounding connectors shall be of a type

specifically manufactured for grounding purposes, made of copper alloy
and assembled with high strength silicon bronze hardware. Where
grounding or bonding conductors connect to structural cables,
connections shall be made with mechanical devices; welded connections
shall not be made at these points. All mechanical connections shall be
completely encapsulated in nonhardening, conductive epoxy. The epoxy
shall be applicable for wet locations or for ambient temperatures of 10 °C
- 55 °C.
Jumper material shall be copper wire. Copper straps shall be softdrawn
copper.
Grounding of all chillers, pumps, and air handling units shall be done by
means of separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for
each feeder or each branch circuit.
 General Requirement
This provision covers the design and construction of motor control
center of floor or wall mounting type. Applicable standards of NEMA,
ANSI, IEC, TISI, JIS, VDE and MEA shall be complied.
 Ratings of Equipment in Motor Control Center
The ratings of the equipment shall be as follows:-
- System Wiring : 3-Phase, 4-Wire (Solid grounded
neutral)
- Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
- Rated Current : As shown in drawing
- Rated Short Time : 50 KA rms. Withstand Current
- Rated Power Frequency Voltage : 2.5 KV rms Withstand Test
(50 Hz x 1 min)
(3) The Construction of Motor Control Center
 Motor control center shall consist of one or more vertical sections
bolted together to form a totally enclosed rigid construction. The
vertical section shall be made of sheet steel (minimum thickness of
1.6 mm.). Each vertical section shall consist of three compartments,
viz. busbar, cable, terminal and control unit compartment, and each

compartment shall be separated by sheet steel barrier. The motor

control center shall be designed to permit easy addition and removal
in the future.
 Each control unit compartment shall be the combination of starter,
circuit breaker and other accessories for each motor. The unit shall
be completely enclosed and isolated from all other units. Unit side
plates shall be permanently attached. Each unit shall have a single
door mounted on removable pin hinges. Each door shall be provided
with a removable panel suitable for mounting push button, selector
or switch and pilot lamp.
 Efficient ventilation opening shall be provided on the panel. The
opening shall be screened so as to be insect-proof.
 Each panel shall undergo a treatment of degreasing and derusting by
electro-galvanized or other equivalent method for antirust and shall
be coated by an oven-baked enamel paint finished.
 All doors shall be provided with dust-protection gaskets of neoprene
or any other approved material. All doors shall be equipped with
locks operated by keys.
 Plastic nameplate with engraved letters of at least 3 mm. thick shall
be placed at ever circuit breaker and starter indicating their uses.
 Mimic bus diagram shall be applied for each motor control center.
 Ground bus shall be full length of the motor control center.
 Uniform height and depth shall be adopted for the cubicles.
(4) Circuit Breakers
 All circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA, or JIS or IEC or TISI standard
and shall be manually operated, trip-free.
 Main circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following protection
devices.
- Over current and short circuit protection.
- Phase sequence protection.
- Over and under voltage protection.
- Time delay relay.
 The rated current and rated breaking capacities shall be as shown on
the drawings.

(5) Motor Starters

 Motor starters shall comply with NEMA, IEC or JIS standard.
 Each starter shall be of an air break type and provided with thermal
trip unit (one on each phase). In case of intervention of the above
trip units, an auxiliary contact shall cut the starter coil off and give an
alarm signal.
 The thermal trip units shall be hand reset, and a suitable
push/button shall be provided on the door of each unit.
 At least 2 normally open and 2 normally closed free contacts for
contacts shall be wired to the terminal blocks for remote indicator.
 The starter contacts shall be able to interrupt a current equal to
 Automatic direct-on-line starters are allowable for various motor sizes
up to 1.5 HP and closed circuit transition reduced voltage starter shall
be used for those over 7.5 HP.
(6) Measuring Instrument and Current Transformer
 All measuring instruments and current transformers shall comply with
IEC or ANSI or JIS standards.
 All metering shall be the flush-mounted type with a dimension
approximately 96 x 96 mm. accuracy class 1.5. The overload capacity
is 1.2 times of the normal continuous load, except for motor circuit
where the overload capacity of ammeter shall be 2 times the normal
continuous load. The voltmeters shall be provided with selector
switch.
 Current transformers shall be the single phase insulated type and can
withstand a continuous overload of 20%. The accuracy class of the
transformer shall be class 1 for metering winding and class 3 for
instrument winding. The insulation of the current transformer shall be
of class 600 volts.
(7) Busbar & Busbar Holder
 Busbar shall be of copper conductor (purity 98%) the size and
ampacity of busbar shall comply with DIN standard and also shall
comply with MEA regulation.
 Busbar spacing shall comply with MEA regulation.

 Busbar holder shall be of fiberglass reinforced polyester or epoxy

stresses.
 Each busbar shall have a colour identification, conforming to the
colour coding of the cable.
(8) Control Wiring
 Control wire in the motor control center shall be flexible annealed
copper wire 750V PVC insulated.
 The size of control wire shall be as follows:-
- 4 mm2 for current circuit
- 2.5 mm2 for voltage circuit
- 1.5 mm2 for control circuit
- 10 mm2 for ground wire for door
 All control wiring shall be run in cable trunk or flexible conduit and
no splicing.
 Wire marker approved by the Employer’s Representative shall be
applied and both ends of the control wiring.
 All wirings shall be terminated at the terminal blocks.
(9) Motors
All motors shall conform to the latest ANSI or IEC standards or approved
equivalent. They shall have ample margin on their rating for the required
duty with due allowance for ambient temperature. All motor shall be
induction type suitable for 50 Hz. Motors shall be of totally enclosed fan
cooled squirrel cage screen-protect drip-proof type. High starting torque
motors and low speed machines shall be started by reduced voltage
starters.
Motors 7.5 KW and larger shall be started by reduced voltage starters
unless otherwise specified.
Motors shall normally be supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment
driven by the motors.
Control devices shall be provided for all motors. Single or double pole
snap switches, specifically designed for alternating current operation only,
may be used as manual controllers for single-phase motors having a
current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch rating. Automatic

control devices such as thermostats may control the starting and stopping
of motors directly, provided the devices used are designed for that
purpose and have such a rating. Otherwise, magnetic starters shall be
used, with the automatic control device actuating the control circuit.
Overload protection shall be provided with running-over current
(Overload) protection in accordance with the NEC. The overload
protection device shall be provided either integrally with the motor or
controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise
specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type.
All motors shall be provided with a disconnection means. All 3-phase and
single-phase motors above 1 kW shall be provided with a safety-type
disconnecting switch. For single phase motors below 1 kW, a general use
snap switch, rated for alternating-current only shall be acceptable,
provided the ampere rating or the switch is at least 125 percent of the
full load current rating of the associated motor. Switches shall disconnect
all ungrounded conductors
3.8.3 Execution
 All motor control centers and electrical system shall be installed in
accordance with MEA regulation, NEC standard and/or the
manufacturer's recommendation.
 All metal parts and non-carrying current of motor control center shall
be.
All motor control centers shall be not only tested at the manufactory but
also checked at the site for the follow performances
 Insulation of all cables
 Operating and protecting of the equipment
 Grounding
END OF SECTION


3.9.1 General
standards.
(1) NEC 300-21
(2) ASTM
(3) UL
(4) BS476
(5) AS1530
3.9.1.3 Submittals
installation.
3.9.1.5 Warranty

3.9.2 Materials
3.9.2.1 Description
rating material, and approved by the Employer’s Representative unless
3.9.2.2 Component
Laboratory Inc.
fire.
enough.

3.9.3 Installation
3.9.3.1 At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where:
END OF SECTION

3.10 PAINTING
3.10.1 General
anticorrosive materials and/or painted according to this specification.
Representative.
(4) During the progress of the paint work, the Contractor shall avoid spotting
of the floors, walls and other adjacent equipment. All spotting, if any,
shall be cleaned immediately. Any damages, which may result from
painting shall be under the contractor's responsibility.
3.10.2 Execution
3.10.2.1 Painting
(1) Preparation and cleaning of surface to be painted
 Metal or ferrous metal surfaces
Rust at welding joints and other defects shall be removed by
scraping. Wire brushes or sand papers shall be used to clean the
loose rust and other foreign substances. Mordant solution such thinner,
gas, terpentine shall be used to remove grease, oil or organic coating.
Then the surface shall be cleaned with water and thoroughly dried or
blow-dried.
 The application of prime coats which follows shall adhere strictly to
 Old paint coats shall be removed by scraping before application of
new paint.

(2) Brush or spray painting

Each paint coat shall be left until completely dry before subsequent
applications.
Painting can be classified into 2 coats :
 Prime coat for rust prevention and/or adhesion of the finishing coats.
 Finishing coat for final appearance or for symbolizing the system
codes. Types of paint used shall depend on the material as well as on
the environment.
(3) Types of paint for various surface and environment
Normal Area
Type of Surface or Humid Area
Corrosive Area
st
Black steel pipe, black steel 1 coat: Red lead 1st coat: Epoxy red
hanger and support, black steel primer lead primer.
nd
sheet, switchboard, and panel. 2 coat: Red Lead 2nd coat: Epoxy red
primer lead primer.
rd
3 coat : Alkyd 3rd coat : Epoxy
finishing paint. finishing paint.
th
4 coat : Alkyd 4th coat : Epoxy
Note: In case where there is a paint repair resulting from welding, cutting, drilling,
polishing, or threading, zinc rich primer shall be used prior to the application
of finishing paint.
(4) Colour Code
All pipes shall be colour coded except insulated pipes where only
priming coats shall be applied to the pipe surface.
 In the electrical system, colour coding shall be only at the conduit
clamps and the cover of junction boxes.
 Location of symbols and arrows indicating directions are as follows :
- Every 6 metre (20 ft.) internal of straight line pipe.
- Near all valves.
- Every change of direction and/or separation.
- Where pipes passing through walls or floors.
- Near service pipe.

(5) Colour Codes of Various Systems

The identifications previously mentioned shall have colour as follows :
Letters Colour Colour

Description Code
Symbol Code Symbol
Fire Water Supply for Sprinkler System FSP White Red
Fire Water Supply for Fire Hose Cabinet FHC White Red
Main Fire Water Supply F White Red
Drain Pipe for Sprinkler System DSP White Red
Conduit & Tray for Electrical Fire FP Orange Red
Pipe Support & Hanger - Dark Gray
Distribution Board & Motor Control Board
- Ivory Black
Normal Electrical
Distribution Board & Motor Control Board
- Ivory Red
Emergency Electrical
Final selection of colours will be made by the Employer’s Representative.

All uninsulated pipes painted all over the pipe surface conforming to this
colour codes.
END OF SECTION

3.11 TEST AND STERILIZATIONS

3.11.1 General
(1) All piping shall be tested by the contractor and approved by the
Employer’s Representative before acceptance.
(2) All equipment, materials, labour, etc. required for testing the fire protection
system or the part thereof shall be furnished by the contractor at no
additional cost.
(3) All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered
and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved.
(4) Where such work has been covered or concealed before it is tested and
approved, it shall be exposed for testing.
(5) Underground fire protection piping shall be tested and approved before
back filling.
Test and sterilizations shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 NFPA 20/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
 NFPA 24/2010 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances
3.11.2 Execution
that the equipment operates satisfactorily and to conform to contract
documents.
furnished, installed or connected by the contractor to assure proper
manufacturer's field Engineer.


Representative conditions to determine that equipment, material and
system meet requirements of these Specifications.
(6) The contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests
(7) The contractor shall notify the Employer’s Representative two weeks prior
to commencement of any testing, except for meggering.
replace or restore to original condition any damaged equipment or material.
barriers, danger signs, etc. shall be provided by the contractor and shall
the tests.
(10) The contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary
system.
(12) The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination
(13) All interlocks, control and alarm circuits shall be given an operation test.
(14) The insulation test of each conductor shall not be lower than the
accepted level as required by Authority concerned.
(15) The grounding system test shall not be more than 5 ohms.
as recommended by the manufacturer, circuit breaker, low voltage
switchboard, motor, etc unless specifically waived by the Employer’s
Representative.


specifications.
(19) Cost incurred during testing i.e, electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be
borned by the contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these
specifications or the contract documents.
3.11.2.2 Flushing of Piping
(1) Underground mains and lead-in connections to system risers shall be
completely flushed before connection is made to sprinkler piping.
(2) The flushing operation shall be continued for a sufficient time to ensure
thorough cleaning.
(3) The minimum rate of flow shall be not less than one of the following:
 Hydraulically calculated water demand flow rate of the system,
including any hose requirements.
 Flow necessary to provide a velocity of 3.1 m/sec (10 ft/sec).
 Maximum flow rate available to the system under fire conditions.
(4) Piping between the fire department connection and the check valve in
the inlet pipe shall be flushed with a sufficient volume of water in order
to remove any construction debris and trash accumulated in the piping
prior to the completion of the system and prior to the installation of the
fire department connection.
3.11.2.3 Hydrostatic Test
(1) All piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 13.8 kg/cm2 (200 psi) or 3.5 kg/cm2
(50 psi) in excess of the system working pressure, whichever is greater, and
shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours.
(2) The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low elevation
point of the individual system or zone being tested.
(3) The inside standpipe system piping shall show no leakage.
(4) Piping between the fire department connection and the check valve in
the inlet pipe shall be tested hydrostatically in the same manner as the
balance of the system.
(5) During the hydrostatic test, the pressure gauge at the top of each
standpipe shall be observed and the pressure recorded.

3.11.2.4 Flow Tests

(1) Water flow tests shall be carried out in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA
14 to verify the following :
 Mains water supply.
 All water flow alarm devices.
 Flow rate at the hydraulically most remote sprinkler.
 Flow rate at the hydraulically most remote hosereel.
(2) The arrangement of piping work and fittings to facilitate these tests shall
be as illustrated in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, with safety shut-off valves and
quick-action couplings for connection of the portable meter set.
3.11.2.5 Equipment Tests
In addition to the tests required by NFPA 20, the contractor shall carry out
functional tests on all flow switches, monitoring points and interface
connections with the fire alarm, BMS and SCADA systems.
Packaged pump units shall be tested at the manufacturers works, and a
detailed test certificate shall be provided.
3.11.2.6 System Operational Tests
(1) Water flow detecting devices including the associated alarm circuits shall
be flow tested through the inspector’s test connection to result in an
alarm on the premises within 5 minutes after such flow begins.
(2) The main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until the system
pressure stabilizes. The static and residual pressures shall be recorded on
the contractor’s test certificate.
(3) Operating tests shall be made of exposure protection systems upon
completion of the installation, where such tests do not risk water damage
to the building on which they are installed or to adjacent buildings.
3.11.2.7 Defective Work
(1) If the inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material
shall be replaced or repaired as necessary. Then inspection and tests
shall be repeated.
(2) Repairs of piping shall be made with new materials. No caulking of
screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.

3.11.2.8 Cleaning and Adjusting

Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings, and fixtures shall be clean without grease,
metal cuttings, or sludge that may have accumulated from operation of the
system during the test. Any stoppage, discolouration, or other damage to the
finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the Contractor's failure of
cleaning the piping system properly, shall be repaired by the contractor at his
properly, shall be repaired by the contractor at his own expense. When the
Works is completed. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be
adjusted for proper operation.
3.11.2.9 Works to completion
(1) The contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working
(2) The contractor shall operate the systems in such a manner to be able to
and ready to operate at full load anytime within a period of 24
consecutive hours. The cost incurred during this operation shall be borne
by the Contractor.
(3) As the installation proceeds the contractor shall prepare record drawings
of the Electrical Installation, 'as built drawing. It will be sufficient to
modify these contract drawings showing any amendments to the services
which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the
Employer’s Representative for approval.
(4) The contractor shall deliver to the owner representative on completion of
the works, manufacturer's literature, specifications, technical information
and record drawings for all equipment installed.
3.11.2.10 Reports
operate with the required performance. Test run reports with all necessary
data such as pressure, temperature, flow rate, current, voltage, etc., shall be
recorded.
END OF SECTION


SECTION 4: MECHANICAL VENTILATION
AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL VENTILATION

AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
4.1.1 General
installation of the Mechanical Ventilating and Air Conditioning works for
building services and related work for the project.
drawings and this specification.
4.1.1.2 Environment
(2) Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection:
 Altitude: Approximately mean sea level
 Maximum temperature 40C (104F)
 Average temperature (all year) 36.1C (97F)
 Maximum relative humidity 85%
 Average relative humidity (all year) 60%
to the standard and regulations of ASHRAE (American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers). The following standards are
mentioned in this specification for systems and/or components and,
where described, the systems and/or components shall conform to such
standards.
 AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association
 ANSI - American National Standard Institute
 ARI - Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

 ASTM -
American Society for Testing and Materials
 BS -
British Standard
 EIT-3003-40 -
Standard of Air Conditioning & Ventilation System
 EIT-3008-44 -
Standard for the Installation of Small Size Air
Conditioner
 FM - Factory Mutual
 IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
 MEA - Metropolitan Electricity Authority
 MWWA - Metropolitan Water Works Authority
 NEC - National Electrical Code
 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
 SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National
Association Inc.
 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
 Any regulations issued by local authorities.
(2) In the case of conflict or uncertainly in the application of the above
(3) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issued unless
governing authorities require an earlier one.
(1) The Air conditioning and Ventilating System work includes the furnishing
of materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation and services required
to construction, installation and testing the completed air conditioning
and ventilating system as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
workable system in accordance with the requirements of this
specification, and the accompanying drawings and schedules all to the
entire satisfaction of the owner.
complete air conditioning and ventilating system with the established

(4) The entire system and its basic components shall conform to the
standards and regulation of ASHRAE. All Standards, codes and regulations
shall be the latest issued unless governing authorities require an earlier
one.
(1) The Contractor shall examine all drawings and Specifications to make sure
opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of these documents, he
shall inform the Employer’s Representative immediately.
drawings, together with all other utilities systems involved in the Project,
4.1.1.6 Dimensions
on the drawings.
4.1.1.7 Operation
make a decision.
(2) The locations of air outlets, air duct route and piping route shown on the
drawings are diagrammatic, and shall be considered as approximate only.
The approved locations may be different from those shown on the
drawings, if so directed by the owner.

4.1.2 Material
4.1.2.1 General
shall provide sufficient technical documents and the comparison to Employer’s
Representative for consideration.
qualification:
(1) All equipments, materials and parts used shall be new of current
manufacture, of the highest quality and free from defects or imperfections
affecting the performance or life of the item and approved by the
Employer’s Representative and the owner.
(2) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the drawings or in the
owner shall not release the Contractor from his responsibility or his
liability regarding the properties and workmanship of installations.
(3) The Contractor shall protect all equipments, material and parts during
storage and during construction against the ingress of moisture,

contamination or corrosion that might damage the equipment and

material.
(4) Certain major equipment defined in the Specifications will be furnished to
the Contractor, on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix
this equipment as instructed by the manufacturer and to the Employer’s
Representative satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if any).
(5) After the materials and equipment have been installed completely in
materials and equipment from damages shall rest with the Contractor's
own expense.
the works.


Representative may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency,
improve their character, augment their number or replace with new tools,
equipment and materials as required.
(1) All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and
maintenance, shall be provided with nameplates, tags or arrows,
especially in enclosed areas, such as ceiling, shafts, and other places
accessible for maintenance service.
(1) Only new material and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works.
All materials and equipments furnished by the Contractor shall be subject
to inspections and approval of the Employer’s Representative with the
the job site.


the Employer’s Representative Immediately, any extra expense for testing
shall be of the contractor responsibility.
Representative in writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality
for approval.
installation.
to dimensions taken in the building(s) and shall closely follow manufacturer's
recommendations. All submitted drawings shall be signed by the Contractor,
and shall indicate the date of submission and the date(s) of revision(s).
Representative.


approval, and shall be returned to the Contractor. After approval, 4 copies
of blueprint are required and additional copies may be requested by the
Employer’s Representative as necessary.
shipping and transporting of material and equipment to the job site. The
materials and equipments shall be handled in a manner to prevent
warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft
of damage or any kind what so ever.

4.1.2.11 Materials and Equipments Storage

necessary materials and equipments brought to the job site. The storage
4.1.3 Execution
The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe
for his own use at suitable connection points and shall bear the expense of
usage, which shall be removed upon completion of sections of the Works.
loss to :
 All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected
thereby.
 All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein,
(1) Test all equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the
equipment operates satisfactorily and to conform to Contract Documents.

(2) Field testing shall be required for all Air conditioning and Ventilating
System equipment furnished, installed or connected by the Contractor to
assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in
accordance with the plans, specifications and manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer’s Representative
field Engineer.
specified in this specification or not, shall be included, unless specifically
waived by the owner representative.
(5) Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the owner representative
conditions to determine that equipment, material and system meet
requirements of the specifications.
(6) The Contractor shall maintain in triplicate, a written record of all tests
performed and results. Three copies of test records shall be given to the
owner representative within the following day.
(7) The Contractor shall notify the owner representative two weeks prior to
commencement of any testing, except for metering.
material.
the tests.
(10) The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment and furnish temporary
4.1.3.4 Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual
completed work.

 Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipments and

 Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete
 Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
 Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare
parts.
 Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and
yearly.
 Section 6 Comprises system operation manual
After acceptance of the completed work, the Contractor shall train the
operator (s) and maintenance staff of operator for a period of not less than
15 consecutive days until they are competent to operate the system by
themselves.
of the HVAC installation, as built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify
these contract drawings showing any amendments to the service which
have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the owner
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the owner representative on completion
of the works, manufacturer's literature, specifications, technical
information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END OF SECTION

4.2 ELECTRIC WATER CHILLER

4.2.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install electric water chiller as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein.
The electric water chiller shall be specially designed for 50 Hz. Electrical
systems and the cooling capacity shall not be less than that indicated on the
Drawings.
The electric water chiller shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
 American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
 Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.)
 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
(ASHRAE)
4.2.1.3 Submittals
(1) Product Data
 Chiller description and data, including operating manual and instruction
 ARI 550 certified performance curves (kW input vs. output) for full
load.
 Sound power data by octave band at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of
full load.
(2) Technical Drawings
 Technical drawings of chiller, including dimensions and weight.
 Complete wiring diagrams specifically for the proposed equipment.
Include required wiring between chiller and starter. Indicate locations
of conduit connections.


4.2.1.5 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for electric water
chiller.
4.2.2 Material
4.2.2.1 Description
Water chillers shall be of factory assembled package type, each consisting of a
screw compressor, motor, water cooler, condenser, economizer, lubricating
system, electrical and microprocessor control system, etc. All equipment
shall specifically be designed for refrigerant R-134a, R410a or environment
friendly refrigerant. Chiller performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI
standard 550 (latest version).
4.2.2.2 Component
(1) Compressor
 Compressor shall be of the Semi- hermitic direct drive or gear drive.
 Compressors shall be selected to ensure stable operation at all
operating points from 25 % to maximum rated load at design
conditions.
(2) Motor
 The compressor motor shall be of the single speed, non-reversible,
squirrel cage induction type. Motor shall have a minimum of 95%
efficiency and 85% power factor and shall be suitable for 380 volt / 3
/ 50 Hz power system as specified.
 Motors shall be provided with a factory alignment of motor and
compressor shafts, and to allow access to motor for repair without
first removing refrigerant charge from the chiller.
(3) Lubricating System
 Each compressor shall be equipped with positive displacement or
forced-feed lubricating system in association with pump, cooler,
reservoir, filter and accessories. All systems shall be completely
functional during starting, stopping and normal operating conditions.

Crankcase heater shall be provided to heat up lubricating oil when

necessary.
(4) Lubricating Oil Control System
 Compressors and gear boxes shall be provided with sensors to
indicate either bearing temperatures or lubricating oil temperatures.
(5) Oil heater
 In case lubricating oil and refrigerant in the system can be mixed up,
thermostatically controlled electric oil heaters with adequate
capacity shall be installed in order to prevent oil bubbles when
refrigerant pressure changes.
(6) Heat Rejection System for Oil Cooler
 City water shall not be used for lubricating oil coolers, purging
devices, and the like. If required, either condensing water or chilled
water shall be allowed to use in a coolant circuit.
(7) Capacity Reduction Equipment
 Each compressor shall be provided with an automatic micro-
processor control for varying the compressor capacity in the range of
maximum to minimum values. The capacity reduction equipment
shall consist of a hot gas bypass or the radial type suction damper or
slide valve; or shall be equipped with one stage or multi-stages inlet
guide vane.
 The capacity reduction equipment shall be arranged for automatic
operation, and shall be able to reduce the capacity in the range of
30% to 100%.
(8) Cooler / Condenser Design and Construction
 The cooler and condenser shall be designed, constructed and tested
in accordance with ASME and ANSI-B 9.1 Code requirements and
recommendations of ARI standard 550. Working pressure of the water
side vessel shall not be less than 1,034 kPa or the figure shown in the
equipment data sheet. The fouling factor for both cooler and condenser
shall not be more than 0.000044 m² °k/w (0.00025 ft² h °f/Btu)
 Unless otherwise specified, water cooler and condenser shall be 2-
pass construction of the shell and tube type operating with
refrigerant in the shell and water in the tubes. The water tubes shall
be made of replaceable integral copper or red brass.

(9) Shell Insulation

 Shell of water cooler shall be insulated with at least 25 mm. thick
closed cell insulation. The insulation shall have thermal conductivity
of less than 0.038 W/m°k (0.27 Btu/Hr/sq.ft/°F/inch). When shell
insulation is finished completely, 3 layers of emulsion acrylic paint
shall be applied on the insulation surface.
(10) Current Demand Limiting Controller
 Current demand limiting controller shall limit the current draw of
compressor motor not exceeding 105% of maximum running amps.
Performance curves along with technical data shall be submitted for
approval before installation. High operating efficiency shall be
acceptable.
(11) Vibration Isolator
 Each water chiller shall be mounted on steel spring isolators or
rubber pad recommend by manufacture which are placed on a
concrete base. The isolator shall be selected and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation so that
vibration or noise transmission cannot be permitted to the nearby
structure.
(12) Safety and Control Devices
 The controller of the unit shall be of the microprocessor type which
is able to directly interface at High level with chiller manager system
or Building Management System. The controller shall be factory
mounted and suitable for operation on single phase alternating
current of frequency available and voltage not exceeding 250 V. The
controller shall include, but is not limited to, the following main
functions:
- Safety control
- System shutdown control
- System cycling control
- Motor current limiting control
- Leaving chilled water temperature control
- Monitoring a number of parameter
 Date and time of day
 Chiller operating hour
 Entering/Leaving chilled water temperature

 Entering/Leaving condenser water temperature

 Oil temperature
 Differential oil pressure
 Motor current in % full load AMP
(13) Safety Devices
 Microprocessor control panel shall automatically shut down the unit
when emergency conditions occur. All safety devices shall be
suitable for operation on single phase alternating current of available
frequency and voltage not exceeding 250 V. The following
requirements shall be combined on the control board, but is not
limited to:
- Motor over current
- Under/Over voltage
- Bearing oil high temperature & pressure
- High motor temperature
- High condenser pressure
- Low evaporator refrigerant temperature
- Low oil pressure
- Loss of cooler/condenser water flow
(14) Unit Starter
 The starter shall be of star-delta closed transition, or solid-state
starter, and shall be designed suitably for 380 volts / 3 / 50 Hz of
power system. The structure and components of starter shall be as
follows:
- Floor standing or unit mounted with gasket steel enclosure
- 3 ammeter with current transformer
- 3 voltmeter with Fuse
- Load break switch with panel
- Short circuit protection device
(15) Accessories
 The following accessories shall be provided, but is not limited to, for
each chiller:
- Vibration isolation
- Flexible pipe connection
- Water flow switch

- Thermometer
- Pressure gauge
- Two brushes with jointed rods for each chiller
 The quantities of accessories shall be in the drawing. Some
accessories shall be recommended by the manufacturer if applicable.
4.2.3 Execution
(1) Install chiller and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
(2) Complete accessories and related equipment in accordance with the
drawings
(3) Provide for connection to electrical supply
(4) Install units on vibration isolator
4.2.3.2 Start Up
(1) The Contractor shall supervise leak testing, evacuation and dehydration
using a high vacuum pump furnished by the manufacturer, charging the
unit, startup, and instruction of the Employer’s personnel on operation.
Provide sufficient refrigerant and dry nitrogen for pressure testing under
manufacturer's supervision.
(2) Before units are started, pump new grease into bearing housing to force
out old grease and provide adequate lubrication.
(3) If no factory-mounted oil cooler chilled water piping circuit is provided,
the Contractor must provide field piping as per manufacturing
recommendations including all valves, filters and drains.
(4) Before acceptance of the equipment, all tests shall be conducted as
required by demonstrate that the equipment operates mechanically and
electrically as specified.
(5) Provide all instruments as required for conducting tests.
END OF SECTION

4.3 CROSS FLOW COOLING TOWER

4.3.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install Cross flow cooling tower as shown on
the Drawings and/or specified herein.
4.3.1.2 Submittal
(1) Submit, with certified drawings, performance curves for the tower,
showing leaving water temperatures from the tower for the design
temperature range and for temperature ranges corresponding to 80
percent, 60 percent, 40 percent and 20 percent of the design
temperature range for wet bulb temperatures.
(2) Submit materials of construction for all components.
(3) Certified dimensioned drawings of complete cooling tower.
(4) Total pressure loss value of cooling tower
(5) Thermal Performance (CTI Certified)
4.3.1.4 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for Cross flow
cooling tower.
4.3.2 Material
4.3.2.1 Description
(1) The contractor shall provide and install the cooling tower as shown on
the drawing and equipment data sheets. The cooling tower shall have
the heat rejection capacity of not less than the specified figure on the
equipment data sheet.
(2) The cooling tower shall be designed to use for outdoor installation.
The cooling tower shall be allowed to assemble at the site. Every part
shall be in good condition. If any part is damaged, the contractor shall
replace with a new one at his own expense.

4.3.2.2 Component
(1) Type of Cooling Tower
 The cooling tower shall be of Low noise, induced-draft, cross flow
and draw-through type. The tower shall be equipped with a film
type filling as the basic heat transfer.
(2) Casing and Structure
 Casing and structure for cooling tower including inlet louver shall be
the following types:
Option Casing Structure Inlet Louver

Fiberglass reinforced Hot dip galvanized steel Fiberglass reinforced
1.
polyester (FRP) polyester (FRP)
2. Hot dip galvanized steel Hot dip galvanized steel Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
3. Polyvinyl Chloride PVC) Hot dip galvanized steel Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
 Casing and inlet louver shall be fixed to the structure in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
(3) Filling and Filling Support
 Filling shall be constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) to form as rigid
packing. Filling shall be supported by hot dip galvanized steel in
order to achieve the uniform water distribution.
(4) Drift Eliminator
 The tower shall be provided with drift eliminators or equivalents for
limiting drift loss. Drift eliminators shall be constructed of polyvinyl
chloride (PVC). Drift loss shall be 0.001% of rated water flow.
 Drift loss shall be certified by an independent institute.
(5) Hot Water Distribution System
 The metering orifice shall distribute water uniformly over the entire
filling area. The hot water from the system shall enter hot water
basin, which shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized steel or
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). The hot water shall be
distributed to filling area by gravity feed through metering orifice. In
case the cooling tower consists of 2 hot water basins, the tower shall
have 2 sets of cast iron body flow type control valves with locking
bar. These valves shall be installed to balance the flow of water to
each cell.

(6) Fan, Driving System and Accessories

 Fan shall be of the axial flow type with airfoil section blades and
made of light aluminium alloy. Fan shall be quiet in operation.
 The steel shaft shall be used for torque transmission. Fan speed
reducer shall be of gear-drive type. Gear reducer shall have a long
service life and heavy duty. Gear reducer shall be products of Europe
or USA.
 The motor shall be out of hot air stream. Fan motor shall be of 1450
RPM, 380V / 3 / 50 Hz. Totally enclosed fan cooled, insulation class F,
IP55 and service factor of 1.15.The motor shall be capable of
supporting an adequate torque to the fan under all operating
conditions. The motor shall be of a high efficiency design.
(7) Cold Water Basin
 Basin shall be of hot dip galvanized steel or fiberglass reinforced
polyester (FRP). The internal surface shall be smooth. Cold water
basin for each cooling tower shall be separated to ease a cleanup
service.
 The capacity of each basin shall have a sufficient volume in order to
prevent suction line of pump from sucking the air during operation.
(8) Miscellaneous
 The contractor shall provide outlet and inlet connection, over flow,
drain, pilot operated float controlled valve (for make-up water), inlet
air screen, suction strainer, and the like. The quantity and material
shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Service door shall be the same construction as its casing. When the
door is closed, no air leakage shall be allowed. In case the location
of service door is too high, the contractor shall also provide ladder
with guard.
 The contractor shall provide service catwalk inside the cooling tower
if more than 2 cooling towers are installed.
 The contractor shall provide ladder, hand rail and guard in order to
access to the deck of cooling tower. All material shall be of non-
corrosive material.
 Hot air duct shall not be less than 1.27 mm galvanized steel sheet or
FRP. The dimension shall be subject to the size of cooling tower.
 Cooling tower shall be supported by steel spring type isolator which

has static deflection of not more than 25mm. All piping to be

connected to the cooling tower shall be provided with flexible pipe
connection.
 Bolts and nuts used for outdoor installation shall be of stainless steel
type.
 In case the electrical panel board is in accessible location, the
contractor shall provide weather proof disconnecting switch near the
cooling tower.
4.3.3 Execution
(1) Confirm the operating weight of installed cooling tower to Structure
Engineer for floor load checking before installation. Guarantee the
cooling tower to perform as per schedule requirements.
(2) Install the cooling tower in accordance with the Manufacturer’s installation
instruction.
(3) Connect water pipes to cooling and complete accessories and related
equipment in accordance with the drawings.
(4) Connect electrical supply to the cooling tower.
END OF SECTION

4.4 PUMPS
4.4.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install water pump as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein.
(2) Select pumps to operate at or near their point of peak efficiency, allowing
for operation at capacities of approximately 25 percent beyond design
capacity. Maximum impeller size shall not exceed 85 percent of the
differences between the maximum and minimum impeller diameter.
(3) In order to insure stable operation and prevent any possibility of hunting,
the pump curve shall be continuously rising from maximum capacity up
to the shutoff point. Pumps shall be non-overloading over the full range
of the pump curve
4.4.1.2 Submittal
(1) Installation drawing submittals shall be included certified pump curves,
net positive suction head requirements, pump performance characteristics
with pump and system operating points plotted.
(2) Submit installation details, materials of construction, seals, pump base,
and mounting details.
(3) Submit motor details and efficiency.
4.4.1.4 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for kind of pumps.

4.4.2 Material
4.4.2.1 Description
(1) Pumps shall be of vertical or horizontal mounted centrifugal type as
shown on the drawing. Impeller shall be of single or multiple stage, and
shall be driven by 380 V/ 3/50Hz induction motor. Torque transmission
equipment shall be of direct flexible coupling. Both pump and motor shall
be installed on the same base frame.
(2) Pumps used for the same function shall be of the same Manufacturer.
(3) Unless otherwise specified, the pump shall be selected for a total
efficiency of not less than specified or highest efficiency of its applicable
model.
(4) Motor and pump selection shall be performed on the basis of non-
overloading performance curve of pumping unit. The motor shall be of a
1450 RPM, 380/V/3/50 Hz totally enclosed fan cooled, insulation class
F, IP55 and service factor of 1.15.
(5) To prevent the vibration of pump from piping system, pumps shall be
equipped with flexible connection on both suction and discharge pipes.
(6) Gate valve or butterfly valve shall be installed on the discharge pipe of
all the pumps as shown on the drawing.
(7) Drainage from pump shall be discharged to the nearest drain or gutter.
Drain pipe shall be of galvanized steel pipe.
(8) Strainer shall be installed on the suction pipe of pump. Not smaller than
25 mm of drain valve shall be fixed at the strainer cover plate, and also
galvanized steel pipe of 100 mm length shall be connected to this drain
valve. The end of this drain pipe shall be closed with screwed end cap.
(9) Check valve shall be installed on the discharge pipe of pump.
(10) Both pump and motor shall be aligned and permanently fixed to a inertia
block. The inertia block shall be of reinforced concrete type and shall be
supported by spring isolator which has static deflection of not more than
25 mm. The selection of isolator shall meet the recommendation of
Manufacturers.
4.4.2.2 Types of Pump
(1) Split Case Centrifugal Type
 Pump shall be of the non-over loading, centrifugal, volute type,
single or multi stage, horizontal split, or vertical split, single or double
suction type with suction and discharge connections in the lower half

of the casing. Pumps shall be designed to disconnect the rotating

components without disturbing pipe connections and operating at not
over the speed indicated on the pump schedule.
(2) End Suction Centrifugal Type
 Pump shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, volute type, single
stage horizontal mounted and end suction type. The pump shall be
designed so that disassembly of the pump impeller shall not
interfere with the piping system (back-pull-out pump). The pump
shall be designed to operate at not over the speed indicated on the
pump schedule.
4.4.2.3 Details of Pump Components
(1) Casings
 Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision-manufactured for the best
performance and durable functions. Casing shall be designed to
operate at working pressure of not less than 1034 kPa (150 psig) or
not less than the specified head on the equipment schedule. The
casing shall be tested by hydro static test at 1.5 times of casing
design maximum working pressure. Suction and discharge flange
connection shall have the same working pressure as pump casing.
Casing shall be provided with tapped and plugged fittings for vent
and drain purpose.
(2) Wearing Rings
 All pumps having discharge connections larger than 50 mm (2 inches)
and operating at more than 206 kPa (30 psig) total dynamic head
shall be provided with casing wearing rings. These rings shall be
suitable for an individual application. Rings shall be replaceable, and
positively keyed to prevent rotation.
(3) Impellers
 Impellers shall be one-piece, cast-bronze and dynamically balanced.
Impellers of pumps having 40 mm (1½ inches) and larger discharge
connection shall be fully enclosed and hydraulically balanced.
Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial
position by shaft sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers shall be
completely protected against damage due to reverse rotation.

(4) Shafts
 Shafts for pump with stuffing boxes shall be of stainless steel,
(chrome-iron or nickel-iron) extending through the stuffing boxes.
Where stuffing boxes are used, shafts shall be provided with water
slingers. Shafts shall be designed with high safety precautions to
withstand substantially against the torsional loads with other stresses
to which they may be subjected. Shafts shall be suitably designed to
ensure that there shall be no detrimental vibrational stresses. All
shaft threads shall be external to the water passage and stuffing
boxes.
 Shaft sleeves shall be keyed to the shaft and extended through the
stuffing box. “O” rings or gaskets shall be provided at sleeve ends to
protect the shaft from water corrosion.
 When sleeves replacement of shaft is required, there shall be no
dismantling of the pump casing.
(5) Bearings
 Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball bearings with a minimum average
life of 100,000 hours. The bearings shall be self-sealed, and housed in
malleable-iron housing aligned to a bearing bracket by means of large
precision registers. Bearings shall be removable without dismantling
any rotating components inside the pump.
(6) Seal
 Mechanical seals shall be provided in lieu of stuffing boxes as
specified in pump schedules. Balance type mechanical seals shall be
used when the casing working pressure exceeds 1,378 kPa (200 psig).
(7) Couplings
 All pumps, other than close coupled pumps, shall be provided with
urethane flexible couplings or steel pins and bushing with a service
factor of at least 1.5 for an individual application.
 The flexible coupling shall be with spacer sleeves to allow
dismantling of the entire bearing bracket of the pump including shaft
seal and impeller without detaching the motor from the base plate.
 Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or

(8) Base Plate

 Each flexible coupled pump shall be provided with a cast-iron or
fabricated steel base plate to hold both the pump and the motor in
correct alignment. Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
(9) Miscellaneous Fittings
 High points of pump casings shall be provided with automatic air vent
and valve. These vents shall be extended outside of any insulation.
inlet and outlet connections with properly located gauge tappings.
(10) Anti-Vibration
 Each pump shall be mounted on inertia base and spring isolators
which are placed on a concrete foundation. The maximum static
deflection of spring isolators shall be 25 mm (1 inch). Spring isolators
shall be selected and installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
recommendations so that vibration and noise transmission cannot be
permitted to the nearby structure.
(11) Insulation
 Chilled water pumps shall be insulated with at least 40 mm (1.5 inch)
thick closed cell insulation.
(12) Motor
 Motor shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage induction
motor.
 Unless otherwise specified, the speed of motor shall not be more
than 1450 RPM.
 Motor shall be suitable for 380V / 3 / 50 Hz power system.
The winding insulation shall be of class F, IP 55.
 Service factor of motor shall not be less than 1.15
 Bearing of motor shall be of anti-friction type ball bearing or roller
bearing. The seal of motor shall be of dust and moisture protection
type.
 Motor terminal box shall be waterproof type. Conduit for terminal
box shall be of waterproof flexible conduit.

4.4.3 Execution
(1) Pumps shall be installed according to the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
(2) Access or service space shall be provided around pumping unit.
(3) Cavitation and vapor binding at eye of impeller shall not be acceptable.
(4) Suction and discharge pipe, which are bigger than pump connection, shall
be equipped with reducer.
(5) Shut-off valve and strainer shall have the same size as suction pipe.
Check valve and shut-off valve shall have the same size as discharge pipe.
(6) Flexible connection shall be installed on both suction and on the
discharge pipe.
(7) Automatic air vent shall be put on the top of pump’s casing and drain
connection shall be put on the bottom of pump’s casing.
(8) Drainage from pump shall be discharged to the nearest drain or gutter.
(9) Grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the pump prior to commissioning.
(10) Pump shall be permanently fixed to the inertia base which is supported
by spring isolator. The spring isolator shall be placed on concrete
foundation.
(11) Check and make the alignment of-both pump and motor prior to
commissioning.
END OF SECTION

4.5 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONER

4.5.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install precision air conditioner as shown on
the Drawings and/or specified herein.
4.5.1.2 Submittals
(1) Manufacturer's Data: Submit certified dimensioned drawings, including
total weight and support points.
(2) Product Data: Submit fan curves, coil performance with cooling capacity
in form of Manufacturer’s program and acoustic data for each unit. Submit
the technical data including dimensions, power consumption etc.
(1) American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
(2) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
(ASHRAE)
(3) Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
4.5.1.5 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for precision air
conditioner.
4.5.2 Material
(1) The precision air conditioner shall be specially designed for 50 Hz.
Electrical system and the cooling capacity shall not be less than that
(2) Evaporator unit shall be installed in the position that indicated on the
Drawings or advised by the manufacturer.
(3) Precision Air Conditioner’s performance selection, matching curve,
material lists and technical data shall be submitted for approval.

4.5.2.2 Component
(1) Material and Construction
 Precision air conditioner shall be extendable modular type. Each
module is provided with its own air section, electrical section and
cooling section. They shall be designed for maintenance access from
the front.
 Type of precision air conditioner shall be specified as shown on the
Drawings. General classification type of the units shall be as the
following:
- Classify by air flow direction
 Downflow : The units will be discharge cold air at the bottom
and intake air (return air) at the top.
 Upflow : The units will be discharge cold air at the top and
intake air (return air) at the front.
- Classify by cooling system
 Air Cooled direct expansion (DX) refrigerant cooling system
with remote air cooled condenser.
 Chilled water cooling system.
 Water cooled direct expansion (DX) cooling system with water
cooled condenser.
 Dual circuit cooling system, this type is consist of two system
are describe above.
(2) Indoor Unit
The indoor unit shall consist of the following:
 Frame and Housing
- The unit consists of a frame made of natural color aluminium
extruded profile and inner steel walls serving for air direction of
highest stability.
- The unit is closed on all sides with removable doors. All parts of
housing which are in direct contact with water are made of
aluminium or stainless steel with life time protect against
corrosion.
 Exterior Panel Work
- The panel work is lined with noise absorbing insulation, which is
thermally treated. The thickness of insulation is minimum 25 mm.
- Panels are designed to a total air pressure difference of minimum

1000 Pa.
 Evaporator
- The evaporator shall be seamless copper tube with mechanically
expanded into aluminum fins. Coils shall be leak tested and
pressure tested at 2,069 kPa. (300 psig.)
- The evaporator coil shall be inclined position with stainless steel
condensate drain pan.
 Fan Blowers
- Fan Blowers shall be of the centrifugal type, forward or back ward
curved blade type mounted on a single shaft. It shall be of the
double width, double inlet type low revolutions and low noise
emission.
- Fan Blowers housing shall be of heavy gauge galvanized steel, die-
formed with stream-lined inlets designed to eliminate eddy and
shock.
- The fan wheel or impeller shall be of mild steel, fabricated
construction and well formed shroud and shall be both statically
and dynamically balanced. Shafts shall be steel, either solid or
hollow, and ground to close tolerances on all working surfaces.
Shafts shall operate well within their critical speeds.
- Bearing shall be of the self-aligning, maintenance free pre-lubricated,
sealed type, mounted in cast-iron housing, and shall have balls
and races specially lapped and individually tested and selected
for quiet operation.
- Bearings shall be equipped with externally accessible grease
fittings and shall be of a size designed to assure an average
operating life in excess of 100,000 hours.
 Motor and Drive
- Both fan and motor shafts shall be provided with proper size
grooved pulleys for belt drive with belt guard. Belts shall be of the
oil-resistant type and sized for 115 per cent of the rated kW.
- Each motor for a V-belt drive shall be fitted with variable pitch
pulleys. The pulleys shall be key-slotted and set-screwed to the
shafts. All combined parts shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. Motor shall be of the totally enclosed fan-cooled type,
1,450 rpm, 380V/3 φ / 50 Hz. insulation class B and protection

class IP54.
- In case of fan and motor are directed drive, fan motor shall be EC
type, non belt or pulley required.
 Heater
- Electrical reheat shall be installed per module or unit, made of
stainless steel finned rods, fins made of or stainless steel to
reduce surface temperature and frame made of galvanized or
stainless steel.
- Each stage is protected by an overheat thermostat and an addition
circuit breaker in electrical box in the module.
- Electric reheat shall also be a multistage electric control with step
controller or SCR control to have at least 3 stages output.
 Humidifier
- Steam humidifier shall be installed per module or unit the
nominal pressure is 1-6 bars. Steam capacity in the range of 25-
100% of the nominal capacity adjustable on the unit. Comprising
with steam cylinder and the boiling electrodes.
- The humidifier is separated from the airflow stream and can be
service without interrupting the operation of the unit.
 Water Leak Detector
- The water leak detector sensing cable provided completed with
the unit module or unit. The sensing cables are installed under
raised floor and detect water leakage under the unit. The cable
detects the presence of water at any point along their length.
- The sensing cable constructed of 2 sensor wires and continuity
wire embedded in a Fluoropolymer carrier rod or Nylon. The cable
structure has no alarm error when touching any steel
(3) Master Controller
 The Controller shall be produced by the same manufacturer as
precision air conditioner. The controller provided for controlling of
and a precision air conditioner unit and supervising of room
temperature and humidity limits.
 The controller can control the operation of stand-by module and
duty module by the configuration at least as follows:
- Fault Start : The stand-by module will automatic changeover in
the unlikely even of failure of duty mode.

- Alarm Start : The stand-by module will be started automatically to

maintain the room condition in the case of temperature or relative
humidity out of limited values.
- Sequencing : The automatic duty sharing between stand-by
module and duty module ensures all module have the same
operating time. Thus each module takes over the stand-by
function at a defined time.
(4) Front Panel / Display Face
 Front panel equipped with user friendly large surface LCD display or
touch screen. The software is structured in tree different levels:
Information, Operation and Service, which can be operated by a user
friendly windows base via the display and the keys consisting of;
- Selector Button : Select menus and change parameters.
- Confirmation : Acknowledge function and parameters.
- On/Off Switch : On/Off or touch screen.
- LED Alarm : LED lights up in the event of alarm.
- Audible Indicator : The audible indicator issues an alarm tone
when the alarm signals at the display.
 The controller have to display at least:
- Actual values of temperature and relative humidity and display of
the temperature and humidity recording in graphic display at last
24 hours.
- Symbols for operation modes cooling, reheat, dehumidification
and humidification of every modules.
- The RS232 or RS485 shall be provided for communication with
computer, printer or for interface with building management
system (BMS).
- The graphic display can be switch to various languages and
different character including both English and Thai.
- Module and component running time.
- The previous 60 alarms with date and time, alarm delays
adjustable, priorities of the alarm.
- Maintenance request symbol appear when the service required.
- The alarm signals have to transmit via the controller (front panel),
paper, mobile phone and fixed line.
- The front panel alarm with LED indicator and audible alarm with

the following display at least:

 Temperature too high / too low
 Humidity too high / too low
 Clogged filter
 Compressor high / low pressure
 Water leak alarm
(5) Supervisor Controller
 The Supervisor controller produces by the same manufacturer as
precision air conditioning unit. Each controller has to provide completed
with own supervisor controller.
 The supervisor controller acts as a supervisor to the controller and
takeover the controller in the event of failure by keeping the same
parameter and all features as master controller and front panel and
every module still operation with current status.
4.5.3 Execution
Install precision air conditioner according to the Manufacturer’s standard and
recommendation.
END OF SECTION

4.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT

4.6.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install Air handling unit as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein.
4.6.1.2 Submittal
(2) Product Data: Submit fan curves, coil performance with cooling capacity
in form of Manufacturer’s program and acoustic data for each unit. Submit
the technical data including dimensions, power consumption etc.
(1) American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
(2) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
(3) Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
4.6.1.5 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for air handing unit.
4.6.2 Material
4.6.2.1 Description
(1) Provide air handling units of the horizontal or vertical type with coil
requirements and capacities as listed on the Drawings or equipment data
sheet.
(2) Construct each air handling unit complete with casings, fans, internal
spring type vibration isolator, insulation, drain pans, cooling coils,
galvanized or painted filter retainer frames or plenums for filter holding
frames and media, factory mounted fan motors with adjustable bases,
belt guards, and belt drives.

(3) The static pressure values shown on the equipment data sheet shall be
of the external static pressure value only. The Contractor shall combine
this pressure with pressure losses of other equipment within the air
handling unit in order to select the optimum operating point of fan.
4.6.2.2 Component
(1) Frame and Casing
 The frame shall be sturdily constructed of 3 mm thick galvanized angle
steels. The frame contacting the cool air shall be insulated and any
surfaces of frame that touch moisture or water shall be enameled
with an anticorrosive material.
 The casing which is made of either galvanized steel sheet or steel sheet
processed by means of the baked-on enamel shall be not less than
1.2 mm thick. The casing contacting the cool air shall be insulated and
any surfaces of casing touching moisture or water shall be enameled
with an anticorrosive material.
 The frame and casing construction which is designed to be double-
skinned panels shall be allowed to use. The installation and assembly
of air handling unit construction shall be of a flange method.
 The air handling unit shall be provided with an access door to ease
maintenance and service. Hinge type access door shall be installed if
the door dimensions are larger than 600 mm. X 600 mm. The
locations to be provided with an access door shall be as follows:
- Fan
- Air Filter
- Cooling Coil
4.6.2.3 Insulation and Condensate Drain Pan
(1) All surfaces of casing and frame which are in contact with the cool air
shall be insulated inside in order to prevent condensation. In case of the
single-skinned panel construction, insulation material shall be either
closed-cell foamed elastomeric or polyurethane foam (fire retardant type)
and insulation thickness shall not be less than 25 mm. In case of double-
skinned panel construction, insulation material shall be a closed-cell
foamed elastomeric, polyurethane foam (fire retardant type) or fiberglass
and insulation thickness shall not be less than 25 mm. Insulation shall be
secured to casing with an adhesive applied over the entire back. All

seams and joints on insulation shall be completely sealed.

(2) The condensate drain pan which is fully provided under the entire cooling
coil shall be fabricated from a minimum 1.5 mm. thick stainless steel
sheet. The pan shall have upstanding edges and shall be high enough to
prevent condensate overflow. At lease two drain outlets of pan shall be
equipped with plugs or covers. The upper surface of pan contacting the
water shall be enameled with anticorrosive material and the lower
surface of the pan shall be fully insulated with either closed-cell foamed
elastomeric of polyurethane foam (fire retardant type).
The condensate drain shall be equipped with a drain trap near the drain
pan and sloped down according to the water flow direction.
4.6.2.4 Cooling Coil
(1) The cooling coil, 3 to 6 rows, shall be a thick seamless copper tube with
outside diameter of not less than 15.8 mm. (1/2 inch). Mechanically
bonded on the copper tube, the fin shall be of the aluminium plate type.
The number of fin shall be 9 to 14 fins per inch. The cooling coil shall be
tested under water at minimum pressure of 1757.8 kPa (255 psi) for air
leakage.
(2) Coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec (500 fpm).
(3) Water pressure drop of cooling coil shall not exceed 6.0 meters of water
(20 feet of water)
(4) For the chilled water pipes connected to cooling coil, the automatic air
vent shall be installed on the highest point of the chilled water pipes as
specified.
4.6.2.5 Fan
(1) The fan shall be constructed of either galvanized steel sheet or steel
sheet processed by means of the baked-on enamel and shall be both
statically and dynamically balanced from Manufacturer’s laboratory test.
The fan, in general, shall be of a forward-curved blade. In case the total
static pressure of fan is over 50 mm. of water, the fan shall be either
backward-curved blade or air foil blade.
(2) The fan of air handling unit shall be of draw-thru type. If the air handling
unit has more than one fan, these fans shall be mounted on the same
shaft.
(3) The capacity of supply air fan shall be according to the equipment data
sheet and the sound pressure level of fan measured from the nearest

outlet shall not be exceed 60 dBA, unless otherwise specified. If the

sound pressure level measure is higher than the specified level, the
Contractor shall provide additional sound absorber to alleviate the sound
pressure level.
(4) Bearings shall be of a self-aligning ball bearing or self-aligning roller
bearing. Bearings shall be equipped with externally accessible grease
fittings and shall be designed to achieve an average operating life in
excess of 200,000 hours base on basic rating life L50 or 50,000 hours base
on basic rating life L10 of ISO 281 standard.
(5) Outlet air velocity from discharge side of fan shall not exceed 9.5 m/s.
4.6.2.6 Motor
(1) The motor shall have a power supply of 380 V/3 /50 Hz, totally-
enclosed fan-cooled squirrel cage induction motor, IP55 and class F for
widing insulation. The revolutions per minute of motor shall be 1,450
rpm.
(2) Generally, the selected kW rating shall not be less than kW rating
specified on equipment data sheet.
(3) The service factor for backward curved blade or air foil blade centrifugal
fan shall be 1.15 and the service factor for forward curved blade centrifugal
fan shall be 1.2.
(4) The fan shall be driven by V-belt fitted with variable pitch pulleys. The
pulley fixed on the motor shaft shall be adjustable by increasing or
decreasing the revolution of fan at least 50 rpm. Belt tension shall be
adjusted by sliding the motor base. The Contractor shall provide the belt
guard to cover the pulleys, belts and shafts.
4.6.2.7 Air Filter
(1) Type of Air filter shall be specified on equipment data sheet.
(2) One set of inclined manometer shall be provided for each filter bank for
filter clog check.

4.6.3 Execution
4.6.3.1 Install air handling unit according to the Manufacturer’s standard and
recommendation.
4.6.3.2 During installation, in order to protect the air handling unit from any dust,
water, insects and etc. The Contractor shall provide plastic sheets or
equivalent to cover or close both supply air opening and return air opening,
including protection of the body of the air handling unit from any damages.
END OF SECTION

4.7 FAN COIL UNITS

4.7.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install Fan coil unit as shown on the Drawings
and/or specified herein.
4.7.1.2 Submittal
(2) Product Data: Submit cooling capacity and acoustic data for each unit
and also submit the technical data including dimensions, power
4.7.1.4 Warranty
Provide minimum 2-year spare parts and labour warranty for air handing unit.
4.7.2 Material
4.7.2.1 The fan coil unit shall comprise with fan, cooling coil, return plenum and
synthetic filter.
4.7.2.2 The cooling coil shall be of spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to
copper tubes, size of 9.52 mm.(3/8 inch) diameter, designed for 1,034 kPa
(150 PSIG) working pressure.
4.7.2.3. Drain pan shall be constructed form galvanized steel and coated with a layer
of water proofing compound. The underside of this drain pan shall be
insulated with a layer of fire retarded closed cell foam insulation.
4.7.2.4 The cabinet shall be constructed from galvanized steel with exposed corners
and edges rounded, easily removed panels. Line with fire retarded closed cell
foam insulation.
4.7.2.5 The return plenum shall be of 1.0 mm galvanized steel with exposed corners
and edges rounded. Inside liner shall be closed cell elastomeric insulation
with 48 kg/m3 density, 25 mm. thick.

4.7.2.6 Fans shall be centrifugal forward-curved double width wheels, statically and
dynamically balanced, direct driven.
4.7.2.7 Fan motor shall be permanent split capacity 4 speeds direct drive motor with
build in overload protection.
4.7.2.8 Filter shall be washable synthetic type.
4.7.3 Execution
(1) Install Fan Coil Unit, including components and controls required for
operation, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. .
(2) Level Fan Coil Units to the tolerance recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Comb out any damaged fins or replace coil if fins could not be combed
to a like-new condition.
(4) Test unit to verify proper operation and correct any defects found.
END OF SECTION

4.8 AIR COOLED SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONER

4.8.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install split type air conditioner as shown
on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
(2) The split type air conditioner shall be specially designed for 50 Hz. Electrical
systems and the cooling capacity shall not be less than that indicated on
the Drawings.
(1) The split type air conditioner shall comply with the following codes and
standards.
 ANSI/ASHRAE 128-2001 : Method of Rating Unitary Spot Air
Conditioners (ANSI Approved)
 AMCA 301 : Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for
Air Moving Devices
 EIT 3008-44 : Standard for the Installation of Split Air
Conditioning (Small Unit)
 TIS 1155 2557 : Standard of Split type Air conditioner
 TIS 2134 2553 : Standard of Split type Air conditioner
4.8.1.3 Submittal
The Contractor shall submit split type air conditioner’s performance selection,
matching curve, material lists and technical data and all necessary information
for approval before purchasing.

4.8.1.5 Warranty
(1) All part of the split type air conditioner shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer and/or by the contractor for as least two year after
handover.
(2) All compressors shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for as least
5 year.
4.8.2 Material
4.8.2.1 Description
(1) The unit shall be assembled and matching parts from factory as standard
model. The unit consisting of outdoor condensing Unit and indoor
evaporator unit are connected with refrigerant pipe and electrical wires,
part of each section will be described below:
(2) Evaporator unit, condensing unit, refrigerant pipe, filter dryer, sight glass,
shall be installed in the position indicated on the drawings or advised by
the manufacturer.
(3) The air conditioning equipment shall be air cooled, split system suitable
for HFC-410a or any zero ODP refrigerant, factory tested, evacuated
dehydrated and pressurized with refrigerant holding charge for field
installation. The unit shall be in accordance with the following
Specifications as stated below.
4.8.2.2 Component
(1) Condensing Unit
 The condensing unit shall be air cooled, weatherproof type for
outdoor installation. The unit shall consist of the following:
- Casing shall be made of steel sheet, bonded and finished with baked
enamel. The casing may be made of fiberglass with equivalent
strength.
- Compressor shall be hermetic type. All compressors shall be
mounted on vibration isolators. They shall be equipped with
internal overload (overheated) protectors,
- Electrical characteristic shall be 220V/1/50Hz or 380V/3/50Hz
as indicated on the Drawings.
- Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubes with mechanically
expanded into aluminum fins, leak tested and pressure tested at
3,100 kPa (450 psig).

- Condenser fan shall be direct drive protected by heavy gauge rust

resisting wire guard.
- Fan motor shall be permanent-split-capacitor, inherently
protected and permanently lubricated bearings.
- There shall be low and high sides access valves for pressure
measuring.
- Control shall be factory wired and located in a separate enclosure.
They shall consist of the following safety devices.
 Control and fan motor fuses size not be over 6 amperes.
 High-low pressure switch, except compressor with a capacity
less than 12 kW. (42,000 BTUH)
 Magnetic Contactor.
 Timer or time delay (3-6 minutes delay time) especially
designed for air conditioner except compressor with a capacity
less than 12 kW. (42,000 BTUH)
- Standard accessories for condensing unit shall include the
following:
 Thermal overload
 Compressor contact relay
 Refrigerant dryer
 Suction and liquid lines shut-off valves
 Refrigerant charging port
 Safety switch
(2) Indoor Unit (Fan Coil Unit)
 Casing shall be made of steel sheet, bonded and finished with baked
enamel inside lining with 12 mm. thick fire retard closed cell foam
plastic or as per manufacturer standard. The casing may be made of
aluminum or fiberglass with equivalent strength.
 Evaporator coil shall be seamless copper tube with mechanically
expanded into aluminum fins. Coils shall be leak tested and pressure
tested at 2,069 kPa. (300 psig.)
 Blower or fan shall be squirrel cage centrifugal type or cross flow
type, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven.
 Motor shall be split-capacitor type with over load protection or DC
Motor.
 Electrical characteristic shall be 220V/1/50Hz or 380V/3/50Hz as


 Air filter shall be washable synthetic polyester type.
(3) Cooling Capacity
 The cooling capacity and system design condition have been
indicated on the equipment schedule herein or shown on the
Drawings.
 If the system design condition not shown, the cooling capacity shall
be matching capacity of condensing unit and air handling unit, based
on the following conditions :
- Air on condenser : Dry bulb temperature 35 C (95 F)
- Air on evaporator : Dry bulb temperature 26.7 C (80 F)
: Wet bulb temperature 19.4 C (67 F)
- Maximum face velocity of air through evaporator 2.54 m/s (500
ft/min)
- Maximum compressor discharge pressure corresponding to 51.7 C
(125 F) condensing temperature.
- Saturated suction temperature 3 C - 9 C (38 F - 47 F)
(4) Refrigerant Pipe
 Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tube hard drawn type L, suction
lines shall be insulated with closed cell electrometric thermal
insulation thickness not less than 25 mm (1 inch) thick, and applied
with 3 layers of emulsion acrylic paint for exposed pipe only.
Wrapped with PVC tape for exposed pipe only.
 Suction and liquid lines shall be separated and fixed with clamps at
every 2.5 m. (8 ft.) interval.
 Pipe insulation at the fixed points shall be covered with galvanized
steel of not less than 100 mm. (4 inches) long.
4.8.3 Execution
(1) The split type air conditioner shall be mounted on vibration isolators and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation such
that no disturbing vibration or noise is being transmitted to the nearby
structure.
(2) Refrigerant pipes that exposed to outdoor shall be cover with aluminium
pipe jacket for protected insulation from direct UV exposure.


(1) After installations are completed, all split type unit shall undergo test run.
Any adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all split
type will operate either the required performance. Report forms to
contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual
conditions for each Item mentioned below:
 Brand type model and serial number of split type unit.
 Compressor running amps.
 Condenser fan running amps.
 Fan motor running amps.
 Ambient conditions. (DB and WB)
 Coil leaving conditions (DB and WB)
 Room conditions (DB and WB)
 Re-circulated air CFM.
 Pressure at high side.
 Pressure at low side.
(2) During test run, the air filters of testing sets shall be used.
END OF SECTION

4.9 FAN AND BLOWER

4.9.1 General
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the fans including all necessary
accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
(2) Each fan capacity shall not be less than that shown on the Drawings.
(3) Requirements of fans in this section shall be applied to those which are
not integral parts of air-handling units and similar equipment designed as
complete units by the manufacturer. Fans shall be guaranteed to deliver
the specified air quantities at the specified pressures. In addition, they
shall be quiet in operation and be free from objectionable vibration. Each
fan shall be suitable in size for the space available and be installed
without damage to either the building or the fan.
(4) The rotation of the fan shall be checked on startup and if there is no
rotation arrow supplied by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall provide
correct rotation arrow.
(5) V-belt drives shall be dimensioned for long belt life according to the
manufacturer's recommendations regarding belt tension, minimum pulley
diameter and belt speed. For belt selection purpose, the actual motor
horse power rating shall be multiplied by 1.3. A minimum of 2 belts shall
always be provided. These belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. Belt
drives shall have adequate means for adjustment of belt tension. Belt
drives outside casings shall be protected with easily detachable belt
guards.
(1) The fan and blower shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1999 : Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating (AMCA
Standard 210-99) (ANSI approved)
 ANSI/ASHRAE 87.1-1992 : Method of Testing Fan Vibration -- Blade
Vibrations and Critical Speeds (ANSI
approved AMCA)
 ASHRAE 68 : Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound
Power Measurement Procedure for Fans.
 ANSI/AFBMA 9 : Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

 AMCA 300 : Reverberant Method for Sound Testing of

Fans.
 AMCA 301 : Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air
Moving Devices.
 UL 793/705 : Power Ventilators for Smoke
 UL 762 : Power Roof Ventilators for Restaurant Exhaust
Applications, (UL 762);
 IEC 60034-1 : Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating
and performance
 BS 7346 Part 2 : 1990 : Components for smoke and heat control
systems. Functional recommendations and
calculation methods for smoke and heat
exhaust ventilation systems, employing
time-dependent design fires. Code of
practice
 BS 7346 Part 2 : 1990 : Components for smoke and heat control
system. Specification for powered smoke
and heat exhaust ventilators.
4.9.1.3 Submittals
(1) The contraction shall submit fan and blower’s performances selection,
material list and technical data request for approval.
(2) Dimension plan and elevation view drawing or the unit, required cleanses,
and location or all field ducting and electrical connections.

4.9.1.5 Warranty
All parts or fan and blower shall be guaranteed by the contractor and/or by
the manufacturer as least two year after handover.
4.9.2 Material
4.9.2.1 Description
(1) Fan and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding
the effect of all stress and loads under starting, operating and where
applicable reversing conditions.
(2) Belt driven fan shall be selected, where as possible, fan shall be driven
by motor with revolution less than 1,500 rpm.
(3) Unless specified, maximum noise level for all fans shall be less than 65
dB (A) measured at three times of fan diameter from the fan outlet.
(4) Fan and Blower’s performance curve shall have certified rating by AMCA
or Eurovent standard
4.9.2.2 Component
(1) Centrifugal Fan
 Fan housing shall be of an appropriate thickness to prevent vibration
and drumming.
 Large fan housings shall be made in sections small enough to permit
installation or removal through openings available in the building. Field
joints shall be flanged and bolted. The fan scroll shall be attached to
the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam
construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be
acceptable. Thickness of steel plate for housings shall not be less than
those indicated in the following table.
Housing Thickness (mm.)

Wheel Diameter (mm.)
Side Scrolls
Not over 500 1.9 1.9
Between 500 and 1,000 2.0 1.9
Between 1,000 and 2,000 2.0 2.0
 Wheels shall be accurately assembled from die-formed parts and

shall operate at all speeds, up to 1 1/4 times the maximum speed
specified without noticeable static or dynamic unbalance, eccentricity
or wobble. They shall be rigidly braced to resist torsional stresses due

to air pressure and rapid acceleration.

 Shafts shall be steel, heavy enough so that the critical speed of
wheels and shafts will be not less than twice the maximum speed.
Shafts and wheels shall be tightly fitted and securely keyed.
 Bearings shall be self-aligning of the ball on roller type. Inner races of
ball and roller bearing shall be secured to the shafts by press fittings,
split taper sleeves, eccentric locking rings or set screws. Taper sleeve
mounts shall be carefully adjusted so that bearings can neither slip
on shafts nor be preloaded. Eccentric locking rings shall be securely
tightened and retained by setscrews. The bearings held only by
setscrews shall have two in each race and the screws shall have
points designed to provide in locking action on the shaft.
 Load ratings of ball and roller bearings shall be based on an average
bearing life of not less than 200,000 hours bases on basic rating life
L50 or 50,000 hours base on basic rating life L10 of ISO 281 standard,
allowance being made for dead load of wheel, shaft and maximum
pull of belts. Bearings requiring grease lubrication shall be equipped
with readily accessible filling connections.
 Fan handling air that is abnormally hot or corrosive shall have both
bearings opposite the inlet and overhung wheels and sheaves.
 Unless otherwise specified, double- and single-inlet fans having
wheels larger than 900 mm. in diameter shall have two bearings, one
on each side of the wheel, with overhung sheaves. Single-inlet fans
with wheels not over 900 mm. diameter may have bearings arranged
as specified for larger fans, or bearings may both be located on the
side opposite the inlet with both wheels and sheaves overhung.
Small wheels may be mounted on extended motor shafts wherever
fan speeds permit.
(2) Axial Flow Fan
 The fan shall be direct driven, axial-flow fan with adjustable airfoil
blade. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced
before coupling and shall be fixed on a shaft. Fan shaft shall be of
high carbon steel. The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
three-phase induction.
 The fan casing shall be made of structural steel and designed to
reduce resistance loss at each section. For high static pressure
application, guide-vanes shall be welded inside the casing in order to

obtain better fan efficiency. The motor terminal shall be connected by

a steel pipe to a terminal box outside the casing, which keeps the
lead wire completely isolated from draft.
 Consideration shall be given to noise-protection when using axial flow
fans in public areas.
(3) Wall Mounted Propeller Fan
 Propeller fan for commercial type, Blade diameter smaller than 300
mm, shall be direct driven type. They shall be quiet in operation and be
statically and dynamically balanced.
 Unless otherwise specified, Large size propeller fans may be either

direct-connected, motor driven type or belt-connected. They shall be
quiet in operation and be statically and dynamically balanced.
Wheels shall be steel, aluminum or plastic with heavy hubs.
 The gravity shutters shall be provided, opened in operation and
closed in stopping. The blades of gravity shutter are weather-proof
materials.
 The fan casing shall be made of steel, aluminum or plastic structure.
The rubber sheet shall be inserted between fan casing and wall, for
vibration isolator.
 The contractor shall be block-out the wall during building
construction period to comply with fan's casing dimension.
(4) Ceiling Type Fan
 The fan shall be specifically designed for mounting at ceiling only
and shall be easily taken-off for maintenance without dismantling of
the connected exhaust duct.
 Each fan shall consist of centrifugal fan backward curve or backward
airfoil discharge gravity damper, tightly-sealed motor and assembled
in a seam processed casing.
(5) Pressurized Air Fan
 Pressurized air fan shall be backward curve or backward airfoil
centrifugal fan or axial air fan as specified on the Drawings or
specified herein.
 The motor driven for pressurized air fan shall be direct driven for
axial fan and belt driven for centrifugal fan.

 The power supply for motor shall be for essential load, and cable
shall be fire resistant (FR) type.
 Motor insulation shall be class H, protection IP55
(6) Smoke Extract Fan
 Smoke extract fan shall be centrifugal fan backward curve or
backward airfoil, up-blast roof fan or axial air fan as specified on the
Drawings or specified herein.
 The motor driven for smoke extract fan shall be direct driven for
upblast roof fan or axial air fan. Belt driven shall not acceptable.
 The power supply for motor shall be for essential load, and cable
shall be fire resistant (FR) type.
 Motor insulation shall be class H, protection IP55, conforming BS 7346
Class D, which can be operated at temperature 250 C for 1 hour.
 All parts of smoke extract fan including motor, fan driven, control and
power supply shall be heat resistant conforming to BS 7346 Class D,
which can be operated at temperature 250 C for 1 hour.
4.9.3. Execution
Fans shall be mounted on or suspended with rubber-in-shear or spring
vibration isolators depend on fan size. These isolators shall be selected and
installed in accordance with the unit manufacturer's recommendation so that no
disturbance is caused in the surroundings.
(1) Before start-up, grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the blower
and motor.
(2) After installations are completed, all equipment shall undergo test run.
Any adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all
equipment will operate either the required performance. Report forms to
contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual
conditions for each Item mentioned below:
 Date and time of test
 Fan make, type, name and serial number.
 Fan rpm
 Fan discharge static pressure
 Fan motor amperage

 Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating

 Exhaust air CFM
END OF SECTION

4.10 PIPING WORKS

4.10.1 General
(1) The piping work shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM A53/A53M-04a : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black
and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless
 ASTM B75-02 : Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube.
 ASTM B88 : Seamless Copper Tube for Water, Gas and
Sanitation
 ASTM C177 : Steady State Heat Flux measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by mean of
the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus
 ASTM C534 : Perform flexible elastomeric cellular thermal
insulation in sheet and tubular form
 BS 874 Part 2 : Determining thermal insulating property part
2. Test for thermal conductivity and related
properties
 DIN 52615 : Determination of water vapor (moisture)
permeability of construction and insulation
materials
 ASTM D1056 Type 1 : Flexible cellular materials-Sponge or Expanded
Rubber
 ASTM E96 : Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
 ASTM E84 : Surface Burning Characteristic of Building
Materials
 ASTM D635 : Rate of Burning and/or Extend and Time of

Burning of Plastics in the Horizontal Position
 UL 94 : Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in
Devices and Appliaences


4.10.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit all materials, catalogue, material lists and
technical data requested for approval before installation.
4.10.1.5 Warranty
All part of the piping work shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least
two years after handover.
4.10.1.5 Delivery, Handling, Storage and Cleaning.
closed with temporary covers during erection.
(2) Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded to remove
any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(3) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or under cover to
anodized rust converter or red lead primer.
(6) Before start-up all piping shall be thoroughly flushed with water until it
runs clear.
4.10.2 Material
(1) The valves shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the
working fluid in the system. The rated working pressure of the valve as

specified for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual
working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
(2) The diameter of hand wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as
that neither additional leverage nor damage shall be imposed upon the
overhead valves, chain-operated hand wheels including rustproof chain
and chain guide shall be provided.
4.10.2.2 Component
(1) Chilled Water/Condenser Water Piping
 All pipes shall be seamed black steel pipes, conforming to ASTM A-
53, Schedule 40. All pipes shall be welded joints and flanged
connection for equipment and part required maintenance.
 Small pipe if necessary threaded joints may be used with union
connection for equipment and parts required maintenance.
 Pipes and fittings shall be rated at not less than 1,034 kPa. (150 PSIG)
working pressure.
 Chilled water pipe shall be pre-insulated pipe where pipe size
diameter is 100 mm (4 inch) and larger.
 The Pre-insulated Pipe manufacturer shall be experienced and
technically competent and be able to provide a list of local project
references, thermal conductivity test certificate, class 0 fire behavior
certificates, 2-hr fire resistance certificate tested to ASTM E119-05
 Pipe shall be specified for desire service or as per design engineer’s
requirements.
 In either case the pipe shall be suitable for the pressure service
specified elsewhere.
 Pre-insulated pipe shall be specified as below description :-
- Outer casing
(a) Spiral formed locked seam galvanized iron (min thickness
0.45mm)
(b) High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) for underground system.
- Finishing
(a) Plain galvanized iron spangle chromated
(b) Black
- Insulation shall be specially formulated MDI rigid polyurethane

foam machine injected into the annulus between service pipe

and casing by a one shot factory process and shall have the
following physical properties:
(a) Density: minimum 32 kg/m 3 (ASTM D 1622)
(b) Thermal Conductivity: k value 0.022 W/mK at 30°C mean
(tested to ASTM C518), Testing Certificate by 3rd party testing
body is to be submitted
(c) Compressive Strength: minimum 255 Kpa
(d) Closed Cell Content 90% by volume minimum.
(e) Water vapour permeability(ASTM E96, DIN 52615)
1.8 x 10-5 metric perms
(2.6 x 10-2 perm inch)
Mu >7000
(f) Fire Rating
Do not spread fire, self-extinguishing, low smoke density
Class O tested to BS 476: Part 7, 1997 (Surface spread of
flame test) and BS 476: Part 6, 1989 (Fire propagation test),
Testing Certificate by 3rd party testing body is to be submitted
2-hr Fire Resistance tested to ASTM e119-05, Testing Certificate
by 3rd party testing body is to be submitted
- Thickness of Insulation:
(a) Shall be such thickness as to prevent condensation
forming on the outer casing under the following conditions:
Ambient Temp: 35°C (95°F), Rh%: 75, Fluid Temp: 6°C (43°F)
Ambient Temp: 30°C (86°F), Rh%: 80, Fluid Temp: 6°C (43°F)
Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

NB NB
mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch

15 1/2 32 1 1/ 4 150 6 39 1 1/ 2
20 3/4 32 1 1/ 4 200 8 50 2
25 1 32 1 1/ 4 250 10 50 2
32 1 1/4 32 1 1/ 4 300 12 50 2
40 1 1/2 32 1 1/ 4 350 14 50 2

Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

NB NB
mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch

50 2 32 1 1/ 4 400 16 50 2
65 2 1/2 32 1 1/ 4 450 18 50 2
80 3 39 1 1/ 2 500 20 50 2
100 4 39 1 1/ 2 600 24 50 2
125 5 39 1 1/ 2
Note : Contractor shall recheck with supplier to make sure the insulation thickness that
suitable for environment condition of this project and submit to owner’s
(2) Make-Up Water/Drain/Condensate Drain Piping

 All pipes shall be galvanized steel, BS Standard class medium, or
conforming to Thai Industrial Standard TIS 277-2521 medium weight.
 Threaded joints may be used for pipes of 65 mm. in diameter or
smaller and flanged connections for pipes of 80 mm. and larger.
(3) Refrigerant piping
 Refrigerant pipe shall be copper tube hard drawn type L, fully annealed
and internally degreased and creamed.
 Compression fitting will not be accepted on refrigerant pipe work.
 Screw joints will not be accepted in refrigerant pipe work except on
the equipment accessories.
(4) Pipe insulation
 The insulation shall be closed cell elastomeric thermal insulation,
moisture and vapor barriers, self-extinguishing with fire and low
smoke density while burning.
 Properties of Insulation shall be as the following:
- Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.038 W/m./K (0.26
BTU/Hr/ft2/ F/Inch.) at 24C (75F) by test method of ASTM C177.
- Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percentage by weight
method of ASTM D1056 Type 1
- Water vapor permeability not be more than 0.10 perm-in in
compliance to ASTM E96
- Moisture Resistance shall be ≥5,000 µ in compliance to DIN 52615

- Flammability shall be 25 in compliance to ASTM E84 or Class V-0

in compliance to UL94 or surface spread of flame of Class 1 in
compliance to BS476 Part 7. Smoke density shall be 50 in
- Density shall be 48-96 kg/cu.m. (3-6 lbs/cu.ft.) in compliance to
ASTM D1667
- Service temperature shall be -20°C to 105°C (-4°F to 220°F)
 The insulation shall be preformed tube or rolled sheet. The thickness
of pipe insulation shall be as follows:-
Pipe Diameter, mm (inch) Insulation Thickness, mm (inch)

65 (2 ½) and smaller 32 (1 ¼)
80 (3) to 150 (6) 40 (1 ½)
200 (8) and larger 50 (2)
Chiller Unit 40 (1 ½)
Chilled Water Pump 32 (1 ¼)
Condensate Drain 80 (3) or less 15 (1/2)
Condensate Drain above 80 (3) 20 (3/4)
Refrigerant Pipe 25 (1)
4.10.3 Execution
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angle with, the
shall be not less than 1 : 500, in general. Branches from water mains
shall be taken in a manner that facilitates venting and draining.
Reductions in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting,
except on vertical pipes where concentric reduction may be used.


they shall be jointed by welding, solvent welding, screwing or
soldering as approved or indicated in this Specification.
 All pipe crossing structural expansion joint between buildings shall be
provide with stainless steel corrugated expansion joint.
direction, and arranging pipe runs parallel to or at right angles with
structural members of the building, to provide uppermost head-room
structure.
(2) Workmanship
installed so that it may expand and contract freely without damaging to
itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe
cutters and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be
reamed to remove all burrs and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All
changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Pipe bending and
bushings are prohibited.
(3) Location of device
All valves, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that
they are accessible for repair and replacement.
(4) Connections to equipment
of the equipment.


 Pack less type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion
problems shall be avoided by providing flexible connections, offsets, or
loops.
(7) Sleeves
anti-corrosion painted black steel pipes. Sleeves shall be of a proper
length to pass through the entire floor construction all shall
terminate 40 mm. above the finished floor level.
provided with full thickness sleeves made of standard weight anti-
corrosion painted black steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 10 mm.
clearance around the pipe or covering insulation, if there is any.
Sleeves shall be set in place when the walls and partitions are built.
form work before the concrete are poured.
 Chromium-plated escutcheons shall be provided where exposed pipes pass
(8) Pipe Joints
 Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and
at other places where necessary. Jointing flanges shall be accurately

parallel to each other so that bolts are used only to tighter joints,
rather than correct alignment.
 Flanges shall be chosen to suit the maximum working pressure of the
system at the points of installation in accordance with the ASME
standards. They shall be manufactured from a similar material to the
pipe works and fittings to which they are to be attached.
 Jointing materials used between flanged faces shall be of 3.2 mm.
thick gaskets of good quality or shall be of suitable material for the
specified working fluid. Machined steel bolts with hexagonal heads
and nuts, and fitting with cadmium-plated flat steel washers where
necessary. For bronze flanges, machined brass bolts with hexagonal
heads and nuts shall be used.
 The maximum length of each bolt shall be such that when it is fixed
on the joint with nut in position, it shall not extend more than 1/4 of its
diameter beyond the nut while the minimum length shall be a full
nut. All threaded connections shall be made tight with an approved
pipe thread compound or Teflon tape. They shall be so jointed that
not more than two threads will be exposed. Union joint faces shall
be smeared with graphite and oil during connection.
 The edges of the pipe to be welded shall be machine-beveled
wherever possible. Gas cuts shall be free from burnt metal. Before
welding, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The
welding technique shall be such as to ensure penetration to the full
thickness of the pipe wall and through fusion of the deposited metal
with the parent metal. During welding the ends of the pipes shall be
held firmly together by suitable lugs, welded-on-bridge pieces or
adequate tack welding. Special care shall be taken to prevent formation
of welded obstructions and lodgment of welding residue inside the
pipes. Cracks, pinholes, excessive under cutting, etc. shall be
removed and the joints rewarded. Welding materials and
workmanship shall be in accordance with acceptable standard.
 Welders must be competent and shall have qualification certificates.
They may be required to perform site tests. Should the Employer’s
Representative not be satisfied, the welder must be replaced?
The Employer’s Representative reserves the right to order the cutout
for inspection of up to 1 per cent of the total number of welds. In
the event of any inspected welds being, in the Resident Employer’s

Representative opinion, unsatisfactory he reserves the right to order

the removal of further welds which in his opinion indicate faulty
workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at
no cost to the Project.
 Either the electric arc or the oxy-acetylene welding method may be used
for metallic pipes. Welding rods or electrodes shall have such
composition that the welds produced by them shall have the same
analysis as the parent metal and shall be of an approved type and brand.
 Prior to silver-soldering or brazing (if any) suitable chemical shall be
used in cleaning the metal surface to be jointed in order to remove
oil and grease. Scale and any gross oxidation shall be removed by
emery cloth, or grinding. Care shall be taken in preparation of the
joints.
 All tees or take-off’s shall be made with standard welding fittings
only.
(9) Pipe Hangers and Supports
 Hangers or supports shall be provided at intervals as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein, both in horizontal and vertical runs.
In addition, it is required that a hanger be provided at not more than
1.0 meter (3.5’) from each change of direction on the side of the
longest run and also at point adjacent to all valves, strainers, etc. All
hangers and supports for horizontal piping shall be adjustable in
height over a minimum distance of 50 mm. (2”) the intervals
indicated for support are maximum distances between brackets.
 For chilled water and condensate piping, polymeric rigid insulation of
minimum length of not less than the outside diameter of the pipe,
but not over 100 mm. shall be provided at each support and hanger.
hanger of dissimilar metals suitable separation with a layer of felt
shall be provided to prevent corrosion. Hangers on structural steel
must be clamped in position with hook bolts. Drilling holes in or
welding to structural steel is absolutely prohibited, unless with the
express approval from the Employer’s Representative.
pipes shall be of the split ring type. Hangers in the main technical
room shall be supported on springs.


and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
 Two fixings per bracket shall be provided at follows :-
Nominal Pipe Size, mm (inch) Fixing Rod Size, mm (inch)
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200(8”) to 350 (14) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hanger and steel rod shall be hot-drip galvanized.
 For all pipes hangers in the plant room shall be provided with spring
isolators to reduce noise transmission to adjacent rooms. The spring
shall be selected to maintain 25 mm. (1”) minimum static
deflections.
(10) Pipe insulation
 The outer surface of the pipe shall be cleaned before installation
without any cement or small particles attached to the pipe surface
that may cause uneven surface. The irregular uneven surface on the
joint area should be made smooth.
 Installation shall use the adhesive recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Apply the adhesive on the joints then press the joints
together tightly. The joints shall be made level and smooth without tilt.
For insulation on equipment, adhesives shall be applied on both
insulation and equipment surface. The insulation shall fit into the
equipment smoothly without air holes or bubbles inside.
 Installation shall be in the standard length according to the
manufacturer. Then install it by slipping continuously onto the pipe
and joints. In case that it cannot be slipped, the insulation has to be
slit along the tube length and then closed back firmly by adhesives.
 After installation, the insulation shall be in the right tension, not too
loose or too tensed, observable by its appearance. Shall not use
perform tube that is bigger than the pipe size.
 For hanging, holding and other method to support the pipe shall use
polymeric rigid foam pipe supporter to prevent the weight pressure
on the insulation. The rigid foam pipe supporter shall have equal or
similar thermal conductivity as the insulation and shall be in a full or

half circular shape in order to support the full pipe or only the
bottom part of the pipe on the load supporting point.
 Insulation materials that are improperly stored, damaged, torn,
scratch, unclean shall not be used for installation.
 After installation, it shall be covered with another layer of anti-rust
metal sheet (aluminum sheet, galvanized steel sheet, stainless sheet)
with thickness at least 0.5mm for the following areas:
- Vertical or horizontal chilled water pipes that may be easily damage.
(1) Water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than 1034
kPa. (150 Psig) or 1.5 times the maximum working pressure, whichever is
greater, at the lowest point in the system. Care shall be taken to avoid
putting excessive pressure on safety devices, etc. These delicate control
mechanisms shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage.
The system shall be tested when water temperatures and average ambient
temperatures are approximately equal and constant. Test pressure shall
be maintained for not less than 30 minutes without an appreciable drop
after the force pump has been disconnected.
(2) Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the
construction.
(3) Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks
in welded joints shall be cut out and re-welded. Caulking of leaks will not be
permitted.
(4) After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system
to be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained
dirt and mud have been removed before introducing chlorinating
material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or
hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less
than 50 PPM. and shall be introduced into the system in an approved
manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to
destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is
approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce
not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the extreme end of the system of the
retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened
and closed several times during the contact period.
END OF SECTION

4.11 VALVES
4.11.1 General
All valves shall be of the size and type as indicated on the drawing.
4.11.1.2 Submittals
Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, capacity,
performance intended service and installation.
4.11.1.4 Warranty
All valves shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least two year after
handover.
4.11.2 Material
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the valves which are indicated on
the drawings.
(2) The Contractor has to install, by his own expense, valves which are not
indicated on the drawing, but are needed to achieve a more perfect
system.
(3) Valves of the same type shall be supplied by the same Manufacturer.
The valves shall be the types or models which are suitable for any fluid in
the system.
(4) The rated working pressure of the valves shall not be less than 1,034 kPa
(150 psig) or the specified figure on the drawing. All valves shall be
hydro-static tested under pressure of not less than 1.5 times of rated
working pressure by Manufacturer.
(5) All types of valves, except the control valves, shall have the same size as
the connected pipe.
(6) Normally, valves shall be installed on the horizontal position (vertically
stem). If not possible, any angle position of valve installation shall be
accepted after the approval of the Employer’s Representative.

(7) Chain operated hand wheels shall be furnished and installed for
overhead valves. Chain shall be made of stainless steel and one end of
chain shall be left at 1.00 m. (3 feet) above finished floor.
4.11.2.2 Gate Valves
Gate valve sizes in the range of 15 mm. (1/2 inch) to 50 mm. (2 inches) shall
be made of bronze body, and consist of screwed bonnet, rising stem, solid
wedge disc and screwed ends.
4.11.2.3 Globe Valves
Globe valve sizes in the range of 15 mm. (1/2 inch) to 50 mm. (2 inches) shall
be made of bronze body, and consist of screwed bonnet, replaceable plug
type disc and screwed ends.
4.11.2.4 Check Valves
(1) Check valve sizes in the range of 15 mm. (1/2 inch) to 50 mm. (2 inches)
shall be selected from 2 alternatives as follows:
Alternative 1 : For single disc type, the body made of bronze shall be
of Y-pattern, consisting of Teflon seat, stainless steel
spring and screwed ends.
Alternative 2 : The body made of bronze shall be of swing type.
(2) Check valve sizes of 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) and larger shall be made of cast
iron or semi-steel body. Valve shall consist of bronze seat and bushing,
stainless steel spring. Check valve shall be of silent type, globe style,
single disc and flanged ends.
4.11.2.5 Automatic Balancing Valve
(1) Automatic Balancing Valves for FCU and AHU with a capacity not over 12 Kw.
The valves shall consist of dynamic accessible, flow limiting device. They
shall automatically maintain a constant water flow rate through the
cooling within + 5% of rated flow. In the fully open position and at rated
flow rate the pressure drop through valves shall not be more than 40 kPa
(14’ water). The valves shall withstand an operating pressure not less
than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG). Flow regulation cartridge and spring shall be
stainless steel and readily accessible for change out or maintenance. Body
shall be bronze for valve size 40 mm. (1.5”) and smaller and shall be cast
iron for valve size 50 mm. (2”) and larger.

(2) Automatic Balancing Valves for AHU with a capacity over 12 Kw.
The Automatic Balancing Valves shall automatically maintain a constant
water flow rate through the cooling within + 5% of rated flow. They shall
work in harmony with the 2-way control valves. They shall not work
against the 2-way control valve during modulation. In the fully open
position and at rated flow rate the pressure drop through valves shall not
be more than 40 kPa(14’ water). The valves shall withstand an operating
pressure not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG). Flow regulation part and
spring shall be stainless steel and readily accessible for change out or
maintenance. Body shall be cast iron.
(3) Balancing valve sizes in the range of 15 mm. (1/2 inch) to 50 mm. (2
inches) shall be of bronze body and screwed ends.
(4) Balancing valve sizes of 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) and larger shall be of cast
iron or ductile iron body, and flanged ends.
(5) Selected balancing valve shall be balancing valve with flow measuring
ports.
(6) The Contractor shall provide flow measuring devices for the Employer as
specified.
4.11.2.6 Butterfly Valve
(1) Butterfly valve sizes of 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) and larger shall be made of
cast iron or ductile iron body, consisting of stainless steel or aluminium
bronze disc.
(2) Body connection shall be of lug type or double flanged type.
(3) Stem shall be of a through shaft or two piece shaft design.
(4) Compound rubber seat rings shall have excellent elasticity and wear
resistance to ensure fully closed position under the working pressure.
(5) Molded-in “O” ring shall be provided for flange connection application
without additional gasket.
(6) Lever-operated valves shall be used for sizes in range of 65 mm. (2½
inches) to 100 mm. (4 inches).
(7) Hang wheel gear-operated valves shall be used for size of 150 mm.
(6 inches) and larger.
(8) Position indicator shall be provided to check valve disc position.

4.11.2.7 Pressure Relief Valve

(1) Pressure relief valve used for pressure control shall be automatically
opened for pressure relief when the system pressure exceeds the set
point.
(2) Pressure relief valve shall be of hydraulically operated type, pilot control,
diaphragm type and globe pattern body.
(3) Pilot control shall be of direct-acting, adjustable spring loaded,
diaphragm-type valve.
(4) Pressure relief valve shall be made of cast iron or ductile iron with flange
connection.
4.11.2.8 Pressure Bypass Valve
(1) Pressure bypass valve shall be of a hydraulically operated, single seated
globe or angle valve controlled by a direct acting spring and diaphragm
pilot valve.
(2) The main valve will operate by the downstream pressure passing through
the pilot system. The high pressure of upstream will reduce to a
predetermined lower pressure of downstream.
(3) Main valve shall be made of cast iron.
(4) Seat and Stem shall be made of stainless steel.
(5) Diaphragm shall be made of Reinforced Synthetic Rubber.
4.11.2.9 Flexible Connections
(1) Flexible connections shall be of neoprene rubber impregnated fabric
reinforcement, bellow shape with flanged ends.
(2) Isolated tension members shall be provided to prevent excessive elongation.
(3) Flexible connections shall be selected to suit for the specified working fluid
or specified working pressure and temperature.
4.11.2.10 Expansion Joints
(1) Packless construction externally pressurized guide expansion connectors
shall be used where the expansion and contraction of the pipe is
excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
Anchors and pipe guides shall provide and install at the recommended
locations.
(2) All expansion connectors shall be flanged ends with working pressure
corresponding to the piping system.

4.11.2.11 Strainers
(1) Water strainers size of 50 mm. (2 inches) and smaller shall be Y pattern,
bronze body and screwed ends.
(2) Water strainer size of 65 mm. (2.5 inches) and larger shall be Y pattern,
cast iron body and flanged ends.
(3) Water strainer shall have the same pressure rating as the piping system.
(4) The free area of strainer screen shall be not less than three times the
area of the strainer inlet pipe.
(5) Water strainers of size of 65 mm. (2.5 inches) and larger shall be provided
with 15 mm. (1/2”) valve drains.
4.11.2.12 Water/Air Vent and Drain
(1) Manual air vent shall be furnished as required for purging air or other
gases from the water circuit during filling up. The outlet shall be piped to
the nearest drain.
(2) Automatic air vents, conforming to ASA Standards, shall be direct acting
floating type, cast-iron body.
(3) Automatic air vents shall be furnished at the top of main water risers,
supply and return pipes.
(4) A shut-off valve shall be provided at all low points of pipe work systems.
(5) Drains shall be installed to ensure easy access and convenience for
maintenance and removal of all piping, valves, fittings and equipment
without undue spillage.
(6) Drainage facilities shall be provided and suitable sized to drain
expeditiously the entire system and equipment involved.
4.11.2.13 Thermometers
(1) Thermometers shall be of the adjustable angle glass tube-type in a 230 mm.
( 9 inches) case with the stem of 90 mm( 3.5 inches) and accuracy of ±
one scale division.
(2) The scale range shall be suitable for the specified working fluid
temperature.
(3) Thermometer wells shall design to hold an engraved stem thermometer.
(4) Wells shall be made of stainless steel or of equivalent material.
(5) Wells shall be projected as much as possible into the pipe at the most
suitable location for accurate measurements and readings.
(6) The thermometer well welding socket shall supply as one of the
packages.

4.11.2.14 Pressure Gauges

(1) Pressure gauges shall be of the bourdon type, stainless steel casing, round
type of 100 mm. ( 4 Inches ) dial and scale range of approximately 150
per cent of the normal operation. Pressure readings shall be in PSI. and/or
Pascal.
(2) A needle shut-off valve and pressure snubber with working pressure
corresponding to the piping system shall be provided.
(3) Oil filled pressure gauges shall be selected where there are excessive
vibrations.
4.11.2.15 Closed Type Expansion Tank
(1) The expansion tank for air conditioning system shall be closed type.
The volume of the tank shall be indicated in the drawing or schedule.
(2) Tank shall be constructed of mild steel and tested in accordance with
ASME or BS standard. The rated working pressure shall not less than 150 psi
(1034 kPa).
(3) Tank shall be painted with in specification and outside surface shall be
insulated with 25mm thick of fire retardant type of closed cell insulation.
(4) Tank shall be jacket by stainless steel 0.5mm thick for finished.
(5) Accessories Expansion tank shall be completed with control accessories
as below:-
(a) Isolating valve
(b) Pressure relief valve
(c) Pressure gauge
(d) Strainer
(e) Check valve
4.11.2.16 Automatic condenser Tube Cleaning
(1) The automatic condenser tube cleaning shall consist of cleaning ball, ball
injector, ball collector or ball trap, valve and automatic control panel.
(2) Cleaning ball shall be made of sponge ball or elastomeric rubber ball.
The cleaning ball shall be soft enough for condenser tube and not made
damage to the tube
(3) Ball injector shall be made of maid steel and furnished with baked on
enamel. The ball collector constructed of stainless steel ball strainer or
other material that can be used for high temperature and high corrosion.
The ball collector shall not disturb condenser water flow for a minimum
pressure drop.

(4) Valve and accessories shall be standard valves, which are used in the air
condition system. The valves and accessories shall follow to this
specification.
(5) Control panel shall be microprocessor control or programmable logic
control (PLC). The control can be controlling of start/stop the unit by
interlocking with chiller and injector ball to the system automatically
4.11.3 Execution
(1) Install valves according to the Manufacturer’s recommendation and
installation.
(2) Install with stem vertical and handle up wherever possible, never with
stem below horizontal position.
(3) Install with operating clearance for handle and stem.
(4) Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not
interfere with equipment removal or maintenance. Install unions or
flanges on equipment side of valves.
(5) Provide valves of a design permitting packing while open and under
pressure.
(6) Provide (1 inch) 25 mm. diameter drain valves with threaded ends for
hose connections at drain points, at main shutoff valves, low points of
piping systems, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.
(7) Provide required manual or automatic vent valves at high points of piping
systems or as shown on the drawing to facilitate venting of air and to
ensure quiet operation.
(8) Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for cast iron
body valves.
(9) Provide chain operated sheaves and chains for all valves which are more
than 2400 mm. (8 feet) above the floor in Mechanical Equipment areas.
(10) Provide other valves, check valves, accessories, etc., as required for the
complete and proper operating of the entire installation.
(11) Install butterfly valves in horizontal piping with stem in the horizontal
position so that bottom of disk lifts in the direction of flow.
(12) Install butterfly valves in vertical piping at pumps with stem perpendicular
to pump shaft.
END OF SECTION

4.12 DUCT WORKS

4.12.1 General
(1) Unless otherwise specified or noted, casings, plenum chambers and ducts
shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel of varying thickness and construction
as specified.
(2) The Drawings do not attempt to show all offsets in ductwork. The
Contractor shall provide these offsets as required at no additional cost.
(3) The construction of ductwork shall be generally in accordance with the
"Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air-
conditioning System", published by the Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning
Contractors National Association Inc.
(4) In ducts, the slip joint must form a smooth interior surface and a neat
exterior appearance. All joints shall be as near airtight as possible. All
seams shall be continuous around four sides of the duct. Under no
conditions shall hangers or supports piece the ducts. All curves, vents,
offsets, etc. are to be made for an easy flow of air with minimum
obstruction and the radius being not less than the width of the duct or
flue.
(5) All changed in dimensions and shapes of ducts shall be gradual with a
slope of not less than 1 to 4.
(6) Changes in duct size or shape that may interference with other works
shall be made by using the size of the equivalent friction loss.
(7) Where space permits, elbows shall have an inner radius of at least the
duct width measured in the plane of the elbow. Where shown or where
required to fit in restricted space, square elbows shall be used. These
elbows may be constructed with square inner and outer corners, and
shall be fitted with factory-made or shop-fabricated turning vanes.
Factory-made turning vanes shall be zinc-coated or factory-finished with
black enamel or other suitable finish. Seams, joints and bracing of elbows
shall be as specified for straight ducts.
(8) Splitter dampers shall be provided for air adjustment in throats at all duct
branches. Rivets, screws and other fastening details shall be made of or
plated with the same metal as the ducts or other metals having equal or
superior corrosion-resistance.
(9) The exposed air ducts in air conditioning area except that in technical
room shall be painted with high quality coloring paint conforming to

specification of "Painting". Colors shall be selected by the Employer’s

Representative.
(10) Where ducting passes through walls and floors, the Contractor shall
supply to the Main Building Contractor treated hardwood frames as
shown on the Drawings. The area between the frame and the ducting
shall be covered on both sides of the wall by boards of 20 mm. (3/4”)
thick multiplex, neatly cut to form a sound barrier. The space between
the covering board shall be filled with rockwool to a maximum density.
All joints shall be sealed with mastic.
(11) Small holes, 50 mm. (2”) in diameter with cover plates, are to be
provided for the use of Pilot tubes for measurement of air quantities.
Such holes are to be provided at convenient positions to facilitate
regulation of all branches and as may be required by the Employer’s
Representative.
(12) In the technical rooms, the ducting shall be fabricated in flanged sections,
bolted together with cadmium-plated bolts and nuts and asbestos cord
for easy dismantling.
(13) Bracing angles shall be provided for all sides and riveted to the ducts at
150 mm. (6”) centre to centre. Bracing angles, angle flanges and
transverse joints shall be painted with 2 coats of antirust paint.
(1) Duct works shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 SMACNA : HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal &
Flexible, 1995, 2nd Edition
 SMACNA : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation
Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th Edition
 SMACNA : HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide, 2nd
Edition
 SMACNA : Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct

Construction Handbook
 SMACNA : Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
 SMACNA : HVAC Systems - Duct Design Manual
 SMACNA 1286 : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation
Guide for HVAC Systems
 Standard 68-1997 : Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the

Sound Power in a Duct (AMCA Standard 330-97)

(ANSI approved)
 Standard 126-2000 : Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts (ANSI
approved) (SMACNA standard)
 Standard 120-1999 : Method of Testing to Determine Flow
Resistance of HVAC Ducts10and Fittings (ANSI
Approved)
 UL 555 Revision 2 : Fire Dampers
4.12.1.3 Submittals
The contractor shall submit all material selection, catalog, material lists and
technical data for approval before installation.
4.12.1.5 Warranty
All parts of duct works shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or by the
contractor for as least two year after handover.
4.12.2 Material
The construction of ductwork shall be generally in accordance with the "Duct
Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air-conditioning
System", published by the Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors
National Association Inc.

4.12.2.2 Component
(1) Low Pressure Duct
 Low pressure ducts shall be used where indicated on the drawings,
or, if not, where static pressure does not exceed 50 mm. water gauge.
 Low pressure ducting shall be constructed with galvanized steel
sheet and steel bracing angles in which the thickness and dimension
of the respective equipment shall not be less than the indicated
figures for low pressure ducting in the latest edition of ASHRAE and/or
SMACNA.
 Sheet metal for slips and drive caps shall be of the same material
and thickness as the ducts.
(2) Medium Pressure Duct
 Medium pressure ducts shall be used where indicated in the
Drawings. If not, they shall be used where static pressure is higher
than 50 mm. water gauge, but not over 100 mm. water gauge.
 Medium pressure ducting shall be constructed with galvanized steel
sheet and steel bracing angles in which the thickness and dimension
of the respective equipment shall not be less than the indicated
figures for medium pressure ducting in the latest edition of ASHRAE
and/or SMACNA.
 Medium pressure ducts shall be constructed without sharp edges or
irregularities that may generate noise.
(3) Spiral Duct
 Spiral duct shall be used where indicated in the Drawings. Spiral duct
shall be constructed with galvanized steel sheet. The construction
and thickness of spiral duct shall conform to the latest edition of
ASHRAE and/or SMACNA.
 Spiral duct shall be constructed with smooth inside surface with low
friction loss.
(4) Round Flexible Duct
 The flexible ducts shall be made of a coated polyester fabric, the
outside of which shall be mechanically interlocked by a corrosion-
resistant metal spiral helix. If specified, factory-applied insulation shall
be a nominal 25 mm. (1”) thick, 24 kg/m3 (1.5 lb/ft3) density
fiberglass. The vapour barrier shall be of fiberglass fabric coated with
a black elastomer compound and laminated to aluminized polyester

film. Pressure rating is 300 mm. of water static.

(5) Duct Support and Hangers
 Horizontal rectangular/round, low and medium pressure ducts shall
be supported by hangers as shown on the Drawings.
 A pair of hangers shall be located close to each transverse joint and
elsewhere as required by the spacing indicated in table of air duct
hanger.
 Upper ends of hangers shall be vertical and secured individually to
floor of above roof construction. Hangers shall not be secured to
suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling hangers or insertions to which
suspended ceiling hangers are attached.
 The hangers and supports shall be of the adjustable type and hot-dip
galvanized.
(6) Access Panels
 Access doors shall be installed in casings, plenum chambers and
ducts where shown and wherever else required for ready access to
dampers and other operating parts of any kind.
 Access doors shall be 1 mm. thick, double-skin set in galvanized
frames with 25 mm. (1”) thick, 48 kg/m3 (3 lb/ft3) density fiberglass
insulation and approved latches and hinges. Edges and frames shall
be stiffened and made airtight with felt strip. The minimum size shall
be 300 by 300 mm. except ducts less than 300 mm. where minimum
size shall be 150 by 150 mm (6”x6”)
(7) Flexible Collars
 Flexible collars shall be provided at the connections between fans
and ducts or casings, where required to prevent expansion joints.
They shall be approximately 200 mm. (8”) long and shall be installed
with just sufficient slack to prevent transmission of vibration.
 Circular collars shall be secured to fans and ducts with metal bands
of 2 mm. (0.08”) thick and 25 mm. (1”) wide. Rectangular collars shall
be secured to ducts and fans with 25 mm. by 3.2 mm. (1” by 0.125”)
flat bars fastened with screws or bolts at 200 mm. (8”) intervals or
with flanges similar to those specified for duct joints. Metal for
fastening collars shall be the same as specified for ducts and bracing.
 Flexible collars shall be constructed of fire-resistant flexible canvas,
or neoprene-coated glass fabric.

 Collars for ducts operating at temperatures above 40oC (104oF) and

acid-resistant ducts shall be made of neoprene-coated polyester
fabric.
 Collars exposed to weathering shall be made of neoprene-coated
glass fabric.
(8) Dampers
 Automatic Air Dampers
- Automatic dampers shall be of the air balancing type, with flat or
elliptical steel blades, mounted horizontally in welded steel
frames. Blades shall have interlocking edges. Rectangular dampers of
300 mm. or more in a direction perpendicular to the axis shall be
louvered. Blades on louvered dampers must not be over 200 mm.
wide. Round dampers shall be single-blade dampers. Damper
blades shall have steel turnings mounted in bronze sleeve
bearings or ball bearings. Dampers between bearing shall be not
more than 150 mm. long. Opposed blade dampers shall be similar
to louvered dampers except that the air stream is not deflected to
one side. Where volume control is required, opposed blade
dampers shall be used.
- Dampers shall guaranteed to close substantially tight. Those for
use in high pressure and high velocity systems shall be of special
design to minimize noise. Dampers in outdoor air intakes,
discharge openings and mixing dampers on hot and cold air
plenum systems shall have fitted edges or neoprene rubber edges
cemented and riveted in place during fabrication. Rectangular
2 2
dampers having an area larger than 0.4 m (4 ft ) shall have
additional corner bracing.
- Damper operating links shall be steel or brass rod, adjustable in
length and of such proportions that they will withstand without
appreciable deflection a load equal to not less than twice the
maximum operation force of the damper motor. Joints in linkages
shall be made with steel or brass pins or with ball and socket
joints of ample size. Steel parts of damper shall be finished with
two coats of enamel or aluminum paint or shall be zinc-coated.

 Volume Dampers
- All dampers necessary for proper control and balance of air
distribution for ductwork systems shall be furnished and installed
so that they can be adjusted at any time after the completion of
the Works.
- Front and back bars or vanes of direction grilles are not to be used
for adjustment of all quantities.
- Generally, butterfly dampers shall be of the air balancing type
with flat or elliptical blades. Blades shall be rigid, with close fitting
hem edges. A damper in ducts over 350 mm. (10ft) in minimum
dimension shall be of the multiple opposed blade type. Multiple
blades shall be not over 300 mm. (12”) wide and may be either
gang-operated or individually operated. Blades of dampers in
medium and high pressure ducts shall be non-metallic or provided
with non-metallic edges or coating.
- Damper rods shall be not less than 9.5 mm. (0.375”) squared at
one end and shall either pass entirely through the ducts or shall
be of short stubs secured to the blades by not less than 2 bolts or
rivets at each end. The squared end of each rod shall be held in
lever type locking device with a central locking nut of large
diameter or a quadrant and locking screws. Ends of damper rods in
medium and high pressure ducts shall be provided with means of
sealing them to prevent leakage of air.
- Dampers shall have frames of not less than 50 mm. (2”) wide and
blades of 1.6 mm. (0.0625”) galvanized steel. The damper plate
shall be pivoted on a rod or installed with hinges, controlled with
one or more rods that are fastened to the leading edge of the
blade. Damper rods, on the other hand, shall be not less than 9.5
mm. in diameter and slip through a hub fastened to the duct side.
The setscrew in the hub holds the rod and damper to a desired
setting. Length of damper blades shall be at least equal to the
width of branch. The damper blades, pivots and rods must be rigid
in installation so that they will neither vibrate nor create noise.
 Fire Dampers
- The fire dampers shall be constructed according to NFPA 90A and
UL 555, the fire rating shall have the same fire rating as the wall
through which is to be led.

- The casings and blades of fire dampers shall be constructed of

zinc-coated steel of at least 1.9 mm. (0.075”) thickness. The casing
shall be flanged and supported by the fire wall or floor and be
totally independent of the ducting in which they are incorporated.
- Damper blades shall be pivoted off-balance and counter-weighted
so that they can be closed by gravity, but held open by approved,
rigid, fusible links.
- Fusible links shall be set at 71C (160F) heat resistance for
horizontal ducts and 40C (120F) for vertical ducts. Access doors
shall be provided at each fire damper and shall be 600 by 600
mm. (24”x24”) except ducts less than 300 mm. (12”), in which
case the sizes shall not be smaller 150 by 150 mm. (6” by 6”)
- All parts of fire damper (Frame, damper and fusible links) shall be
tested and certified by UL-555
 Fire and Smoke Dampers
- The fire and smoke damper shall be constructed according to
NFPA 90A and UL-555S, the fire rating shall have the same fire
rating as the wall through which is to be led.
- The casings and blades of fire dampers shall be constructed of
zinc-coated steel of at least 1.9 mm. (0.075”) thickness. The casing
shall be flanged and supported by the fire wall or floor and be
totally independent of the ducting in which they are incorporated.
- The dampers shall be automatically closed when either smoke
concentration or temperature above safety limit. Any remote
sensors, wiring and accessories shall have the same fire rating as
the dampers.
- All parts of fire and smoke damper (Frame, damper, actuator and
fusible links) shall be tested and certified by UL-555S
(9) Duct Silencer and Duct Liner
 The Contractor shall be responsible for installing the necessary duct
silencer or duct liner to reduce the transfer of sound (created by the
fan) to the rooms. The sound level from the air handling unit and fan
coil unit measure in an occupied room shall not exceed NC 40 for
public spaces and NC 45 for back of the house, unless otherwise
specified.

 Duct Silencer shall be constructed to suit the ducting or the air

handling units in which they will be incorporated. The duct silencer
shall be built-up of a casing in which sound absorbing cells are fitted.
 Casings shall be made of zinc-coated steel, not lighter than specified
herein for ducts of the same outside dimensions, but in no case
lighter than 0.76 mm. for low pressure ducts and 1 mm. for medium
pressure ducts. Casings shall be suitable braced and sealed so as not
to show any distortion or leakage.
 Duct silencer lining materials shall neither impart odor to the air nor
delaminate readily. There shall be no loose material on any exposed
surface that may be detached by the air stream, either during
installation or under regular operating conditions. The materials shall
be non-combustible. Sound absorbing materials in contact with the
air stream shall be neoprene-coated. All lining materials shall be in
good condition at the time of final inspection. Material damaged in
shipment by rough handling, vibration or exposure will be rejected. It
shall be replaced or coated to prevent detachment of loose material
as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
 Duct silencer lining materials shall be adequately secured and
protected. Edges of materials that are not protected by metal shall
be heavily coated with an adhesive to prevent detachment of loose
materials, whether such edges are to be exposed in the finished
assembly or butted against other similar edges.
 Duct liner shall have the construction of 25 mm. fiberglass 48 kg/m3
density and coated with neoprene.
(10) Black Steel Sheet Duct
 All hot air exhaust duct from kitchen shall be constructed of
minimum 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) thick black steel sheet. All duct joints
shall be welded and each duct section shall be fabricated in flanged
connection.
 The kitchen exhaust duct shall be insulated with 40 mm (1 1/2
inches) calcium silicate and covered with aluminum foil vapour
barrier same specification and for fiberglass insulation. Where
exposed, the duct shall be covered with galvanized steel sheet jacket
instead of aluminum foil vapour barrier.
 The kitchen exhaust duct shall be sloped in 1:500 and appropriate 25
mm (1 inch grease drain cocks shall be provided.

(11) Miscellaneous Exhaust/Duct Work

 Dedicate kitchen dishwasher and laundry iron shall use welded
stainless steel exhaust duct which is slope back to equipment for
drainage of condensation and ducted directly to outside.
 Fabricate pool bromine/chlorine storage room exhaust duct from
stainless steel.
(12) Duct Smoke Detector
 The duct detector shall operate at air velocities from 1.52 mps. (300
fpm.) up to 20.3 mps. (4000 fpm.). Housing shall be of metal
construction and complete mechanical installation will be performed
without removal of detector cover.
 Visual indicator of alarm and power must be provided on detector
front. A manual reset switch shall be located on front of the device.
Terminal shall be provided for remote alarm indication, strobe/horn
and remote reset switch. All wiring must comply with local codes and
regulation.
(13) Air Outlet
 All ceiling diffusers, registers and grilles shall be of the size and
shapes indicated on the Drawings.
 Ceiling diffusers shall be of the circular, square, rectangular,
perforated face or linear type as indicated on the Drawings.
 Diffusers shall be constructed of anodized, extruded aluminum.
Sharp edges and corners shall be ground-off and the surface shall be
flush-finished.
 Opposed blades volume control dampers shall be provided with each
diffuser. All accessories shall be constructed of extruded aluminum,
and assembled without any metal-to-metal contact in moving parts.
The opposed blades volume control damper shall be adjusted without
removing any part of air outlet.
 All internal parts of each diffuser shall be removable as a unit to
permit cleaning of the diffuser and provide access to the ducts. All
diffusers shall be supported independently from the suspended
ceiling system and shall be of an adjustable type.
 Registers shall be nylon-fitted, noise proof, 4-way adjustable
anodized, extruded aluminum grille with opposed blade volume
control damper. All registers shall have gaskets, installed and located

in place without glue, blades mounted in nylon self-lubricating

bashing, and assembled without any metal to-metal contact in
moving parts.
 Return, transfer and exhaust air grilles shall be constructed of
extruded anodized aluminum. All blades shall be mounted in rigid
vinyl insert cushion elements to prevent rattling or vibration.
 Fresh air grilles shall be similar in construction to return and exhaust
grilles. They shall always be equipped with opposed blade volume
dampers and insect screens.
(14) Duct insulation
 The insulation shall be closed cell elastomeric thermal insulation,
moisture and vapor barriers, self-extinguishing with fire and low
smoke density while burning.
 Properties of Insulation shall be as the following:
- Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.038 W/m./K (0.26
BTU/Hr/ft2/ F/Inch.) at 24C (75F) by test method of ASTM C177.
- Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percentage by weight
method of ASTM D1056 Type 1
- Water vapor permeability not be more than 0.10 perm-in in
- Moisture Resistance shall be ≥5,000 µ in compliance to DIN 52615
- Flammability shall be 25 in compliance to ASTM E84 or Class 0 in
compliance to UL94 or surface spread of flame of Class 1 in
compliance to BS476 Part 7. Smoke density shall be 50 in
- Density shall be 48-96 kg/cu.m. (3-6 lbs/cu.ft.) in compliance to
ASTM D1667
- Service temperature shall be -20°C to 105°C (-4°F to 220°F)
 Duct insulation thickness shall be as follows specified below unless
otherwise specified in the drawings
Duct location Thickness, mm (inch)
Supply air duct outside air conditioning space 25 (1)
or return air stream
Supply air duct in air conditioning space and 20 (3/4)
Return air duct outside air conditioning space

4.12.3 Execution
(1) All supply and return air ducts for cooled air distribution shall be
insulated. Return air duct in air conditioning space, fresh air and exhaust
air ducts may not be insulated.
(2) Flanges and other steel parts shall be painted prior to the application of
insulation.
(3) The insulation shall be adhered directly to clean, oil free surfaces with a
full coverage of its own adhesive.
(4) The insulation seam of connection joint shall be covered using strips of
insulation thickness as installed on the duct surface.
(5) In order to protect the insulation from damage, insulated ducting shall be
supported on strips of celotex or gypsum board of 6 mm.(0.25”) thick and
150 mm.(6”) wide at all supports and hangers.
(6) Insulation seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of
insulation.
(1) High pressure blower with control damper shall be used for test
apparatus. Air for testing shall be introduced into the system through a
suitable filter and dryer to exclude all impurities.
(2) A flow measuring device shall be of an orifice assembly consisting of
straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with
properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly is accurately
calibrated with its own calibration curve, which shall also be submitted to
the Employer’s Representative for approval. Pressure and flow readings
shall be taken with U-tube manometers.
(3) Test procedures shall be of audible test with a pressure of 50 mm WG in
excess of designed duct operating pressure. All joints for audible leaks
shall be surveyed and each leak shall be marked and repaired after
shutting down the blower. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the
orifice section with a pressure of 25% in excess of designed duct
operating pressure.
END OF SECTION

4.13 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

4.13.1 General
All air distribution devices shall be of the size and type as indicated on the
drawings.
(1) Air distribution devices and accessories shall comply with the following
codes and standards.
 SMACNA : HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal &
Flexible, 1995, 2nd Edition
 SMACNA : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation
Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th Edition
 SMACNA : HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide, 2nd
Edition
 SMACNA : Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct
Construction Handbook
 SMACNA : Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
 SMACNA : HVAC Systems - Duct Design Manual
 Standard 68-1997 : Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the
Sound Power in a Duct (AMCA Standard 330-97)
(ANSI approved)
 Standard 126-2000 : Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts (ANSI approved)
(SMACNA standard)
 Standard 120-1999 : Method of Testing to Determine Flow
Resistance of HVAC Ducts10and Fittings (ANSI
Approved)

4.13.1.3 Submittals
(1) The contraction shall submit air distribution device’s performance selection,
catalog, material list and technical data request for approval before
installation
(2) The contractor shall provided samples or material for air distribution
device request for approval before installation.
4.13.1.5 Warranty
All air distribution devices shall be guaranteed by the contractor for as least
two year after handover.
4.13.2 Material
The air distribution devices is the device used for distributed the air to the
space.
4.13.2.2 Component
(1) Supply Ceiling Diffusers (SCD.)
 Supply ceiling diffusers shall be 1 to 4 ways air direction as specified
on the drawings and/or specified herein. The diffusers shall be square
or rectangular shape as specified on the drawings and/or specified
herein.
 The diffusers shall be constructed or extruded anodized aluminum,
removable cones and installed flush-finish with the ceiling. (flush
mount) .
 The diffusers will be colors coating with white color or others color as
specified on the drawing.
 All diffusers shall have opposed blade volume control dampers,
which can be adjusted air volume without removing the diffusers.
(2) Supply Air Registers (SAR)
 Register shall be 4 way adjustable air direction supply air registers
shall be constructed of extruded aluminium and shall have an

individual adjustable blade place one up on the other (vertical front

blade and horizontal rear blade).
 Some or the registers will be color coating with white color or other
color as specified on the drawing.
 All registers shall have opposed blades volume control dampers white
can be adjusted air volume without removing the registers.
(3) Supply Air Grills (SAG)
 Supply air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium
and blades fixed on the grilles with 45 degree angle deflection.
 Some of the grille will be color coating with white color or other color
as specified on the drawings.
 All grilles shall have opposed blade volume control dampers which can
be adjusted air volume with out removing the grilles.
(4) Supply Linear Slot (SLS.) / Return Linear Slot (RLS.)
 Supply linear slot shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium
and shall be formed to provide horizontal air flow (condo air flow
pattern). The linear slot shall be one-way or two-way flow direction and
shall be complete with internal damper to adjusted air flow, flow
direction and pattern.
Each air flow channel shall not less than 20 mm.(314 in.) wide.
 Return linear slot shall have the same character as the supply linear
slot, but the return linear slot does not have internal control damper.
 Some of the linear slot will be color coating with white color or other
color as specified on the drawings.
(5) Return Air Grilles (RAG.)
 Return air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminum
and blade fixed on the grilles with 45 degree angle deflection.
 Return air grilles shall be of removals cores and installed flush-finish with
the ceiling (flush mount).
(6) Transfer Air Grilles (TAG)
 Transfer air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium
and horizontal blade fixed on grilles with 45 degree angle deflection.
 If on the wall, transfer air grilled shall have face and fixed grilles on both
sides of the wall.

(7) Fresh Air Grilles (FAG.) / Outdoor Air Grilled (OAG.)

 Fresh air grille and outdoor air graces shall be constructed of extruded
anodized aluminium and horizontal blade fixed on the grilles with 45
degree angle deflection.
 Fresh air grilles and outdoor air grilles shall be designed for outdoor
type, which have ability to protect water come to inside of graces
(weather proof).
(8) Exhaust Air Grilles (EAG)
 Exhaust air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium
and horizontal blades fixed on the grilles with 45 degree. angle
deflection.
 Exhaust air grilles shall be designed for outdoor type, which have ability
to protect water come to inside of grilles (weather proof). Unless
otherwise specified. They shall be equipped with opposed blade
volume damper.
4.13.3 Execution
(1) The installation of diffusers, grilles and registers in the ceiling or on the
walls shall be flush-finish.
(2) All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be installed with galvanized steel
plenum.
operate either the required performance. Report forms to contain following
minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for each Item
mentioned below:
END OF SECTION

4.14 AUTOMATIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT

4.14.1 General
(1) Automatic control systems shall include all dampers, valves, thermostats
and other control devices shown on the Drawings. Control devices shall
be connected complete so as to perform the indicated functions and
operate in the required sequence.
(2) All control equipment shall be supplied by a firm whose establishment is
widely recognized and whose engagement in the installation and
maintenance of this control equipment is on a regular basis.
(1) The automatic control equipment shall comply with the following codes
and standards.
 ASHRAE 135-1995 : BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks
 EN 50081-1 : Generic Emissions: Residential, Commercial, and
Light Industrial Environments
 EN 50081 : Electromagnetic Emissions - Generic Emissions
Standard (3) NEC
4.14.1.3 Submittals
(1) The contractor shall submit automatic control equipment’s performance
selection, catalog, material lists and technical data for approval before
installation.
(2) The contractor shall submit full detail of equipment, function of work,
size and method of installation before the work starts.


4.14.1.5 Warranty
All part of automatic control equipment shall be guaranteed by the contractor
and/or by the manufacturer for as least two year after handover.
4.14.2 Material
(1) The quality and type of the instruments and enclosure shall be suitable
for the climatic conditions of the area where they will be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendation. Care should be taken in selection
of instruments for hazardous areas, fire control purposes and outdoor use.
(2) Chiller System Manager Control Panel (CSM) shall be produced or
recommended by the chiller manufacturer, which can control the whole
operation of chiller units.
(3) CSM will be using a micro-processor (Direct Digital Control System) and
able to stand alone. A back-up battery set shall be required for standby
or maintaining information, in case of electricity failure.
(4) CSM can be connected with the future Building Management System
(BMS) as well as communicating and sending information e.g. status of
chillers, pumps, cooling towers, valves and remote shut-down from BMS.
4.14.2.2 Component
(1) Electronic sensors and controllers
 Electronic equipment shall be of the unit type with all elements
readily removable for testing and replacement. Equipment shall be
enclosed in a suitable housing.
 Electronic sensor/controller shall be used to detect analogue signal
(temperature humidity, etc.)
 Thermostats shall be of the proportional type unless two-position
instruments are required in these Specifications or diagrams.
 In general, duct thermostat shall be of a remote sensor type. Sensing
elements shall be located where they will respond to a
representative temperature within the duct. Operating and adjusting
mechanisms or controller shall be enclosed in metal or phenolic

resin cases and shall be located on the outside of the ducts with
covering. If the distance between the remote sensor and controller
(operating/adjusting) panel exceeds the recommended maximum
length, a remote transmitter, mounted on the outside of the duct,
shall be used.
 Remote sensor shall be protected against damage. Capillary tubes or
wires between sensor and operating mechanisms shall be protected
by conduit, moulding or flexible armour. Excess capillary or wire
lengths shall be neatly coiled and securely fastened out of the way.
Capillaries or wiring shall pierce thermal insulation at the smallest
practicable number of points. They shall be properly sealed
wherever they pierce an insulation vapour seal.
 Pipe thermostats, generally, shall be of a remote sensor type. Pipe
shall be provided with suitable socket or thermo-well for sensor.
Where the distance between the sensor and controller (adjusting/
operating) panel exceeds the recommended maximum capillary or
wire length, a remote transmitter shall be used. Protection of
capillary tubing and wires shall be as specified for duct thermostats.
 Room thermostats shall be securely attached to suitable bases
mounted on the walls or other building surface. Each thermostat
shall be located where shown or, if not shown where it will respond
to the average temperature in the room. Thermostats, generally, shall
be mounted with centerline 1.50 m. above the floor and shall not be
mounted on outside walls or light partitions between offices if other
locations are more suitable. Thermostats mounted on outside walls
shall be provided with insulated bases.
 Room thermostats in which the adjusting mechanism is integral with
the sensing element shall have locked or concealed adjustment
devices by means of which the operating points can be adjusted
through a range of not less than 5C, above and below the operating
points specified. External thermometers and knob or lever adjusting
devices (lockable type) shall be furnished on room thermostats.
 Every electronic temperature control system shall be provided with
one or more transformers to supply power for equipment operating
at less than the normal lighting circuit voltage.
 Transformer shall be fed from the nearest air-conditioning
switchboard.

 Control transformer shall have ample capacity to operate simultaneously

all apparatus connected to it and shall be capable of carrying a 25
per cent overload. Transformers shall be of the open type with
screw type terminals.
 Relay shall be of electronic or electric type and shall be totally
enclosed. Capacity shall be suitable for the loads controlled and
contacts shall be as specified for thermostats.
(2) Electric actuators and motors
 Controlled voltage shall be either 220V or 24V as specified on the
Drawings.
 Valve and damper motors shall be of the proportional or on off type
in accordance with thermostat or controller and shall be quiet in
operation. All motorized valves for air handlers shall be returned to
close position when fan motors being turned off.
 Operating speeds of valve and damper motors shall be selected or
adjusted so that the motors will remain in step with the controller
without hunting, regardless of load variations. Motors operating in
sequence with other motors shall have adjustable operating ranges
and starting points to permit adjustment of the control sequence as
required by the operating characteristics of the system.
 Damper motors may be mounted either inside or outside of the duct
or casing. If outside, they must be mounted on supporting plates that
are completely outside the covering. On casings or ducts handling
cold air, the supporting plates shall be installed in a manner that will
prevent condensation on cold surface.
 Valve and damper motors shall be of rugged construction and quiet
in operation. When operated at rated voltage, each motor shall be
capable of delivering not less than twice the torque required by the
valve or damper and shall withstand, without damage, continuous
stalling.
 Motors shall function properly with a 10 per cent plus or minus
change in line voltage supplying to the equipment.
 Motors shall be of either the hydraulic or geared type. Motor-driven
pinions and high speed gears may be made of a suitable non-metallic
composition to insure quiet operation, while others may be of steel
or bronze. Shaft shall be hardened steel, running through bronze,
hardened steel, nylon or other suitable sleeves or ball bearings.

Lever arms shall be attached to motor shafts with setscrews or other

secure and adjustable means.
 Motors and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof housing
of pressed steel or cast metal with conduit entries. Gear trains shall
be oil-immersed.
 Two-position motors shall be of the single direction, spring return
(stall) or reversing type. Proportioning motors shall be of the
reversing, shaded pole or capacitor induction type, capable of
stopping at any point in the cycle and starting in either direction from
any points. Reversing and proportioning motors shall have limit
switches to limit the lever travelling in either direction. Every valve
motor shall be equipped with a spring yield device so that, when in
the closed position, it will maintain on the valve disc a pressure
equivalent to that of the valve.
 Motor actuator shall be selected with sufficient close-off rating
according to the actual system.
(3) Automatic Control Valves
 Automatic valves shall be of the stem-guided or cage-guided globe
types and shall provide proportional equal percentage flow
characteristic. The bodies, discs, stems and stuffing boxes of valves
shall be designed to withstand 150 psi (1000kPa) working pressure.
 Valves with 50 mm. (2”) bodies or smaller shall be all brass or bronze
with screwed or union ends or flange connections. On the other
hand, 65 mm. (2.5”) bodies and larger shall have iron bodies, brass or
bronze trimmings and flanged ends.
 The design and materials of the valve and its actuator shall be such
that leakage of water from the stem packing cannot cause corrosion
of any working part. Each valve shall be provided with a readily
visible position indicator.
 The Contractor shall submit the procedure of valve sizing selection to
match with suitable valve operating rang for approval.
(4) Chiller system manager control (CSM)
 CSM shall control the multiple chillers to work in harmony based on
the information from temperature and flow rate sensors in the
chilled water system and condenser water system. In order to

calculate cooling load capacity and instruct the chillers to operate at

a certain numbers to get the highest efficiency.
 CSM will automatically set time clock program and time schedules
which enables the pumps, chiller and cooling tower, to start-up and
shut-down as required by the user.
 CSM should be capable of indicating the measurement and
performance of chiller units as listed below:
- Volts (3 Phase)
- Amps (3 Phase)
- Kilowatts
- Power Factor
- Oil Temperature
- Oil Pressure
- Tonnage
- Leaving and Return Chilled Water Temperature
- Leaving and Return Condenser Water Temperature
- Refrigerant Pressure
- Refrigerant Temperature
- Chilled & Condenser Water Flow Rate
- Manual and Automatic Reset Alarm
- Chilled Water Set point
- Demand Limit set point
 CSM shall be able to organize the sequence of operation for chiller
units, which result to “Lead-Lag”
 Ability to start/ stop, including status of other equipment of the
system as listed below.
- Chilled water pump
- Condenser water pump
- Cooling tower
 CSM shall be able to measure the power consumption and cooling
capacity of chiller plant, in order to get the highest efficiency
operation.
 CSM will be connected to monitor and show in graphics and then
input data through keyboard.

4.14.3 Execution
(1) The Contractor shall require the control supplier to supervise and
commission the control system. The testing for the automatic control
system include the following service :-
 Prior to commencement of work on site:-
Advise on the operation of the control system, identification and
correct positioning of control equipment and wiring connections.
 During the progress of the site work:-
Advise on the correct location and installation of controls and correct
wiring on controls. Particular attention shall be paid to the mounting
of actuators on valves, dampers, and the correct linkages form
actuators to valves and dampers. The work shall be carried out on
the basis of regular visits throughout the Contract period.
 When the installation is completed :-
Commission the complete control system supplied under this section
of these Specifications to provide detailed operation and
performance figures.
(2) Provide all normal servicing and maintenance during the defects liability
period for all equipment provided under this Contract. In addition the
following tests shall be carried out :-
 Insulation resistance
 Earthing continuity
 Polarity
 Continuity
 Phase proving tests to ensure that phases are connected in the
specified manner and correct sequence throughout.
 Earth fault loop inspection test.
(3) Final commissioning of control systems after the Employer’s
Representative approval of the test records the systems shall be finally
commissioned.
END OF SECTION

4.15 WATER CONDITIONING SYSTEM

4.15.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install water condition system including
package automatic softener, chemical treatment, chemical tank, bypass feeder
tank, Ozone generator system as shown on the Drawings and/or specified
herein.
4.15.1.2 Submittal
(1) Submit the Shop Drawing that consists of a complete list of equipment
and material, including manufacturer’s descriptive and technical literature.
(2) Submit the catalog, installation detail, chemical used system, Ozone
generator system to protected corrosive pipe.
4.15.1.4 Warranty
(1) Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for two years from date of
handover.
(2) Provide a set of spare chemicals for two year.
4.15.2 Material
4.15.2.1 Chemical Treatment
(1) The Contractor shall provide complete corrosion and scale protection and
algae growth protection by a chemical method for both chilled water and
condenser water. The calculation of chemical consumption, installation
drawings, technical bulletins, and dosing program shall be submitted for
approval.
(2) The Contractor shall provide chromate corrosion inhibitors and chemicals
for biocide algae growth protection for 12 months consumption.
(3) A complete set of pH, chromate, chloride and hardness test kit shall also
be provided by the Contractor. During guarantee period, the Contractor
shall be responsible for taking water supply periodically analyze and
check the quality of water.

(4) The Contractor shall provide a competent representative to assemble,

install and interconnect equipment for chemical treatment. The
representative shall be from or recommended by the manufacturer of
equipment. The representative shall also perform the running and testing
of the plant, to place it in operation.
(5) Methods of chemical feeding system shall be as follows :-
 Corrosion and Scale Protection
- For Condenser Water
The chemical feeding system shall include chemical tank for 15-
day operation, mixer and metering pump. The metering pump
shall be adjustable flow and controlled by timer.
- For chilled water
The chemical feeding system shall be of the bypass diffusion type.
 Biocide Protection
The chemical feeding system for condenser water shall be of the
bypass diffusion type or metering pump. Shock feeding shall be
applied occasionally during guarantee period according to the water
expert's recommendation.
4.15.2.2 Automatic Bleed-Off Control
The bleed-off system shall operate automatically by weatherproof control
valve, which is commanded by temperature-compensated conductivity cell.
The indicator controller shall be of the industrial type suitable for the required
function. The control voltage shall be of low voltage. Accumulative type water
meter shall also be provided.
4.15.2.3 Cooling Tower Make-up Control
(1) Softeners
 The softener shall treat raw water with a total hardness of about 200
PPM and reduce to not over 10 PPM with a pressure drop not over 70
kPa. (10 PSI.) The continuous treating rate capacity of the softener
shall be at least as indicated on the Drawings.
 The softener shall consist of cylindrical mild steel tank with inside
and outside epoxy coated with a design pressure not less than 700
kPa. (100 PSI.). The tank shall contain strong action exchange resin for
catching calcium and magnesium. When a certain volume of raw
water has been treated the softener shall be automatically

regenerated by brine solution (sodium chloride). There shall be one

standby unit and shall be automatically interchanged with the duty
unit in every regeneration cycle without any interruption of soft water
supply to the cooling towers.
 The automatic regeneration control shall be with either adjustable
timer or adjustable aqua-sensor control. The unit shall be fully
automatic with necessary accessories motorized/solenoid valves,
sight glass, pressure gauges etc.
(2) Brine Tank
The brine tank shall be matched with the softener. It shall be made of
fiberglass-reinforced polyester or polyethylene. The valves, mixer and other
necessary accessories shall be made of stainless steel if applicable in order
to withstand brine solution.
(3) The make-up water control for cooling tower shall operate automatically
by mechanical float valve. The valve shall be rugged and heavy duty. The
floating ball shall be made of bronze.
(4) All necessary valves and accessories shall be provided as recommended
by cooling tower manufacturer but not less than that indicated on the
Drawings.
4.15.2.4 Ozone system for cooling tower water treatment
(1) Ozone system
 The Contractor shall provide complete corrosion and scale protection
and algae growth protection by Ozone system for condenser water
system. The calculation of Dissolved Ozone, Residual Ozone,
installation drawings, technical bulletins, and dosing program shall be
submitted for approval.
 Ozone system shall treatment condenser water to be suitable condition
for cooling tower as below specification :-
- PH. Value 6.5 - 8.0
- Electric Conductivity (uohm/cm) Less than 300
- Total Hardness (ppm as CaC03) Less than 200
- Total Iron (ppm as Fe) Less than 1.0
- M-Alkalinity (ppm as CaC03) Less than 100
- Chloride Ion (ppm as Cl) Less than 200
- Sulfate Ion (ppm as S04) Less than 200

 The Ozone system shall be consist of Ozone tube, Ozone chamber,

Ozone generator, Programmable logic control (PLC) and manufacturer
accessories standard.
 Ozone tube shall be corona discharge with high voltage. The Ozone
chamber shall be made of stainless steel or manufacturer’s standard.
 Ozone generator shall be built-in programmable logic control (PLC)
which able to control and organize all correctly function system.
 The Ozone system shall provide real time monitoring and alarm
system with historical event and record memory. The monitoring
system shall be of at least automatically show as the following
description:-
- No input water
- No ventilation fan current
- Low % of Oxygen gas concentration (<60%)
- No converter current
- Arc current occur
- Low voltage or unbalance voltage occur
- Door Opening during normal operation
- Ozone gas leakage occur
- Warning low water level
 Ozone generator shall be provided protection system as followings:-
- Phase loss protection
- Over current protection
- Under voltage protection
- Over voltage protection
- Converter failure detector
- Corona discharge failure detector
- High voltage transformer failure detector
- Oxygen failure detector
- Ozone gas leakage detector
- Door locked protection
- Water loss protection
- Manual emergency machine off running switch
- Ventilation system failure

 Ozone generator supply shall perform continuously at least 20 hours

/day and enough to get the value of ozone gas output as per
calculation and shall create more than 80% purity of oxygen at
actual operation.
 Ozone mixing pump, ozone-water mixing is considered to be particularly
designed and erected for ozone-water mixing. Performance of mixing
ozone into water must be more than 70% without the additional of
venturi injector and static mixer.
 Ozone gas must not be leaked in ozone mixing system when being
performed. The ozone gas leakage detector shall be able to sense
and stop ozone gas leakage when leakage gas greater than 0.1 ppm.
 Reversed water protection, installed for protecting water flowing to
ozone chamber must be closed loop which outside air cannot be
sucked to ozone mixing system.
 Pump protection shall be dry electrical contact control signal which
able to cut-off automatically, if no water flows in its pipe line.
 Materials connected to machine output such as piping and fittings
shall be UPVC or Stainless steel.
 Valves and other parts which contact to ozone shall be Stainless
steel, Teflon or UPVC.
4.15.3 Execution
(1) Install control system and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer’s
recommendations requirement or Employer’s Representative and
indicated on drawing.
(2) Complete accessories and related equipment in accordance with the
drawings
(3) Water sampling and testing shall provide every 3 months for along
warranty period of 2 years after completed of installation.
END OF SECTION


4.16.1 General
(1) This general specification and requirements describes all electrical
equipment and installations including connections there for the
aforementioned systems.
(2) All items of a similar nature shall be products of one manufacturer.
(3) Unless items are factory-finished, one prime coat shall be provided on all
raceways, hanger assemblies, equipment and accessories furnished under
this section. Prime coating on steel and iron shall be synthetic red lead,
or other materials as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
(4) Scratches in factory-finished surfaces shall be touched up to match
the original. Finished coat colors shall be defined by the Employer’s
Representative.
(1) The electrical and control works shall comply with the following codes
and standards.
 IEC 60034-1 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 1: Rating
and performance
 IEC 60034-12 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 12:
Starting performance of single-speed three-
phase cage induction motors
 IEC 60335-2-104 : Household and similar electrical appliances
- Safety - Part 2-104: Particular requirements
for appliances to recover and/or recycle
refrigerant from air conditioning and
refrigeration equipment
 IEC 60364-1 Edition 4.0 : Electrical installations of buildings - Part 1:
to the standards and regulations of PEA and National Electrical Code
(NEC).

4.16.1.3 Submittals
The contraction shall submit electrical and control works performance
selection, catalog, material lasts and technical data request for approval
before installation.
4.161.5 Warranty
All parts of electrical and control works shall be guaranteed by the contralto
and/or by the manufacturer for as lest two year after handover.
4.16.2 Material
the Drawings. The Contractor shall connect the cable from the indicated
location to the isolator or circuit breaker in the panels. The connections
and installation thereof shall form a part of the Contract.
4.16.2.2 Component
(1) Earthing or grounding system
 The equipment grounding system shall be designed and installed
such that all metallic structures, raised floor structures, enclosures,
raceway, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames,
portable equipment, and other conductive items in close proximity with
electrical circuits continuously operating shall be at ground potential.
 The equipment grounding system shall provide a low impedance
path for possible ground fault currents. The system shall consist of a
separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each
feeder and each branch circuit. Grounding conductor and neutral
conductor shall be installed separately. Each electrical expansion

fitting shall be provided with an external flexible copper ground strap

securely bonded on each end of the fitting. The required equipment
grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC Table
250-95, or approved equivalent.
 Unless otherwise specified, the grounding connectors shall be of a
type specifically manufactured for grounding purposes, made of
copper alloy and assembled with high strength silicon bronze
hardware. Where grounding or bonding conductors are connected to
structural cables, the connections shall be made with mechanical
devices, and welded connections shall not be made at these points.
All mechanical connections shall be completely encapsulated in
non-hardening, conductive epoxy. The epoxy shall be applicable for
wet locations or for ambient temperatures of 10 - 55C. Jumper
material shall be copper wire. Copper straps shall be soft copper.
 Grounding of all equipment shall be done by means of separate
green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder or
each branch circuit.
 This provision covers the design and construction of motor control
center of floor or wall mounting type.
 Ratings of Equipment in Motor Control Center
If the ratings of the equipment in the motor control center are not
specified on the Drawings and in these Specifications, they shall be
provided and complied with NEMA, ANSI, IEC, TISI or VDE standard
and PEA regulation.
 The ratings of the equipment shall be as follows :-
- System Wiring : 3-Phase, 4-Wire (Solid grounded- neutral)
- Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
- Rated Current : Shall be submitted by theContractor
- Rated Short Time : Shall be submitted by the Contractor
 The Construction of Motor Control Center
- Motor control center shall consist of one or more vertical sections
bolted together to form a rigid construction. The vertical section
shall be made of sheet steel (minimum thickness of 1.6 mm.).
Each vertical section shall consist of four compartments, via.
busbar, cable, terminal and control unit compartment, and each

compartment shall be separated by sheet steel barrier.

- Each control unit compartment shall be the combination of
starter, circuit breaker and other accessories for each motor. The
unit shall be completely enclosed and isolated from all other
units. Unit side plates shall be permanently attached so much so
that can not be accidentally discarded. Each unit shall have a
single door mounted on removable pin hinges. Each door shall be
provided with a removable panel suitable for mounting push
button, select or switches and pilot lamp. The door of each
control unit shall be interlocked so that it cannot be opened
while the circuit breaker is in "ON" position.
- Efficient vent opening shall be provided on the panel. The
opening shall be screened so as to be insect-proof.
- Each panel shall undergo a treatment of degreasing and derusting
by electro-galvanized or other equivalent method for anti-rust and
shall be coated by an oven-baked enamel paint finished.
- All doors shall be provided with dust-protection gaskets of
neoprene or any other approved materials, positively retained in a
rebate. All doors shall be equipped with locks operated by keys.
- Plastic nameplate with engraved letters of at least 3 mm. thick
shall be placed at ever circuit breaker and starter indicating their
uses.
 Circuit Breakers
- All circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA, or JIS or IEC standard
and shall be manually operated, trip-free.
- Main circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following
protection devices.
 Over current and short circuit protection
 Phase sequence protection
 Over and under voltage protection
 Time delay relay
- The Contractor shall submit the rated current and rated breaking
capacities.
 Motor Starters
- Motor starters shall comply with NEMA, IEC or JIS standard.
- Each high voltage starter shall be of an air break type and

provided with thermal trip unit (one on each phase). The 3.3 kV
starter shall be of vacuum or SF6 with over-current protection
unit. In case of intervention of the above trip units, an auxiliary
contact shall cut the starter coil off and give an alarm signal.
- The thermal or over-current trip units shall be hand reset.
- At least 2 normally open and 2 normally closed free contacts for
contacts shall be wired to the terminal blocks for remote
indicator.
- The starter contacts shall be able to interrupt a current equal to
- Automatic direct-on-line starters are allowable for various motor
sizes up to 22 kW (30 HP) and closed circuit transition voltage
starter shall be used for those over 22 kW (30 HP).
- Y-D starter shall be used for motor bigger than 3.7 kW (5 HP) D.O.L.
starter can be used for motor size up to 3.7 kW (5 HP)
 Measuring Instrument and Current Transformer
- All measuring instruments and current transformers shall comply
with IEC or ANSI or JIS standards.
- All metering shall be the flush-mounted type with a dimension
approximately 96 x 96 mm. accuracy class 1.5. The overload
capacity is 1.2 times of the normal continuous load, except for
motor circuit where the overload capacity of ammeter shall be 2
times the normal continuous load. The voltmeters shall be
provided with selector switch.
- Current transformers shall be the single phase insulated type and
can withstand a continuous overload of 20%. The accuracy class
of the transformer shall be class 1 for metering winding and class
3 for instrument winding. The insulation of the current transformer
shall be of class 600 volts.
 Busbar & Busbar Holder
- Busbar shall be of bare copper conductor (purity 98%) the size
and ampere city of busbar shall comply with DIN standard and
also shall comply with Authority regulation.
- Busbar spacing shall comply with Authority regulation.

- Busbar holder shall be of Fiberglass reinforced polyester or epoxy

stresses.
- Each busbar shall have color identification, conforming to the
color coding of the cable.
 Control Wiring
- Control wire in the motor control center shall be flexible
annealed copper wire 750V PVC insulated.
- The size of control wire shall be as follow :-
 4 mm2 for current circuit
 2.5 mm2 for voltage circuit
 1.5 mm2 for control circuit
 1.0 mm2 for ground wire
- All control wiring shall be run in cable trunk or flexible conduit
and no connecting.
- Wire marker shall be applied at both ends of the control wiring.
(3) Motors
 All motors shall conform to the latest ANSI or IEC standards or
approved equivalent. They shall have ample margin on their rating
for the required duty with due allowance for ambient temperature.
All motors shall be induction type suitable for 50 Hz. Motors shall be
of totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage screen-protect drip-proof
type. High starting torque motors and low speed machines shall be
started by reduced voltage starters.
 The rated kW shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power required.
 Control devices shall be provided for all motors. Single-or double-
pole snap switches, specifically designed for alternating current
operation only, may be used as manual controllers for single-phase
motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the
switch rating. Automatic control devices such as thermostats may
control the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the
devices used are designed for that purpose and have such a rating.
Otherwise, magnetic starters shall be used, with the automatic
control device actuating the control circuit.
 Overload protection shall be provided with running-over current
(overload) protection in accordance with the NEC. The overload

protection device shall be provided either integrally with the motor

or controller, or shall be mounted in separate enclosure. Unless
otherwise specified, the protective device shall be of the manually
reset type.
(4) Safety Switch
 Safety switches shall be installed as indicated on the drawings or as
required. The switches shall be either Fused Safety Switches (FSS) or
Non-Fused Safety Switches (NFSS) as shown on the Drawings or as
required.
 Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle
and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box. Padlocking
provisions shall be provided in the OFF position with at least three
padlocks. Switches shall be horse power rated for 380/220V as
required. Lugs shall be for copper conductors.
 Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure
with knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. Switches located
on the exterior of the building or in "wet" locations shall have NEMA
3R enclosures.
 The safety switches shall be securely mounted in accordance with
the NEC. The Contractor shall provide all mounting materials
including fuses it specified, in the FSS.
 All fuses for "fused load break switch" shall be of the high rupturing
capacity (HRC) type of voltage rating up to 500 volts. Current rating
shall be as specified on the Drawings.
(5) Outlet-boxes
 All outlet boxes for concealed work shall be of hot-dip galvanized or
electrical stamped steel.
 All wall boxes on exposed work shall be of aluminum- or cadmium-
plated cast-iron.
(6) Pull boxes
 Pull boxes shall be installed at all necessary points, whether
indicated on the Drawings or not, to prevent injury to the insulation
or other damage that might result from pulling resistance or for other
reasons related to improper installation. Pull box locations shall be
approved by the Employer’s Representative prior to installation. All
pull boxes shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel not less

than 1.6 mm. thick. Where boxes are used in connection with
exposed conduits, plain covers attached to the box with a suitable
number of countersunk flathead machine screws may be used.
 Where so indicated, certain pull boxes shall be provided with barriers.
These pull boxes shall have a single cover plate, and the pull boxes.
Each circuit in pull boxes shall be marked with a tag guide denoting
panels to which they connect Exposed pull boxes will not be
permitted in areas normally occupied or regularly used by staff
and/or visitors.
4.16.3 Execution
(1) Motor control centers.
 All motor control centers shall be installed in accordance with Authority
regulation, NEC standard and the manufacturer's recommendation.
 All metal parts and non-carrying current of motor control center shall
be grounded.
 All electrical installation shall comply with MEA regulation and NEC
standard.
(2) System Voltage and Color Codes
 The distribution system for the low-voltage shall be 380/220V, 3-phase,
4 -wire, 50 Hz.
 All busbars, cables, wires, terminals, etc. shall be color-coded as
specified in the TISI. Thus the colors for 380 V are as follows :
- Phase A black
- Phase B red
- Phase C blue
- Neutral white or gray
- Ground green or yellow-green
Large wires, cables and busbars shall be color-coded with suitable
paints.
(3) Low Voltage Cables
 All cables shall conform to the TISI Standard, No.11-2531. All
conductors of the insulated cables shall be copper wires.
 The rating or current carrying capacity of the cables shall comply with
the PEA regulation.

 The conductor size is to be determined by taking into consideration

the following factors:
- The rated load (permissible permanent overload being 30%)
- The limit voltage regulation of 3% for all types of loads.
- The effects of short-circuit current.
 The types of low tension cables to be installed shall be as follows :
- Type NYY for direct burial or exposed wiring, or cable trench.
- Type THW for running in conduit, cable tray, or wire way.
 No conductor shall be smaller than the 2.5 mm2 wire, except for the
control wiring. Wiring to switches shall not be considered as control
wiring.
 All conductors 6 mm2 or larger shall be stranded. In all lug
connections for main feeders, sub-feeders and branches made in
switchboards and panels, etc., copper solderless connectors having
either a 2-bolt cast-copper clamp or an indent compression
attachment shall be used.
 Branch taps from feeders shall be made in junction boxes or pull
boxes, with approved cast-copper alloy solderless connectors in a
high impact phenolic insulating cover, having at least two spring clip
fasteners.
 Splicing shall be allowed only in the proper junction box with an
approved method of insulation. No splice shall be made in
conductors for instrument circuits or control circuits.
 Termination and splices for conductors of 6 mm2 and larger shall be
of the pressure or bolted type. No splices shall be made in
conductors except at outlets or accessible junction boxes. Splices in
branch circuit wiring shall be made mechanically and electrically
secured with solderless connectors, and if insulated they shall be
rated 750 volts. If connectors are not of the insulated type. Splices
shall be rated 750 volts and insulated by taping so that the insulating
value is equal to that of the conductors being jointed. In splicing,
connectors shall be brought up securely on the conductors in a
workmanlike manner so that all conductors are equally engaged and
the insulation is not ruptured. No bare wires are to be exposed or
shall have "backed off" due to the application of pressure nor shall it
happen that the connector will loosen due to cycling or vibration.

 Immediately prior to the installation of each cable or cable group,

the raceway route to be followed shall be inspected and ascertained
to be completed in installation and free of all materials detrimental
to the cable or its placement. All cables assigned to a particular
conduit shall grouped. All cables shall be routed according to the
circuit schedule.
 The Contractor shall identify the ends of all power and control
conductors, circuits, and pull boxes. Each marker shall bear the circuit
schedule on the drawing.
(4) Cable Laying
 The cables are to be laid in conduits, in cable trays, underground or
in cable trenches.
- Conduits, All materials and workmanship shall conform to the PEA
regulation and as stipulated in these Specifications.
- Rigid steel conduits (RSC) and intermediate metal conduits (IMC)
shall be galvanized rigid steel with a minimum size of 12.7 mm.
(1/2”), rigid steel conduits and intermediate metal conduits shall
be installed for the following services and locations: service
entrance, underground (in contact with earth), in concrete, panel
feeders, for motor feeders.
- Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized steel and used
in all location not otherwise specified for rigid or flexible conduits
as specified on the Drawings.
 Flexible metal conduits shall be galvanized steel, and those located
in wet locations shall be of the liquid-tight type.
 A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall be used in connecting all
motors and vibrating equipment. The flexible metal conduits shall be
of the type approved for continuous grounding.
 Supports and connections for each conduit shall be completed prior
to the pull-in of any pulling line of conductor.
 Moisture pockets shall be eliminated from the conduits before
installation.
 Bends in conduits shall be made without reducing the internal diameter
of conduits. The use of pipe tees for bending will not be permitted.
The inside radius of bends shall not be less than six times the inside
diameter of the conduits. Conduit deformed or crushed in any way
shall be removed from the job site.

 The ends of all conduits shall be reamed to remove all rough edges
and burrs.
 Conduits shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads
on metallic conduits shall project through the wall of the box to
allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit, after which
the locknuts, both inside and outside, shall be tightened sufficiently
to bond the conduit securely to the box.
 Precautions shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt
or concrete in the conduits. Conduits in which water has
accumulated shall be thoroughly cleaned. If the cleaning is not
possible, the conduits shall be replaced.
 Junction boxes shall be sheet steel boxes, zinc or cadmium-coated,
and shall be utilized where required.
 Double locknuts shall be provided on all conduit terminations not
provided with threaded hubs and couplings. Locknuts shall be
designed to bond securely the conduit to the box when lightened
and shall not loosen through vibration.
(1) All motor control centers shall be not only tested at the manufactory but
also checked at the site for the follow performances:
 Insulation of all cables
 Operating and protecting of the equipment
Grounding
END OF SECTION


4.17.1 General
standards.
(1) NEC 300-21
(2) ASTM
(3) UL
(4) BS476
(5) AS1530
4.17.1.3 Submittals
installation.
4.17.1.5 Warranty

4.17.2 Materials
rating material, ad approved by the Employer’s Representative unless
4.17.2.2 Component
Laboratory Inc.
fir.
enough.

4.17.3 Installation
4.17.3.1 At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where:
END OF SECTION

4.18 PAINTING AND COLOR CODES

4.18.1 General
(1) The following clauses specify the material or paint system, preparation
and application requirements for painting of all equipment, housing,
vessels, containers, pipelines, pipe supports, and other structural
steelworks which are not protected by galvanizing or an approved
protective coating.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for any expense incurred for cleaning,
brushing and painting work.
(3) When surface cleaning, blasting and painting is done in the Contractor's
factory, such preparation and painting shall be done with the prior
consent of the Employer’s Representative. If necessary, the Contractor
shall arrange for presentation the Employer’s Representative for
inspection at his factory.
(4) All painting shall be completed before applying of pipe insulation and
commissioning.
anti-corrosive materials and/or painted according to these Specifications.
Representative.
(8) During the progress of the painting work, the Contractor shall avoid
spotting of the floors, walls, and other adjacent equipment. All spotting, if
any, shall be cleaned immediately. Any damages, which may result from
painting shall be under the Contractor's responsibility.
4.18.2 Surface Preparation and Cleaning
(1) Metal or ferrous Metal Surfaces
 Rust at welding joints and other defects shall be removed by
scraping. Wire brushes or sandpaper shall be used to clean the
loose rust and other foreign substances. Mordant solution such as
thinner, gas, turpentine shall be used to remove grease, oil or organic

coating. Then the surfaces shall be cleaned whitewater and

thoroughly dried or blow-dried.
 The application of prime coats, which follows shall adhere strictly to
 Old paint coats shall be removed by scraping before application of
new paint.
(2) Non-Ferrous Metal Surface
Non-ferrous metal surface shall be cleaned with sandpaper and
turpentine before prime coating. Wire-brushing or sand-blasting shall not
to be used.
(3) Zinc and Zinc-Annealed Surfaces
(4) Copper, Lead, Plastic and Brass Surfaces
Before the application of prime coats, the surface shall be cleaned with
sand paper, then proper solution shall be used to remove dust.
4.18.3 Brush or Spray Painting
(1) Each paint coat shall be left until completely dry before subsequent
applications.
(2) Painting can be classified into 2 coats :-
 Prime coat for rust prevention and/or adhesion of the finishing coats.
 Finishing coat for final appearance or for symbolizing the system codes.
Types of paint used shall depend on the material as well as on the
environment.
4.18.4 Paint System
(1) For Equipment
 All of the manufacturer's applied coating or painting surfaces of all
equipment such as pump, valve, and other accessories or fittings,
etc., which have been damaged, or have been applied with
inappropriate paint system for the services and environment of the
equipment, shall be corrected or removed and repainted at the
Contractor's expenses.
 The above requirements shall also be applied to all damaged
galvanized surfaces of the equipment and materials.
 Paint system for equipment, valves, etc. shall be of the same grade
of paint system specified for pipe work that those equipment, valves,

etc. are connected, except that the surface cleaning may be

mechanical wire brushing.
(2) For Vessel
Products vessel which are constructed of stainless steel material shall
have their surface polished internally and externally as specified under
other section. No painting is required on uninsulated stainless steel and
galvanized steel surface. However, for vessel externals of carbon steel
components shall have their surfaces treated and coated as specified
below for the carbon steel vessels.
 Uninsulated Vessel of Black Steel
- Exterior
Surface Preparation - Abrasive blasted to a Near white grade
SSPC-SP-10 (Sa 2 1/2)
Prime Coat - Zinc Ethyl Silicate Coating 3 mils (75 micron)
DFT
Second Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
Finish Coat - Polyurethane 2 mils (50 micron)DFT
- Interior
Surface Preparation - Same as exterior
Prime Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
Second Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
 Insulated Vessel of Galvanized Steel
- Exterior
Surface Preparation - Solvent cleaning and degreasing
Primer Coat - PVB Zinc chromate self etching primer or
wash primer 0.4 mil (10 microns) DFT
Second Coat - Chlorinated rubber based primer 3.4 mils
(2x40 microns) DFT
- Interior
Not required

(3) For Piping and Material Other Than Equipment Vessel

Type of Surface Normal Area Humid/Corrosive Area
st st
Black steel pipe, 1 coat: Read lead primer. 1 coat: Epoxy read lead
Black steel sheet, 2nd coat: Read lead primer. primer.
Switchboard, 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. nd
2 coat: Epoxy read lead
(a)
Panel 4th coat: Alkyd finishing paint. primer.
rd
3 coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
4th coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
Galvanized steel 1st coat: Wash primer. 1st coat: Wash primer.
pipe, Galvanized 2nd coat: Zinc chromate primer. 2nd coat: Epoxy read lead
steel sheet duct 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. primer.
work exposed to 4th coat: Alkyd finishing paint. rd
3 coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
view. If color 4th coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
(b)
coding is not
specified, bronze
color shall be
used for finishing
coat
PVC pipe, 1st coat: Wash primer. 1st coat: Wash primer.
Plastic pipe 2nd coat: chlorinate rubber 2nd coat: chlorinate rubber
(c) finishing paint. finishing paint.
3rd coat: chlorinate rubber 3rd coat: chlorinate rubber
Cast-iron pipe 1st coat: Coal tar Epoxy. 1st coat: Coal tar Epoxy.
inclusive of 2nd coat: Coal tar Epoxy. 2nd coat: Coal tar Epoxy.
(d)
underground
pipe

Type of Surface Normal Area Humid/Corrosive Area

st st
Copper tube, 1 coat: Wash primer. 1 coat: Wash primer.
Stainless steel 2nd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 2nd coat: Alkyd finishing paint.
(e) sheet, Aluminium 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint.
steel sheet, Light
alloy, Lead
Closed cell foam - -
plastic. Use color
(f) tape strips to
indicate color
codes.
Outdoor kitchen 1st coat: As recommend by
exhaust duct manufacturer.
nd
2 coat: As recommend by
(g)
manufacturer.
3 coat: Heat resistant 100oC
rd
alkyd finishing paint

Note: In case where there is a paint repair resulting from welding, cutting, drilling, polishing,
or threading, zinc rich primer shall be used prior to the application of finishing
paint.
4.18.5 Color Codes

(1) All pipes shall be color-coded.
(2) In the electrical system, color coding shall be only at the conduit clamps
and the cover of junction boxes.
(3) Strip sizes of color codes (for insulated pipes) and the letter size are as
follows :-
Pipe Size Width of Color Strip Letter Size
(mm.) (inch.) (mm.) (mm.)
20 - 32 (3/4”-1.1/4”) 200 12
40 - 50 (1.1/2”-2”) 200 20
65 - 150 (2.1/2”-6”) 300 30
200 – 250 (8”-10”) 300 65
300 and larger (12”) 500 100
(4) Location of Color codes, symbols and arrows indicating directions are as
follows:-
 Every 6-meter (20 ft.) internal of straight line pipe.
 Near all valves.
 Every change of direction and/or separation.
 Where pipes passing through walls or floors.

 Near service pipe.
4.18.6 Color Codes of Various Systems

(1) The identifications previously mentioned shall have colours as follows :-
Description Letters Code Colour ColourSymbol
Chilled water supply White CHS Green
Chilled water return White CHR Green
Chilled water reverse return White CHRR Green
Condenser water supply White CDS Orange
Condenser water return White CDR Orange
Conduit for electrical Blue - -
(2) The Employer’s Representative will make final selection of colors.
All uninsulated pipes shall be painted all over the pipe surface.
END OF SECTION

4.19 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM

4.19.1 GENERAL
4.19.1.1 SUMMARY
(1) Scope of Works
The air-conditioning system shall be an air-cooled VRF system, consisting
of outdoor condensing connected to units multiple fan coil units. Each
FCU shall have the capacity to cool its respective room independently of
the other units.
The system shall be easily extendable to allow the addition of future
indoor (FCU’s) units.
The system shall be capable of operating efficiently with 100 m. of
pipework between the condensing unit and fan coil unit and with a
minimum of 50 m. level difference (without oil traps) between the indoor
and condensing units.
The system shall be suitable for the installation of various types of fan
coil unit.
The system shall be completely provided with fully automatic
microprocessor control.
The refrigerant piping layout shown in the Drawings is indicative only.
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the optimal design and
layout of the refrigerant piping system and verifying that sufficient riser
ducts, wall and floor openings are provided.
The system shall be equipped with oil and recovery system to ensure stable
operation particularly where long refrigerant pipework runs are used. Oil traps
are not acceptable.
The cooling capacities of the fan coil units and condensing units as
indicated on the Drawings and Equipment Schedule are the minimum
cooling capacities required. Any increase in the cooling capacity of fan coil
and condensing units to cater for the minimum cooling requirement shall
be deemed to be included by the Sub-Contractor.
(2) Related Sections
23 01 80 Operation and Maintenance of Decentralized HVAC System
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HVAC
23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation

23 21 29 Automatic Condensate Pump Units

23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
4.19.1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
 ISO9001 : 2015
 ISO14001 : 2004
 RoHS standard
 EUROVENT, OM-15-2016
4.19.1.3 DEFINITIONS
-
4.19.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
 Qualifications
 Certifications
 Field Samples
4.19.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
(1) Packing and Shipping
 All material and goods shall be delivered to the site in new
condition, properly packed and protected against damage due to
handling, adverse weather or other circumstances, and be kept in
packing case or under protective covering until required for use.
(2) Acceptance at Site
 Any items suffering damage in transit or on site shall be rejected and
replaced without extra cost and time to the Sub-Contract.
(3) Storage and Protection
 Deliver and store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging
bearing the brand name and manufacturer’s identification until ready
for installation.
 Repair or replace damaged products before completion of project.
 Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds, stores or other means
to protect the apparatus, equipment and materials from the weather,
water damage, corrosion and to prevent dirt, grit, plaster or other
foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or
equipment.

4.19.1.6 WARRANTIES
(1) 1 year for any part of the air conditioner and accessories. During this 1-
year warranty, the contractor shall provide, free of charge, all labor and
related service costs to replace the defective part.
(2) 5 years for compressor
4.19.1.7 MAINTENANCES
Refer to section 23 01 80 - Operation and Maintenance of Decentralized HVAC
Equipment.
4.19.2 PRODUCTS
4.19.2.1 MATERIALS
-
4.19.2.2 EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
(1) Casing
 Casings shall be constructed or folded and reinforced zinc anneal
sheet or a structural steel frame clad in zinc anneal sheet to support
all items of equipment, and shall be treated for prevention of
corrosion. Casings for outdoor installation shall be of weather proof
finish with galvanized or special coating finish with zinc chromate and
a finish coat.
 Casings for housing coils and supply air fan shall be internally lined
with closed cell foam, polyurethane foam, fiberglass or mineral wool
insulation in rigid form faced with scrim.
 Casings for housing compressors shall be acoustically treated to
achieve the specified acoustic level.
 Removal panels shall be provided for access to all internal
components to facilitate convenient installation and maintenance.
(2) Air-Cooled Condensing Units
 Each condensing unit shall be specifically designed for connected to
direct expansion fan coil units. The refrigerant used shall be R410a or
another approved CFC free refrigerant.
 The air cooled condensing units shall be supplied and installed
generally as shown on the drawings. The condensing units shall be
complete with compressors, fans, condenser coils, motors and
controls system.

 The air cooled condensing unit shall provide the minimum cooling
capacities as detailed in the Drawings and Equipment Schedule.
 The air cooled condensing unit shall be fitted with hermetic scroll or
twin rotary compressors. The compressors shall be driven by an electric
motor designed for three phases, 50 cycle operation. Compressor
speed shall be controlled by an inverter. The controlling method
shall be suction / discharge control with fuzzy logic or PI control
capable of varying the load from 15% to 130% of design capacity.
 The condensing unit shall contain the condenser coils within the
same housing as the compressors. The condenser coils shall be of
the coiled tube type.
 The condenser fans shall be fabricated from ABS plastic or aluminium
alloy with a corrosion resistant coating and non-corrodible blind
screens shall be fitted in front of the fans. The fan motors shall be
direct drive and have a totally enclosed fan cooled weather-proof
casing.
 COP for each system shall be at least 3.4 (for vertical discharge) and
3.3 (for horizontal discharge) with conditions indoor entering air
temperature at 27°C DB, 19°C WB (80.6oF DB, 66.2oF WB), outdoor
temperature 35oC DB (95 oF DB).
 The refrigerant circuits shall be completely factory assembled, tested,
dehydrated and charged with refrigerant.
 The noise level of the air cooled condensing unit shall not exceed
65 dBA at 1.5 m. from unit.
(3) Fan Coil Units
 The fan coil units shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown on
the accompanying drawings. Each fan coil unit shall be complete with
fans, motors, filters, Expansion valve, controls and all necessary
accessories.
 Fans shall be of the double inlet, double width type with centrifugal
forward curved blades of ABS plastic or aluminium construction.
Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced for true
operation. Fans shall be direct drive by two-bearing. Multi speed
motor with nominal speed not exceeding 1000 rpm.
 Fractional horsepower motors shall be permanent split capacitor
type or similar approved by the engineer. Motors shall be equipped

with sleeve bearings with oilers. Fans and motors shall be mounted
on galvanized steel fan deck with the assembly easily removable
from the basic unit.
 Each fan coil unit shall be internally lined with not less than 15 mm.
thick poly urethane foam or 15 mm. thick, 32 kg/m³ density fiber-
glass with neoprene or similar facing. Where fan coil units are found
to be unduly noisy, these shall be replaced at the instruction of the
Employer’s representative. Prior to placing of order for the units, the
Sub-Contractor shall submit sound power level ratings to the
engineer for approval.
 The noise level of fan coil unit shall not exceed 45 dBA at 1.5 m
from the unit.
(4) Compressors
Compressors of fully hermetic scroll type or twin rotary type with suction
gas cooled motors and shall be complete with all necessary accessories
and controls for safe and efficient operation and shall include:
 Starters complying with the requirements of power supply authorities.
 High refrigerant pressure safety cutout.
 Low refrigerant pressure safety cutout.
 Thermal overload and fuse on all motors (this requirement shall also
be applicable for all fan motors).
 Positive lubrication.
 Service valves at suction and discharge of each compressor.
 Liquid moisture indicator sight glass.
 Compressor crankcase heaters.
 Individual compressor fault indication
(5) Evaporator Coils
 The coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tube complete
with mechanically bonded aluminium fins.
 The coils shall be suitable for the design operating pressure and shall
be factory tested to 1.5 times the working pressure.
 Heavy gauge insulated galvanised drip trays shall be provided under
each evaporator coil.

(6) Supply Air Fans

 Supply air fans shall be of centrifugal type and shall be adequately
rated to provide the air quantities specified.
 Supply air fans shall be full double width, double inlet, forward
curved, multi-blade fans statically and dynamically balanced. Fan
wheels shall be mounted on an adequately size shafts with 200,000
hours bearing.
 Fans shall be direct drive type with field adjustable speed tap or
driven by a vee belt drive correctly aligned with pulleys capable for
replacement as necessary to achieve the air quantities specified.
 The exact fan speed and fan motor size shall be determined by Sub-
Contractor having regard to the resistance of all elements of the air
conditioning systems to be provided and installed, including
ductwork and fittings with a 20% safety factor for motor sizing.
(7) Air Cooled Condensers
 Air cooled condensers shall be constructed with copper tubes and
aluminium fins. Fans shall be of propeller type.
 Where hostile condensing units are to be installed in a environment
such as close to the sea.
 The coil fins shall be copper or chemically coated to resist corrosion.
 Condensers shall be provided with spring loaded pressure relief valve
and line valves.
 Condensers shall be designed suitable for the refrigerant working
pressure
(8) Refrigerant Piping
 The refrigerant shall be copper pipe.
 The system shall be totally free from leaks, moisture or installation
debris.
 During installation dry, oxygen-free nitrogen (OFN) shall be used to
purge during brazing.
 The ends of refrigerant piping shall be covered when stored or when
being passed through insulation or walls. This is done either using
the caps supplied by the pipe manufacturers or by pinching the pipe
and soldering or taping the pinched end. Covering prevents

insulation, dirt, water, insects or other debris entering the system

during construction.
 The ends of cut piping shall be cleaned and reamed out to the
original internal diameter before brazing. Hacksaws shall not be used
to cut pipework.
 When all the site joints have been made, before connecting to the
system components, high pressure nitrogen (OFN) shall be used to
flush through the system to remove oxidation bubbles formed inside
the pipework. It also removes moisture and debris and it can be used
to make sure no liquid and gas-pipes have been incorrectly
connected.
 The number of joints shall be kept to a minimum and should
preferably be brazed. Flare joints are prone to leakage and their use
should be minimized. Provision shall be made for the maintenance
technicians to be able to conduct thorough leak testing, therefore
joints in void spaces should be avoided where possible.
 Refrigerant may need to be added to enable longer pipe runs.
The amount differs depending upon the manufacturer and (in all
cases) the length of the longest liquid line. The charge should be
added with accurate scales within 100 grams of the calculated
charge.
 In all refrigeration applications, tight bends (elbows) are not
recommended; elbows tend to have high frictional losses. Swept
bends or, best of all, hand formed bends shall be used. (A hand
formed bend is a trade term for a bend made in the copper pipe
using a pipe bending tool). When hand bending, the correct spring or
mandrel shall be used to prevent necking or barreling.
(9) Controls
 Each condensing unit shall be equipped with a suitable
microprocessor controller enabling it to moderate the capacity from
15% to 130% of the nominal compressor capacity without the use of
hot gas by-pass for capacity control.
 In the event of sudden power failure, the auto start mechanism saves
the current A/C setting. It will restore the A/C to its previous setting
when power returns.

 A wall mounted LCD remote control unit shall be supplied for each
fan coil unit, this will allow control of temperature, fan speed and
operational mode.
 This controller shall be self diagnostic to aid maintenance.
4.19.2.3 ACCESSORIES
4.19.2.3.1 Optional Condensate Drain Pump
The condensate drain pump shall be made from plastic. The pump shall be
capable to lift the water up to 500mm. minimum. The pump shall be
automatically operated by the level switch.
4.19.2.3.2 Air Filter
Ceiling suspended type FCUs shall be complete with washable poly
propylene filters. All other types of FCUs shall have filters as shown on the
design drawings.
4.19.3 EXECUTION
4.19.3.1 PREPARATION
(1) Site Preparation
 Prepare enough installation area for equipment. If the preparation is
the responsibility of another installer, notify the Owner’s representative
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
 Prepare base construction for condensing unit installation.
(2) Protection
 Protect installed products until completion of project.
4.19.3.2 INSTALLATIONS
(1) Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and approved
submittals.
 Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are
obtained.
4.19.3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
-

4.19.3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(1) Pre-functional Inspection
 Condensing units
- Visual inspection of the condensing unit, outer appearance, inner part
and etc.
- Check condensing unit installation space to prevent short circuit air
flow
- Check service space
 Fan coil units
- Visual inspection of the fan coil unit, outer appearance, inner part
and etc.
- Check service space
- Check combination ratio
- Check center of gravity and horizontal installation of the fan coil
units.
 Refrigerant Piping
- Check piping size
- Check opening status both low and high-pressure service valve
- Check piping length and height difference
- Check refrigerant branch joints and pipe connections
- Check additional refrigerant quantity, record additional refrigerant
amounts.
 Drain Piping
- Check the slope of drain pipe
- Do the drain test
- Check drain pipe insulation
(2) Tests and Commissioning
 Site Acceptance Test
- Provide testing and balancing system to ensure the system operate in
proper conditions.
- Provide start up report with test data comparing with standard
condition.
 Refrigerant Piping
Pressure testing shall be carried out in two parts: one, an aural
inspection technique used during installation and two, the structured

and recorded method carried out as part of commissioning (which

shall be issued for review by the clients representative).
The aural inspection consists of listening to the fan coil units as the
transportation flare caps are removed. Most indoor coils are charged
with nitrogen during manufacture. If they have lost gas pressure in
transit and there is no aural indication when the flared cap is
removed, this normally indicates a leak or at least prompts further
investigation.
The formal pressure test involves a multiple stage pressure test.
Initially nitrogen shall fed into the liquid and gas lines with all the
solenoid and expansion and capillary valves open. The actual pressures
used in testing are manufacturer-, product- and/or site-dependent.
Typical values are as follows:
- Stage 1 - 500 kPa for 2 to 3 minutes to indicate major leaks.
- Stage 2 - 1,500 kPa for 10 minutes to indicate minor leaks
- Stage 3 - 4,150 kPa for 24 hours to indicate pipe porosity or small
flare joint leaks.
Vacumm drying after successful pressure testing - triple evacuation
and charging shall be used, to make sure that all the oxygen and
moisture is removed from the system pipework. First the pipework
shall be evacuated to -755 mmhg for 1 to 2 hours and the vacuum
shall be broken with oxygen-free dry nitrogen, this process shall be
then repeated. After a third evacuation, refrigerant shall be used in
place of nitrogen to break the vacuum.
4.19.3.5 DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING
Provide training for operation and troubleshooting to end user after
completing of test.
END OF SECTION

4.20 STANDARD FIELD TESTS

4.20.1 General
4.20.1.1 All water pipes shall be cleaning & flushing with clear water before testing.
4.20.1.2 All air ducts shall be cleaning inside before testing.
4.20.1.3 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Employer’s Representative.
The Contractor shall give timely notice and furnish the Employer’s
Representative the required certificates of testing for review. The cost of all
tests including the supply of instruments shall be paid by the Contractor.
4.20.1.4 Work which fails to meet the requirements of any test or does not meet the
requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective and
shall be promptly corrected or removed from the site.
4.20.1.5 Test instruments shall be tested for accuracy by an approved laboratory or by
the manufacturer. Instruments and appliances required for tests shall be
furnished by the Contractor. If gauges, thermometers, etc. which are to be left
permanently installed are used for the tests, they shall not be installed until
just prior to the tests to avoid possible changes in calibration.
4.20.1.6 The Contractor shall submit the star-up and test report form to the
Employer’s Representative for approval before starting-up and testing each
system.
4.20.2 Testing for Equipment

operate either the required performance. Report forms to contain following
minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for each Item
mentioned below:
4.20.2.1 Water Chillers
(1) Date and time of test.
(2) Chiller make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Number of pumps running.
(4) Flow rates for chilled water.
(5) Temperatures of chilled water at inlet and exit of pumps, chillers, etc.
(6) Pressures of chilled water at inlet and exit of pumps, chillers, etc.
(7) Flow rates for condenser water.
(8) Temperatures, as above.

(9) Pressures, as above.

(10) Compressor motor data.
(11) Compressor rpm.
(12) Suction and hot gas temperatures.
(13) Suction and hot gas pressure.
(14) High pressure cutout.
(15) Condensing temperature.
(16) Evaporator temperature, pressure drop.
(17) Flow switch function.
(18) Chiller automatic control sequencing, including the interlocking of all the
chillers.
4.20.2.2 Cooling Towers
(2) Ambient conditions at time of test.
(3) Cooling tower make, type, name and serial number.
(4) Number of pumps running.
(5) Flow rates for condenser cooling water.
(6) Temperatures of condenser water at inlet and exit of pumps, cooling
towers, etc.
(7) Pressures of condenser water at inlet and exit of pumps, cooling towers
etc.
(8) Number of fans working in cooling towers.
(9) Amount of bleed water added during the test period.
(10) Automatic bleed-off control sequencing.
(11) Make-up water control sequencing.
4.20.2.3 Pumps
(2) Ambient conditions at time of test.
(3) Pump make, type, name and serial number.
(4) Pump rpm.
(5) Pump amperage (Individual Operation).
(6) Pump amperage (Multiple Operation).
(7) Rated motor amperage, starter relay number and amperage rating.
(8) Pump inlet pressure (Individual Operation).
(9) Pump inlet pressure (Multiple Operation).
(10) Pump outlet pressure (Individual Operation).

(11) Pump outlet pressure (Multiple Operation).

(12) Chilled water flow rate GPM (Multiple Operation).
(13) Condenser cooling water flow rate GPM (Multiple Operation).
(14) Water temperatures.
(15) Water flow rate GPM.
4.20.2.4 Air Handling Units and Fan Coil Units
(2) Air handling unit and fan coil unit make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Fan rpm.
(4) Pressure drop across filter
(5) Fan discharge static pressure
(6) Fan motor amperage
(7) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating.
(8) Air Recirculation CFM
(9) Outside air CFM
(10) Outside conditions (DB and WB)
(11) Return air conditions (DB and WB)
(12) Entering coil conditions(mixing) (DB and WB)
(13) Leaving coil conditions (DB and WB)
During test run, the air filters of testing sets shall be used.
4.20.2.5 Exhaust Fans
(1) Date and time of test
(2) Fan make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Fan rpm
(4) Fan discharge static pressure
(5) Fan motor amperage
(6) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating
(7) Exhaust air CFM
4.20.3 Testing for Pipe Works

4.20.3.1 Water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than specified or 1 ½
times the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point
in the system. Care shall be taken to avoid putting excessive pressure on
safety devices, etc. These delicate control mechanisms shall be removed
during the tests to prevent shock damage. The system shall be tested when
water temperatures and average ambient temperatures are approximately

equal and constant. Test pressure shall be maintained for not less than 30
minutes without an appreciable drop after the force pump has been
disconnected.
4.20.3.2 Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the construction.
4.20.3.3 Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks in
welded joints shall be cut out and rewelded. Caulking of leaks will not be
permitted.
4.20.3.4 After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system to
be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and
mud have been removed before introducing chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or hypochlorite. The
chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 PPM. and shall
be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treated water
shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all nonspore-forming
bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall
be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the
extreme end of the system of the retention period. All valves in the system
being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact
period.
4.20.3.5 The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine
is reduced to less than 0.2 PPM. During the flushing period all valves and
faucets shall be turned on and off several times.
4.20.4 Testing for Duct Work

4.20.4.1 High pressure blower with control damper shall be used for test apparatus. Air
for testing shall be introduced into the system through a suitable filter and dryer
to exclude all impurities.
4.20.4.2 A flow measuring device shall be of an orifice assembly consisting of straightening
vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located
pressure taps. Each orifice assembly is accurately calibrated with its own
calibration curve, which shall also be submitted to the Employer’s Representative
for approval. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers.

4.20.5 Testing for Electrical Works

4.20.5.1 The electrical installation shall be functionally tested and checked to insure
that all equipment, devices and wiring have been properly installed and will
operate as intended.
4.20.5.2 The conduit system shall be checked to ensure that it has been installed for
safe and reliable operation. Special attention shall be given to ensure NEC or
approved equivalent requirements are satisfied in weatherproof enclosures,
sealed location and sealed pouring. Conduit drawings, supports, fittings covers,
etc. shall be checked.
4.20.5.3 Insulation resistance tests shall be performed using a 500-volt DC megger on
the 400-volt system. Insulation resistance shall not be less than one mega-
ohm per 1,000-volt rating.
4.20.5.4 All electrical tests of equipment shall be recorded. A copy of the record shall
be furnished to the Employer’s Representative.
4.20.5.5 Power cables, 600-volt rated shall be meggered phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground before the equipment is connected and phase-to-ground after the
equipment is connected. All connections are taped with color code tape.
4.20.5.6 All motor control centers equipment shall be visually inspected, and where
possible, test-operated to ensure that all components have been furnished
and installed and will operate in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4.20.5.7 The tests shall be for fuses, meters, current transformers, potential
transformer, overload relays, wiring, connections for power, control, grounding,
etc.
4.20.5.8 The motor control center buses shall be meggered phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground. Each starter and contactor shall be test-operated.
4.20.5.9 The actual running current of the motor shall be checked against the
nameplate current to insure that the motor is not overloaded.
4.20.5.10 Each adjustable circuit breaker shall be set in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Each motor shall be meggered phase-to-ground.
4.20.5.11 Each motor shall be checked for proper lubrication, shaft alignment, electrical
connections, ground connection, control circuit operation, space heater, drain
operation, etc. Each motor shall be "bumped" to verify proper rotation.

4.20.5.12 Ground resistance shall be checked, using Megger Ground Resistance Test
Instrument. The maximum resistance to grounding shall be 2 ohms.
4.20.6 Testing for Automatic Control System
4.20.6.1 The Contractor shall require the control supplier to supervise and commission
the control system. The testing for the automatic control system include the
following service :-
(1) Prior to commencement of work on site:-
Advise on the operation of the control system, identification and correct
positioning of control equipment and wiring connections.
(2) During the progress of the site work:-
Advise on the correct location and installation of controls and correct
wiring on controls. Particular attention shall be paid to the mounting of
actuators on valves, dampers, and the correct linkages form actuators to
valves and dampers. The work shall be carried out on the basis of regular
visits throughout the Contract period.
(3) When the installation is completed :-
Commission the complete control system supplied under this section of
these Specifications to provide detailed operation and performance
figures.
4.20.6.2 Provide all normal servicing and maintenance during the defects liability
period for all equipment provided under this Contract. In addition the following
tests shall be carried out:-
(1) Insulation resistance
(2) Earthing continuity
(3) Polarity
(4) Continuity
(5) Phase proving tests to ensure that phases are connected in the specified
manner and correct sequence throughout.
(6) Earth fault loop inspection test.
4.20.6.3 Final commissioning of control systems after the Employer’s Representative
approval of the test records the systems shall be finally commissioned.
END OF SECTION


SECTION 5: ESCALATORS AND LIFTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
5.1.1 Operational Requirements
5.1.1.1 The lifts and escalators shall be provided in a manner consistent with the
achievement of the overall Project objectives and the system level
performance requirements described in the Employer’s Requirements Part 1 -
General Scope and Service Requirements.
5.1.1.2 The lifts and escalators shall be designed and constructed to comply with the
functional and performance requirements relevant to the scope of work
described in the Employer’s Requirements Part 1 - General Scope and Service
Requirements as specified in this Particular Specification.
5.1.1.3 Design and construction of the lifts and escalators shall incorporate state of
the art technology and comply with internationally recognised standards.
5.1.1.4 Primary design objectives shall be safe and efficient operations in elevated
monorail line operating conditions and the climatic conditions prevailing in
Bangkok.
5.1.2 Lifts and Escalators Specification

5.1.2.1 This Particular Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Conditions of
Contract, the Employer’s Requirements Part 1 - General Scope and Service
Requirements, the Employer’s Requirements Part 2 - General Specification and
any other documents forming part of the Contract.
5.1.2.2 In the event of any conflict between the Contract documents, the order of
precedence shall be as follows:
(1) Conditions of Contract;
(2) Employer’s Requirements Part 1 - General Scope and Service
Requirements;
(3) Employer’s Requirements Part 2 - General Specification;
(4) Employer’s Requirements Part 3 - Particular Specification(s); and
(5) Contractor’s Proposal.
5.1.2.3 Reference to the Conditions of Contract, the General Scope and Service
Requirements, the General Specification, this Particular Specification and other

Particular Specifications shall be interpreted to include all annexes and

appendices to such documents.
5.1.3 Normative References
Rules and Regulations
5.1.3.1 All designs shall comply with the relevant laws of Thailand.
5.1.3.2 All designs shall comply with the relevant rules and regulations issued by
statutory agencies with jurisdiction in Thailand.
5.1.3.3 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Lifts & Escalators Supplier to obtain
relevant safety certificates or any other approval required from statutory
authorities for installation and commissioning of the lifts and escalators.
Codes of Practice
5.1.3.4 Codes of Practice are defined and incorporated in the Employer’s
Requirements Part 2 - General Specification as management plans and
procedures for:
(1) System Assurance;
(2) Design and Interface Management;
(3) Testing and Commissioning;
(4) Operations, Maintenance and Training Documentation; and
(5) Evidence of Safety Documentation.
5.1.3.5 Compliance with these management plans and procedures is mandatory
unless clearly inappropriate to the Project and relaxation has been given by
the Employer.
Standards
5.1.3.6 Standards shall be used and quoted in design submissions in accordance with
the Employer’s Requirements Part 2 - General Specification.
5.1.3.7 Escalators shall in addition comply with the requirements of the heavy duty
public service type for Mass Transit application in accordance with the latest
edition of European standard EN115: Safety Rules for the Construction and
Installation of Escalators.
Definitions
5.1.3.7 The following words and phrases used in this specification shall bear the
meanings given below:

(1) Angle of Inclination - The angle at which a passenger travels with respect
to the horizontal.
(2) Anti-Slide Device - A device to be installed on the decking between the
handrails of the adjacent escalators, or on the decking between the
handrail and the adjacent wall, to prevent people or objects from sliding
down on the decking.
(3) Balustrade - The enclosure at both sides of the moving steps, consisting
of decking, inner and outer panels, and skirts.
(4) Ceiling Intersection Guard - A guard provided at the intersection of
escalator decking and ceiling or soffit.
(5) Comb - The pronged portion of the comb plate at the landing which
meshes with the step tread grooves.
(6) Comb plate - The plate supporting the combs at the landings.
(7) Control Equipment - The components by means of which motion,
direction of travel, speed and stopping are controlled.
(8) Deck, decking and decking extension - The portion of the balustrade
outside the moving handrails that are transversely horizontal. This shall
include anti-slide devices where applicable
(9) Driving Machinery - The motorised power unit for driving the escalator.
(10) Electro-mechanical Brake - A brake consisting of friction shoe(s) applied to
a brake drum or disc by means of springs that are electrically released.
(11) Handrail- A power driven moving rail for passengers to grip whilst using
the escalator.
(12) Handrail Guard - A guard for the moving handrail at the point where the
handrail enters or leaves the balustrade.
(13) Landing - The stationary areas at the entrance to or exit from an
escalator.
(14) Landing Plate/Floor plate - The portion of floor plate next to the comb
plate at the landing.
(15) Newel - The portion of the balustrade on the landing at the end where
the moving handrail changes direction.
(16) Number of Flat Steps - Flat steps shall be measured from the point at
which the first step emerges from under the comb plate in a horizontal
direction to the first exposure of the riser of an adjacent step, both at the
upper and lower landings.
(17) Panel - The portion of the balustrade occupying the vertical space
between the top of the decking and the moving stairway excluding space

occupied by the skirts.

(18) Skirt - The portion of the balustrade immediately adjacent to the moving
stairway, occupying the vertical space between the steps and the deck or
inner panel.
(19) Step - The unit which forms the moving stairway.
(20) Step Chain - The main chain to which the steps are attached.
(21) Step Roller Track - The track on which the step roller runs.
(22) Step Tread - The horizontal portion of the step grooved in the direction
of travel and on which the passengers are carried.
(23) Step Roller - The rollers attached to the step and supporting the step.
(24) Truss - The supporting structure on which the various components are
mounted.
(25) Working Point - The intersection of the escalator step nose line and the
projection of the escalator floor plate level.
(26) Constant length - The horizontal distance between the escalator working
point and the end of escalator support.
END OF SECTION

5.2 PARTICULAR DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

5.2.1 Design Gates
5.2.1.1 Design gates shall be identified for all elements of lifts and escalators design
where design progress is absolutely conditional on resolution of an interface.
The minimum design gates are listed below.
Operational requirements
5.2.1.2 All potential interfaces with the Operator shall be identified and recorded in a
separate interface register.
5.2.1.3 Design gates shall be implemented as a minimum for the following elements:
(1) Remote monitoring and control of escalators;
(2) Provisions for emergency stopping of escalators;
(3) Provisions for surveillance (CCTV) within lift cars:
(4) Provisions for rescue from a lift stopped between floors;
(5) User interface with lift controls;
(6) Compatibility of instructions for use with overall signage design.
Architectural requirements
5.2.1.4 All potential interfaces with architectural design shall be identified and
recorded in a separate interface register.
5.2.1.5 Design gates shall be implemented as a minimum for the following elements:
(1) general appearance of lift exterior and compatibility with station architecture
and finishing;
(2) general appearance of lift interior including lighting.
Civil Engineering requirements
5.2.1.6 All potential interfaces with civil engineering design shall be identified and
recorded in a separate interface register.

5.2.2 Samples
5.2.2.1 Samples of all user interfaces and instructions shall be submitted.
5.2.3 Design workshops
5.2.3.1 Design workshops shall be held at regular intervals and as a minimum one
design workshop shall be held for each stage of the design process for the lifts
and escalators.
END OF SECTION

5.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - LIFTS

5.3.1 General
5.3.1.1 The lifts shall be of Electric type and machine-room less arrangement with the
traction drive motor and controls mounted within the hoist way of the lifts at
the top landing. No machine room shall be required. The following specifications
are considered to be the minimum required.
5.3.1.2 Lifts shall be supplied complete with car, landing doors, architrave, guides,
ropes, buffers, power unit, controller, and every material, component, device,
machinery, gauge, electrical installation, switchboard, safety, operation or
signalling system, software, diagnostic tools and functionality charts and all
the other equipment or works necessary to complete the installation and to
ensure the safe and continuous operation of the lifts.
5.3.1.3 Each lift shall have its own driving machine. The method of drive shall be
electric traction with gearless motor having 3phase VWF control.
5.3.1.4 All lifts shall be capable of operating satisfactorily and smoothly and deliver
their rated performance at a rate of 180 motors starts or more per hour for a
period of not less than 20 hours per day and seven days a week within the
anticipated environmental conditions.
5.3.1.5 Major repair shall mean replacement of car frame, car enclosure, car and
landing doors, lift shaft wiring (except travelling cables), drive machine, but
parts attached to these components which are subjected to normal wear and
tear are excluded.
5.3.1.6 The design of the lifts shall take into consideration fire prevention, elimination
of dust and dirt traps, and easy accessibility for cleaning and routine
maintenance.
5.3.1.7 Both the car and landing entrance clear opening width shall not be less than
900mm with height not less than 2100mm and the door shall be of centre
opening type.
5.3.1.8 All key switches used shall have the same type of switch cylinder and the key
shall be common to all lifts. The cylinder used shall be unique to this
Contract.
5.3.2 Performance Requirements

5.3.2.1 Each lift shall be so designed to be heavy duty, to require minimum maintenance
and standard components, wherever possible, shall be used in its construction
and installation.
5.3.2.2 Lifts with a carrying capacity of not less than 630 kg and designed to
accommodate wheel chairs shall be provided. They shall be suitable for
service as public service lifts.
5.3.2.3 Lifts shall comply with NBC-2005 and BS EN 81 and other appropriate
international Codes and Standards and relevant statutory requirements. Lifts
shall be type Class A for passenger loading and shall comply with NFPA 101
Fire Life Safety requirements.
5.3.2.4 Lifts shall comply with BS 7255 - "Code of Practice for safe working of lifts", or
equivalent to allow for the emergency release of users at the nearest landing.
This shall include.
(1) An alarm button at low level in the lift car and two-way speech
communication with station control with both being controlled from
power supply independent of the main power supply.
(2) Emergency lighting and intercom for a duration of 2 hours.
5.3.2.5 Lifts shall be provided with lift safety instructions announcement system to
facilitate use of lifts by "visually - impaired" commuters.
5.3.2.6 Lift doors shall be heavy duty and all accessories shall be of the "anti-vandal"
type. An intercom system shall be provided between the lift and the station
Control Room (SCR) for emergency communication.
5.3.2.7 Lifts with single access shall include a laminated framed safety mirror in the
rear panel of at least half of the lift height, for ease of reversing of wheel
chairs from the lifts.
5.3.2.8 The control system shall be microprocessor based to control the lift position
and operating sequence logic and have the facility for transmitting function
and fault data. Monitoring and control of the lift operation shall be through
the Building Management Systems (BMS).
5.3.2.9 Operating panel buttons shall be a minimum of 50 mm diameter and shall
also have the operation of the button superimposed on it in Braille.

5.3.2.10 Comfort Requirements:
Car jerk (maximum) Less than 2.50 m/s3

Machine noise:
- At a distance 1 m from the machine Less than 70 dB(A)
Car noise:
- Inside running car (maximum) Less than 55 dB(A)
- Noise at the landing, 1 m of hoist way with doors closed Less than 45 dB(A)
Door noise:
- At the landing at 1 m of hoist way with door closing Less than 55 dB(A)
In car Vibration:
-Vertical and Horizontal (maximum) Less than 20 cm/s2
5.3.2.11 Performance Requirements

Speed variation
-As per EN-81.1 Less than +5% upward and downward

- With 2/3 full of load at 40° C -10% in both directions
Door timing
- Opening 2.5 sec adjustable
-Closing (as per handicapped requirement) 6 sec adjustable
Door noise
Run/ Lock/Reopening 50 dBA, 52 dBA, 55 dBA
Door dwell time
Hall Call 15 sec Adjustable from 5 to 25 sec
Car call 15 sec Adjustable from 5 to 25 sec
Lighting of the lift car
Minimum illumination interior of the car with Normal 150 Lux
door closed Emergency 20 Lux

5.3.2.12 Special Design Requirements for lifts as minimum requirements.
Facilities in lift car

Handrail height inside car 0.90 m height
Doors Equipped with large windows
Door detectors in car entrance
Door closing speed Adjustable door opening and closing speed that
Gong at door closing remain
Giving aopen for at least
notification 3 secclosing
of door and close
5 secat before
speed not
the
Cabin operating panel exceeding 0.3 m/s
doors of the car start to close
Intercom Between lift car and station Control Room, at a height
Voice synthesiser not exceeding
Announcing door1.20 m above
closing, level andthetrain
car direction
floor and
at
Buttons, legends identified
platform byrelief
Buttons Inlevel a (for
raised symbol
andblind andinpartially
legend Braille sighted)
Facilities on Landings
landing control panels The lift control panel shall be located 0.75 m height
Lighting level on wall
Two or post.
metres Buttons
in front in relief
of the and legend
lift doors, in Braille
the lighting level
Braille designations of level shall
50 mmbehigh
increased
raised to 300onLux.
fixed theThis is applicable
lift entrance jambsalso
at
Intercom to exterior
1.50 m above
Between street
streetFFL level lifts
level landing station Control Room, at
a height not exceeding 1.20 m above the ground level
and identified by a raised symbol
5.3.2.13 General Characteristics
Lift Usage : Transportation of passengers with restricted
mobility including those in wheelchairs
No. of Cars : As identified on Architectural layouts
Speed : 1.00 m/s
Rise : As identified on Architectural layouts
No. Of Floor : As identified on Architectural layouts
No. Of Entrances : Front or Front & Rear as identified on
Architectural layouts
Control : Simplex Full Collective automatic (FCL)
Drive : Variable Voltage Variable Frequency
Machine Room Location : At top of lift shaft. No machine room
required
Starts Per Hour : 180 motor starts per hour at 40°c shaft
ambient temperature
Levelling Accuracy : ± 3 mm
Hoist way Dimensions : As identified on Architectural layouts
Type of Car/ Hoist way Door : 2-Speed, Centre Opening

5.3.2.14 Power supply

Main power supply : 415V ~ 50 Hz ±10%
Lighting power supply : 240 V
Type of power supply : Separate neutral and protective conductor
through TN-S system
Protection device : Over current protection device
5.3.3 Operation principles - Control functions
5.3.3.1 Lifts shall provide at least the following modes of operation:
Normal operation
5.3.3.2 Simplex full Collective Automatic
Automatic evacuation
5.3.3.3 In case of fire, emergency evacuation is initialized through the fire alarm panel
or with a manually operated switch in the station Control Room to all lifts
giving them a signal to go immediately to the ground level (or other pre-
assigned levels) ignoring all other signals, and the doors shall remain open.
The lift shall operate under this mode on the normal power supply.
Overload control
5.3.3.4 The overload control, which preventing the overloaded car travel. An acoustic
signal indicates the car is overloaded.
Reservation Control
5.3.3.5 The reservation control, which reserves the car for a special purpose e.g.
cleaning when the reservation key switch inside the car is turned on. Neither
hall calls nor car calls are registered. The car remains at the predetermined
level with the car doors open until the key switch is turned off.
Automatic parking control
5.3.3.6 The automatic recall control automatically to a specified landing after a
determined time of inactivity.
Door Nudging Feature
5.3.3.7 If the lift doors are kept open longer than the pre-determined time, an
override alarm shall sound to alert the passenger that the doors must close so
that system performance is not adversely affected.
Next Landing

5.3.3.8 The car shall automatically proceed to the nearest floor with a functioning
landing door if the car doors fail to open at the designated floor.
Door Load Detector
5.3.3.9 When an object is caught in or interferes with the opening or closing of the
doors, the doors shall reverse direction when an excess load is detected.
Safety Door Edge
5.3.3.10 When a passenger comes in contact with the door safety edge, when the
doors are closing, the doors shall re-open.
5.3.4 Monitoring
5.3.4.1 The monitoring of the lifts operation shall be realized through the building
management system (BMS) and occ workstations. A BMS interface shall be
installed to monitor the main functions of the lifts and generate audible and
visible alarms in the station Control Room in the event of a fault.
5.3.4.2 A collective alarm for each lift of a station shall be transmitted to the OCC.
5.3.4.3 The information to be provided for the Lift Monitoring and Fault Diagnostic
System shall include floor name, car position, car status, door status, travelling
direction, alarm, fault status and its causes etc.
5.3.5 System Elements

Cabin
5.3.5.1 The lift car shall be vandal resistant, with stainless steel enclosure.
Car frame
5.3.5.2 The car assembly shall comprise of a support frame, platform, enclosure, car
control panel, doors, car door operator, ceiling, flooring and all associated
wiring.
5.3.5.3 The car safety gear shall be mounted on the members of the frame and shall
be operated by an over speed governor. Guide shoes shall be mounted to top
and bottom of the car frame to engage the guide rails and ensure smooth car
operation.
5.3.5.4 The support frame shall be constructed from steel beams designed in a way
to provide a rigid support to the car enclosure.

5.3.5.5 For street level lifts where the outside faces of the car can be seen, the car
frame, walls, doors, roof etc shall be so designed as to be architecturally
acceptable.
Platform
5.3.5.6 The car platform shall be of all steel construction. The platform shall be fixed
securely to the frame and the car enclosure shall be mounted upon this.
5.3.5.7 The platform shall be designed to withstand the load of cash-carts for coin
collection, of about 500 kg each (with a point live load of 125.5 kg per wheel).
Car Interior and Finishing
5.3.5.8 Unless specified elsewhere in this Specification, the following finishes for the
lift shall be complied with:
(1) Landing Finishes
(a) Landing Transom Panels - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(b) Architrave (Jamb) - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(c) Landing Doors - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(2) Car Finishes
(a) Car Transom Panels - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(b) Car Door Frame - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(c) Car Wall
(i) Front Panels - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(ii) Side Panels - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(iii) Back Panels - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(iV) Car Doors - Stainless steel, Vandal resistant
(d) Car Floor - 15mm. thick granite or other suitable arrangement
matching with nearby floor finishes.
(e) Car Ceiling - Stainless steel, hairline panels with sufficient down lights
or other ceiling design to be coordinated with the overall station
design
(f) Car Kick-Plates and skirting - Stainless steel, hairline
(g) Hand/grip rail - Stainless steel, hairline
5.3.5.9 All stainless steel materials specified for car finishes shall be of grade 304 and
samples shall be submitted for approval.
Car Ceiling

5.3.5.10 The car roof shall be of sturdy construction allowing for the load of mechanics
and tools for maintenance/inspection and repairs. It shall incorporate one
hinged rescue exit that can be opened from the car top only. This exit shall
have contacts that shall not allow the car to move when it is open.
Car Operating Panel
5.3.5.11 The car panel shall include circular micro movement halo illumination of the
button, which will indicate that it has been pressed. Buttons shall be provided
for entering floor calls, door open and alarm.
5.3.5.12 A position indicator providing a digital numeric display shall be included. The
position indicator shall utilize LCD technology. The panel shall also include:
(1) Emergency Car Lights
(2) Loudspeaker grill with inter-communication unit.
(3) Voice synthesizer (Doors closing announcement, floor announcement,
train direction and overload announcements).
(4) Independent service key switch.
(5) Car overloaded indicator.
(6) Fan key switch.
(7) Load plate kg & number of passengers and unique lift number.
(8) Car direction indicator
(9) Intercommunication Unit
10) In the car: One loud speaker and one microphone are included in the
main COP, connected with station Control Room
(11) In the hoist way: One unit on the E&l panel
(12) Cabin emergency exit, at the top of the car an emergency exit at least
500 X 355 mm, with same finish as structural ceiling.
Car Lighting
5.3.5.13 Lighting shall be provided by a minimum of two concealed light fittings
mounted vertically around the car-operating panel. They shall provide 150
Lux minimum at floor level and in front of the control panel. This is to be
designed for ease of maintenance and cleaning. An emergency light fitting to
provide lighting of 20 Lux under mains failure condition is also to be provided.
The emergency light fitting shall be fed with batteries lasting for at least 1.5
hours.
5.3.5.14 All light fittings shall be based on LED technology.
Car Ventilation

5.3.5.15 Forced ventilation shall be provided that is capable of changing the air in the
car with 20 air changes per hour.
5.3.5.16 Natural ventilation shall be provided at low level in accordance with BS EN 81.
Car Surveillance
5.3.5.17 Discreet surveillance devices (CCTV) shall be installed in all lift cars and
connected to monitors in the station Control Room. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the provision of the cable from the camera position in the car
to the lift control panels adjacent to the traction drive unit and shall interface
with the M&E Works Contractor for the installation of the camera within the
car.
Car Doors
5.3.5.18 The car entrance shall be provided with a centre-opening two-speed type
horizontal sliding door. The door shall be hung on roller hangers, with a steel
track and guided at the bottom by non-metallic shoes sliding in a threshold
groove.
5.3.5.19 All doors shall be fitted with electro-mechanical locks to ensure that the lift
can only move when all doors are closed and locked. A toughened glass
vision panel shall be provided in the car door.
Cabin Top and Maintenance Control Panel
5.3.5.20 A car top control panel shall be fitted to the roof of the car, and shall include
at least the following items:
(1) Master switch with two positions NORMAL/TEST.
(2) Stop push-button labeled STOP/RUN.
(3) Constant pressure UP push.
(4) Constant pressure DOWN push.
(5) Roof light: This shall be a bulkhead fitting protected by a metal cage, the
cover being secured by a single screw.
(6) Bulkhead roof light switch.
Door Operator
5.3.5.21 Central opening doors (2 panels)
5.3.5.22 A closed loop variable frequency controlled door operator shall be provided
to drive the car and landing doors fully automatically. The open and close
speed profile shall be software based and re programmable via a test tool.

5.3.5.23 In the event of the door meeting an obstruction during closing, re-opening will
occur by way of a motor slip detection device. The device shall use torque
measurement in the door control system.
5.3.5.24 The time interval for which the lift doors remain open when a car stops at a
landing shall be independently adjustable for response to car calls and
response to hall calls.
5.3.5.25 The maximum door noise measured one metre from the landing entrance
shall not exceed 55 dB (A).
5.3.5.26 Door opening commences when the car arrives at a floor. Door closing time
and operating speed shall be adjustable and different if the stop has been
initiated by a car call from the case when it has been initiated by a hall call.
The dwell time shall be adjustable and shall be initially set to 15 seconds.
5.3.5.27 An arrival gong located on top of car shall be used to indicate the door
closing.
Passenger Door Protection
5.3.5.28 An electric infrared screen curtain type detector shall be provided. This shall
provide protection across the full width and height of the entrance.
Interruption of the curtain beams shall cause the doors to reopen.
5.3.5.29 A back-up mechanical protection system shall also be provided.
Operational Control
5.3.5.30 The operation shall be Full Collective automatic type with one button in the
car for each landing level served; and UP and DOWN buttons at the
intermediate landings and a single button at each terminal landing. All stops
registered by the momentary pressure of the car buttons shall be made in the
order in which the landings are reached after the buttons have been pressed
but irrespective of the sequence in which calls are registered. Calls registered
by the momentary pressure of the buttons at the landing shall be made in
the order in which the landings are reached in each direction of travel after
buttons have been pressed.
5.3.5.31 All UP landing calls shall be answered when the car is traveling in the UP
direction and all DOWN landing calls shall be answered when the car is
traveling in the DOWN direction, except in the case of the terminal floor calls
which shall be answered as soon as it is reached.

5.3.5.32 The parking operation of the lift car shall be adjustable from 1 to 10 minutes,
but initially set to 5 minutes. After this period, the lift car shall return to the
designated parking level.
5.3.6 Landings
Landing Entrances (Automatic Sliding Doors)
5.3.6.1 Complete centre-opening two-speed type sheet stainless steel entrances shall
be supplied and installed for each landing.
5.3.6.2 Doors shall be provided at each entrance at all landings where the lift shall
stop.
5.3.6.3 Landing doors must be suitably protected during transport and erection
against damage or distortion. The doors shall be provided with fail-safe
electromechanical interlocks to ensure that the lift cannot depart unless all
doors are closed and locked until the car reaches a landing, when the door at
the landing shall be unlocked.
5.3.6.4 The interlocks shall be designed to ensure that the doors are mechanically
locked before the electrical contacts of the interlocks are made. Two
emergency door release keys shall be provided which shall be capable of
opening the landing door irrespective of the position of the lift car in the shaft.
5.3.6.5 The landing entrance shall have a minimum fire rating of 2 hours. Satisfactory
evidence and certification shall be submitted to the Fire Services to show the
degree of fire resistance.
5.3.6.6 An electro-mechanical interlock, certified according to BS EN 81.1, shall be
provided, fitted on the landing, operated by the door lock cam on the lift car.
This interlock shall prevent movement of the lift car until the landing door is
both mechanically and electrically locked.
5.3.6.7 An emergency release mechanism shall be included with the interlock. In the
event of an emergency (or for maintenance) the landing door may be opened
from the landing with an emergency release key provided in the top of the
door casing.
5.3.6.8 The complete assembly shall provide a resilient, smooth, efficient and highly
reliable door system.
FCL Type Landing Fixtures

5.3.6.9 At each terminal landing, a push button fixture shall be provided and at each
intermediate landing, a button fixture shall be provided containing UP and
DOWN push buttons.
5.3.6.10 When a call is registered by momentary pressure on a landing button, that
button shall become illuminated and remain illuminated until the call is
answered. The illumination shall be by light emitting diodes, displaying green
for up and red for down.
5.3.6.11 A separate indication shall be given on the landing fixture to denote that the
lift is inoperable/out of service.
Key Switch (parking)
5.3.6.12 A separate key (parking) switch integral with the hall button fixture shall be
provided at the concourse landing for emergency service.
5.3.6.13 The switch shall be a two-position key switch located at the designed parking
floor in the hall button fixtures. Upon activation of this park switch:
(1) The car returns to the designated landing.
(2) It shall make normal car stops.
(3) Registered hall calls shall be cancelled.
(4) Upon arrival, its doors shall open to enable passengers to exit. They
remain open, for 15 seconds then the doors shall close for parking.
(5) The door open button (DOB) in the car shall remain operative in case
someone has remained in the car.
(6)Fan and light shall turn off.
5.3.6.14 The lift shall resume normal operation when the parking switch is switched
back. The key may be removed in both positions.
Hall Position Indicator
5.3.6.15 A digital hall position indicator shall be installed at all landings where the lift
serves more than two floors. The indicator shall have a numeric capability.
5.3.6.16 A hall lantern integral with the hall position indicator shall be provided at all
landings. When a car is stopping at a landing, the lantern indicating the
direction in which the car is traveling shall become illuminated prior to arrival
of the car.
Gong
5.3.6.17 A gong shall sound to announce the arrival of the car. The gong shall have
different tones for UP and DOWN direction.

5.3.7 Drive Unit

5.3.8 Machine
5.3.8.1 The machine shall be ac gearless permanent magnet type with a single piece
main shaft, integral drive sheave and brake disc. The machine shall be
designed to be placed in the hoist way headroom partly above the car
projection and shall be accessed for maintenance by opening the car ceiling.
Bearing
5.3.8.2 Bearing shall be of deep groove ball type with lifetime not less than 20 years.
Brake system
5.3.8.3 Brake system shall meet the BS EN 81-1 requirements. The main brake shall
be of Disc type with independent dual action capable of arresting the load on
any single calliper. In the event of undetected brake wear the brake shall not
lift and thereby automatically prevent further lift operation.
Motion Control (VF Drive)
5.3.8.4 An ac Closed Loop, Variable Frequency, motion control and velocity profile
shall be provided. The micro-computer based speed control system shall
incorporate a digital closed loop feedback system ensuring the actual lift
speed is in line with a dictated pattern during all phases of travel, namely
acceleration, full running speed and deceleration. All phases of travel shall be
controlled regardless of load or direction of travel.

5.3.9 Drive Performance

Travel Time
5.3.9.1 The lift manufacturer shall guarantee the floor-to-floor time.
Stopping Accuracy
5.3.9.2 The stopping accuracy shall be no more than +/- 3 mm before loading or
unloading the car. The mechanical brake shall not be operative before the car
has been electrically stopped and at speed zero.
Re-levelling
5.3.9.3 To compensate for rope stretch under various load conditions, an automatic
re levelling system is to be furnished to ensure the car stays within the floor
levelling zone at all times.
5.3.10 Hoist way Equipment

Guide Rails
5.3.10.1 Planned steel "T" rails shall be provided as guides for the car and
counterweight. The stem section of all guides shall be tongued and grooved
to provide matched joints. The guide rail shall be securely fastened and
accurately installed onto the building structure.
Counterweight
5.3.10.2 A structural steel frame with filler weights shall be furnished to provide proper
counterbalance for safe operation. A rigid protective screen must be installed
in the pit in front of the counterweight area, to comply with BS EN 81-1.
Buffers
5.3.10.3 Speed 1.0 m/s suitable energy accumulation type buffers shall be provided for
car and counterweight.
Electric Wiring
5.3.10.4 All necessary insulated wiring and trucking together with necessary fittings,
shall be provided, except as specified as work by others. The cables shall be
halogen free and fire retardant. The behaviour in fire shall have been tested
according to DIN VDE 0472 part 804, test methods c (IEC 332.3 Cat C).

5.3.11 Safety components

5.3.11.1 Each lift shall be provided with an overload device which shall operate when
the load in the car exceeds the rated load. When activated, this device shall
prevent any movement of the lift car and shall cause a warning buzzer on the
car to be set off and illuminate an "Overload” signal. This device shall be
incorporated in the car operating panel.
5.3.11.2 Water sensors in the lift pits shall be provided for all lifts from ground level to
concourse. The sensor shall initiate an alarm to the BMS when water level in
the pit exceeds the pre-set level. Drainage from the lift pit shall incorporate
an oil/grease interceptor before connecting to the public drain.
5.3.11.3 An inspection control panel shall be fitted on the top of the lift car for
maintenance purpose. Protection shall be provided to protect person working
on car from falling. The design of the inspection control panel shall comply
with the following requirements and prevent the lift car from being operated
accidentally:
(1) It shall not be possible to control the lift car from any other position after
the NORMAL/TEST change-over switch shall be set to the TEST position.
When in the TEST position, the UP and DOWN continuous pressure push
buttons within this panel shall become operative.
(2) An ON/OFF switch shall be provided. It shall render the lift inoperative in
any mode, when the switch is in the OFF position.
(3) The lift car shall only move when all safety devices are in the safe
position.
(4) The lift car shall move in either direction only on continuous pressure of
the appropriate direction button at a car speed not exceeding 0.25 m/s.
(5) An emergency stop switch shall be provided.
(6) The control panel shall incorporate an adequately protected permanent
light fixture with a separate switch and a 5/15A switch socket outlet.
(7) A door operator ON/OFF switch shall be provided. The door operator
shall only be operative when the switch is at “ON” position.
(8) Associated with this control, a terminal stop limit switch shall be provided
to stop the car from travelling in an upward direction not less than 1.8m
from the soffit of the lift shaft. When this switch is activated, it shall not
stop the car from operating in the down direction.
(9) All switches and buttons on the inspection control station shall be clearly
engraved with their functions in both Hindi and English. All buttons and

switches shall be shrouded against accidental operation, with the

exception of the emergency stop button.
5.3.11.4 The lift shall be provided with a floor levelling device which shall
automatically bring the lift car to stop within ±5 mm of the level of the floor
for which a stop shall be initiated regardless of the load or direction of travel.
5.3.11.5 An automatic re-levelling device shall be provided which returns the lift to the
floor automatically when the lift creep down or move up from floor level for
any distance from 6 to 50 mm. This device shall be operative at all floors
served whether the landing and car doors are opened or closed.
5.3.11.6 Mechanical device and electrical device shall be provided to prevent the car
movement resulting from maintenance / inspection that can be dangerous to
person carrying out maintenance/inspection works from inside the car or car
roof.
5.3.11.7 Each lift car shall be provided with progressive type safety gear mounted on
the lower member of the car frame structure. This safety gear shall be
capable of operating only in the downward direction and capable of stopping
the car with full load at the tripping speed of the over speed governor, by
gripping the guides and holding the car stationary.
5.3.11.8 The motor circuit shall be opened by a switch on the safety gear before, or at
the same time the safety gear is applied. It shall be possible to release the
safety gear by raising the lift car without the use of any special tools.
5.3.11.9 An over speed governor shall be provided, which is capable of activating the
safety gear in the event of the lift exceeding the rated speed by 15%. A
mechanically operated safety switch shall be provided to disconnect the
power supply to the motor when the governor is activated.
5.3.11.10 The governor shall be adjusted to operate the safety gear in accordance with
the recommended limits set out in EN81 Part 1 and IS 14665. The governor
rope shall be of steel and shall comply to IS: 14665.
5.3.11.11 Counterweight safety gear shall be provided for lifts from Concourse to
Platform level having floating pits.
5.3.11.12 A phase protection device shall be provided in the main control cubicle of
each lift to prevent the lift car from moving in case there is a phase failure or
the phase of the power supply being reversed due to any reason whatsoever.
This device, when activated, shall cause a visual indicator to illuminate on the

main control cubicle, until the fault has been rectified.

5.3.11.13 A switch shall be provided in the lift pit which, when in the “STOP” position,
shall prevent any movement of the lift car, including inspection/test
operation, until the switch is set to the “RUN” position. The switching
positions shall be prominently labelled.
5.3.12 Emergency Rescue Panel
5.3.12.1 At the highest landing, there shall be located an Emergency & Inspection
panel. A triangular door release key similar to the landing doors shall unlock
this.
When opened it shall reveal instructions on the use of the Emergency
passenger release system.
5.3.13 Special Features for the Physically Challenged Persons

5.3.13.1 The following user-friendly features shall be provided in the lifts for physically
challenged passengers as specified in ISO 15330 and EN81.
(1) Operating force for car and hall buttons shall be in the range of 2.5 - 5N.
Minimum area of the active part shall be 490 mm square and buttons
shall be 20 mm minimum in the smallest dimension.
(2) Lift control buttons e.g. call buttons; destination buttons, etc. shall be
positioned in between 900 mm and 1200mm from the finished floor
level.
(3) Hall call buttons shall be installed at a height of 900 mm from the lift
landing finished floor level.
(4) The minimum distance to the centre line of any of the hall call buttons
from any wall or door at right angles shall be 500mm.
(5) Grip rails shall be provided on the side walls of the lift car and positioned
between 800mm - 900mm from the car floor level and at least 50mm
clear from the side and rear walls.
(6) Active part of the car and hall buttons shall be identifiable visually and
by touch from the faceplate or surroundings. Braille notations shall be
incorporated in each button of car and landing operating panel.
(7) Colour of any face plate of a Hall call buttons shall be contrasted to its
surroundings.
(8) Size of any symbols provided for car and/or hall buttons shall be min. of
15 mm and max. of 40 mm, relief with a thickness of 1mm +0.5mm/-
0mm and contrasted to their background. Symbols shall preferably be on

the active part of the button or on the left of the active part of the
button at a distance between 10mm and 15mm. This shall be measured
from the edge of the relief.
(9) A digital voice system for announcing the car position, opening/closing of
doors, direction of travel and messages shall be provided. The sound
level of the information shall be adjustable between 35 dBA and 55 dBA
adjusted to suit the site conditions outside the hall.
(10) A laminated safety glass type mirror shall be provided on rear panel at
appropriate position to help wheelchair bound passengers in backward
movement while exiting the car.
(11) An international symbol of access for the physically challenged persons
shall be permanently and conspicuously displayed at every landing next
to the entrance and in the car. The inside signage shall be provided by
the Lifts & Escalators Supplier and the outside signage by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall interface with the Lifts & Escalators Supplier in this
regard.
END OF SECTION

5.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - ESCALATORS

5.4.1 General Requirements
5.4.1.1 Escalators shall be heavy duty, reversible type compliant with the relevant
provisions of BS 5655-6 or equivalent and capable of operating safely,
smoothly and continuously in both directions in the environmental conditions
of Bangkok for a period of not less than 20 hours a day, seven (7) days a week
with an alternating passenger load reaching100% of the specified load (120 kg
per step) for three hours, 75% of contract load for following one hour and
50% of the specified load.
5.4.1.2 Escalators shall be designed for installation and operation at an angle of
inclination of 30°.
5.4.1.3 Operating speeds of the escalators shall be as follows:
(1) Service (rated) speed - Nominal 0.65 m/s
(2) Maintenance / Idling speed ≤ 0.2 m/s.
5.4.1.4 Step width shall be at least 1000 mm. Width between Centre-lines of
handrails shall be at least 1280 mm.
5.4.1.5 Three flat steps shall be provided at both upper and lower landings.
5.4.1.6 Safety factors used in the design shall, as a minimum, conform to the
following:
(1) Trusses-As per EN 115 (as applicable for Public Service Escalators)
(2) Step roller tracks and steps - 8.
(3) Driving Machinery - 5 for steel and bronze components; 8 for cast iron
parts.
(4) Chains-8
5.4.1.7 Any other item (if not specified elsewhere) - As per EN 115 (as applicable for
Public Service Escalators).
5.4.1.8 Ceiling intersection guards and anti-slide devices shall be provided, where
necessary.
5.4.1.9 Escalators shall be self-contained units consisting of truss, tracks, step drive
units, steps, step chains, comb plates, handrails, landing plates, driving machines,
controllers, safety devices, balustrades and all other components required to
provide a complete installation. Materials used shall be non-combustible and
selected to achieve a fire-resistant installation.
5.4.1.10 Escalator design shall be such that no major repairs shall be necessary for a

period of at least fifteen (15) years from the date of Revenue Service,
assuming that regular inspection and maintenance are carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Major repairs shall
consist of repairs to the steps, track system, step chains, main drive system,
traction machines, landing plates and tension carriage due to causes
attributable to normal wear and tear.
5.4.1.11 Escalator design shall give specific consideration to fire prevention, elimination
of dust and oil trapping configurations, ease of handling, access into the
station and easy accessibility for routine maintenance.
5.4.1.12 In the case of adjacent escalators, it shall be possible to remove or replace all
components of one unit, without stopping or interfering with the operation of
the adjacent unit.
5.4.1.13 Escalator components shall be protected against corrosion.
5.4.1.14 All electrical equipment supplied and installed shall at least have the
following class of protection for all type of escalators.
(1) Machine : Protection IP Class 54.
(2) Controller (outside) : Protection IP Class 54
(3) Controller (inside) : Protection IP Class 55
(4) Isolating Switches : Protection IP Class 55
(5) All safety switches andinterface boards (indoor): Protection IP Class 31
(6) All safety switches andinterface boards (outdoor) : Protection IP Class 55
5.4.1.15 The elongation of the main drive chain and handrail drive chain shall not
exceed 2% of the length of chain within the first year of operation.
5.4.1.16 All key switches used shall have the same type of switch cylinder and the key
shall be common to all escalators. The cylinder used shall be unique to this
Contract.
5.4.1.17 The lower pit of all escalators shall be provided with detection device, such
as float switch, to stop the escalators if the pit is flooded. This detection
device shall transmit an alarm to the BMS in the event of flooding.
5.4.1.18 PVC shall not be used in any component except FRLS cables.
5.4.1.19 If any obstacle such as intersecting floor slab, is less than 600mm from the
centre line of the nearer handrail, an intersection guard fabricated by light
weight material shall be provided in accordance with EN115. There shall be no

fixed structural or architectural element within 120mm from the outer edge of
the handrail under any circumstances.
5.4.1.20 It shall be possible to reverse any escalator manually or remotely irrespective
of the direction of travel. After being reverse, the escalator shall run smoothly
in the desired direction without adjustment and under any passenger load
conditions.
5.4.1.21 All similar parts, elements, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be totally
interchangeable between escalators of same type and duty.
5.4.1.22 All ball or roller bearings shall be sealed for life time greasing and shall have a
working life of at least 110,000 operating hours.
5.4.1.23 Escalators shall be provided at all stations to assist vertical User traffic flow
between street level, concourse and platforms to meet the requirement of
the Key Performance Indicators and NFPA 130.
5.4.1.24 Escalators shall be used as stairways in stationary position during an
emergency for station evacuation. All escalators shall be of a standard pattern,
two lanes wide, having a minimum tread width of 1000 mm with a width at
hip height of 1200 mm. They shall have three (3) flat treads at entry and exit
and be equipped with double safety brushes on either side.
5.4.1.25 Escalators shall be reversible, monitoring and control of the operation being
through the system of BMS.
5.4.1.26 Escalators shall be designed for continuous operation in either direction for a
period of not less than 20 hours per day, seven days per week, at
temperatures varying between 5°c and 46°c.
5.4.1.27 Materials of construction for escalators exposed to high ambient temperatures
and dusty and dirty conditions shall be suitable for these aggressive
conditions.
5.4.1.28 Escalators shall comply with EN 115. They shall be suitable for service as
public service escalators /passenger conveyors. The angle inclination of the
escalators shall be not more than 30° to the horizontal with speed of 0.65
m/s.
5.4.1.29 During periods of no occupancy, the speed shall automatically reduce to 0.2
m/s and come to halt if not occupied for 5 minutes.
5.4.1.30 Access shall be provided to the escalator underside for cleaning purposes.

5.4.1.31 Operation of escalators (starting and stopping) shall be controlled from upper
or lower level and from the station Control Room.
5.4.1.32 Escalators shall be located along the normal and direct path of User
circulation and be easily identifiable.
5.4.1.33 Escalators shall be so designed that routine operation and maintenance can
be performed with minimum disruption to station functioning.
5.4.1.34 Escalators shall conform to BS EN 115: Safety rules for the construction and
installation of escalators and passenger conveyors.
5.4.2 Mechanical Requirements
5.4.2.1 Structural truss shall be of sufficient strength to carry (a) the dead weight of
the escalator which shall include any exterior claddings and decking
extensions and (b) passenger load. Passenger loading shall be assumed as
5000 N/m2 (load carrying areas = nominal width of escalator X distance
between supports).
5.4.2.2 The truss shall be designed to retain the steps and the running gear should
the track system fail. The truss shall also be designed to support an additional
load of the outer cladding panels and truss claddings up to a maximum load
of 300N/m2.
5.4.2.3 Truss shall be supported at both ends (and at intermediate support for
vertical rises above 6.5m) with resilient supports and bearing plates.
5.4.2.4 Resilient supports shall be designed for the purpose of preventing the
transmission of noise and vibration to the station structure.
5.4.2.5 The truss shall be designed to support the dead weight of the escalator plus
the passenger load. Considering the passenger load, the maximum calculated
deflection shall not exceed 1/1000th of the distance between supports.
5.4.2.6 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Lifts & Escalators Supplier for all
interfacing requirements relating to the Civil Works.
5.4.2.7 Track system shall be designed and fabricated to support and retain the steps,
running gears and prevent step up-lifting continually, under all load conditions
at design speeds. The design shall allow installation and removal of
mechanical components without dismantling the structure.

5.4.2.8 The track system shall be constructed of stainless steel. The track surface
shall be straight and smooth. All joints, where possible shall be diagonal
across the width of the running surface.
5.4.2.9 The maximum deflection of the track system shall not exceed 1.00 mm
between any two adjacent track supports under 6000N/m2. Radii of the upper
and lower transitional tracks shall be equal to or greater than the following: -
(1) Upper-2.6m
(2) Lower - 2.0m
5.4.2.10 Aluminium surface comb plates shall be provided with natural colour comb
with under step lighting. The alternatives like coloured fibre, for the Comb
plate is subject to acceptance at the design stage.
5.4.2.11 Corrosion resisting aluminium alloy comb teeth shall be provided at both
landings of each escalator. The comb plate structure shall withstand a load of
6000N/m2 with a deflection not exceeding 2.0mm.
5.4.2.12 The teeth of the combs shall properly mesh with the cleats on the step
treads and shall be designed to permit simple replacement in sections.
5.4.2.13 The yellow colour light in the pits shall be provided to demarcate the moving
and the nonmoving parts of the escalators.
5.4.2.14 The comb sections shall be so designed such that when a foreign object is
caught between the comb teeth and the step tread surface, the comb teeth
shall either deflect, whilst remain matching with the grooves of the tread
surface, or break.
5.4.2.15 The load which may cause a comb tooth to break at its tip shall not be less
than 700N or more than 1900N.
5.4.2.16 In the event that a foreign object caught between the comb teeth and the
step tread surface cannot be removed as mentioned above, and is likely to
cause damage to the steps, comb plate or its supporting structure, the comb
plate safety switch shall be actuated and shall cause the escalator to halt.
5.4.2.17 Escalator landings shall be provided with easily openable, hinged landing
plates suitable for access to the drive mechanism. Landing plates shall have a
non-slip, stainless steel or aluminium alloy surface that will facilitate sectional
replacement.

5.4.2.18 Lifting handles shall be provided to facilitate opening of the landing plate.
Means, such as hydraulic cylinders, shall be provided so that the force
required to lift the floor plate is not more than 200N.
5.4.2.19 The floor plate shall withstand a uniformly distribution load of 6000 N/m 2
over its entire area, the deflection shall not exceed 4mm during load
application and there shall be no permanent deformation after the load is
removed.
5.4.2.20 Stainless steel balustrades shall consist of handrail decks, inner panels, outer
cladding panels, skirts and lighting installation as given below:
(1) Handrail decks profile : Minimum 1.5 mm thick stainless steel and
hairline finish (Grade 304)
(2) Inner panels : For stainless steel panels, minimum 1.5 mm
thick stainless steel, hairline finish (Grade 304).
(3) Outer cladding panels : Minimum 1,5mm thick stainless steel with
hairline finish (Grade 304) in Visible Section and
Cold rolled steel galvanized sheet (with minimum
100jjm thick Galvanising) in Non - visible section.
The cladding shall be provided on all three
sides including bottom side.
(4) Skirt panels : Minimum 1.5 mm thick stainless steel, hairline
finish, with a material of low coefficient of
friction such as Teflon or equivalent applied on
the surface.
(5) Lighting : LED comb lighting.
5.4.2.21 Measures other than frictional or gravitation methods shall be provided to
prevent the inner panels from dislodging during normal operation.
5.4.2.22 All stainless steel items shall be manufactured and processed in a factory
where the quality control procedures comply with ISO standards.
5.4.2.23 The distance between the inner decking immediately below the handrail shall
not be less than 1200mm.
5.4.2.24 Where necessary, all outer sides of the balustrades and truss shall be
provided with reinforced claddings. The gap between the sides of escalator
and the adjoining walls/ parapet walls shall be provided with decking
extensions.

5.4.2.5 A gap of approximately 15mm shall be allowed between the decking and the
adjacent walls/ parapet walls. The gap shall be filled up with an approved
flexible sealant.
5.4.2.26 The claddings and decking extensions shall be fabricated from 1.5mm thick
stainless steel with hairline finish.
5.4.2.27 The inner surface shall be reinforced to prevent warping. It shall be sprayed
with fire resistant vibration/sound attenuating backing material.
5.4.2.28 The claddings and decking extensions shall have tight butt joint and be
fastened to the truss with concealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers.
The joint line shall be perpendicular to the escalator step nose line without
any longitudinal joints.
5.4.2.29 All joint lines of interior decking, exterior decking/decking extension shall be
aligned and staggered in arrangement in line with the joint line of interior
panel.
5.4.2.30 The balustrade shall withstand the loading without permanent deformation
after removal of loading as specified in EN115.
5.4.2.31 Glass Balustrade shall meet the following requirement.
(1) The glass balustrade shall be fabricated of tempered safety glass with
minimum thickness 10mm and sufficient mechanical strength and rigidity
in accordance with EN115 as a minimum.
(2) Glass and glazing shall comply with BS 952 Part 1, BS 5713, BS 6206 and
BS6206 and BS 6262.
(3) All glass shall be capable of easy replacement.
(4) The balustrade shall be glazed at the entire section from upper to lower
newel ends.
(5) The glass balustrade shall be self-supporting without ทานllions and the
edges of the glass panels shall be bevelled and polished with joints
perpendicular to the escalator step nose line rather than the horizontal.
(6) Handrail drive system of escalators with glass balustrades shall be
designed such that the drive system is below the passenger side and
cannot be seen in the glazed portion.
(7) All glass shall be manufactured and processed in a factory where the
quality control procedures comply with ISO standards.
(8) The thickness and safety design of the glass shall be demonstrated during
the design phase.

(9) The glass balustrade shall be provided with a suitable lighting system
under the handrail decking where there is insufficient overhead lighting
from other sources.
5.4.3 Handrail and Handrail Drive System
5.4.3.1 Balustrades shall be provided with smooth and continuous handrails moving
in the same direction and at the same speed as the steps with tolerance of
0% to 2% of the speed of the steps. The handrail shall have a life span of at
least eight (8) years.
5.4.3.2 The colour of the handrails shall be black.
5.4.3.3 All handrails shall have inserts and sliding surfaces of endless construction
designs, synthetic materials, traction type, with a single, smooth, vulcanised
joint. Both the inserts and sliding surfaces shall be made from synthetic
material.
5.4.3.4 The minimum breaking strength of each handrail shall be 2500 kg.
5.4.3.5 The handrails shall run on specially formed guides except when in contact
with a tension device. Appropriate action shall be taken to prevent the build-
up of static electricity in the handrail.
5.4.3.6 Hand and finger guards shall be provided at the point where the handrail
enters the balustrade. The clearance between the guard and handrail shall
not exceed 3.0mm to prevent trapping.
5.4.3.7 The handrail drive system shall be provided with guides immediately before
and after the drive wheel. The returning portion of the handrail shall be
supported by guide rollers at not more than 2m interval.
5.4.3.8 Adequate provisions shall be provided to maintain proper tensioning
throughout the service life of the handrail and prevent tightening/loosening
and excessive heating up of the handrail during operation.
5.4.3.9 The temperature rise of the handrail during operation shall not exceed 6°c
above station ambient temperature.
5.4.3.10 The handrail shall overlap sufficiently with the handrail decking (top deck), to
prevent pinching and trapping fingers or hands due to running clearance.
5.4.3.11 The lips at the handrail shall be of sufficient rigidity to prevent the handrail
being easily removed from the handrail guides if a force of 300N is applied.

5.4.3.12 Lifetime greases packed roller bearings are preferable for all newel wheels.
However, if nonlifetime bearings are used, greasing nipples for the wheel
bearings shall be accessible without necessitating removal of balustrade
panels from the passenger side.
5.4.3.13 The newel stands shall be of sufficient rigidity and suitably braced to the main
structure of the truss to prevent undue distortion. Provision shall be made to
permit checking of alignment of the newel wheels on site.
5.4.4 Steps and step Chains
5.4.4.1 Each step shall be supported on four wheels, two of which shall be the step
chain wheels and shall be capable of carrying the basic load with the safety
factor as per clause 4.1.5. Individual step loading shall be assumed as
6000N/m2.
5.4.4.2 The design of the mounting of all wheels on the step shall ensure that the
centre line of the wheel shall remain perpendicular to the running track under
all load conditions, step dimensions shall have a tread width of at least 400
mm deep and not more than 210 mm high.
5.4.4.3 The step shall be one piece, pressure die-cast, high wear and corrosion
resistant aluminium alloy. The step casting shall bear a marking, which clearly
indicates the month and the year of manufacture.
5.4.4.4 The ingot materials for die-casting of steps shall be new and not previously
used. Certificates of origin and chemical composition for the material shall be
provided.
5.4.4.5 Both sides and the rear edge of each step shall be painted with yellow
demarcation lines of at least 20mm wide and the entire surface of the step
riser, grooves of the step tread and the walking surface shall remain unpainted
in natural aluminium finish.
5.4.4.6 Step riser shall be of a cleat-and-groove type.
5.4.4.7 Step chains shall be of the endless roller type located on both sides of the
moving step. The chains shall be provided in matched lengths and be of high
quality steel construction incorporating links, pins, bushes, axles and rollers
with three pitches between adjacent rollers.
5.4.4.8 The step rollers shall be located outside the chain links and shall be easily
replaceable without dismantling the links.

5.4.4.9 All chain pins shall be circlipped.

5.4.4.10 Each step chain shall be provided with an automatic tension device to ensure
proper tension under varying load conditions. A method shall be provided to
shorten the chain by one step to compensate for chain elongation.
5.4.4.11 The design of the fixing of the step to the step axle including detail of
bushing, pin or any other means, shall be of proven design and have been in
used for an extended period in existing mass transit system(s) or airports at a
speed of 0.65 m/s. The fixture shall permit quick and easy removal of step
without dismantling any part of the step chain and the balustrade.
5.4.4.12 The step chain pin pressure of all escalators shall not exceed 20N/mm2 with a
design life of at least 1,100, 000 operating hours.
5.4.4.13 The step shall be type tested according to EN115.
5.4.4.14 The chain roliers/wheels shall have durable elastomer materials bonded to a
metal die case hub. The shore hardness of the tyre materials shall be 92o ±
3o A when cured. The bond shall have sufficient strength to avoid de-tyring
under all load conditions.
5.4.4.15 The minimum diameters of the chain roller and the trailer rollers shall be
75mm. Preference will be given to designs that provide larger roller diameter
for escalator above 8.0 metres vertical rise. The roller shall have a minimum
width of 20mm.
5.4.4.16 The step chain tension device shall be designed and constructed to maintain
the step chains at correct tension automatically and continuously under
varying load conditions by means of compression springs.
5.4.4.17 The tension device shall be located at the lower landing, mounted within the
truss and supported on truss members, with adjusting bolts of the
compression springs readily accessible and easily adjustable.
5.4.5 Drive Mechanism
5.4.5.1 Each escalator shall be independently driven by a traction machine(s).
5.4.5.2 The traction machine shall be of the geared type. Each traction machine shall
be mounted within the truss framework and connected by chain or directly
coupled to the main drive shaft of the escalator.
5.4.5.3 Where a chain is used to couple to the main drive, the design shall
incorporate a minimum braking load factor of safety of 10:1.

5.4.5.4 Traction machines shall be easily removable from the truss i.e. without
dismantling the machines. Suitable lifting points shall be provided.
5.4.5.5 The traction machines shall be provided with mechanically applied and
electrically released brakes. The brake shall automatically bring the escalator
to a halt whenever the power is interrupted, or any of the operating and
safety switches are operated.
5.4.5.6 If more than one brake is provided, all brakes shall operate simultaneously,
the minimum and maximum stopping distances shall be as per EN115.
5.4.5.7 A device shall be provided to prevent the starting of the escalator if the brake
does not operate properly. An indicator to indicate the wearing of the brake
lining shall also be provided.
5.4.5.8 A data plate indicating the brake torque, in Newton-metres shall be provided.
Provision for testing the brake torque shall be provided.
5.4.5.9 Where chains are used to connect the traction machine to the main drive
shaft, an additional brake (auxiliary brake) shall be provided which will operate
automatically on the main drive shaft should the chains fail.
5.4.5.10 Provisions for hand winding and the necessary tools to effect hand winding
shall be provided for each escalator.
5.4.5.11 Where possible, self-lubricating maintenance free sealed bearings shall be
used in the traction machine. Where regular greasing of the bearings is
required, this must be accomplished without removing any part of the traction
machine and yet provide adequate lubrication. If face-to-face roller bearings
are used, matched pairs with provision for greasing of each bearing shall be
provided.
5.4.5.12 The design of the traction machine shall ensure that there shall be no oil
leakage from any part of the machine under normal operating conditions.
Synthetic oil shall be used in the gearbox. Use of circulation pump for gear oil
will not be accepted.
5.4.5.13 The worms and gears of the machine shall comply with BS721.
5.4.5.14 The starting current shall not exceed 3.5 times full load current. The starting
current characteristic and the speed/torque characteristic for different duty
ranges shall be submitted for approval.

5.4.5.15 The overall efficiency of the combined motor and gearbox shall not be less
than 82% at full load.
5.4.5.16 An oil gauge shall be provided in the gear housing to clearly indicate the oil
level. An inspection plate shall be provided to check the condition of the
gear.
5.4.5.17 Vibration isolation for drive units and switching must be sufficient to ensure no
measurable increase in noise levels during operation of the escalators.
5.4.6 Lubrication System
5.4.6.1 Automatic means shall be provided to lubricate the main drive chains, step
chains and handrail drive chains efficiently and economically.
5.4.6.2 Lubricants shall be selected on the basis of maintaining the highest possible
flash point consistent with effective lubrication.
5.4.6.3 The duration between two successive lubrications shall be adjustable from 15
to 150 hours of operation of the escalator. The duration for lubrication for
each individual chain shall also be adjustable according to operational
requirements.
5.4.6.4 A low oil detection device based on the principle of ‘oil level detection’ or
'oil pressure detection’ shall be provided to prevent the re-starting of the
escalator after a predetermine time as recommended by the manufacturer
but in no case after more than one week when low oil is detected.
5.4.6.5 Grease shall not be used for chain lubrication.
5.4.6.6 Corrosion resistant, oil tight drip pans of galvanised sheet of not less than 1.5
mm thick shall be provided for the entire length of the truss and shall be of
sufficient rigidity to support the weight of workmen.
5.4.6.7 Drip pans shall be designed to collect and drain off both oil from the
machines and water that may enter through the landings, floor plates,
exposed portions of escalators or from fire suppression systems.
5.4.6.8 All gaps shall be properly sealed to prevent leakage. Means shall be provided
to drain and collect any excess lubricating oil from the chains to removable
container(s) at the lower landing machine pit for easy removal and cleaning.
5.4.6.9 Guards shall be provided at the truss adjacent to the main drive chain,
handrail drive chain and step chain to reflect oil splatters from the chains back

to the oil drip pan. No oil splatter shall be allowed to get onto the truss, the
back of the outer cladding panels, the outside of the truss and brakes.
5.4.6.10 There shall be no oil spillage through the outer panels, claddings or the truss
to the surrounding areas. Proper means shall be provided to prevent the
problem of oil spillage onto machinery spaces, step risers and step surfaces.
5.4.7 Operating and Safety Devices
5.4.7.1 Operating and safety devices conforming to the following requirements shall
be provided:
Starting Switch
5.4.7.2 Spring-return key operated starting switch with running directions marked on
the face plate shall be provided at both ends of the escalator.
5.4.7.3 These switches shall be positioned to enable the operator, when using the
key to start the escalator, to see the entire escalator. The key shall be
removable only in the neutral position.
Service stop Switch
5.4.7.4 Service switches shall be provided within the machinery spaces at both ends
of the escalator. The switches shall be conspicuously and permanently
marked and located such that switching can be accomplished without passing
or reaching over any part of the machinery.
5.4.7.5 The operation of these switches shall disconnect electrical power to the
controller and the drive mechanism and shall activate the brakes. The switch
shall be rated to interrupt the starting current of the motor and the fuses shall
be rated for the available fault current at the switch. Inspection run shall also
be prohibited by the switch.
Emergency stop Switch
5.4.7.6 Recessed type, momentary pressure, emergency push button stop switches
with extended sleeve to protect against accidental operation shall be
provided on each escalator.
5.4.7.7 A minimum of one switch shall be located in conspicuous and accessible
positions at the incline section as well as at the newel at both ends of the
escalator.
5.4.7.8 The switch provided at the incline portion shall have protection from the dust
ingress which may jam its operation.

5.4.7.9 The distance between the switches shall not exceed 15m for the escalators,
otherwise, additional switches shall be provided.
5.4.7.10 The operation of these switches shall disconnect electrical power to the drive
mechanism and activate the brake(s).
5.4.7.11 It shall not be possible to start the drive mechanism by the use of these
switches. Proper signage shall be displayed so that the location of the switch
can be easily identified.
Speed Governor
5.4.7.12 The speed governor is not required in cases where alternating current
induction driving motors are used, provided the slip does not exceed 10% and
the motor is directly connected to the drive mechanism.
Broken step Chain Safety Device
5.4.7.13 Devices shall be incorporated as part of each tension carriage which shall
disconnect electrical power to the drive mechanism and activate the brake if
the step chain breaks, or if the tension on either chain drops below (or
exceeds) a predetermined value, or if the motion of a chain is interrupted.
Broken Drive Device
5.4.7.14 Where the drive mechanism is connected to the main drive shaft by chains, a
device shall be provided which will disconnect electrical power to the drive
mechanism and shall activate both the operational brake, and the additional
brake in the event of failure of driving chain or excess sagging.
Non-Reversing Device
5.4.7.15 A device shall be incorporated to detect reversal from the pre-set direction of
motion and activate the operational and auxiliary brakes to stop the
escalators.
Handrail Finger Guard Safety Device
5.4.7.16 Detection devices shall be provided at points where the handrails enter the
escalator newels. These devices shall disconnect electrical power to the drive
mechanism and activate the brake in the event of an object entering the gap
between the handrail and newel.
Step and Skirt Safety Devices

5.4.7.17 D etection devices shall be provided in escalator skirting panels in close

proximity to the upper and lower comb plate tips, on the track system at the
upper and lower curves and at 7.5m intervals along the incline of each
escalator. Electrical power to the drive mechanism shall be disconnected and
the brake(s) applied should any one of these devices be activated due to the
skirt panels being forced away from the steps.
Comb plate Safety Device
5.4.7.18 Safety devices shall be incorporated at both sides on the comb plates at each
landing, which shall disconnect electrical power to the drive mechanism and
activate the brake should any object become wedged between the comb and
the step. The device shall be able to operate in the vertical and horizontal
direction.
Step Lowering Device
5.4.7.19 Devices shall be provided which will disconnect electrical power to the drive
mechanism and activate the brake, should a step be lowered due to excessive
load or breakage. The detection shall be effective at the left, centre and right
side of the step. The device shall be located near the top and bottom curves
for the escalators. These shall be located such that the lowered steps stop in
front of the comb in order to prevent further damage.
Normal stop Switch
5.4.7.20 Normal stop switch in the form of a key switch shall be provided at each
landing to stop the escalator without activating the fault (trip) signal. Proper
signage shall be displayed so that the location of the switch can be easily
identified.
Inspection Control
5.4.7.21 At least one Inspection control and inspection outlet for portable control
device complying with EN115 at both landing shall be provided.
Missing step detection device
5.4.7.22 Detection device(s) shall be provided to stop the escalator before the missing
step opening appears on the passenger side of the escalator.
Handrail Speed Detection Device
5.4.7.23 Each handrail shall be fitted with a device, which shall stop the escalator
when the handrail speed exceeds ± 30% of the rated speed.

Broken Handrail Device

5.4.7.24 Each handrail shall be equipped with a mechanically operated electrical
safety device of approved design to detect undue tension, excessive
elongation and handrail failure and the device shall stop the escalator in case
of actuation.
Floor Plate Safety Device
5.4.7.25 Safety switch of approved design shall be provided underneath each hinged
floor plate at both the upper and lower landings to stop the escalator in case
of actuation. The escalator shall stop when the floor plate is opened unless
under maintenance / inspection mode.
Step Up-thrust Device
5.4.7.26 Safety device of approved design shall be provided at the upper and lower
landings to stop the escalator should a step be lifted or displaced against the
“up - thrust” track at the 1transition curve from incline to horizontal in the
passenger carrying side of the track system.
Skirt Deflectors
5.4.7.27 Skirt deflectors shall be provided on the skirt panel to keep feet and loose
clothing clear of the possible trapping point in accordance with EN115.
Brake Lining Safety Switch
5.4.7.28 Safety device of approved design shall be provided at each brake shoe of the
machine brake to monitor the lining thickness and to detect any abnormal or
uneven wear of brake lining.
Phase Protection Device
5.4.7.29 A phase protection device shall be provided in the control cubicle to prevent
setting in motion or to stop the escalator in the event of phase failure or
phase sequence reversal of the power supply.
5.4.7.30 An illuminated visual indicator shall be provided on the control cubicle to
signify actuation of this device due to phase failure or phase sequence fault.
The indicator shall remain illuminated until the fault is rectified.
Motor Overload Device

5.4.7.31 The driving motor shall be protected against excessive current due to either
overloading or short-circuiting by means of a suitable device to be submitted
for approval. Such protective devices shall be provided for each phase of the
motor winding.
5.4.7.32 After the intervention of this safety device, the power supply to the motor
shall be disconnected and it shall only be possible for a competent person to
reset it back to its normal working condition.
5.4.7.33 If the detection of excessive current depends upon a temperature increase in
the motor winding, such a device may be automatically reset after the fault is
removed and the winding cooled down sufficiently, but shall not restart the
escalator automatically.
5.4.7.34 Built-in type thermal protection, if offered, shall conform to BS 4999 Part 72.
Traffic Lights
5.4.7.35 Traffic lights shall be installed at the entry of escalator landings to indicate the
passengers about the running direction of escalator on real time basis. The
lights shall be visible at least from 10 metres distance.
5.4.7.36 The traffic light shall interface with the direction of escalators i.e. light shall be
red when escalator is not available for use or running in opposite direction
and shall be green when escalator is available for use.
5.4.8 Monitoring and Fault Diagnostic System
5.4.8.1 A micro-processor based monitoring and fault diagnostic system to provide
information on the operation, identification and display of all faults that have
caused the escalator to stop including emergency stops shall be provided.
The system shall be able to record at least 200 events in their order of
occurrence and display them sequentially in a last-in first-out sequence.
5.4.8.2 An alphanumeric display unit indicating the fault code and fault message shall
be installed at an easily accessible and protected location on the handrail
decking at both the landings.
5.4.8.3 The display of the last fault can only be re-set, after the fault causing the stop
is cleared but the historical record shall remain in the micro-processor.
5.4.8.4 Faults that do not require the attendance of the maintenance staff shall be
easily identified to enable the operators to re-set and re-start the escalators
locally and also by remote monitoring and control system from SCR and OCC.

5.4.8.5 The system shall capture, display and retain the following information,
(1) Record number
(2) Fault/status code/alphanumeric display
(3) Date
(4) Time at which fault started
(5) Time at which fault cleared
(6) Direction of operation with starting time
(7) Total operation hours separately for “Up” and “Down" operations.
(8) Total hours under fault
(9) Total hours under normal shutdown conditions
5.4.8.6 A LCD display panel and means for programming the system shall be provided
at the controller.
5.4.8.7 In addition, serial interface output ports shall be provided at the controller to
allow the system to be connected to a Notebook computer for down loading
the historical data for trend analysis. Suitable compatible driver software shall
be provided to download data for analysis and presentation by using Microsoft
Office.
5.4.8.8 A back-up power supply shall be provided to ensure that the data can be
retained for a period of at least 12 hours.
5.4.9 Provisions for the Remote Monitoring and Control System
5.4.9.1 A Remote Monitoring and Control System (RMS) shall be supplied to be run on
the BMS workstation in the Station Control Room. The RMS shall provide
continuous monitoring and control of the escalators.
5.4.9.2 The following monitoring function shall be provided for the RMS.
(1) Power On / Off status indicator
(2) Trip (fault) indicator and fault code
(3) Up (escalators) direction indicator
(4) Down (escalators) direction indicator
5.4.9.3 The trip signal shall be activated whenever the escalator is stopped by any
fault or emergency stop button during operation and the activation of the
control functions in (a) and (b) in Clause 4.9.2 above. The signal shall be
latched on until it is manually re-set by key switches located at the two
landings or remotely via the RMS.

5.4.9.4 The escalator shall only be re-started after the “trip” is cleared and the ‘trip”
signal has been re-set. Re-starting of escalators shall also be allowed for those
fault signals activated by safety devices without the necessities of
maintenance personnel to carry out inspection and the safety device is
automatically re-set.
5.4.9.5 The following control function shall be provided for the RMS:
(1) Remote stop control
(2) Override control switches to prevent unauthorised starting of the
escalator for both normal run and inspection run locally. This shall only
function when the escalator has been stopped. A by-pass (Local/Remote)
switch with illuminated indication which shall by-pass this function shall
be provided in the controller.
(3) Remote re-setting of trip (fault) signal.
(4) Remote starting including the option to select Up / Down direction of
movement for escalators.
5.4.9.6 The Contractor shall interface with Lifts & Escalators Supplier for integration of
the RMS with the Building Management System.
5.4.10 Energy Saving Device
5.4.10.1 An energy saving device to conserve energy when the escalator is operated at
no load and light load shall be provided by means of speed reducing, load
sensor and timer. When operating in the energy saving mode the device must
not cause abrupt change in speed or jerk in normal operation.
5.4.10.2 The device shall not cause harmonic feedback to the power supply system or
emit electromagnetic interference to other systems.
5.4.10.3 Provision shall be made to allow the escalator to be operated without this
device.
5.4.10.4 Detailed calculations of saving of energy shall be submitted for the following
options considering the passenger load of the Project:
(1) On no load after preset time (depend upon the travel time of escalator)
escalator shall come to idling speed and then stop.
(2) On no load after preset time (depend upon the travel time of escalator)
escalator shall come to idling speed and remain at idling speed of 0.2
m/s.

5.4.10.5 When the escalator is operating at no load, the quantum of energy saved with
this device shall not be less than 30% as compared to operating without this
device.
5.4.11 Machine Rooms/Pits and Closets
5.4.11.1 The space required for machinery and other accessories shall be provided by
the Contractor in accordance with the co-ordinated requirements of the Lifts
& Escalators Supplier.
5.4.11.2 Controllers and other accessories such as incoming isolators, interface terminal
boards, switches, shall be housed outside the truss in enclosure of controller
below the escalator inclined section or in wall recess/closet besides the upper
or lower landing.
5.4.11.3 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Lifts & Escalators Supplier for further
wiring and cabling works from the incoming isolators to escalator equipment
and equipment and the layout of the equipment in the wall recess/closet.
5.4.12 Electrical Requirements and Controller
5.4.12.1 Escalators shall be designed to operate on power supplies of 415 VAC + 10%-
15%, 3 phase, 50Hz, 4 wire. All electrical components shall be rated to these
voltages. Power supply to the escalator shall be provided by the Contractor.
5.4.12.2 The Contractor shall provide for the appropriate electrical requirements to be
terminated with suitable isolators/switches installed within each controller
enclosure / closet next to the controller in accordance with the requirements
of the Lifts & Escalators Supplier.
5.4.12.3 Cables, trunkings, conduits and conduit fittings necessary for the power,
control and lighting circuits shall be installed in accordance with the latest
edition relevant BIS standards.
5.4.12.4 Trusses, machines, motors and all other non-current carrying metal parts and
components shall be effectively earthed by the Contractor in accordance with
the requirements of the Lifts & Escalators Supplier.
5.4.12.5 Electrical safety switches and controllers shall be suitably enclosed to provide
protection against accidental contact.
5.4.12.6 Motors shall be of adequate capacity and rated to operate the escalators
continuously, efficiently, quietly and smoothly under all conditions of load as
specified. The motor insulation and temperature shall comply with class F
standard in BS2757.

5.4.12.7 Controllers shall be provided to control starting, rotational direction and

stopping of escalator motors. The controller shall bring escalators to stop in
the event of activation of any safety device, power failure, or normal shut
down.
5.4.12.8 Controllers shall incorporate power supply switches (3 phase, 4 pole and one
phase one pole), main switch, selectable manual/auto resetting thermal
overload, inherent low voltage release and unbalance, reverse phasing and
earth leakage protection.
5.4.12.9 Control circuits shall be protected by fuses or equivalent means independent
of the protection for the main circuits. All electronic components and relays
shall be protected against starting and voltage surges by appropriate surge
suppressers / surge arresters.
5.4.12.10 Control system shall not depend upon the completion or maintenance of an
electrical circuit for the interruption of the power supply to the drive
mechanism or brake.
5.4.12.11 All switches, relays, timers, and auxiliary apparatus shall be of accepted design
and labelled for identification.
5.4.12.12 The power and control wiring shall be laid neatly and terminated with suitable
cable termination sleeves. All terminals and cables shall be labelled and
marked for identification. All live terminals from other sources shall be
properly protected and identified with yellow warning signs.
5.4.12.13 The escalator controller shall be housed in an IP54 powder coated, 1.5mm
thick galvanised sheet (with minimum 100pm thick Galvanising) metal cabinet
with hinged door, lockable with a dedicated key.
5.4.12.14 The operating buttons / switches etc shall be provided in lockable enclosure
to restrict access to authorized person only.
5.4.12.15 The size of the controller cabinet shall be suitable for mounting into a wall
closet with doors and shall be suitable to house the incoming power supply
isolators and interface terminal boards.
5.4.13 Special Cable Requirements
5.4.13.1 All cables used shall be rated for 1.1 kV voltage grade.
5.4.13.2 The conductor shall be of stranded conductor composed of plain annealed
copper wire complying with IEC 228, Class 2.

5.4.13.3 The insulation shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked polyethylene

complying with IEC 502
5.4.13.4 All cables shall be manufactured from fire retardant, low smoke, materials.
5.4.13.5 The cable shall be armoured/ shielded having anti-termite, pest-resistant
properties.
5.4.14 Interface with Fire Protection Systems
5.4.14.1 The escalators shall be equipped with a separate sprinkler system where
required to comply with NFPA 130.
5.4.14.2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Lifts and Escalators Supplier to
provide a complete sprinkler installation and shall make adequate provision
to incorporate the required fire protection equipment and to get the sprinkler
system connected to the main fire sprinkler / suppression system.
5.4.15 Lighting
5.4.15.1 Lighting for areas surrounding escalators shall be provided by the Contractor
to emphasise illumination on the landings.
5.4.15.2 The lighting level of the comblight shall not be less than 50 lux at the centre
of the comb.
5.4.15.3 Under-step lighting with adequate lux level at step gaps shall be provided.
5.4.16 Noise Generation

5.4.16.1 Equipment shall be designed to operate quietly and smoothly. The sound
level at one metre from the balustrade of each escalator shall not exceed 65
dBA peak value as measured by a slow response sound level meter. The
required acoustic treatment shall be provided to meet this requirement.
5.4.17 Fault Diagnosis Procedures and Circuit Diagrams
5.4.17.1 Fault diagnosis procedures and circuit diagrams down to component level of
the printed circuit boards, detailed information software and technical data
shall be provided in pocket booklets and also in O&M manuals to assist in
trouble-shooting for breakdown during normal operation and maintenance.
5.4.18 Escalators Signage
5.4.18.1 Statutory signage and user instructions on each escalator equipment shall be
provided as per EN115 and accordingly submit signage and graphics design for
approval.

5.4.18.2 Voltage free contacts shall be provided for real time UP/DN status signage of
escalators.
5.4.18.3 The Contractor shall provide the escalator signage and graphics outside the
escalator equipment. The Contractor shall interface with the Lifts & Escalators
Supplier for this requirement.
5.4.19 Data Plate
5.4.19.1 A data plate of durable material containing all relevant technical information
essential for maintenance and replacement of parts such as rise, length, part
number, etc, shall be provided in the machine pit of the escalator.
5.4.19.2 Each escalator shall be provided with unique serial number and the number
plate shall be fixed near/on the escalator.
5.4.20 Maintenance Barrier
5.4.20.1 A barrier shall be provided for both escalator landings, which shall prevent
people from entering the pits and escalator. The barrier shall be painted
yellow, made from aluminium and be of minimum height 900mm.
5.4.21 Variable Speed Control/Drive
5.4.21.1 Three phase VWF drives shall be provided suitable for the motor capacity of
each escalator. It shall be possible to operate the escalator at service (rated)
speed - nominal 0.65 m/s and reduced speed of 0.50 m/s, with all other
requirements and performance remaining unchanged. An easily accessible
manual change-over switch, with clear label, for selecting the normal and
reduced speed, shall be provided in the controller.
5.4.21.2 Electrical braking shall be incorporated by using brake resistors. The electrical
braking alone (without mechanical braking) shall be capable to stop the
escalator within stopping distances specified in EN115. Special precautions
shall be taken for fire prevention. The location of brake resistors shall be
proposed during design stage for approval.
5.4.21.3 If there is no movement of passenger for adjustable predetermined time (say
1-5 minutes) the escalator shall operate at idling speed less than 0.2 m/s and
further if there is no passenger movement for 10 minutes (adjustable 5-30
minutes) the escalator shall stop automatically.
5.4.21.4 When someone approaches the escalator, it shall start and attain nominal
speed.

5.4.21.5 To meet the above requirements, the three phase drive and escalator control
system shall be capable of operating as follows: -
(1) Service (rated) speed - Nominal 0.65 m/s
(2) Maintenance / idling speed < 0.2 m/s.
(3) Stop, if no load continues for predetermined time.
END OF SECTION


Book 3 - Building Services 9-7-61 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Book 3 - Building Services 9-7-61 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Construction Specification (Civil Work) Contents-i

Book 3 : Building Service

CHAPTER: 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

CHAPTER: 2 PLUMBING AND SANITARY SYSTEM

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

CHAPTER: 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

CHAPTER: 4 MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

CHAPTER: 5 ESCALATORS AND LIFTS

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(2) Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.1.2.6 Submission of Data for Approval

(2) Each equipment information shall be separately submitted by listing all

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.1.3.3 Color Coding

Color Codes of Various Systems Electrical System

1.1.3.4 Field Testing

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(b) Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.2 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.2.1.4 Quality Assurance

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

 Fuel service tank including level gauge, sufficient for at least 8-

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.2.4 Testing and Commissioning

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.2.4.3 Test reports shall be submitted for approval prior to conducting an

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

1.3 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD AND CAPACITOR BANK

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(2) Standard and Reference

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

 Reenergisation of the normal supply shall cause the change over

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

isolating sheet metal and horizontally by insulation between

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

fitted to the rear of cubicles. Doors and lift-off panels shall be

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(v) lcu : As shown on the Drawings.

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(ii) The ACB shall not be capable of insertion or withdrawal

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

(v) Shunt Trip

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)

NCE • DEWI • SENA Detailed Designs (Civil Works)